LUXURY VILLA
FOR
MR. KHALID AL MISNAD
AT
BOROQUE ISLAND, ISOLA DANA 9, THE PEARL QATAR
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND, ISOLA DANA 9
FOR MR. KHALID AL MISNAD
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 3 – ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL
AEB-872-10
REV. A
A
JUNE 2014
ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV.
DATE
ISSUE PARTICULARS
AEB-872-10
REV. A
This specification document is part of overall “Tender Documentation” and is
to be read in conjunction with the other parts, including the General
Conditions of the Contract, The particular conditions of the Contract, the
Drawings, and other Referred Documents of these Specifications. The
Tenderer should ensure that they have been fully comprehended and
included in the Scope of Works under this Contract.
AEB-872-10
REV. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 11
Building Management System
1. General
2. Products
3. Execution
Section 19
Plumbing and Irrigation Installations
4. General
5. Materials
6. Irrigation System Specifications
Section 20
Drainage Installation
1. General
2. System Network
Section 21
Electrical Installation
1. General
2. Electrical Supply and Distribution
Section 22
Air Conditioning Installation
1. Commercial Specification
2. Technical Specifications
Section 23
Fire Fighting Installation
1. General
2. Products
3. Execution
AEB-872-10
REV. A
SECTION – 11
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. General
A. The Building Automation System (BAS) manufacturer shall furnish and install a
fully integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital control
(DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control, and
subsystems with open communications capabilities as herein specified.
Provide open communications system. The system shall be an open architecture
with the capabilities to support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this
effectively, system shall be capable of utilizing standard protocols as follows as
well as be able to integrate third-party systems via existing vendor protocols. BMS
System shall be capable of BACnet communication according to ASHRAE
standard SPC-135A/95. System shall be capable of OPC server communications
according to OPC Data Access 2.0 and Alarms and Events 1.0. System shall be
capable of LonWorks communication using the LonTalk protocol.
The system shall not be limited to only use open communication protocols, but
also be able to integrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications via
existing vendor protocols and through the latest software standards.
The intent is to either use the Operator Workstation provided under this contract to
communicate with control systems provided by other vendors or to allow
information about the system provided in this contract to be sent to another
workstation. This allows the user to have a single seat from which to perform daily
operation.
B. The installation of the control system shall be performed under the direct
supervision of the controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flow diagrams,
bill of materials, component designation or identification number and sequence of
operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer. The installing manufacturer
shall certify in writing, that the shop drawings have been prepared by the
equipment manufacturer and that the equipment manufacturer has supervised
their installation. In addition, the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing,
that the shop drawings were prepared by their company and that all temperature
control equipment was installed under their direct supervision.
C. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed specially for
this project. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and
proven in actual use for at least two years.
D. BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for all BAS and Temperature Control
wiring for a complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done in accordance
with all local and national codes.
This contractor shall furnish and install an interface to provide integration of fire
alarm and life safety system information into the BAS for centralized alarming,
monitoring, maintenance reporting, graphical display, and historical data
collecting.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-2/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
F. The chiller equipment supplier shall provide proof of experience with integration of
the type outlined in this specification. The supplier shall provide individuals
experienced with the installation and start-up of equipment relating to integration.
1. 1
Scope of Work
A. Mechanical works including the installation of all wells, valves, taps, dampers, flow
stations, etc. furnished by BMS manufacturer.
B. Electrical works including:
1. 120V power to all BAS an/or Temperature control panels
2. Wiring of all power feeds through all disconnect starters to electrical motor.
3. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor
speed control devices not furnished by BAS manufacturer
4. Wiring of any electrical sub-metering devices furnished by BAS
manufacturer.
C. Control shall cover the following items:
1. Control Valves
2. Flow Switches
3. Flow Meters
4. Pressure and Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets
5. Automatic Dampers
6. Terminal Unit Controls
7. Pressure Transmitters
8. Temperature Transmitters
9. Power Transmitters
10. Thermostats
11. Sensors
12. Controllers
13. Smoke Detectors
14. Chiller Controls
15. Air handling units
16. all pumps
1.2 Related Work
A. General and Special Conditions
B. Mechanical works specifications
C. Electrical works specifications
1.3 Quality Assurance
A. The BAS system shall be designed and installed, commissioned and serviced by
manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have an in-
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-3/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
place support facility in QATAR miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts
inventory and necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed
installing contractors are not acceptable.
The manufacturer shall provide full time, on site, experienced project manager for
this work, responsible for direct supervision of the design, installation, start up and
commissioning of the B.M.S.
The BAS specialist shall be regularly engaged in the manufacturing, installation
and maintenance of BMS systems and shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of
demonstrated technical expertise and experience in the manufacture, installation
and maintenance of B.M.S. systems similar in size and complexity to this project.
A maintained service organization consisting of at least ten (10) competent
servicemen for a period of not less than ten years and provide a list of 10 projects,
similar in size and scope to this project, completed within the last five years.
B. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control
systems and shall be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with
the specification requirements.
C. All BAS peer-to-peer network controllers, central system controllers and local
user displays shall be UL Listed under Standard UL 916.
D. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall provide documentation
supporting compliance with ISO-9002 (Model for Quality Assurance in
Production, Installation, and Servicing) and ISO-140001 (The application of wellaccepted business management principles to the environment). The intent of this
specification requirement is to ensure that the products from the manufacturer are
delivered through a Quality System and Framework that will assure consistency
in the products delivered for this project.
E. This system shall have a documented history of compatibility by design for a
minimum of 15 years. Future compatibility shall be supported for no less than 10
years. Compatibility shall be defined as the ability to upgrade existing field panels
to current level of technology, and extend new field panels on a previously
installed network.
Compatibility shall be defined as the ability for any existing field panel
microprocessor to be connected and directly communicate with new field panels
without bridges, routers or protocol converters.
F. This contractor shall provide proof of experience with integration to fire alarm/life
safety systems. Provide individuals experienced with the installation and startup
of equipment related to this type of integration.
1. 4 Submittals
A. Submit (3) complete sets of documentation in the following phased delivery
schedule:
1. Valve and damper schedules
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-4/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
2. Equipment data cut sheets
3. System schematics, including:
a. sequence of operations
b. point names
c. point addresses
d. interface wiring diagrams
e. panel layouts.
f. system riser diagrams
4. Auto-CAD compatible as-built drawings
B. Upon project completion, submit operation and maintenance manuals, consisting
of the following:
1. Index sheet, listing contents in alphabetical order
2. Manufacturer's equipment parts list of all functional components of thesystem,
Auto-CAD disk of system schematics, including wiring diagrams
3. Description of sequence of operations
4. As-Built interconnection wiring diagrams
5. Operator's Manual
6. Trunk cable schematic showing remote electronic panel locations, and all
trunk data
7. List of connected data points, including panels to which they are connected
and input device (ionization detector, sensors, etc.)
8. Conduit routing diagrams
1.5
Warranty
It is very important that the BMS vendor has a well established service and spare
part net work in Doha and he is manned with sufficient number of skilled men to take
care of all maintenance and faults in the system.
All the Equipment connected to the BMS system shall have a selector where by they
can be operated independently of the BMS if required.
All the Documents pertaining to Warranty of equipment shall be listed on an index
and the whole set of documents with all dates entered be handed over to the client
before the final handing over takes place.
The MBS system vendor shall explain in detail the system proposed and all the
options that is incorporated in the system, have the same approved by the Engineer
before they are configured. The system shall have means of retrieving the histogram.
The DDC panels shall have a detailed wiring diagram with every component
identified and the wiring diagram shall also be a part of the enclosure.
All the sensors, sensor cables, hoses, actuators, motor drive that are exposed to
atmosphere shall be properly protected, with ease for day to day operation and
maintenance. All these components shall be robust and withstand the harsh weather
condition with no impact on their performance. All the standby units shall come into
service in event the duty machine fails to operate on any account and the same shall
be registered on the panel... All the equipment used in this project shall have either
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-5/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
the equipment or its panel that can be integrated with the BMS system, with a
manual operation selection as an option.
A. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful
operation of the entire BAS system for a period of one year after beneficial use.
B. The adjustment, required testing, and repair of the system includes all computer
equipment, transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices.
C. The on-line support services shall allow the local BAS subcontractor to dial out
over telephone lines to monitor and control the facility's building automation
system. This remote connection to the facility shall be within 2 hours of the time
that the problem is reported. This coverage shall be extended to include normal
business hours, after business hours, weekends and holidays.
If the problem cannot be resolved on-line by the local office, the national office of
the building automation system manufacturer shall have the same capabilities for
remote connection to the facility. If the problem cannot be resolved with on-line
support services, the BAS manufacturer shall dispatch the appropriate personnel
to the job site to resolve the problem within 3 hours of the time that the problem is
reported.
1.6
Technical Submittal
A. Technical submittals shall be prepared in accordance with these specifications. Four
(3) copies of the proposal shall be submitted for approval. The technical submittal
shall include the following data/information as a minimum. The order of listing here
is not intended to indicate, nor should it be construed to indicate, the relative
importance of the data/information:
1. Information on organizational capability to handle this project (management,
personnel, manufacturing, single source responsibility, etc.)
2. Information on training program to demonstrate specification compliance.
3. System Configuration as Proposed:
a. Describe system architecture including a schematic layout with location
and type (model number) of all control panels.
b. Describe system operation, functions and control techniques.
c. Modularity.
d. Provisions against obsolescence due to technological advancement.
e. Provide hardware and software data sheets on interfaces third party
systems (e.g. chiller).
4. Technical data to support the information on the hardware configuration.
5. Detailed description of all operating, command, application and energy
management software provided for this project.
6. A signed certificate stating the Contractor "has read the performance and
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-6/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
functional requirements, understands them and his technical proposal will
comply with all parts of the specification."
7. Other requirements for inclusion in the technical proposal are located
throughout this specification.
8. Line by line specification concordance statement.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1
Acceptable Manufacturers
As in the approved supplier list.
2.2
Networking Communications
A. The design of the BAS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone
Native BACnet DDC Controllers. The network architecture shall consist of
multiple levels for communication efficiency, a campus-wide (Management Level
Network) Ethernet network based on TCP/IP protocol, high performance
peer-to-peer building level network(s) and DDC Controller floor level local area
networks with access being totally transparent to the user when accessing data
or developing control programs.
B. The design of BAS shall allow the co-existence of new DDC Controllers with
existing DDC Controllers in the same network without the use of gateways or
protocol converters.
System shall have the capability communicate with a BACnet network over
Ethernet or BACnet/IP (according to Annex J). The intent is to use the system
provided under this contract to communicate with control systems provided by
other vendors. A PICS must be provided describing the BACnet, ANSI/ASHRAE
135-95, implementation. Minimum system functionality must include monitoring,
commanding, and alarming for daily operator functions from a common
workstation.
1. System shall have the capability to be an OPC Client and Server for dynamic
communication with OPC Clients or Servers over an Ethernet network. At a
minimum, the following must be supported:
a. Data Access 1.0 (96), 1.0A (97) and 2.0 (11/98)
b. Alarms & Events 1.0 (1/99)
C. Peer-to-Peer Building Level Network:
1. All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial-up modems
shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data or
execute control functions for any and all other devices via the peer-to-peer
network. No hardware or software limits shall be imposed on the number of
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-7/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
devices with global access to the network data at any time.
2. The peer-to-peer network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers
and PC workstations
3. Each PC workstation shall support a minimum of 4 peer to peer networks
hardwired or dial up.
4. The system shall support integration of third party systems (fire alarm,
security, lighting, PCL, chiller, boiler) via panel mounted open protocol
processor. This processor shall exchange data between the two systems for
inter process control. All exchange points shall have full system functionality
as specified herein for hardwired points.
5. Field panels must be capable of integration with open standards including
Modbus, BACnet, and Lonworks as well as with third party devices via
existing vendor protocols.
6. Telecommunication Capability:
a. Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow DDC
Controllers to communicate with remote operator stations and/or remote
terminals via telephone lines, as indicated in the sequence of operations.
b. Auto-dial DDC Controllers shall automatically place calls to workstations
to report alarms or other significant events. The auto-dial program shall
include provisions for handling busy signals, "no answers" and incomplete
data transfers.
c. Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control
functions, all report functions and all database generation and
modification functions as described for workstations connected via the
network. Routines to automatically answer calls from remote DDC or
HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be inherent in the
Controller. The use of additional firmware or software is not acceptable.
The fact that communications are taking place with remote DDC or HVAC
& Mechanical Equipment Controllers over telephone lines shall be
completely transparent to an operator.
d. Multiple modems shall be supported by DDC or HVAC & Mechanical
Equipment Controllers on the Peer-to-Peer Network to ensure continuous
communication to workstation.
e. Intranet/Internet access
1. Web Based Operator Interface
a. The BAS shall provide a web based graphical interface that allows
users to access the BAS data via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet.
The interface shall use HTML based ASP pages to send and
receive data from the BAS to a web browser.
b. A web server computer will be supplied. The web server shall use
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-8/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
c.
d.
e.
f.
Microsoft‟s IIS server 4.0 with Windows NT4, or IIS 5.0 with
Windows 2000, and support browser access via Microsoft Internet
Explorer 5.0 (or higher), or Navigator Netscape 6.0 (or higher).
All information exchanged over Internet shall be optionally
encrypted and secure via SSL (provided by Owner).
Access to the web interface may be password protected. A users
rights and privileges to points and graphics will be the same as
those assigned at the BAS workstation. An option will exist to only
allow users “read” access via the web browser, while maintaining
“command” privileges via the BAS workstation.
Commissioning of the Web interface shall not require modification
or creation of HTML or ASP pages. All graphics available at the
BAS graphical workstation shall be available to users via a web
browser.
The web-based interface shall provide the following functionality to
users, based on their access and privilege rights:
1. Logon Screen – allows the user to enter their user name,
password and Domain name for logging into the web server.
2. Alarm Display – a display of current BAS alarms to which the
user has access will be displayed. Users will be able to
acknowledge and erase active alarms, and link to additional
alarm information including alarm messages, and informational
and memo text.
Any alarm acknowledgements initiated
through the web interface will be written to the BAS central
workstation activity log.
3. Graphic Display – Display of system graphics, including
animated motion, available in the BAS workstation will be
available for viewing over the web browser. Software that
requires creation of dedicated “web” graphics in order to
display them via the browser interface will not be acceptable.
A graphic selector list will allow users to select any graphics to
which they have access. Graphic displays will automatically
refresh with the latest change of values. Users will have the
ability to command and override points from the graphic
display as determined by their user accounts rights.
4. Point details – users will have access to point detail
information including operational status, operational priority,
physical address, and alarm limits, for point objects to which
they have access rights.
5. Point Commanding – users will be able to override and
command points they have access to via the web browser
interface. Any commands or overrides initiated via the web
browser interface will be written to the BAS central workstation
activity log.
g. The web server licensing options will allow concurrent access by
(5), browser connections.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-9/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
h. Internet connections, ISP services, as well as necessary firewalls
or proxy servers shall be provided by the Owner as required to
support the web access feature.
2.3
DDC Controller Floor Level Network
A. This level communication shall support a family of application specific controllers
and shall communicate with the peer-to-peer network through DDC Controllers
for transmission of global data.
B. This network may utilize the EIA standard 709.1, LonTalk protocol for peer-topeer communication and integration of 3rd party LonMark devices.
2.4
DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers
A.
The DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall reside on the
Building Level Network.
B.
DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall use the same
programming language and tools. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controllers which require different programming language or tools on a network
are not acceptable.
C.
DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which do not meet the
functions specified in Section 2.4.1 and Section 2.5 for DDC Controllers or
Section 2.4.2 and Section 2.5 for HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers are
not acceptable.
2.4.1
DDC Controller
A. DDC Controllers shall be a 32 -bit stand-alone, multi-tasking, multi-user,
real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in
enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and
input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the
requirements of this specification and the attached point I/O schedule. Each
controller shall support a minimum of three (3) Floor Level Application Specific
Controller Device Networks.
B. Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating
system and databases, including:
1. Control processes of operator I/O devices such as industry standard
Energy management applications
2. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for
each level alarm for each point in the system.
3. Historical/trend data for points specified
4. Maintenance support applications
5. Custom processes
6. Operator I/O
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-10/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
7. Dial-up communications
8. Manual override monitoring
C. Each DDC Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need to
replace hardware.
D. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers so that the
implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point
input/output termination module and wiring.
E. DDC Controllers shall provide a RS-232C serial data communication ports for
operation rinters, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's
terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without
interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers or
terminals.
F. As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability to
manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC
Controller via local, point discrete, on-board hand/off/auto operator override
switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analogue control
type points.
1.
Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controllers
key-accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to
prevent unauthorized overrides.
2.
DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the
operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall
also collect override activity information for reports.
G. DDC Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input
and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the
need for an operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analogue
indication of value shall also be provided for each analogue output. Status
indication shall be visible without opening the panel door.
H. Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication
diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall
provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures,
low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication.
H. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all
field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3 V
Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-42) at 8 kV air discharge, 4 kV contact
Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500
V signal, 1 kV power
Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max)
Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer panel's AC input terminals
to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
S-11-11/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
a. IEEE Standard 587-1980
b. UL 864 Supply Line Transients
c. Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)
d. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly
shutdown of all DDC Controllers to prevent the loss of database or
operating system software.
Non-volatile memory shall be
incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery
backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile
memory for a minimum of 60 days.
1.
Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall
automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.
2.
Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user
shall have the capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the
local RS-232C port, via telephone line dial-in or from a network
workstation PC.
e. Provide a separate DDC Controller for each AHU or other HVAC
system as indicated in Section 3.02. It is intended that each unique
system be provided with its own point resident DDC Controller.
2.4.2
HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers
A. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be a 32 -bit stand-alone,
multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular
hardware with plug-in enclosed processors.
B. Each HVAC Mechanical Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its
own operating system and databases, including:
1. Control processes
2. Energy management applications
3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for
each level alarm for each point in the system.
4. Historical/trend data for points specified
5. Maintenance support applications
6. Custom processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Remote communications
C. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide a RS-232C serial data
communication port for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry
standard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's
terminals.
D. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide local LED status
indication for each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-12/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.
E. Each HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall continuously perform
self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all components. The
HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide both local and remote
annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or
repeated failure to establish communication.
F. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all
field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
1. RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3 V
2. Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-42) at 8 kV air discharge, 4 kV contact
3. Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500 V
signal, 1 kV power
4. Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max)
Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer panel's AC input terminals to
suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
1. IEEE Standard 587-1980
2. UL 864 Supply Line Transients
3. Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)
G. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of
HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers to prevent the loss of database
operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for
critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided
support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
all
or
all
to
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual
intervention.
2. Should HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller memory be lost for any
reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the HVAC
Mechanical Equipment Controller via the local RS-232C port, via
telephone line dial-in or from a network workstation PC.
2.5 DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller Resident Software
Features
A. General
1.
The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral
part of DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers and shall not be
dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
2.
All points shall be identified by up to 30 character point name and 16 character
point descriptor. The same names shall be used at the PC workstation.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-13/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
3.
All digital points shall have user defined two-state status indication (descriptors
with minimum of 8 characters allowed per state (i.e. summer/winter)).
B. Control Software Description
1.
The DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall have the ability to
perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Two-position control
Proportional control
Proportional plus integral control
Proportional, integral, plus derivative control
Automatic tuning of control loops
C. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide the following
energy management routines for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption
while maintaining occupant comfort.
1.
Start-Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) shall automatically be coordinated with
event scheduling. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest
possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone condition
by time of occupancy. The SSTO program shall also shut down HVAC
equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period,
and still maintain desired comfort conditions.
a) The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons.
1)
2)
It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to individual fan systems.
The SSTO program shall operate on both outside weather conditions as
well as inside zone conditions and empirical factors.
b) The SSTO program shall meet the local code requirements for minimum
outside air while the building is occupied.
2.
Event Scheduling: Provide a comprehensive menu driven program to
automatically start and stop designated points or groups of points according to a
stored time.
a)
It shall be possible to individually command a point or group of points.
b)
For points assigned to one common load group, it shall be possible to
assign variable time delays between each successive start or stop within
that group.
c)
The operator shall be able to define the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
Time, day
Commands such as on, off, auto, and so forth.
Time delays between successive commands.
There shall be provisions for manual overriding of each schedule by an
appropriate operator.
S-11-14/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
d)
It shall be possible to schedule events up to one year in advance.
1. Scheduling shall be calendar based.
2. Holidays shall allow for different schedules.
3. Enthalpy switchover (economizer) .The Energy Management Control
Software (EMCS) will control the position of the air handler relief, return,
and outside air dampers. If the outside air dry bulb temperature falls
below changeover set point the EMCS will modulate the dampers to
provide 100 percent outside air. The user will be able to quickly
changeover to an economizer system based on dry bulb temperature and
will be able to override the economizer cycle and return to minimum
outside air operation at any time.
4. Temperature-compensated duty cycling.
a) The DCCP (Duty Cycle Control Program) shall periodically stop and
start loads according to various patterns.
b) The loads shall be cycled such that there is a net reduction in both the
electrical demands and the energy consumed.
5.
Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover: The system shall provide
automatic time adjustment for switching to/from Daylight Savings Time.
6.
Night setback control: The system shall provide the ability to
automatically adjust set points for night control.
7.
The Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) program shall limit the consumption of
electricity to prevent electrical peak demand charges.
a) PDL shall continuously track the amount of electricity being
consumed, by monitoring one or more electrical kilowatt-hour/demand
meters. These meters may measure the electrical consumption
(kWh), electrical demand (kW), or both.
b) PDL shall sample the meter data to continuously forecast the demand
likely to be used during successive time intervals.
c) If the PDL forecasted demand indicates that electricity usage is likely
to exceed a user preset maximum allowable level, then PDL shall
automatically shed electrical loads.
d) Once the demand peak has passed, loads that have been shed shall
be restored and returned to normal control.
D. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be able to execute
custom, job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform
calculations and special control routines.
1.
A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from
any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-15/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
2.
3.
4.
SECTION 11
network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points
in any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the
network. Database shall support 30 character, English language point names,
structured for searching and logs.
Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to
operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a
specified device or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote
device such as a printer or pager.
DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide a HELP function
key, providing enhanced context sensitive on-line help with task orientated
information from the user manual.
DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall be capable of comment
lines for sequence of operation explanation.
E.
Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to
operator devices. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall
perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator
interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent
alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC and HVAC Mechanical
Equipment Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or
activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other
panels on the network.
1.
All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language
description and the time and date of occurrence.
2.
The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator
response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for
each point. Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable
destination categories (PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility
in defining the handling of system alarms. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical
Equipment Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms
during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually
inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
3.
Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of operator
devices or PCs based on time (after hours destinations) or based on priority.
4.
In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able
to print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe
the alarm condition or direct operator response.
5.
In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate a call to a remote
operator device.
A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or
automatically sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the
I/O summary.
F.
1.
Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point,
regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in
each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers point group. Two
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-16/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
methods of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defined time interval or
upon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall
be provided. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall have
a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing a
minimum of data samples. All trend data shall be available for transfer to a
Workstation without manual intervention.
2.
DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall also provide high
resolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance.
Operator-initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall be provided
for operator-selected PID control loops as identified in the point I/O summary.
a.
Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC and
HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller, from a network workstation or remotely
using dial-in modems. For all loop tuning functions, access shall be limited to
authorized personnel through password protection.
G. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be capable of
automatically accumulating and storing run-time hours for digital input and output
points and automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals for
analog and digital pulse input type points, as specified in the point I/O schedule.
H. The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controllers to access any data from or send control commands and alarm
reports directly to any other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller or
combination of controllers on the network without dependence upon a central or
intermediate processing device. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controllers shall send alarm reports to multiple workstation without dependence
upon a central or intermediate processing device. The peer to peer network shall
also allow any DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller to access, edit,
modify, add, delete, back up, and restore all system point database and all
programs.
I.
The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controllers to assign a minimum of 50 passwords access and control priorities to
each point individually. The logon password (at any PC workstation or portable
operator terminal) shall enable the operator to monitor, adjust and control the
points that the operator is authorized for. All other points shall not be displayed
on the PC workstation or portable terminal (e.g. all base building and all tenant
points shall be accessible to any base building operators, but only tenant points
shall be accessible to tenant building operators). Passwords and priorities for
every point shall be fully programmable and adjustable.
J.
When part of a LonWorks network, the DDC or HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controller shall have a common database server for all LonWorks network
information embedded. This embedded LonWorks network database server
maintains a dynamic, real time representation of the LonWorks network including
connections/bindings, node status, and configuration properties. A PC must
NOT be required for this database.
K. LonMark Terminal Equipment Controllers
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-17/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
1.
Provide LonMark certified ASC for control of each piece of equipment, including,
but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes
Constant Air Volume (CAV) boxes
Fan Coil Units
Heat Pumps
Unit Ventilators
Controllers shall provide a selection of control applications performable through
configuration (not programming) of the device without violating the LonMark
certification.
Controllers shall operate in stand-alone mode as needed for specific control
applications if network communication fails
Controller must include a FTT-10A transceiver for communication on the
LonWorks network at 78.8K bps.
Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the
specified control sequences. Inputs shall be universal for support of 0-10V, 100k
therm, 4-20mA or dry contact.
Controllers shall include spare inputs/outputs not used in the application to wire
accessories.
Packaging shall be such that field wiring can be performed prior to the
installation of the controller. Board terminations shall be detachable from
controller to facilitate troubleshooting, repair, and replacement.
Utilize standard configuration parameter types (SCPT‟s) for all product
configuration parameters. Do not use network variable for this purpose.
A common Network Management Tool must be used for all LTECs and 3rd party
Lonmark devices connected to the LonWorks FLN. This tool will perform all
node addressing, network setup and maintenance for the network regardless of
device manufacturer.
a. Shall include the following minimum services: device installation, device
configuration, device diagnostics, field programming, device maintenance,
network variable binding, network variable browsing, network variable
monitoring.
b. Shall include all software modules necessary for complete network
management, installation, and maintenance.
c.
d. Shall support multiple service tools in a client/server network fashion.
10. If a manufacturer specific management tool is necessary, it shall be used only for
application programming. It should be used for configuring and installing the
device ONLY and not for any network function.
11. All LonMark ASC sensors, LonMark ASCs, and DDC Controllers with a
LonWorks FLN must provide the Network Management Tool access to the entire
LonWorks FLN via a RJ-11 port.
L. Digital Energy Monitors:
1
Provide three phase digital watt-meters with pre-wired CTs. All watt-meter
electronics shall be housed within the CTs. CTs shall include sizes capable of
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-18/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
mounting directly on a power bus. Diagnostics visible to the installing electrician
(without a operator tool) shall indicate: proper operation, mis-wiring or low
power-factor, device malfunction, and over-load condition. The meters shall
include the following:
a. The device shall be UL Listed, and shall comply with ANSI C12.1 accuracy
specification. The minimum CT/meter combined accuracy shall be no
greater than 1% of reading over the range of 5% to 100% of rated load.
The meter shall not require calibration
b. The wattmeter shall directly connect to power from 208 through 480 with no
potential transformer. In-line fuses for each voltage tap phase shall be
included.
c. The wattmeter CTs shall be split-core and at minimum be sized to
accommodate loads ranging from 100 to 2400 Amps. The CTs shall be voltsignal type, and shall not require shorting blocks.
d. The wattmeter shall reside directly on the Floor Level Network along with
other FLN devices. Data transferred shall include the following:
1. kW & kWH
2. Consumption
3. Demand
4. Power Factor
5. Current
6. Voltage
7. Apparent Power
8. Reactive Power
2.6
Local User Display
Where specified in the sequence of operation or points list, the controllers on the
peer to peer building level network shall have a display and keypad for local
interface. A keypad shall be provided for interrogating and commanding points in the
controller.
A. The display shall use the same security password and access rights for points in
the display as is used in the associated controller.
B. The LCD display shall be a minimum of a 2 line 40 character display.
D. The LCD display shall include the full point name, value (numeric, digital or state
text),
E. Point priority and alarm status on one screen.
F. The LCD shall dynamically update the value, priority, and alarm status for the
point being displayed.
G. The display shall be mounted either on the door of the enclosure or remote from
the controller.
2.7
Personal Computer Operator Workstation Hardware
A. Personal computer operator workstations shall be provided for command entry,
information management, system monitor, alarm management and database
management functions. All real-time control functions shall be resident in the DDC
Controllers to facilitate greater distribution, fault tolerance and reliability of the
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-19/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
building automation control.
1. Provide workstation(s) of equal capability located at
.
2. Workstation shall consist of a personal computer with minimum 256MB RAM,
hard drive with 3.0 GB available space, video card capable of supporting 1024
× 768 resolution with a minimum of 65536 colors (Windows NT) or 16 Bit color
(Windows 2000), CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, or DVD-ROM Drive, mouse and
101-key enhanced keyboard. Personal computer shall be a Windows XP, 2000
or NT4 Compatible PC and shall include a minimum 933MHz Pentium-III
processor.
3. The PC monitor shall support a minimum display resolution of no less than
1024 X 768 pixels. Separate controls shall be provided for color, contrasts and
brightness. The screen shall be non-reflective.
B. Provide an Epson FX-870 or equivalent printer at each workstation location or on
the network (Ethernet) for recording alarms, operator transactions and systems
reports.
C. Provide a color printer for printing of dynamic trend graph report, Excel reports,
graphics and any other screen displays.
D. Alarm Display shall list the alarms with highest priority at the top of the display.
The alarm display shall provide selector buttons for display of the associated point
graphic and message. The alarm display shall provide a mechanism for the
operator to sort alarms.
E. Intranet/Internet access
1. Web Based Operator Interface
a. The BAS shall provide a web based graphical interface that allows users to
access the BAS data via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet. The interface shall
use HTML based ASP pages to send and receive data from the BAS to a web
browser.
b. A web server computer will be supplied. The web server shall use Microsoft‟s
IIS server 4.0 with Windows NT4, or IIS 5.0 with Windows 2000, and support
browser access via Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher), or Navigator
Netscape 6.0 (or higher).
c. All information exchanged over Internet shall be optionally encrypted and
secure via SSL (provided by Owner).
d. Access to the web interface may be password protected. A users rights and
privileges to points and graphics will be the same as those assigned at the
BAS workstation. An option will exist to only allow users “read” access via
the web browser, while maintaining “command” privileges via the BAS
workstation.
e. Commissioning of the Web interface shall not require modification or creation
of HTML or ASP pages. All graphics available at the BAS graphical
workstation shall be available to users via a web browser.
f. The web-based interface shall provide the following functionality to users,
based on their access and privilege rights:
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-20/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
1) Logon Screen – allows the user to enter their user name, password and
Domain name for logging into the web server.
2) Alarm Display – a display of current BAS alarms to which the user has
access will be displayed. Users will be able to acknowledge and erase
active alarms, and link to additional alarm information including alarm
messages, and informational and memo text.
Any alarm
acknowledgements initiated through the web interface will be written to
the BAS central workstation activity log.
3) Graphic Display – Display of system graphics, including animated motion,
available in the BAS workstation will be available for viewing over the web
browser. Software that requires creation of dedicated “web” graphics in
order to display them via the browser interface will not be acceptable. A
graphic selector list will allow users to select any graphics to which they
have access. Graphic displays will automatically refresh with the latest
change of values. Users will have the ability to command and override
points from the graphic display as determined by their user accounts
rights.
4) Point details – users will have access to point detail information including
operational status, operational priority, physical address, and alarm limits,
for point objects to which they have access rights.
5) Point Commanding – users will be able to override and command points
they have access to via the web browser interface. Any commands or
overrides initiated via the web browser interface will be written to the BAS
central workstation activity log.
g. The web server licensing options will allow concurrent access by (5), (10),
(25), (50), (100) browser connections.
h. Internet connections, ISP services, as well as necessary firewalls or proxy
servers shall be provided by the Owner as required to support the web
access feature.
2.8
Workstation Operator Interface
A. Basic Interface Description
1.
Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through
the use of user-friendly and interactive graphical applications, 30-character
English language point identification, on-line help, and industry standard
Windows application software.
Interface software shall simultaneously
communicate with and share data between any combination of dedicated,
modem autodial, and Ethernet-connected building level networks. The software
shall provide, as a minimum, the following functionality:
a.
b.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
Real-time graphical viewing and control of the BAS environment
Reporting
S-11-21/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
c.
d.
e.
f.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
n.
Scheduling and override of building operations
Collection and analysis of historical data
Point database editing, storage and downloading of controller databases.
Utility for combining points into logical Point Groups. The Point Groups shall
then be manipulated in Graphics, trend graphs and reports in order to
streamline the navigation and usability of the system.
Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgment
“Collapsible tree,” dynamic system architecture diagram application:
1. Showing the real-time status and definition details of all workstations and
devices on a management level network
2. Showing the real-time status and definition details of all DDC and HVAC
Mechanical Controllers at the building level
3. Showing the status and definition details of all field-level application
controllers
Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays.
Online, context-sensitive help, including an index, glossary of terms, and the
capability to search help via keyword or phrase.
On-screen access to User Documentation, via online help or PDF-format
electronic file.
Automatic database backup at the workstation for database changes
initiated at DDC Controller operator interface terminals.
Display dynamic trend data graphical plot.
1. Each plot must be capable of supporting 10 pts/plot minimum
2. Must be able to command points directly off dynamic trend plot
application.
3. Must be able to plot both real-time and historical trend data
Transfer trend data to 3rd party spreadsheet software
2.
Provide a graphical user interface that shall minimize the use of keyboard
through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, with a "point and click"
approach to menu selection and a “drag and drop” approach to inter-application
navigation. Selection of applications within the workstation software shall be via
a graphical toolbar menu – the application toolbar menu shall have the option to
be located in a docked position on any of the four sides of the visible desktop
space on the workstation display monitor, and the option to automatically hide
itself from the visible monitor workspace when not being actively manipulated by
the user.
3.
The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows the user
to run several applications simultaneously. BAS software shall run on a
Windows XP, 2000 or NT 32 bit operating system. Standard Windows
applications shall run simultaneously with the BAS software. The mouse or AltTab keys shall be used to quickly select and switch between multiple
applications. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel, and
other Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciating online BAS alarms and monitoring information.
a.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed
simultaneously on-line, and in any combination, via adjustable user-sized
windows. Operator shall be able to drag and drop information between the
following applications, reducing the number of steps to perform a desired
function (e.g., Click on a point on the alarm screen and drag it to the dynamic
S-11-22/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
trend graph application to initiate a dynamic trend on the desired point):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Dynamic color graphics application
Alarm management application
Scheduling application
Dynamic trend graph data plotter application
Dynamic system architecture diagram application
Control Program and Point database editing applications
Reporting applications
b. Report and alarm printing shall be accomplished via Windows Print Manager,
allowing use of network printers.
4.
Operator-specific password access protection shall be provided to allow the
administrator/manager to limit users‟ workstation control, display and data base
manipulation capabilities as deemed appropriate for each user, based upon an
assigned password. Operator privileges shall "follow" the operator to any
workstation logged onto (up to 999 user accounts shall be supported). The
administrator/manager shall be able to grant discrete levels of access and
privileges, per user, for each point, graphic, report, schedule, and BAS
workstation application. And each BAS workstation user account shall use a
Windows 2000/NT user account as a foundation.
5.
Dynamic Color Graphics application shall include the following:
a. Must include graphic editing and modifying capabilities
b. A library of standard control application graphics and symbols must be
included
c. Must be able to command points directly off graphics application
d. Graphic display shall include the ability to depict real-time point values
dynamically with animation, picture/frame control, symbol association, or
dynamic informational text-blocks
e. Navigation through various graphic screens shall be optionally achieved
through a hierarchical “tree” structure
f. Graphics viewing shall include zoom capabilities
g. Graphics shall automatically display the HAND status of points that have been
overridden by a field HAND switch, for points that have been designed to
provide a field HAND override capability.
h. Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall provide the ability to
navigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), internet web
addresses, e-mail, external programs, and other workstation applications,
directly from the Graphics application window with a mouse-click on a
customizable link symbol.
6.
Reports shall be generated on demand or via pre-defined schedule, and directed
to CRT displays, printers or file. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user
to easily obtain the following types of reports:
a.
b.
c.
d.
A general listing of all or selected points in the network
List of all points currently in alarm
List of all points currently in override status
List of all disabled points
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-23/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
List of all points currently locked out
List of user accounts and access levels
List all weekly schedules and events
List of holiday programming
List of control limits and dead bands
Custom reports from 3rd party software
System diagnostic reports including, list of DDC panels on line and
communicating, status of all DDC terminal unit device points
l. List of programs
m. List of point definitions
n. List of logical point groups
o. List of alarm strategy definitions
p. List of DDC Control panels
q. Point tantalization report
r. Point Trend data listings
s. Initial Values report
t. User activity report
7.
Scheduling and Override
Provide a calendar type format for simplification of time and date scheduling and
overrides of building operations. Schedule definitions reside in the PC workstation,
DDC Controller, and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller to ensure time
equipment scheduling when PC is off-line -- PC is not required to execute time
scheduling. Provide override access through menu selection, graphical mouse action
or function key. Provide the following capabilities as a minimum:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Weekly schedules
Zone schedules
Event schedules – an event consists of logical combinations of equipment
and/or zones
Ability to schedule for a minimum of up to 365 days in advance
Additionally, the scheduling application shall:
a. Provide filtering capabilities of schedules, based on name, time, frequency,
and schedule type (event, zone, report)
b. Provide sorting capabilities of schedules, based on name, time and type of
schedule (zone, event, report)
c. Provide searching capabilities of schedules based on name – with wildcarding
options
8.
Collection and Analysis of Historical Data
a. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve
records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point may
be trended automatically at time-based intervals (up to four time-based definitions
per point) or change of value, both of which shall be user-definable. Trend data
shall be collected stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting.
Automatic Trend collection may be scheduled at regular intervals through the
same scheduling interface as used for scheduling of zones, events, and reports.
Additionally, trend data may be archived to network drives or removable disk
media for future retrieval.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-24/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
b. Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended point
data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or predefined
groups of selected points. Provide additional functionality to allow predefined
groups of up to 250 trended points to be easily transferred on-line to Microsoft
Excel. DDC contractor shall provide custom designed spreadsheet reports for use
by the owner to track energy usage and cost, equipment run times, equipment
efficiency, and/or building environmental conditions. DDC contractor shall provide
setup of custom reports including creation of data format templates for monthly or
weekly reports.
B. Dynamic Colour Graphic Displays
1. Create colour graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of
mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems and hot
water boiler systems, and room level terminal units, shall be provided by the BAS
contractor as indicated in the point I/O schedule of this specification to optimize
system performance, analysis and speed alarm recognition.
2. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics
and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, point alarm
association, or text-based commands. Graphics software shall permit the
importing of AutoCAD or scanned pictures for use in the system.
3. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indication
shall be shown in their actual respective locations within the system schematics or
graphic floor plan displays, and shall automatically update to represent current
conditions without operator intervention and without pre-defined screen refresh
rates.
a. Provide the user the ability to display real-time point values by animated motion
or custom picture control visual representation. Animation shall depict
movement of mechanical equipment, or air or fluid flow. Picture Control shall
depict various positions in relation to assigned point values or ranges. A library
(set) of animation and picture control symbols shall be included within the
workstation software‟s graphics application. Animation shall reflect, ON or OFF
conditions, and shall also be optionally configurable for up to five rates of
animation speed.
b. Sizable analog bars shall be available for monitor and control of analog values;
high and low alarm limit settings shall be displayed on the analog scale. The
user shall be able to "click and drag" the pointer to change the setpoint.
c. Provide the user the ability to display blocks of point data by defined point
groups; alarm conditions shall be displayed by flashing point blocks.
d. Equipment state or values can be changed by clicking on the associated point
block or graphic symbol and selecting the new state (on/off) or setpoint.
e. State text for digital points can be user-defined up to eight characters.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-25/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
4.
Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of the
equipment changes. The state colors shall be user definable.
Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall provide the ability to
navigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), internet web
addresses, e-mail, external programs, and other workstation applications,
directly from the Graphics application window with a mouse-click on a
customizable link symbol.
5.
6.
The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the user
to simultaneously view several applications at a time to analyze total building
operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be
viewed without interrupting work in progress.
7.
Off the shelf graphic software, Microgafx Designer or Corel Draw software, shall
be provided to allow the user to add, modify or delete system graphic
background displays.
4.
A clipart library of HVAC application and automation symbols shall be provided
including fans, valves, motors, chillers, AHU systems, standard ductwork
diagrams and laboratory symbols. The user shall have the ability to add custom
symbols to the clipart library. The clipart library shall include a minimum of 400
application symbols. In addition, a library consisting of a minimum of 700
graphic background templates shall be provided.
5.
The Graphics application shall include a set of standard Terminal Equipment
controller application-specific background graphic templates. Templates shall
provide the automatic display of a selected Terminal Equipment controller‟s
control values and parameters, without the need to create separate and
individual graphic files for each controller.
C. System Configuration and Definition
1.
A“ Collapsible tree,” dynamic system architecture diagram/display application of
the site-specific BAS architecture showing status of controllers, PC workstations
and networks shall be provided. This application shall include the ability to add
and configure workstations, DDC Controllers or HVAC Mechanical Equipment
controllers, as well as 3rd-party integrated components.
Symbols/Icons
representing the system architecture components shall be user-configurable and
customizable, and a library of customized icons representing 3rd-party integration
solutions shall be included. This application shall also include the functionality
for real-time display, configuration and diagnostics of dial-up modems to DDC
Controllers.
2.
Network wide control strategies shall not be restricted to a single DDC Controller
or HVAC Mechanical Equipment controller, but shall be able to include data from
any and all other network panels to allow the development of Global control
strategies.
3.
Provide automatic backup and restore of all DDC controller and HVAC
Mechanical Equipment controller databases on the workstation hard disk. In
addition, all database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on-
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-26/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
line without disrupting other system operations. Changes shall be automatically
recorded and downloaded to the appropriate DDC Controller or HVAC
Mechanical Equipment Controller. Changes made at the user-interface of DDC
Controllers or HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be automatically
uploaded to the workstation, ensuring system continuity.
4.
System configuration, programming, editing, graphics generation shall be
performed on-line. If programming and system back-up must be done with the
PC workstation off-line, the BAS contractor shall provide at least 2 operator
workstations.
5.
Point database configuration shall be available to the user within a dedicated
point database editor application included in the workstation software. The editor
shall allow the user to create, view existing, modify, copy, and delete points from
the database. The point editor shall also allow the user to configure the alarm
management strategy for each point. The editor shall provide the option for
editing the point database in an online or offline mode with the DDC Controllers.
a. The workstation software shall also provide the capability to perform bulk
modification of point definition attributes to a single or multiple user-selected
points. This function shall allow the user to choose the properties to copy
from a selected point to another point or set of points. The selectable
attributes shall include, but are not limited to, Alarm management definitions
and Trend definitions.
D. Alarm Management
1. Alarm Routing shall allow the user to send alarm notification to selected printers
or workstation location(s) based on time of day, alarm severity, or point type.
2. Alarm Notification shall be presented to each workstation in a tabular format
application, and shall include the following information for each alarm point:
name, value, alarm time & date, alarm status, priority, acknowledgement
information, and alarm count. Each alarm point or priority shall have the ability to
sound a discrete audible notification.
3. Alarm Display shall have the ability to list & sort the alarms based on alarm
status, point name, ascending or descending alarm time.
4. Directly from the Alarm Display, the user shall have the ability to acknowledge,
silence the alarm sound, print, or erase each alarm. The interface shall also have
the option to inhibit the erasing of active acknowledged alarms, until they have
returned to normal status. The user shall also have the ability to command,
launch an associated graphic or trended graphical plot, or run a report on a
selected alarm point directly on the Alarm Display.
5. Each alarm point shall have a direct link from the Alarm Display to further userdefined point informational data. The user shall have the ability to also associate
real-time electronic annotations or notes to each alarm.
6. Alarm messages shall be customizable for each point, or each alarm priority
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-27/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
level, to display detailed instructions to the user regarding actions to take in the
event of an alarm. Alarm messages shall also have the optional ability to
individually enunciate on the workstation display via a separate pop-up window,
automatically being generated as the associated alarm condition occurs.
7. Alarm Display application shall allow workstation operators to send and receive
real-time messages to each other, for purposes of coordinating Alarm and BAS
system management.
8. Remote notification of messages
a. Workstation shall be configured to send out messages to numeric pagers,
alphanumeric pagers, phones (via text to speech technology), SMS (Simple
Messaging Service, text messaging) Devices, and email accounts based on a
point‟s alarm condition.
b. There shall be no limit to the number of points that can be configured for
remote notification of alarm conditions and no limit on the number of remote
devices which can receive messages from the system.
c. On a per point basis, system shall be configurable to send messages to an
individual or group and shall be configurable to send different messages to
different remote devices based on alarm message priority level.
d. Remote devices may be scheduled as to when they receive messages from
the system to account for operators‟ work schedules.
e. System must be configurable to send messages to an escalation list so that if
the first device does not respond, the message is sent on to the next device
after a configurable time has elapsed.
f. Message detail shall be configurable on a per user basis.
g. During a ”flood” of alarms, remote notification messages shall have the ability
to optimize several alarms into an individual remote notification message.
h. Workstation shall have the ability to send manual messages allowing an
operator to type in a message to be sent immediately.
i. Workstation shall have a feature to send a heartbeat message to periodically
notify users that they have communication with the system.
9. Always visible non-obtrusive alarm display
a. An alarm display must be active and visible to the operator at all times,
regardless of what other workstation applications the operator is involved in.
b. This display shall provide an overview of the system status including fire,
security, and building automation events.
c. This display shall display a textual description of the highest priority event on
the system as well the point status and indication of when the point last
changed state.
d. This display shall indicate whether the highest priority event has been
acknowledged.
e. When a new alarm is received at a workstation, the operator shall be
informed of the new event through an audible and visual notification without
application focus being drawn away from the application that the operator is
currently working with.
10. Acknowledgement
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-28/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
a. Operators shall be allowed to acknowledge events in any order, regardless of
their priority, or which system (fire, security, automation) they reside on.
b. The interface shall clearly display whether a point has been acknowledged
and who it was acknowledged by.
c. When a point has gone in and out of trouble repeatedly, an operator shall be
permitted to acknowledge every change of state in a single operation rather
than having to explicitly acknowledge every change of state.
E. Workstation Communications
1.
Provide automatic dial-up communications for buildings as specified. Automatic
dial-up communications shall include the following features as a minimum:
a.
Dial-Out
1) Manual dial-out from the workstation to remote networks shall be
accomplishable using only a mouse to select and request the desired remote
connection.
b.
Dial-In
1) Alarms shall automatically dial into the workstation for display at the
workstation monitor and for hard copy printout at the associated event
printer.
2) Alarms shall, at the operator's option, dial into a stand-alone modem-printer to
provide for real-time alarm printouts even when the workstation is off-line (such
as when it is being used to run operator-selected 3rd party software).
3) Trend data from remote networks shall be scheduled for automatic updating to
the workstation at operator-selected times. The operator shall also have the
option of manually collecting trend data at any time.
2.9
Field Devices
A. Provide instrumentation as required for monitoring, control or optimization
functions. All devices and equipment shall be approved for installation in the City
of Doha
B. Room Temperature Sensors
1) Digital room sensors shall have LCD display, day / night override button, and set
point slide adjustment override options. The setpoint slide adjustment can be
software limited by the automation system to limit the amount of room
adjustment.
Temperature monitoring range
Output signal
Accuracy at Calibration point
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
+20/120°F -13° to 49°C)
Changing resistance
+0.5°F (+/- 0.3°C)
S-11-29/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
Set Point and Display Range
2)
3)
55° to 95° F (13° to 35°C)
Liquid immersion temperature:
Temperature monitoring range
Output signal
Accuracy at Calibration point
+30/250°F (-1°/121°C)
Changing resistance
+0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
Duct (single point) temperature:
Temperature monitoring range
Output signal
Accuracy at Calibration point
+20/120°F (-7°/49°C)
Changing resistance
+0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
4) Duct Average temperature:
Temperature monitoring range
Output signal
Accuracy at Calibration point
Sensor Probe Length
+20° +120°F(-7°/+49°C)
4 – 20 mA DC
+0.5°F (+03°C)
25‟ L (7.3m)
5) Outside air temperature:
Temperature monitoring range
Output signal
Accuracy at Calibration point
-58°+122° F(-50ºC to +50ºC)
4 – 20 mA DC
+0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
C. Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges
Output
Calibration Adjustments
Accuracy
Linearity
Hysteresis
D.
Differential pressure:
1.
Unit for fluid flow proof shall be
Range
Differential
Maximum differential pressure
Maximum pressure
0-5/30 inches H20
0-25/150 inches H20
0-125/750 inches H20
4 – 20 mA DC
Zero and span
+-0.2% of span
+-0.1% of span
+-0.05% of span
8 to 70 psi
3 psi
200 psi
325 psi
2.
Unit for air flow shall be.
Set point ranges: 0.5” WG to 1.0” WG (124.4 to 248.8 Pa)
1.0” WG to 12.0” WG (248.8 to 497.6 Pa)
E.
Static pressure sensor:
Range
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
0 to .5” WG (0 to 124.4 Pa)
0 to 1” WG (0 to 248.8 Pa)
0 to 2” WG (0 to 497.7 Pa)
0 to 5” WG (0 to 1.2 kPa
S-11-30/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
Output Signal
Combined static error
Operating Temperature
F. Air Pressure Sensor:
Range:
Output signal
Accuracy
G. Humidity Sensors:
Range
Sensing Element
Output Signal
Accuracy
H. Pressure to Current Transducer
Range
Output signal
Accuracy
0 to 10” WG (0 to 2.5 kPa)
4 – 20 mA VDC
0.5% full range
-40º to 175º F (-40C to 79.5ºC)
0 to 0.1 in. water (0 to 24.9 Pa)
0 to 0.25 in. water (0 to 63.2 Pa)
0 to 0.5 in. water (0 to 124.5 Pa)
0 to 1.0 in. water (o to 249 Pa)
0 to 2.0 in water 90 to 498 Pa)
0 to 5.0 in. water (0 to 1.25 kPa)
0 to 10.0 in.water (0 to 2.49 kPa)
4 to 20 mA
+1.0% of full scale
0 to 100% RH
Bulk Polymer
4 – 20 mA DC
At 77°F(25ºC) + 2% RH
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) or
3 to 30 psig (21 to 207 kPa)
4 – 20 mA
+ 1% of full scale (+ 0.3 psig)
I.
Control Valves (all control valves shall have electric actuators).
1.
Electric Control
Rangeability
Flow Characteristics
Control Action
Medium
Body Type
Body Material
Body Trim
Stem
Actuator
2.
40:1
Modified. Equal percentage
Normal open or closed as selected
Steam, water, glycol
Screwed ends 2” and smaller, flanged
Valves 2½” and larger
Bronze
Bronze
Stainless Steel
0-10 VDC, 4-20 MA or 2 position
24 VAC/120VAC
All automatic temperature control valves in water lines shall be provided with
Characterized throttling plugs and shall be sized for minimum 25% of the system
pressure drop or 5 psi, whichever is less.
a) Positive positioning relays shall be provided on pneumatic control when
required to provide sufficient power for sequencing.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-31/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
b) Two position valves shall be line size.
K . Damper Actuators
1.
Electric control shall be direct coupled actuators.
2. Damper actuators shall be Brushless DC Motor Technology with stall protection,
bi-directional, fail safe spring return, all metal housing, manual override,
independently adjustable dual auxiliary switch.
a) The actuator assembly shall include the necessary hardware and proper
mounting and connection to a standard ½” diameter shaft or damper blade.
3.
Actuators shall be designed for mounting directly to the damper shaft without the
need for connecting linkages.
4.
All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque output shall have a self-centering
damper shaft clamp that guarantees concentric alignment of the actuator‟s
output coupling with the damper shaft. The self-centering clamp shall have a
pair of opposed “v” shaped toothed cradles; each having two rows of teeth to
maximize holding strength. A single clamping bolt shall simultaneously drive
both cradles into contact with the damper shaft.
5.
All actuators having more than a 100 lb-in torque output shall accept a 1”
diameter shaft directly, without the need for auxiliary adapters.
6.
All actuators shall be designed and manufactured using ISO900registered
procedures, and shall be Listed under Standards UL873 and CSA22.2 No. 24-93
l.
2.10
Miscellaneous Devices
A. Thermostats
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Room thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity.
They shall have a bi-metal sensing element capable of responding to a
temperature change of one-tenth of one degree. (Provide all thermostats with
limit stops to limit adjustments as required.)
Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable partitions
without overlap.
Mount the thermostat covers with tamper-proof socket head screws.
B. Firestats
1.
Provide manual reset, fixed temperature line voltage type with a bi-metal
actuated switch.
a) Switch shall have adequate rating for required load.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-32/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
C. Current Sensing Relay:
1.
2.
3.
Provide solid-state, adjustable, current operated relay. Provide a relay which
changes switch contact state in response to an adjustable set point value of
current in the monitored A/C circuit.
Adjust the relay switch point so that the relay responds to motor operation under
load as an “on” state and so that the relay responds to an unloaded running
motor as an “off” state. A motor with a broken belt is considered an unloaded
motor.
Provide for status device for all fans and pumps.
2.11
Integration for Fire Alarm/Life Safety
A. General
1.
Provide a software driver that will provide a supervised link from the fire alarm
system. Integration between the fire alarm system and the BAS is intended to
allow single seat operation for basic monitoring functions.
2.
Interface shall be UUKL Listed for smoke control
3.
Interface shall be UL Listed under UL 864 categories UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL,
UDTZ, and QVAX, UL 1076 category APOU, and UL 916 category PAZX.
4.
Testing and software configuration shall be provided as required during start-up
and commissioning.
5.
Any break in communications between the fire and BAS systems shall be
annunciated at each system. Upon restoration of communications, the interface
shall automatically refresh fire alarm point status.
6.
Provide any miscellaneous equipment required by the building automation
system, such as trunk interfaces, modems, etc. to support the connection
between the fire alarm systems and BAS.
7.
The interface shall include a driver that provides communications from the fire
alarm/life safety system to the building automation system. Each point will be
mapped into the BAS so that they can be monitored and alarmed as though they
were native to the BAS. See the point schedule in Part 3 for a list of points that
are to be integrated into the BAS.
B. Hardware
1. All components required to provide integration shall be common to the BAS or fire
alarm system. No third party hardware shall be allowed. No special hardware
used only for integration purposes, or hardware not integral to the either the BAS
or fire alarm system shall be allowed.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-33/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
2. All hardware used for interfacing the APOGEE automation system to the fire
alarm system must be UL Listed for smoke control under UL 864 category UUKL.
3. All fire fighting zone valve tamper switches shall be connected to the BMS in an
addressable manner.
C. Software
1. The interface shall provide a supervised link from the fire alarm system to the
BAS. System administrators shall be able to configure the system to prevent
operators from changing, reconfiguring, acknowledging or resetting the fire alarm
system such that the fire alarm system remains the primary fire command station
if desired.
2. The fire alarm system labels for each point shall be displayed as the alarm
message text for each point in alarm. The interface shall report the following data
from the fire alarm system for basic monitoring:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Normal point status
Alert for dirty for each point
Status activity
Activated under test
Trouble (open/short)
Supervisory
Alarm
3. Points that are mapped through the interface shall be able to be accessed by
standard applications in the BAS such as programming, alarm routing, graphics,
and scheduling.
4. The following reports shall be provided at the BAS workstation:
a. Maintenance report
b. History report of point and operator activity
c. Test report, storing test results and status for each test detector
5.
Operators shall be allowed to schedule reports to run unattended with their
outputs directed to the operator screen, to a printer, and/or to a file.
6.
Operator messages shall distinguish between the active state and trouble
conditions on any point (alarm, supervisory, security, etc.).
D. Remote Access
1.
The interface shall support either the ability of an operator to connect to the
system via dial-up telephone connections or via the internet in order to perform
diagnostics. The interface shall prevent an operator from affecting the operation
of the fire alarm system, or interfering with fire alarm system programming
remotely.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-34/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Project Management
Provide a designated project manager who will be responsible for the following:
1. Instruct and maintain project schedule.
2. Site coordination with all applicable trades, subcontractors, and other
integration vendors.
3. Authorized to accept and execute orders or instructions from owner/architect.
4. End project meetings as necessary to avoid conflicts and delays.
5. Take necessary field decisions relating to this scope of work.
6. Coordination/Single point of contact.
3.2 Sequence of Operation
Job specific - per job requirements
3.3 Point Schedule Matrix – I/O Schedule
The contractor shall collaborate with the owner directly to determine the owner's
preference for naming conventions, etc. before entering the data in to the
system.
3.4 Start-up and Commissioning
A. When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify
transmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing,
calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by the manufacturer.
Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure
mode upon panel failure or loss of power.
B. Provide any recommendation for system modification in writing to owner. Do not
make any system modification, including operating parameters and control
settings, without prior approval of owner.
C. After manufacturer has completed system start-up and commissioning. Joint
commissioning of integrated system segments shall be completed.
3.5 Electrical Wiring and Materials
A. Install, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work
includes providing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories.
All wiring shall be installed in conduit.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-35/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
B. Provide wiring between thermostats, aquastats and unit heater motors, all control
and alarm wiring for all control and alarm devices for all Sections of
Specifications.
C. Provide 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz emergency power to every B.M.S. DDC
Controller panel, HVAC/Mechanical Equipment Controller, PC console, power
supply, transformer, annunciator, modems, printers and to other devices as
required. It is the intent that the entire building management system except terminal
equipment shall be operative under emergency power conditions in the building.
The power supplies are to be extended in conduit and wire from emergency circuit
breakers.
D. Provide status function conduit and wiring for equipment covered under this
Section.
E. Provide conduit and wiring between the B.M.S. panels and the temperature,
humidity, or pressure sensing elements, including low voltage control wiring in
conduit.
F.
Provide conduit and control wiring for devices specified in this Section.
G. Provide conduit and signal wiring between motor starters in motor control centers
and high and/or low temperature relay contacts and remote relays in B.M.S.
panels located in the vicinity of motor control centers.
H. Provide conduit and wiring between the PC workstation, electrical panels,
metering instrumentation, indicating devices, miscellaneous alarm points,
remotely operated contractors, and B.M.S. panels, as shown on the drawings or
as specified.
I.
All wiring to be compliant to local building code and the NEC.
J.
Provide electrical wall box and conduit sleeve for all wall mounted devices.
3.6 Control Air and Sensing Lines
1.
Air lines cannot be hidden within duct insulation. All piping and tubing shall be
properly supported using straps, cleats, or hangers as approved. Use of wire will
not be permitted. Where this specification permits the use of plastic tubing for
some parts of the piping system, and where the control manufacturer has
obtained such approval, multiple virgin polyethylene tube, with a molecular
weight of not less than 25,000 and a melt index of not more than .3 dg./min.,
positioned adjacent and parallel to each other and contained in an overall jacket
of flame retardant polyethylene compound sheath complying with UL94 vertical
burning test may be supplied. The sheath may be excluded in panel piping.
Pressure rating: 160 psi/72 degrees F. Ambient temperature rating: 100 to 175
degrees F. In bundled tubing, individual lines shall be identified by numbers at 2"
intervals or by color. Tubing shall be supported with pipe rests or other
supporting methods as to prevent the lines from stress conditions.
2.
Tubing passing through or buried in concrete shall be hard drawn copper in rigid
steel conduit.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-36/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
3.
4.
Air tubing run exposed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be hard drawn
copper.
Air tubing in finished areas shall be run concealed.
5.
Air tubing for high pressure mains (over 20 psig) shall be copper.
6.
Single Tube Polyethylene plastic tubing will be permitted in lieu of copper, except
for high pressure mains or smoke control, in the following locations:
a.
b.
7.
Within thin wall electric conduit (EMT).
Within control panels.
Air piping associated with smoke control functions shall be hard drawn copper
only.
3.7
Performance
A. Unless stated otherwise, control temperatures within plus or minus 2oF humidity
within plus or minus 3% of the set point and static pressure within 10% of set
point.
3.8
Commissioning, Testing and Acceptance
A. Perform a three-phase commissioning procedure consisting of field I/O
calibration and commissioning, system commissioning and integrated system
program commissioning. Document all commissioning information on
commissioning data sheets which shall be submitted prior to acceptance testing.
Commissioning work which requires shutdown of system or deviation from
normal function shall be performed when the operation of the system is not
required. The commissioning must be coordinated with the owner and
construction manager to ensure systems are available when needed. Notify the
operating personal in writing of the testing schedule so that authorized personnel
from the owner and construction manager are present throughout the
commissioning procedure.
1.
Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has
been installed according to plans, specifications and approved shop
drawings. Test, calibrate and bring on line each control sensor and device.
Commissioning to include, but not be limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90% of range.
Sensor range.
Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting.
Point value reporting.
Binary alarm and switch settings.
Actuator ranges.
Fail safe operation on loss of control signal, electric power, network
communications.
S-11-37/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
B. After control devices have been commissioned (i.e. calibrated, tested and signed
off), each BMS program shall be put on line and commissioned. The contractor
shall, in the presence of the owner and construction manager, demonstrate each
programmed sequence of operation and compare the results in writing. In
addition, each control loop shall be tested to verify proper response and stable
control, within specified accuracy's. System program test results shall be
recorded on commissioning data sheets and submitted for record. Any
discrepancies between the specification and the actual performance will be
immediately rectified and retested.
C. After all BMS programs have been commissioned, the contractor shall verify the
overall system performance as specified. Tests shall include, but not be limited
to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Data communication, both normal and failure modes.
Fully loaded system response time.
Impact of component failures on system performance and system operation.
Time/Date changes.
End of month/ end of year operation.
Season changeover.
Global application programs and point sharing.
System backup and reloading.
System status displays.
Diagnostic functions.
Power failure routines.
Battery backup.
Smoke Control, stair pressurization, stair, vents, in concert with Fire Alarm
System testing.
14. Testing of all electrical and HVAC systems with other division of work.
D. Submit for approval, a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to
demonstrate compliance with contractual requirements. This Acceptance test
procedure will take place after the commissioning procedure but before final
acceptance, to verify that sensors and control devices maintain specified
accuracy's and the system performance does not degrade over time.
E. Using the commissioning test data sheets, the contractor shall demonstrate each
point. The contractor shall also demonstrate all system functions. The contractor
shall demonstrate all points and system functions until all devices and functions
meet specification.
F.
The contractor shall supply all instruments for testing and turn over same to the
owner after acceptance testing.
1.
All test instruments shall be submitted for approval.
Test Instrument Accuracy:
Temperature:
1/4F or 1/2% full scale, whichever is less.
Pressure: High Pressure (psi): ½ psi or 1/2% full scale, whichever is less.
Low Pressure:
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
1/2% of full scale (in w.c.)
S-11-38/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
Humidity:
2% RH
Electrical:
1/4% full scale
G. After the above tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be
functioning as specified, a thirty day performance test period shall begin. If the
system performs as specified throughout the test period, requiring only routine
maintenance, the system shall be accepted. If the system fails during the test, and
cannot be fully corrected within eight hours, the owner may request that
performance tests be repeated.
3.9
Training
A. The manufacturer shall provide factory trained instructor to give full instruction to
designated personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors shall
be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach.
The manufacturer shall provide all students with a student binder containing
product specific training modules for the system installed. All training shall be
held during normal working hours of 8:00 am to 4:30 PM weekdays.
B. Provide 20 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel.
Training shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals
Walk-through of the job to locate control components
Operator workstation and peripherals
DDC controller and ASC operation/function
Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel
programming
6. Operation of portable operator's terminal
7. Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures
8. Student binder with training modules
C. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive
understanding of the hardware and software, additional training must be available
from the Manufacturer. If such training is required by the Owner, it will be
contracted at a later date.
3.10
General Notes
1.
The electronic controls packaged with the chiller equipment shall directly
communicate with the direct digital control (DDC) system. The Building control
system shall communicate with the chiller equipment to read the information and
change the control set points as shown in the points list, sequences of operation
and control schematics.
2.
The chiller equipment supplier shall provide all hardware and software necessary
to integrate the chiller controls with the Building control network. The following
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-39/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
lists the major integration components that must be supplied by the successful
chiller equipment supplier:
- Full control, management and monitoring system shall be provided for chilled
water plant and shall be connected to building management system as per
drawings and following specifications.
3.
The chiller equipment supplier shall provide proof of experience with integration
of the type outlined in this specification. The supplier shall provide individuals
experienced with the installation and start-up of equipment relating to integration.
22.2.20
CHILLER PLANT AUTOMATION SYSTEM (PLANT MANAGER )
(TO BE INTERFACED WITH THE BMS SYSTEM)
General
A Chiller Plant Automation (CPA) system shall be included with the chillers to provide
coordinated chiller plant operation, optimize energy efficiency, equipment protection
and alarm requirements of a central chilled water plant. The chiller plant automation
system (CPA) shall be furnished by the chiller manufacturer. The CPA must have
communication interface port that can communicate using ASCII/Modbus/ISN/J2 &
BACnet protocol
The CPA system must be a micro-processor based programmable controller and be
capable of specific chiller plant control, chiller interface and must have a local LCD
display.
The CPA will have inputs for accepting signals from temperature sensors and input
quantity shall be minimum 72. The CPA shall control the chiller plant using Bacnet
based Direct Digital Control (DDC). The CPA outputs must be capable of modulating
/ positioning valves and pump speed. Output quantity shall be a minimum of 32
outputs for primary and secondary pumps. Chiller start/stop shall be done over the
network. All the direct digital controllers must have RS 232 port and that can be
connected directly to computer without any interface devices.
The CPA must have an RS 232 C data port for communication to a printer terminal or
PC. The data port must use standard industry ASCII/ISN/Bacnet/Modbus/J2
communication protocol to 9600 Baud asynchronous communication speed. The
CPA will have Translator capability that will transfer all chiller inputs, alarm
conditions, and safety / cycling information to the Building Automation System. The
translator shall be capable of receiving commands from the Building Automation
System to request chiller information and top change set points, alarm points, onstatus of the chillers, maximum demand of each chiller and parameters as
recommended by the chiller manufacturer.
The CPA must have a display panel for human interface, on-site access to chiller
plant operating data, enunciation of system alarms and messages and changes in
chiller plant control. The operator display shall be built-in. The DDC must have the
capability to transfer the alarms to mobile and Bacnet based workstation.
The CPA system display shall be a built-in display of at least 40 alphanumeric
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-40/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
characters and must be capable of displaying system temperatures, pressures, flows,
calculated values, equipment status, valve position, system alarms and messages.
The CPA software must be capable of accumulating historical data and equipment
logs. The CPA must have sufficient memory to store at least 48 hours of chiller logs
and weekly chiller plant management reports.
The CPA must interface to a smart modem and be capable of auto-answer and autodial, for remote access and equipment alarm.
In the event of power failure, all equipment will remain off for a select period of time.
Equipment will then be sequentially started to minimize kW peak demand. If a chiller
or its auxiliary equipment fails to start or shuts down on safety failure, a standby
chiller and its associated auxiliary equipment will be started.
The CPA shall recognize and enunciate chiller, pump and fan failure by means of
positive proof feed back and/or safety failure circuit. An alarm message shall be
displayed and beeper/horn sounded.
The CPA must be capable of summing pump kW and chiller kW. It shall also sum
ton- hours of cooling provided by each chiller.
The CPA system must be capable of displaying chiller plant alarms and messages.
Minimum requirements shall include : Chiller failure alarms, pump failure alarms and
high / low temperature alarms.
The system shall be capable of accumulating and displaying chiller plant data,
historical chiller logs and reports. Minimum Report requirements shall include : chiller
historical kWH, chiller run times, historical cooling load and total chiller plant
estimated power use. Minimum chiller log requirements shall include : all chiller plant
operating temperatures and pressures, chiller kW. All chiller logs must be available
for the previous 48 hours, in 1 hour increments.
1. Inputs
The CPA system shall be able to read:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
Leaving Chilled Water Temperature
Entering Chilled Water Temperature
Evaporator Pressure
Condenser Pressure
Oil Pressure
Entering Condenser Water Temperature
Leaving Condenser Water Temperature
Amperage
Chilled Water set point that the micro-panel is controlling to
Current Limit set point that the micro-panel is controlling to
Evaporator Saturation Temperature
Condenser Saturation Temperature
Discharge Temperature
Oil Temperature
S-11-41/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
o. Operational Mode ( Remote or Local )
p. Vent Solenoid (not applicable for R-134a refrigerant)
q. Oil Pump
2. Outputs
The CPA system shall be able to command the following:
a. Chiller On / Off
b. Current Limit setpoint
c. Leaving Chilled Water setpoint
3. Safety Shutdown Codes
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
4.
No shutdown
Low Evaporator Pressure
Low Oil Pressure
High Condenser Pressure
Evaporator Transducer Error
Motor Controller
High Discharge Temperature
High Oil Temperature
Power Failure
Oil Pressure Transducer
Starter Malfunction detected
High Motor Temperature
Replace Battery – Reprogram
Discharge Probe Failure
Oil Temperature Probe Failure
Cycling Shutdown Codes
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
No shut down
Low water temperature
Flow switch
System Cycling
Multi Unit cycling
Internal Clock
Remote Stop
Power Failure
Vane Motor switch open
Anti-Recycle
Motor Controller
Power Fault
Pressure run switch to start
5. Chiller Supplier Scope
Chiller supplier shall responsible for complete primary chilled water generation
system including cooling tower. Controlling /sequencing of complete chiller plant will
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-42/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
be done by chiller supplier. If required entire plant will be interfaced to BMS supplier
using BACnet protocol. BMS supplier will control Secondary/tertiary system.
Chiller supplier shall supply Bacnet based workstation with all the facilities such as
monitoring, control, trending, Alarm Etc. Chiller supplier workstation will be installed
next to BMS supplier workstation and shall work independently.
All the field devices such as temperature sensors, flow meter, butterfly valves should
be 4-20Ma or 0-10VDC. Supply of all field devices require to control the chillers shall
be from BMS supplier or Chiller plant supplier, however supply of field devices will be
decided by the contractor responsible for MEP installations.
6.
Materials
A. All products used in this project installation shall be new and currently under
manufacture and shall be the version currently being sold by the manufacturer for
use in new installations. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new
products unless explicitly approved by the owner's representative in writing. Spare
parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract.
7. Communication
A. All control products provided for this project shall comprise a BACnet network, the
type to be specific to the application. Communication involving control components
(i.e., all types of controllers and operator interfaces) shall conform to
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet.
B. Each BACnet device shall operate on the BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol
specified for that device as defined in this section.
C. The contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs,
and routers necessary for the internet work.
D. All controllers including wall thermostats where noted on the plans shall have a
communication port for temporary connection to a laptop computer or other
operator interface device. This connection shall support memory downloads and
other operations needed for commissioning and troubleshooting.
E. Communication services over the internet work shall result in operator interface
and value passing that is transparent to the internet work architecture as follows:
a. Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the internet
work will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that
interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status
information, control algorithms, etc., for all controllers shall be available for
viewing and editing from any one controller on the internet work or segment.
b. All database values (e.g., objects, software variables, custom program
variables) of any one controller shall be readable by any other controller on the
internetwork.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-43/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
F. The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily via the
internetwork. An operator change to the master time clock shall be automatically
broadcast to all controllers on the internetwork.
G. The internetwork shall have the following minimum capacity for future expansion:
a. Each router or building controller/router on the network backbone shall have
routing capacity for 48 controllers.
b. The network backbone shall have capacity for 48 routers or building
controller/routers.
c. The system shall have an overall capacity for 12,500 building controller, custom
application controller, and application specific controller input/output objects.
8. Operator Interface
A. Furnish an operator workstation as shown on the system drawings. The
workstation shall reside on the same high-speed network as the building
controllers.
B. Communication between the workstation or server and all controllers the network
shall use the BACnet protocol. Communication between the workstation/server and
the control network backbone shall use the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data
Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing as specified in Annex J of
the ASHRAE/ANSI BACnet Specification and BACnet MS/TP to support lower
order devices. Connection from a remote site to OWS shall use either the BACnet
Point to Point Physical/Data Link Layer Protocol or IP over Point to Point (PTP)
C. The PC Workstation shall support the BACnet interoperability Building Blocks
(BIBBS) for read (initiate) and write (Execute) Services. That Following BIBBS shall
be supported:
a. DS-RP-A,B
b. DS-RPM-A
c. DS-WP-A
d. DS-wpm-A
D. Hardware. Each operator workstation shall consist of the following: Front end PC
shall be a dedicated facilities-management computer provided by the control
system manufacturer. As a minimum, the PC shall be based on the following
minimum configuration requirements: Pentium III - 400MHz, 850MB Hard Drive,
1GB RAM, Tape or independent drive back up unit, 17” CRT and 101 keyboard,
Windows 2000/XP or later, Color Printer, dual printer support for both alarm
printing and trend data to different printers, 2 parallel ports, 2 serial ports.)
E. System software
a. Operating System. Furnish a concurrent multi-tasking operating system. The
operating system shall support the use of other common software applications
that operate under DOS or Windows. Acceptable operating systems include
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows NT, or Linux.
b. Auto Discovery and Graphic Assignment: The Operator Work Station shall be
able to automatically discover controller types on the network and associate a
predefined graphic to any given controller on the network.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-44/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
c. System Graphics. The operator workstation software shall be graphically
oriented. The contractor shall provide all required graphic screens to provide a
summary of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of
equipment, point and click navigation between zones or equipment, and editing
of setpoints and other commonly accessed properties. As a minimum, the
Contractor shall provide one graphic screen per piece of equipment or
occupied zone as well as screens that summarize conditions on each floor of
each building included in this contract. The Contractor shall also provide the
tools and documentation necessary for the customer to edit supplied graphics
or create new graphics and integrate them into the system. Using these tools, it
shall be possible to add analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and
animation files to a background graphic.
d. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment
graphics such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit
ventilators. This library also shall include standard symbols for other equipment
including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. The library
shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation
package program.
F. System Applications. The system shall include the following tools and applications,
either as an integral part of the operator interface or as a separate stand-alone
engineering tool. If provided as an integral part of the interface, the application shall
be available from all operator workstations. If provided as a stand-alone
engineering tool, the software shall be installable on any standard IBM compatible
PC with no limit on the number of copies that can be installed under the system
license. The tools and applications shall provide the following functionality
1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation shall store
on the hard disk a copy of the current system database, for all control modules.
This database shall be updated whenever a change is made to the system
configuration or to the operating program for any control module.
2. Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper
password clearance shall be able to save the database from any system
controller and manually download it to any similar control module in the system
from any operator workstation.
3. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a method of
configuring the system. This shall allow for future system changes or additions
by users under proper password protection.
4. On-Line Help. Provide a context-sensitive, online help system to assist the
operator in operating and editing the system. On-line help shall be available for
all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen.
5. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user
name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security
shall be selectable for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the
ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each
operator password shall be able to restrict the functions accessible to viewing
and/or changing each system application, editor, and object. Each operator
shall automatically be logged off the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is
detected. This auto logoff time period shall be adjustable by the system
supervisor. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
6. System Diagnostics. The system shall monitor the operation of all active
components and annunciate appropriate alarms to the operator.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-45/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
7. Alarm Processing. Any input or status object in the system shall be
configurable to alarm in and out of normal state. The operator shall be able to
configure the alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, states, and reactions for
each object in the system. The system shall be delivered with alarm points
configured and enabled as specified in the Sequences of Operation. (Appendix
A.) BACnet objects and alarm services shall be used for all alarms.
8. Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use an English language descriptor for
the object in alarm in such a way that the operator will be able to recognize the
source, location, and nature of the alarm without relying upon acronyms or
other mnemonics.
9. Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to configure (by object) what, if
any, actions the system workstation or server shall take when an alarm is
received. Actions shall include logging, printing, starting programs, displaying
messages, paging, or providing audible annunciation. Each of these actions
shall be configurable by workstation and time of day.
10. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to program a trend log for any data
object in the system. This definition shall include interval, start time, and stop
time. Trend logs may also be defined based upon change of value (COV)
sampling, rather than interval sampling. Trend data shall be sampled and
stored in the control module, be archivable on the hard disk, and be retrievable
for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs. The system shall be
delivered with trends configured and functioning as specified in the Sequences
of Operation .
11. Alarm and Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all system alarms and
change of states from any workstation or browser interface in the system.
Events shall be listed chronologically. An operator with the proper security level
may acknowledge and clear alarms.
12. Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator to
view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system.
The status shall be available by menu, on graphics, or through custom
programs.
13. Clock Synchronization. The real-time clocks in all building control panels and
workstations shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization service. The system
also shall be able to automatically synchronize all system clocks daily from the
operator -designated device in the system. The system shall automatically
adjust for daylight savings and standard time, if applicable.
14. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to
select, modify, or create reports. Custom reports shall be definable as to data
content, format, interval and date. Report data shall be achievable on the hard
disk for historical reporting. Report data shall be stored on the PC hard disk in a
format that is readily copied to other standard software applications, including
spreadsheets and word processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to
the system printer.
15. Standard Reports. The following standard system reports shall be provided for
this project. Provide ability for the owner to readily create additional reports for
this project.
16. All Objects: All system (or subsystem) objects and their current values.
17. Alarm Summary: All current alarms (except those in alarm lockout).
18. Logs:
A. Alarm History
B. Trends
C. Change -of-state
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-46/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
a. Custom Reports. Provide the capability for the operator to easily define
any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly or annual report.
b. Tenant override reports. Provide a monthly report showing the daily total
time that each tenant has requested after-hours HVAC and lighting
services.
c. Chiller Report: provide a daily chiller report as required by ASHRAE
Guideline 3-1996. At a minimum this report shall include:
1. Chilled water inlet and outlet temperature
2. Chilled water flow
3. Chilled water inlet and outlet pressures
4. Evaporator refrigerant pressure and temperature
5. Condenser refrigerant pressure and liquid temperature
6. Condenser inlet and outlet temperatures
7. Condenser water flow
8. Refrigerant levels
9. Oil pressure and temperature
10. Oil level
11. Compressor refrigerant discharge temperature
12. Compressor refrigerant suction temperature
13. Addition of refrigerant
14. Addition of oil
15. Vibration levels or observation that vibration is not excessive
16. Motor Amperes per phase
17. Motor volts per phase
18. PPM refrigerant monitor level
19. Purge exhaust time or discharge count
20. Ambient temperature
21. Date and time logged
d. Workstation Application Editors. Each PC workstation shall support
editing of all system applications. Provide editors for each application at
the PC workstation. The applications shall be downloaded and
executed at one or more controller panels.
9.
Controller Software
A. Each intelligent field panel shall be completely user programmable, and include the
following programs installed in the base operating system. Editing of applications
shall be possible from the operator workstation, portable operators terminal or
keypad on the controller if present.
B. Alarms: The alarm program shall provide for alarm reporting in eight (8) distinct
categories and alarms shall be processed in order of importance. Classification by
category shall permit alarms of a specific class to be reported to different locations
and cause different system actions.
a. Critical
b. Fire
c. Security
d. Maintenance
e. Safety
f. Performance
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-47/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
g. Equipment
h. System Advisors
i. The total number of alarms in each category shall be displayed at the field
panel and accessible to operators at any other field panel. Alarms shall be
sorted as unacknowledged or acknowledged in the order of occurrence. The
time of occurrence and cause shall be displayed at the local panel and be able
to be accessed by any other panel on the network.
C. Analog Input Scaling: Analog inputs shall be scaled and labeled to read out in
engineering units of the variable being measured, DEG., CFM, etc.
D. Math Functions: Each panel shall allow the user to program math equations
utilizing as a minimum the following functions: average, sum, difference, highest,
lowest, Nth lowest, product, ratio, and square root. Math equations shall be
processed each system cycle but shall also be programmable to occur only when
specific equipment is operating.
E. Logic Functions: Each panel shall allow the user to program logical equations
utilizing as a minimum the following functions: IF, ELSE, OR, AND, GREATER
THAN, LESSER THAN, EQUALS
F. Meter Monitoring: Each panel shall have resident programs to totalize pulse inputs
received during a preset interval of time. Each metered value shall have a scaling
algorithm: Input value = counts/scale with a unit of measure description.
G. Binary Input Monitoring: The system shall be capable of monitoring and displaying
the status of all binary inputs. The system shall permit manual override of each
input, either open, closed or automatic through the software program.
H. Analog Outputs: Each analog output shall be user programmable to be direct or
reverse acting and vary the output between 2 and 10 VDC. The panel shall allow
the user to program minimum and maximum output levels as well as a manual
fixed output level. The analog output shall be assignable to operate based on any
physical input or calculated value on the network.
I.
System Calendar: Each panel other than Application Specific Controllers (such as
Terminal Controllers) shall have a 365/366 day battery-backed clock with the
following software. Automatic daylight savings time switch over on the day entered.
Minimum of 14 holidays of programmable duration shall be programmable up to a
year in advance. Three “special days” of programmable duration that can be
utilized as holidays or overrides for holidays. System shall be programmable so
that any selected point can respond to holidays and/or special days independently.
J. Analog Alarms: The alarm program shall be programmable for each analog value
and have the following capability:
a. Have programmable differential or amount that the analog value must change
before the alarm can be reset.
b. A programmable delay period that, during normal operating modes must expire
once the alarm limits are exceeded before the alarm will be announced. It shall
be possible to automatically enable or disable the alarm based on a schedule
or event such as a particular piece of HVAC equipment running. The program
shall have a separate programmable delay after the alarm has been enabled
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-48/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
based on an event such as fan start or early morning warm up. This shall be
separate from the normal operating mode delay described above.
c. The program shall have the ability to report any alarm to up to 3 different
destinations on the network.
K. Lead/Lag Program: Each panel shall contain a lead/lag program to provide duty
changeover of two switched outputs. The program shall provide for change over
between lead and lag units based on run time, day of the week and time of day, or
a combination of these factors. An alarm shall be initiated and the backup unit
started if the primary unit fails to start.
L.
PID Control: To provide precise control, each analog output shall be
programmable with a proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) program.
Individual constants shall be programmable for the P, I and D functions. The
integral time interval shall be user programmable. The current proportional term,
the integral term and the PID sum shall be dynamically displayed on the screen to
provide assistance to start-up and service personnel in “tuning” the system.
M. Custom Reports: The software shall allow development of custom reports,
accessible through low level pass codes that permit the operator to access limited
data and set points in an orderly fashion without requiring program knowledge.
These reports shall be available from the keypad/LCD display without the use of a
terminal or service tool.
N. Diagnostics: The diagnostics program in each panel shall monitor and report
system status as follows:
a. The system shall record and display the date and time of the last power failure
and last power-up.
b. An alarm shall be generated if the self-diagnostics program detects corruption
of the system memory.
c. An alarm shall be generated any time battery life registers less than three (3)
months.
d. Individual status alarms shall be generated on printer or modem failure, or if the
input/output card is not returning proper data indicating probable hardware
failure.
O. Look-up Tables for Non Linear Sensors: Each panel shall have a program to allow
the user to configure look-up tables to allow accurate read out from non-linear
sensors. This shall not be limited to specific sensor types such as thermistors, but
be totally programmable. The look-up table program shall be “intelligent” and
interpolate between individual points in the table.
10. Run Time Logs
A. Each panel shall have a minimum of 16 equipment run time
following capabilities:
logs with the
1. The program shall allow the user to program an alarm limit that will initiate an
alarm when the run time exceeds the limit.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-49/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
B. The run time alarm shall be assignable to any of the eight (8) alarm classifications
as noted above.
a. The run time counter shall be programmable to run whenever the equipment is
on (or off) or under a combination of specified conditions (Such as fan run time
in the unoccupied mode).
C. Analog Trend Logs: Each panel shall have a minimum of eight trend log programs,
each with the following capabilities:
a. The trend logs shall be assignable to either measured value, computed value,
analog output or metered value.
b. The sampling interval for each trend log shall be programmable, and it shall be
able to enable or disable the sampling based on a schedule or event.
c. Disabling the trend logs shall not destroy data stored in the sampling table.
d. Trend logs shall be able to store 48 samples in each table and then replace the
oldest reading with the newest reading.
e. The program shall allow automatic printing of the table each 48 readings.
D. Change of State Trend Logs: In addition to optimal start/stop trend logs, each panel
shall have a minimum of eight change of state logging programs each with the
following capabilities:
a. Each change of state log shall record the time, date and present state of the
monitored point.
b. Each point shall have a programmable delay time, requiring the point to be in
the changed state for the programmed period before the change of state is
recorded. Zero delay shall be an acceptable delay period.
c. Up to 24 changes of state shall be stored in each log and then the oldest
change of state shall be replaced with the newest.
d. The program shall allow automatic printing of the log each 24 entries.
E. Utility Performance: Control panel software shall incorporate a utility performance
program. This program shall calculate the average outside air temperature for a
24-hour period for degree-day purposes and use this with utility usage to calculate
performance by comparing the result to target values.
a. Three performance values shall be calculated: Previous Day, Previous Week
and a Programmable Period
b. The program shall use 60°F (15°C) as the Degree Day Value.
F. Analog Tantalization: Each panel shall have a minimum of eight (8) analog
tantalization programs that can be used to totalize flows and similar variables.
a. The system shall be programmable such that totals can be displayed in the
units being measured such as gallons, liters, or cubic feet, or optionally
multiplied by the cost per unit and displayed in monetary units such as dollars.
b. The totalization shall be programmable to automatically print the consumption
on a daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly or yearly basis.
F. Printer Control: Each panel shall have an RS-232 port to connect a local printer
and a software program to direct reports and alarms to the local printer or any other
printer on the network. Data and reports shall be programmed to print at specific
time or intervals as described in the sequence of operation.
G. Data Transfer: The control panel software shall allow the operator to select specific
analog and digital data from the controlling panel and transfer that data to any other
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-50/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
panel on the network. The data transfer shall be processed each time the analog
value to be transferred varies by a programmable differential, (Example, outdoor air
temperature changes 0.5°F) and each time the digital value to be transferred
changes state. A programmable time delay shall be provided for value changes or
change of state before data is transferred assuring the data is significant and not
transient. If, after a data transfer, a confirmation of successful transfer does not
occur within a programmable interval, an alarm shall be processed. The class of
alarm to be processed on failure to complete a data transfer shall be selectable for
each point selected for data transfer.
I.
Load Sequencing: Each control panel shall have a load-sequencing program
resident in software. The program shall automatically switch up to 8 loads in a
series of fixed sequences based on a measured input or fault condition. Time delay
between steps while sequencing up and sequencing down shall be individually
programmable as well as the differential between a step up and a step down
command. A rotating load sequencing program (first on, first off) shall also be
available.
J. Time Programs: Each panel shall as a minimum, have the equivalent of eight time
clocks for scheduling equipment on a daily, weekly, holiday, special day and after
hours override basis.
a. Eight start and eight stop times shall be programmable for each group of
points on a daily basis, and if required by the sequence of operation it shall be
possible to link multiple time clocks through software to obtain additional starts
and stops each day.
b. An after hours override function shall permit selected points to be switched
from the unoccupied mode to the occupied mode for a programmable period of
time based on a binary input or software switched event.
K. Demand Limiting: Each Panel shall have a demand-limiting program suitable for
use with analog or pulse inputs and have both sliding window and fixed limit
demand limiting control algorithms in software.
a. The program shall allow selection of up to 32 different loads located anywhere
on the network to be switched based on power consumption
b. Loads shall be grouped in 4 priority levels
c. Loads shall be programmed with the energy consumption of each load and the
program shall switch loads based on both priority and the amount of load to be
shed or restored
d. Both minimum and maximum on and off times shall be programmable for
switched loads.
e. Systems with demand limiting programs that do not compare the power
consumption of each load and the priority level when making shed/restore
decisions will not be accepted.
L. Digital (Binary) and Three-Point Floating Control: Digital outputs shall be
programmable to operate as a contact closure based on a time schedule, an on/off
control mode based on any sensed input, or in a pulse mode on dual outputs
programmed as 3-point floating control for use with reversible actuators.
a. The program shall allow inputs for actuator timing so that, based on pulse
times, the system shall display current actuator position as a percent of full
travel.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-51/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
b. The system shall allow, through software, override of each binary output to
either the closed or open state.
11.
Central Plant Sequence of Operation
The chilled water plant housing- Water-cooled chiller(s), primary CHW pump(s), and
variable volume secondary CHW systems so the sequence of operation will be as
following:
A. The chilled water system shall utilize a stand-alone DDC controller dedicated only
for the control of its respective system. The chiller(s) shall be furnished with a
factory controls package. The DDC controller shall be located in a NEMA 1 hinged
door enclosure near the chilled water system equipment.
B. The chiller(s) shall be started and stopped by the DDC system based upon a time
schedule, optimized start, and/or via operator command. Whenever the outside air
temperature is above 45ºF adjustable, the primary chilled water and condenser
water pumps shall start and the lead chiller‟s 2-way, 2-position isolation valve shall
open.
C. In the event that the primary chilled water or condenser water pumps fail to start
after 5 minutes, the DDC system shall disable the lead pump and start the standby
pump. When a pump fails, a pump failure alarm shall be displayed at the HMI.
D. After proof of flow through the evaporator and condenser has been established, the
DDC system shall enable the chiller(s). Differential pressure switches used for
proof of flow indication shall be provided by the chiller manufacturer and mounted
by the mechanical contractor.
E. The DDC system shall reset the chilled water supply set point. The normal chilled
water supply set point shall be 41°F adjustable and shall be reset by average
space temperature and outside air temperature. Primary consideration shall be
average space temperature, and secondary consideration shall be outside air
temperature. In addition to chilled water reset, the DDC system shall sequence the
loading and unloading of the chiller with respect to demand limiting.
F. For variable volume secondary CHW systems, the DDC system shall monitor the
chilled water return temperature upstream and downstream of the chilled water
bypass line. If either sensor senses a return water temperature of 58ºF adjustable
for a continuous time of 5-minutes adjustable the DDC system shall start the lag
chiller. In addition, if the flow meter in the bypass line indicates a reverse flow
(more secondary loop flow than primary loop flow) the lag chiller shall be started.
Anytime more than one chiller is in operation, each chiller shall be loaded equally.
G. For CHW systems with three or more chillers, if the CHW return temperature
continues to rise with two chillers on line, the additional chiller(s) shall be enabled
based on the above sequence
H. The CPM shall calculate the total facility cooling load in TONS using the following
formula: Cooling Load (in TONS) = {Secondary CHW Loop Flow (in GPM) X Delta
T (in °F)} / 24.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-52/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
I. If this calculation, when compared to the actual chiller rating (in TONS), indicates that
a lag chiller should not have been started based on the enabled chillers‟ rated
capacity, then an alarm message shall be display at the HMI.
J. If the chilled water return temperature drops below 52ºF adjustable and the
calculated cooling load is no more than 85% of the remaining capacity of the
machines operating after the chiller is shutdown, or if the chilled water return
temperature drops to 46°F adjustable for a continuous period of ten minutes, then
the chiller will be shutdown in reverse order.
K. The DDC system shall monitor the chiller(s) runtime through status contacts located
in the factory chiller control panels. Chiller lead/lag shall be selectable from the
HMI operator workstation. To equalize chiller runtimes, the DDC system shall
automatically swap the lead and lag chillers after the selected lead chiller has
operated for an owner-defined period of time.
L. The DDC system shall monitor each chiller‟s alarm contact furnished with the factory
provided controls package. When a chiller is in alarm, a chiller alarm shall be
displayed at the HMI.
M. The DDC system shall monitor each pump‟s runtime. When a pump has operated
for an owner defined time period, the HMI shall notify maintenance personnel that
service/inspection is required.
NOTE:
1. Input and output data schedule shall be as per shown in related drawings.
 EQUIPMENTS OVERVIEW and PROPOSED SEQUENCE OPERATION
The contractor shall provide full and detailed data sheet including all necessary
information about all chilled water plant equipment, sequence of operation and
how to group together to give best performance.
The following overview will be considered as only a guide for sequence operation
system.
GENERAL
The chilled water generation system on the above-mentioned project comprises of
following equipments:
a. Water Cooled Chillers
# 4 nos. (CH-01 to CH-04)
b. Chilled Water Primary Pumps
# 4nos. (PCHWP-01 to PCHWP-04)
c. Cooling Towers
# 4 nos. (CT-01 to CT-04)
d. Condenser /Cooling Towers PUMP # 4 nos. (CTP-01 to CTP-04)
e. Secondary Water Pumps
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
# 5 nos. (SCHWP-01 to SCHWP-05)
S-11-53/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
For the Chiller Sequence purpose, the equipment‟s are grouped together and
consider as one set, which is mentioned below:
SET REFERENCE
Set Ref.-1
Set Ref.-2
Set Ref.-3
Set Ref.-4
EQUIPMENT’S CONNECTED
CH-01/CHWP-01/CTP-01/CTP01 /SCHWP-01
CH-02/CHWP-02/CTP-02/CTP02/SCHWP-02
CH-03/CHWP-03/CTP-03/CTP-03/SCHWP-03
CH-04/CHWP-04/CTP-04/CTP04/SCHWP-04
1. Chillers
The proposed four chillers contains its own Inbuilt Microprocessor board to take
control of internal chiller operations and also ability to provide the data through the
microboard.
The dedicated ISN interface ( micro-gateways ) will be provided to each chiller to
collect the chiller data and to transfer the same to the BAS via software. These
gateways will be networked together to communicate with Human Machine Interface
(HMI) Workstation called „Facility Manager‟ on an ISN Network and also provides
parallel interface to the BMS via a BACnet protocol for monitoring only. The controls
for the complete chilled water system excluding tertiary pumps will be controlled and
monitored via Chiller Management System.
2. Facility Manager
The Facility manager (FM) software shall be provided with graphical screens for
individual DDC controllers and the screens can be scrolled in single click. The access
to the FM workstation shall be distribute to the different operators with the different
level passwords.
The individual chillers, Pumps and cooling towers shall be having individual graphical
screens and each screen will contain a button to scroll front and back & to go back to
the main screen.
The Status of the equipments shall be indicated with the different colors and the
alarms shall be pop up on the screen for operator acknowledgement. A separate
user log will store the acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms with respect to the
user (operator) names. The alarm output (NO contact) will be generated from the
respective controller if the software generated alarm not accepted for more than five
minutes [adj].
The trending of parameters can be done for the selected parameters. The scheduling
for the equipment also can be done using the calendar options. All the parameters
will be displayed with respect to the engineering units.
The facility Manager workstation will be connected to the modem for remote
monitoring purpose.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-54/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
3. Chilled Water System Layout
The chilled water-piping layout consist of primary chilled water supply header, return
header and a de-coupler line connecting the Supply and Return line.
The contractor shall provide and submit full detailed drawings showing the
temperature sensors as per related drawings and any sensors that require to give the
best performance.
In addition to the above there will be three Flow-meters which will measure the flow
(in GPM) in the chilled water system, which are as follows:
a. Chilled water supply header flow, before the de-coupler (CHW-F1)
b. Chilled water return header flow, before the de-coupler (CHW-F2)
c. Chilled water De-coupler flow (CHW-F3)
4. Chiller Set Start/Stop Sequence
There are two modes to operate the chillers.
1. Manual Mode
2. Automatic Mode
In Manual mode, the operator can interrupt the chiller sequencing and the sequence
will be made as per the operator decision.
In Automatic mode, the software will decide the chiller sequencing.
5. Start Signal to any Chiller will be executed in the following steps:
a. The software selected chiller enable signal will be initiated from the facility
manager after confirming the ambient temperature set point.
b. Upon Chiller enable command received by the chiller control panel, chillers
Condenser and Chilled water Isolation valve will be opened via condenser
and chilled water pump run contacts on the chiller micro panel.
c. On determination of the Condenser and Chilled water valves for fully opened
condition from the valve limit switches, the cooling tower will be selected as
per the cooling tower sequence.
d. The cooling towers Isolation valves will be opened.
e. On determination of the Cooling tower valves for fully opened condition from
the valve limit switches, the associated chillers condenser & chilled water
pumps will be enable.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-55/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
f.
The Chilled water and condenser water run status will be interlocked with the
load current of the respective pumps so that the software will always check
the false condition for run status with respect to the load condition via current
relay contacts and generates the alarm if the condition exists.
g. The software selected Cooling tower fan will be started and operation will be
verified by comparing the run status and the load condition (via current relay
contact).
h. Upon proof of the all the pumps and cooling tower valve‟s travel switches for
open condition, the chiller will follow the internal start sequencing.
6. Stop signal to any chiller will be executed in the following steps:
In case of Stop command or Fault condition for a particular chiller set, the sequence
will take place:
a. The condenser water pump related to that set would be stopped.
b. The primary chilled water pump related to that set would be stopped.
c. The cooling tower linked with that set would be switched OFF.
d. The selected Chiller Condenser & Chilled water Isolation valves will be
closed.
e. The cooling towers Isolation valves will be closed.
7. CHILLER SEQUENCE OPERATION
The chillers will be sequenced on weekly basis so as to have equal wear & tear. The
following will be the lead / lag sequencing:
The 6 chillers have been arranged in the following four sequence.
SEQ I
1-2-3-4
SEQ II
2-3-4-1
SEQ III
3-4-1-2
SEQ IV
4-1-2-3
LEAD
LAG1
LAG2
LAG 3
WEEK 1
Chiller 1
Chiller 2
Chiller 3
Chiller 4
WEEK 2
Chiller 2
Chiller 3
Chiller 4
Chiller 3
Chiller 4
Chiller 1
Chiller 4
Chiller 1
Chiller 2
Chiller 1
Chiller 2
Chiller 3
WEEK 3
WEEK 4
The first chiller of any sequence set shall be called as Lead chiller, the second, third
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-56/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
and fourth chiller of that particular set will be called as Lag 1, Lag 2, Lag 3 chiller
respectively.
In any sequence set Lead chiller will always be running irrespective of demand.
Also the operator shall assigning the lead / lag of chiller in manual mode so that the
sequencing will change accordingly to the pumps and cooling towers.
8. Cycling of Chiller Sequence Set
The chiller sequence set will change on weekly basis
9. Operation of the Chiller Within a Particular Sequence Set
9.1 “ON” Sequence
Each chiller has a capacity of 3780 KW.
The Lead chiller always remains ON.
The controller will initiate the starting of the next chiller i.e. Lag 1 chiller when the
building load is equal to 25% of maximum building load or if Lead chiller running
continuously at 90% load for 20 minutes from the start up – whichever condition
comes first.
The controller will initiate the starting of the next chiller i.e. Lag 2 chiller when the
building load is equal to 50% of maximum building load or if lag –1 chiller running
continuously at 90% load for 20 minutes from the start up – whichever condition
comes first.
The controller will initiate the starting of the next chiller i.e. Lag 3 chiller when the
building load is equal to 75% of building load or if lag –2 chiller running continuously
at 90% load for 20 minutes from the start up – whichever condition comes first.
The starting of any Lag chiller will be initiated by the controller only when the demand
condition stays for certain defined time (say 15 minutes – time can be adjusted
during commissioning/initial operation feedback)
9.2 “OFF” Sequence
The stopping of Lag 3 chiller will done by the controller when the building load drops
equal to 75% of maximum building load or if the chiller running continuously at 35%
load for 20 minutes – whichever condition comes first.
The stopping of Lag 2 chiller will done by the controller when the building load drops
equal to 50% of maximum building load or if the chiller running continuously at 35%
load for 20 minutes – whichever condition comes first.
The stopping of Lag 1 chiller will done by the controller when the building load drops
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-57/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
equal to 25% of maximum building load or if the chiller running continuously at 35%
load for 20 minutes – whichever condition comes first.
10. Cooling Towers
Sequence of Operation (Cooling Towers)
1. When chiller is enabled the associated cooling tower isolation valve shall be
automatically commanded from DDC to open fully. Upon proof of the tower
isolation valve and condenser water isolation valve for fully open, the
associated tower cell condenser water pump shall start and operate
continuously.
2. Upon proof of condenser water pump operation, the tower fan control shall
be enabled. The Common condenser water supply temperature (to the
chillers) shall be maintained at the calculated condenser water set point. The
condenser water set point will be calculated by using the outdoor air wet bulb
temperature minus the adjustable approach temperature.
3. If the condenser water temperature cannot be maintained with the operating
tower cell fan operating at maximum, then an additional cell shall be allowed
to flow. The lag cell associated condenser water pump shall operate only if an
additional chiller is enabled.
4. An operating tower cell shall be disabled from the assigned chiller's
condenser water isolation valve end switch. When the chiller closes it's
condenser water isolation valve (located at the chiller), software interlock shall
disable the tower cell fan and pump then shall close the tower isolation valve
fully.
11. Secondary Pumps Control
On this project, there are total 4Nos. Secondary pumps with Variable Speed drive
(supply by others).
The secondary pumps will be interlocked between the run status and issued
command status. The secondary pumps will generate alarm after 15 seconds time
delay, if the pumps are not operating DDC software shall enable the next secondary
pump, which is at less run hours.
When one or more secondary pumps are in operation, while enabling the next
secondary pump, all the other pumps will ramp down to minimum speed and then will
ramp up eventually up to the required speed.
12. Control Sequence of Operation
A pressure sensor shall be installed on the down-stream of the each pipe riser. The
Direct Digital Controller (hereafter called as DDC), will monitor the pressure sensor
with the designed pressure set point (user adjustable) and based on the difference, it
will modulate the speed of all the secondary pumps.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-58/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
The alarms will be generated for the following cases:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Any of the pump trips.
Low water suction pressure
High discharge water pressure
High / Low differential pressure.
13. Flow and Temperature Monitoring and De-coupler Control
The chilled water-piping layout consists of a chilled water supply & return header and
a de-coupler line, connecting the Supply and Return chilled water line. The York DDC
will monitor Flows via a Flow Meter and header Temperatures, installed at the chilled
water header pipe work, which are as follows:
Flow Monitoring
1. Chilled water Supply header flow (FLW-1), before the de-coupler.
2. Chilled water Return header flow (FLW-2), before the de-coupler.
3. De-coupler flow – BI Directional (FLW-3).
Temperature Monitoring
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Chilled water Supply header Temperature i.e (T-1), before the de-coupler.
Chilled water Supply header Temperature i.e (T-2), after the de-coupler.
Chilled water Return header Temperature i.e (T-3), before the de-coupler.
Chilled water Return header Temperature i.e (T-4), after the de-coupler.
De-coupler Temperature (T-5).
14. Control Logic
14.1. When Load Demand
When there is a load demand in the building, the differential pressure across the
secondary loop will become less so that the speed of the secondary pumps will
be commanded by the controller to ramp up to attain the differential pressure
setpoint. In this condition, the secondary pump flow rate will become higher than
the primary side flow rate (i.e. T1<T2 & T3 = T4 ). So that the flow towards
secondary to primary will be taken place in the decoupler which will be sensed by
the flow meter (FLW –3) and shall allow the chiller to load further based on the
KW calculated.
14.2. When No Load Demand
When there is no load demand in the building, the differential pressure across the
secondary loop will become high so that the speed of the secondary pumps will
be commanded by the controller to ramp down to attain the differential pressure
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-59/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 11
set point. In this condition, the primary side flow rate will become higher than the
secondary pump flow rate (i.e. T1=T2 & T3 > T4 ). So that the flow towards
primary to secondary will be taken place in the decoupler which will be sensed by
the flow meter (FLW – 3) and shall allow the chiller to unload further based on the
KW calculated.
14.3. When Saturated Load
In ideal condition, when the load in the building saturated i.e. the load and the
chiller capacity are become equal, then there will be no flow (FLW –3) through
the de-coupler line. And there will be no change in the chiller load operation.
In this case the Temperature T1 = T2 & T3 = T4.
15. Chiller Temperature Reset COntrol
The individual chillers are operating with the control set point of leaving water
temperature set in the chiller micro processor panel can also be override through the
Facility Manager. The individual chiller leaving set point can set up to 40 deg F down
and the chiller shall trip at 38 deg F on low water temperature.
Two or more chillers will not be allowed to operate in parallel at minimum load (part
load) i.e. at 30 % load (Adjustable). In this condition, the controller will select one or
more chillers to operate continuously at maximum load to obtain the maximum
energy efficiency and also to avoid the frequent start / stop of the chillers.
16. Emergency Power Failure Mode
The DDC will monitor the „Emergency Operation‟ input from the Emergency
Management system in the form of volt free contact as a Binary/Digital Input and
based on that input, it will perform the following operation:
1. The Chiller Management system will switched off all the chillers and related
equipment.
2. Issue „Enable‟ command to the Chiller and all it‟s related pumps and cooling
towers and also check all the necessary devices like Valves status and pump
status.
AEB-872-10-REV. 0
S-11-60/60
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
SECTION – 19
PLUMBING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
SL NO.
TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
19.1.00
PLUMBING GENERAL
19.1.01
Site
19.1.02
Site Conditions
19.1.03
Definitions
19.1.04
Scope of Works
19.1.05
Compliance with Specifications and Regulation
19.1.06
Programme
19.1.07
Contract Drawings
19.1.08
Working Drawings
19.1.09
Co-ordination of Drawings
19.1.10
Material Submittals
19.1.11
Materials Inspection
19.1.12
Alternative Materials
19.1.13
Setting out of Works
19.1.14
Safety
19.1.15
Contractor‟s License
19.1.16
Service Connection and Permits
19.1.17
Damage to Plant and Materials
19.1.18
Protective Finishes
19.1.19
Works Test and Inspection
19.1.20
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
19.1.21
As Built Drawings
19.1.22
Period of Maintenance
19.1.23
Labels and Identification of Pipes
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-1/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.2.00
PLUMBING MATERIALS
19.2.01
General
19.2.02
Installation, Storage and Protection
19.2.03
Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers
19.2.04
Pipe Sleeves
19.2.05
Valves and Stop Cocks
19.2.06
Strainers, Automatic Air Vents and Drain Cocks
19.2.07
Float Ball Valves
19.2.08
Trench Excavation
19.2.09
Pipework Insulation
19.2.10
Water Filters
19.2.11
Sterilization of Water Services
19.2.12
Incoming Water Supply and Meter
19.2.13
Testing and Commissioning
19.2.14
Pre Commissioning Works
19.2.15
Labels and Indentification
19.2.16
Hot Water Services Heaters
19.2.17
Water Storage Tanks
19.2.18
Pump Sets
19.2.19
Pressure Reducing Valve
19.2.20
Swimming Pool
19.2.21
LPG System
19.2.22
Heat Exchanger
19.2.23
Schedule of Approved Manufacturers
19.3.00
IRRIGATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-2/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.1.01
SITE
The Pearl-Qatar
19.1.02
SITE CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all the Plumbing Materials & Equipments shall be
capable of withstanding the following site conditions:
1. Maximum Ambient
Temperature
:
50 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in summer
& 8 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in winter
2. Altitude
:
Sea Level
3. Maximum Relative Humidity :
95 %
4. Maximum Wind Velocity
:
140 Kms. per Hour
5. Prevailing Wind
:
North and NorthWesterly
6. Storms
:
Dusty Sporadic and Irregular
7. Annual Rainfall
:
50mm between January & April
19.1.03
DEFINITIONS
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:
Site
:
The Locations where the works are to be carried out.
QCS
:
Qatar Construction Specifications
BS
:
British Standard Specifications
CP
:
British Standard Code of Practice
Tender Drawing
:
The Drawing on which the tender is based and the
schedules therein.
Working Drawings
:
The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the
purpose of execution of work at site.
As Built Drawings
:
This is the true record of the actual work carried out
at site.
Works
:
To include the provisions for all the materials and works
to be carried out by the contractor as per these
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-3/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
specifications and for the satisfactory completion of the
installation.
Approved
:
Shall mean APPROVED by the Consultant in writing.
Submitted
:
Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant in writing.
Accepted
:
Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant in writing.
Provide
:
Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission.
Install
:
Shall mean install, test and commission.
Furnish
:
Shall mean supply only.
Concealed
:
Shall mean hidden from normal sight in the shafts,
ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions.
Exposed
:
Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces,
which may be reached without the use ladders or
any other temporary means of access.
19.1.04
SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works under this contract includes the supply, installation testing and
commissioning of the Plumbing materials, fixtures and equipment as per
specifications drafted in these sections and drawings. The contractor shall provide
complete installation of the project and other associated works such as supporting
structures, ancillary works etc. Brief descriptions of plumbing works are as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
19.1.05
Hot Water & Potable water storage and distribution.
Swimming Pool
External services works
LPG System
COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS
The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition. The
contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and unskilled labours under the
supervision of competent Engineers to complete the works in accordance with the
programme.
The installation of the works covered in this section shall be in accordance with this
specification and with the requirements of the relevant authorities in the state of
Qatar Q.G.E.W.C (Water Division) and fire department and to the relevant B.S
specification.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-4/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
i.
SECTION 19
The equipment shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes of
practice (current editions including all amendments) and QCS.
ii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipment other than
the specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approval
from the consultant shall be obtained. However the consultant reserves the right
for such approval/s.
iii. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings
but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or
work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready
for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or
carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.
iv. Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any such cases
at the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the
construction, the consultant‟s decision shall be final and binding on all such
matters.
v. In case of any ambiguity or discrepancy in the project specification, the
government published specifications (QCS) shall be adapted.
vi. It is contractor‟s responsibility to study the specification in detail and raise and
clear all doubts or issues that need clarification in order to execute the job.The
tender drawings are a guide line and the contractor must prepare a detailed
drawing, which after Engineers approval shall be issued for construction. All
enquiries shall be raised through a RFI only (Request for information). No delay
or any compromise on the specification or quality of work is accepted on any
account.
19.1.06
PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method
or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to
complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the
Program:
1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Accessories
9. Testing
10. Commissioning and Handing Over
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-5/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.1.07
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The Plumbing tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the
Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have
been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general
arrangement required for the project.
These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractor‟s
responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative
and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy
shall be brought to the attention of the consultant, in writing at the time of tender.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of draw offs, valves, and other
accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances.
The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the
local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders‟ work associated with
these drawings.
19.1.08
WORKING DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:100 for plans, 1:10
for details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultant‟s approval.
The contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:
i.
Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and
other accessories and fittings.
ii. Typical connection details of the various Plumbing requirements of
appliances, like Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc.,
iii. Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect to
the other services Installations like, Electrical, Air-conditioning & Ventilation
and Drainage.
iv. Levels, Center Lines of the pipework installations and the details of supports.
19.1.09
CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS
The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical,
and Drainage systems.
The Main contractor shall ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.
19.1.10
MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-6/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for the necessary
review and approval.
If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted in
the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.
In case of items involving aesthetic, sink taps, Showers, Draw offs etc., samples
must be submitted for approval along with the materials submittals.
Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the
equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either
Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.
The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the
Materials submittals of the Plumbing Materials & Equipments in the following
proforma to the consultant:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Submittal Number
Type of Material
Manufacturer / Local Agent
Date of Approval
Date of Order / Order Number
Mode of Delivery (Air, Land or Sea)
ETA on Site
Status as on date of Report
a. Equipment Supply
All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. Above).
In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,
then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from
the consultant specifically.
b. Equipment Size and Delivery
Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations
in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction
program and the method of access.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-7/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
c. Design References
Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires
amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturer‟s range of production or availability etc., The contractor
shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the
Consultant. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the
Consultant‟s advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.
In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed
to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.
19.1.11
MATERIALS INSPECTION
The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used at
site which is not approved earlier specifically shall stand rejected without notice.
Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or
the sample submitted will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall
make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Consultant. Any
time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractor‟s account.
The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and
debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.
Materials Storage
The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials
at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on
completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes
undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be strictly as
per QCS section 1-11, 1-12 & 1-13.
19.1.12
ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturer‟s. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the
equipment or material for the Consultant‟s consideration. Only in case if the specified
item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the alternatives will
be considered by the Consultant, before the tender is accepted and the Consultant‟s
decision will be final regarding the matter.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-8/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed
in writing by the Consultant. During the execution of the contract, no alternative
equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the
contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the
specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not
permit, then such replacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, but nevertheless
at the Contractor‟s expenses etc.
19.1.13
SETTING OUT OF WORKS
The locations of Sink taps, showers, draw offs and their piping routes, etc., as
indicated on the tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit
the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the
detailed working drawings as indicated on the detailed architectural drawings and coordinated with furnishing and other services.
19.1.14
SAFETY
The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect manpower
and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the
Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipment at
any point of time.
19.1.15
CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE
The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage
works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.
The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Mechanical Engineer, Foreman, and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the
project and obtain approval from the consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the
contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary,
re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for
a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such
cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local
experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience will be rejected by
the consultant.
19.1.16
SERVICE CONNECTION & PERMITS
The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of
7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for
obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for
any connected works to others.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-9/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
All statutory permits from Fire, Water, and Sewerage Department are secured by the
Consultant. The plumbing contractor shall however coordinate all inspection works
and liaise with the State departments regarding all pipework and payment of fees,
etc., when connecting city water mains connections to the mains. The contractor is
required to produce certificates of approval of all materials and equipment by the
relevant authorities when requested by the Consultant
The plumbing contractor shall coordinate connection works of water/sewer and fire to
the city mains with relevant local authorities of works.
19.1.17
DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS
Any plant or material that is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used in
the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the
plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the
attention of the Consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the
necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from
the Consultant, shall any remedial work be carried out.
Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a “as-new” condition following
such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of
the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.
19.1.18
PROTECTIVE FINISHES
The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in
this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local
climatic conditions. All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his
representative before shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the
specifications.
19.1.19
WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION
Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Consultant or Consultant‟s
representative to witness hydraulic tests as specified elsewhere, of major pipe work
executed by the contractor.
The Consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the
contract the list of works that are to be inspected and the contractor shall give the
Consultant the required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which
the plant or work will be ready for testing.
The Consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test certificates
in original to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-10/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.1.20
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Step by step operating procedures.
Preventive maintenance schedule.
Technical literature.
Spare parts list
Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. Telephone no., and contact
person. - Local as well as overseas.
f. Work test certificates, if any.
g. Routine Test results carried out at site.
The O&M Manual shall contain fully filled up and stamped Warranty certificate for
every component/equipment, with commencement date from date of handing over
and date of warranty expiry.
19.1.21
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Consultant. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings, which are to
be submitted to the Consultant within one month of completion of the project.
Two sets of process negatives & CD‟s along with three sets of drawings shall be
submitted after approval of the Consultant for onward submission to the client.
19.1.22
PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire Plumbing System installed against Faulty /
improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days
(Four Hundred) from the date of the final handing over, and the installation is tested,
commissioned and accepted by the Consultant. Also where longer guarantee or
warranty periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or materials such longer
terms shall apply.
The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states
that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the
period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of
notification at no additional cost to the contract.
In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within
the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault
but nevertheless at the Contractor‟s expense.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-11/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
19.1.23
SECTION 19
LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION OF PIPES
IDENTIFICATION
A. Valves
1. Valve identification to comply with MSSSP-25.
2. Attach a 50mm round brass tag stamped with designating numbers 25mm high
filled in with black enamel to each valve, except those on fixtures.
3. Securely fasten valve tag to valve spindle or handle with a brass chain.
B. Motor Control Identification
1. Mount black lamacoid nameplates on each motor controller identifying primary
control function and individual position indication such as Pump No. 1, etc.
Nameplates to be cut through to white background and have beveled edges.
Mounted with chromium plated acorn head screws
C. Schedule and Charts
1. Furnish to the Architect three (3) complete framed plastic laminated valve tag
schedules. Schedule to indicate tag number, valve location by floor and nearest
column number, valve size and service controlled.
D. Piping Identification and Coding
1. Apply color coded Polyvinyl Chloride pipe bands identifying pipe contents and
direction of flow.
2. On exposed piping, apply bands on 10 meters centers of straight runs, at valve
locations, at point where piping enters and leaves a partition, wall, floor or ceiling.
3. On concealed piping installed above removable ceiling construction, apply bands
in manner described for exposed piping.
4. On concealed piping installed above non-removable ceiling construction, or in
pipe shafts, apply bands at valve or other devices that are made accessible by
means of access doors or panels.
5. Apply bands at exit and entrance points to each vessel, tank or piece of
equipment.
6. Band widths to be 200mm for pipes up to 300mm diameter. Letter heights stating
service to be preprinted on band, 20mm high for 200mm bands.
7. For insulated pipes, apply bands after insulation and painting work has been
completed.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-12/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
8. Colors to conform to ASA Standard A13.1. Provide 24 additional bands of each
type for future use by owner's personnel.
9. Follow manufacturer's instructions for application procedures using noncombustible materials and contact adhesives.
10. Pipe background color coding shall be as follows:
a. Fire standpipe - red
b. Sprinkler - green
c. Domestic Cold Water Piping - blue
d. Domestic Hot Water Piping - yellow
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-13/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
19.2.00
SECTION 19
MATERIALS
DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES
19.2.01
GENERAL PIPE WORKS AND FITTINGS
Hot and Cold water services within the building shall comply with British Standard
code of practice BS 6700: 1987 CP 342 : Part 2 : 1974.
All pipe work fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation
shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and
replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be
provided as appropriate for the diameter pipe work in order to allow valves and
equipment removal.
a) All pipe located at roof, shafts and risers – hot and cold water pipes shall be
Copper pipe to BS 2871 part 1-1971 Table “X”, fittings to BSEN 1254-3 : 1998.
All tubes and fittings shall be stamped with the British Standard kitemark and
copper alloy fittings shall carry a CR Mark.
All underground / buried – External hot and cold water pipes shall be PP-R
pipeDIN 8078. All underground hot water pipe shall be provided with high
density fiberglass pipe insulation complete with vapor proof varrier.
b) Polypropylene PP-R Pipes and Fittings
All hot and cold water pipes for internal works for each building shall be in
polypropylene plastic PP-R pipes to DIN 8078. Fittings shall be both welding
fittings and metal insert fittings. All metal inserts shall be in dezincification
resistant brass. Jointing between pipes and fittings shall be made by melting the
parts. Locations where pipe is to be connected to equipment, PP-R fittings with
metal insert shall be used.
Polypropylene valves shall be used where available with manufacturers in their
product range. All the components inside the valve in contract with water shall be
dezincification resistant brass. For those valves (type and sizes) which are not
available in the PP-R pipe manufacturer range, shall be made dezincification
resistant brass as described in clause below.
All components of polypropylene pipe systems shall be suitable for a working
0
pressure of 6 bars at 70 C for 50 years life expectancy. The whole polypropylene
piping installation including supports shall be carried out strictly in accordance
with manufacturer‟s recommendations. The contractor shall make allowance for
expansion in the pipework. The whole PP-R installation shall be guaranteed for a
period of 5 years.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-14/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.2.02 INSTALLATION, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and due allowance made for thermal movement.
All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be obtained from one manufacturer only,
who shall be nominated by the contractor in writing and approved by the Consultant
prior to ordering any materials. Materials from different manufacturers shall not be
incorporated into the system. All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be stored in
properly ventilated well-supported racked storage sheds.
All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly appearance arranged to
or at right-angles to the structural member of the building, giving maximum
headroom and not obstructing window or doorways. Pipes shall bend round piers,
projections and into recesses forming part of the structural works whether so
indicated on the drawings or not. Pipework shall be erected such that there is a
minimum of 50 mm clear below to the finished floor level and at least 25 mm clear to
the finished wall face.
The pipeworks, which are to be insulated, contractor shall allow space for each pipe
around its whole circumference. Adequate clearance shall be provided between
insulated pipework running together and adjacent to walls and floors. Clearances
between insulation and floor and insulation and wall shall be as for bare pipework.
No joints shall be formed in the thickness of walls, floor slabs or roof slabs. No
pipework shall be chased into floor slabs, roof slabs or walls. During the installation
period open ends of pipework shall be capped off using purpose-made plugs or
blank counterflanges. Pipework shall be kept free of dirt and other foreign debris at
all times.
All pipework fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation
shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and
replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be
provided as appropriate for the diameter pipework in order to allow valves and
equipment removal.
All pipework shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily.
All low points in the system shall have draincocks fitted and high points shall have air
bottles or automatic air vents.
19.2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS, BRACKETS AND HANGERS
All pipework shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free
movement due to expansion, contractions, vibration or other changes in the system.
Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes of direction.
Spacing of supports shall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS
5572: 1978. Vertical rising pipes particularly in shafts shall be adequately supported
at the base to withstand the total weight of the riser. Under no circumstances shall
branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical pipework.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-15/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
Pipework up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be supported clear of the
structure with cast brass brackets. Where exposed to view, bright finish brass
hospital brackets shall be used with rawl plugs and brass screws.
All multi runs of pipework within false ceilings or service shafts shall be supported on
purpose designed proprietary brackets suitable for carrying more than one pipe run,
and shall be secured using expanding plugs or other purpose designed fixing
devices. Softwood plugs shall not be allowed. All purpose designed proprietary
brackets shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval prior to ordering.
All G.I hangers and supporting brackets shall be painted with one coat of red oxide
and one coat of Galvanizing paint. The spacing of supports where not specified must
not exceed the spacing given in the following schedules. Where one-support carries
more than one pipe diameter the spacing shall be that specified for the smallest
diameter.
All supports and hangers for GI piping shall be ferrous. Supports for copper pipes
shall be non ferrous and chromium plated, wherever specified. Brackets or supports
shall be set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valves, flanges or other
fittings requiring maintenance.
All pipe work shall be supported by means of approved clips or hangers at centres
as detailed. In the event of two or more pipes being carried by a single support, the
spacing shall be of a shorter interval.
All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging. Unless
otherwise indicated, pipe hangers shall be spaced as follows.
a. 20 to 32mm Not over 2.4m apart b. 40 to 100mm Not over 3.0m apart c. Over 100mm Not over 3.6m apart -
10mm rods
15mm rods
22mm rods
Horizontal steel pipes on the roof shall be supported to prevent sagging or swinging.
The pipes supports spacing shall be as follows.
a.
b.
c.
d.
20 to 32mm 40 to 65 mm 80 to 100mm 125 to 250mm -
2.4m
3.0m
3.6m
4.5m
Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or
distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be
supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum
of dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are
removed.
All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc. necessary for fastening of hangers shall be
furnished by the Contractor. Alll hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to be
supported. Oversized hangers shall be permitted. Details of hangers and supports to
be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
fitting. All hangers shall be provided with locak-nuts and have provisio for vertical
adjustment of pipes.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-16/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trpeze type hangers of G.I
construction. Individual horizontal piping shall be supported by the hangers
consisting of malleable split rings with malleable iron sockets or steel clevis type
hangers or roller hangers where specified. Pipe standard with base flange and
adjustable type yokes shall be used for pipes supported form the floor. Vertical
piping shall have heavy wrought iron or steel clamps securely bolted on the pipimg
with the end extention bearings on the building construction.
Piping shall be achored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue
strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and
shall be heavy forged or welded construction of approved design.
Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have tongue and groove design rubber
support inserts of approved make or high density insulation capable of withstanding
the compression and allowing the hanger to support the pipe without any metal to
metal contact.
All internal pipe supports, hangers and achors etc. are to be painted with two coats
of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of
enamel paint of grey colour or as approved by the Engineer.
All external pipes supports including ground floor pump room and plant room at loft
area etc. shall be finally painted with two coats of enamel paint of grey colour or as
approved by the Engineer.
19.2.04 PIPE SLEEVES
Pipe sleeves shall be supplied where pipework passes through walls, floors, footings
and waterproofed membranes. Sleeves shall be built in the correct locations at the
time required by the main contractor. The inside diameter of all sleeves shall not be
less than 15 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through.
Where pipes pass through buried walls or footings, sleeves shall be 25 mm larger
than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through. The space between the pipe
sleeve shall be neatly packed using asbestos string or rope to prevent the passage
of noise, vermin or smoke. Sleeves shall not protrude beyond the finished surface.
Where pipework is exposed to view and passes through wall or floor, chromium
plated copper pipe flanges of the correct pipe diameter shall be fitted.
19.2.05 VALVES AND STOPCOCKS
All valves and stopcocks shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of
Electricity and Water, Water Department and shall be dezinctification resistant.
Valves shall be provided as shown on the drawings and detailed below or similar
approved and shall conform to BS 5154 made of gun metal,non rising stem,screwed
bonnet,one piece wedge type and tested to 16 bars hydraulic pressure. All valves
shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval obtained in writing prior to ordering.
All valves shall be fitted in readily accessible positions. They shall be of even
thickness throughout, clean and smooth from scale. All stuffing boxes shall be
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-17/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
packed with material specially selected and recommended by the manufacturer for
the particular service in which each valve is used.
Non-return valves shall be screwed BSPT or flange BSEN 1092- 2 : 1997 in
accordance with the valve schedule in this specification. All non-return valves shall
be suitable for both vertical and horizontal mounting and shall be fitted in readily
accessible positions.
NRV shall be installed in discharge line of pumps and other locations directed by the
Engineer to prevent reversal of flow. Non-return valves shall be made of gun metal,
swing pattern, metal to metal seats and tested to 16 bars hydraulic pressure
conforming to BS 5154.
1. Gate Valves/Servicing valves shall be used for isolation purpose in the service
pipelines. Valves shall be of the same nominal bore as the pipeline in which they
are installed. Gate valve/Servicing valves shall be of bronze construction with
threaded/flanged ends. The bronze valves shall conform to BS5154. Gate valves
shall have screwed ends & bonnet pattern. The valves shall be pressure rated for
16bar & have a BSI kite mark for quality assurance.
VALVE CONSTRUCTION/APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Valve Type
Pipe Size
Gate
65 mm (2-1/2") &
Smaller
76 mm (3")
& Larger
65 mm (2-1/2") &
76 mm (3")
All
All
Gate
Ball
Check (Silent)
Check
AB
IBBM
RS
NRS
UB
ISB
SOB
OS&Y
ISP
FL
SE
AEB-872-10-REV. A
Press. Rate
Steam/WOG
/Style
125#/200#
125#/200#
150#/600#
150#/300#
150#/500#
Bonnet/Stem
Assembly
Material/ Body
(Class)
UB/RS
UB/NRS
FL/NRS
AB/IPS or SE293
AB/IPS or SE291
IBBM/FL 415
Chrome Ball
Rings 3-piece
Spring
Spring
AB/IPS or SE
IBBM/BOLT
IBBM/BOLT
= All Bronze
= Iron Body Bronze Mount
= Rising Stem
= Non-Rising Stem
= Union Bonnet
= Inside Screw
= Screw Over Bonnet
= Outside Screw and Yoke
= Iron Pipe Size
= Flanged
= Soldered Ends
S-19-18/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.2.06 STRAINERS, AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS AND DRAIN COCKS
All strainers shall be fitted in a readily accessible position and adequate access shall
be allowed for maintenance and cleaning of strainer basket. All strainers shall be
manufactured by specialists and have a stainless steel 80 mesh screen basket.
Automatic air vents shall be fitted at all high points in the system and other points
where necessary. Shall be of high pressure type made of DZR brass body and cap to
BS 2872, fixing components shall of stainless steel. AAV shall be designed for a max
test pressure of 15 bars.
All air eliminators shall manufactured by specialists and a discharge pipe shall be
run from the automatic air vent to a convenient position to drain.
All draincocks shall be of the same manufacture and be in accordance with BS 2879.
Generally draincocks shall be provided at all low points in the system and other
points where necessary and as directed by the Consultant.
19.2.07 FLOAT BALL VALVES, FLOAT SWITCHES
Float ball valves on the mains shall be of equilibrium type, full bore, 6 bar
medium/high pressure to BS 1212 Part 1. Float ball valves shall be of delayed action
type if specified or shown on drawings. The fixing components and members for
delayed action ball valves shall be stainless steel.
Float switches sitted to the water tanks shall be a mercury switch in a plastic casing
suspended from its own cable.The float switch casing shall be made of
polypropylene and cable shall be sheathed with PVC compound. It shall be suitable
for water temperature up to 50°C.
19.2.08 TRENCH EXCAVATION
Excavation work shall be executed in whatever ground conditions may be
encountered to the line and levels as detailed on the drawings.
The contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all excavations and any claim
arising from accident or damage to the public, adjoining property or labour on site.
The contractor shall provide all necessary steel sheeting, timber supports, strutting
and shoring to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant. Any slip or fall shall be
immediately made good by the contractor at his own expense and the contractor
shall take sole responsibility for any claim for damages arising out of inadequate
support of excavations.
All excavation shall be maintained dry and free from water.To achieve this, the
contractor shall, without additional charge, provide all necessary pumping
equipment, sumps, drains and soakaways. The contractor shall also be responsible
for operating, running and maintaining all equipment at all times to ensure
excavations are free from water.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-19/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
All obstructions shall be broken out and voids and soft spots filled with concrete
grade 15 or as otherwise instructed by the consultant at the Contractor's expense.
Granular Bedding
Pipework shall be laid on a granular bed with a minimum cover above the crown of
the pipe as follows:
1. Pipe lines 600-mm cover when there is no traffic on the ground above the
pipeline.
2. Pipe lines 1000-mm cover when there is traffic on the ground above the pipeline.
The granular bedding shall comprise grave, stone chippings or crushed stone to
pass 12 mm sieve and be retained on a 5 mm sieve mixed with free draining course
sand, in the ratio of two parts crushed stone or gravel to every one part of sand.
Bedding material shall not contain more than 0.3% sulphate nor shall it be obtained
from locations where 0.1 % sulphate is present in the ground water.
Bedding shall be laid 150 mm deep along the length of the trench and compacted
prior to work commencing on the pipe laying. After pipe laying, inspection and
testing, a further 300 mm of bedding material shall be compacted by hand above the
uppermost crown of the pipeline along its entire length. The bedding material shall
span the entire width of the trench and shall be laid in not more than 150-mm deep
layers, each layer being compacted by hand.
Laying of Pipelines and Fittings
All underground pipelines shall be laid to true levels in straight lines to even
gradients shown on the drawings. Pipeline laying shall not commence until the
Consultant has inspected and approved the granular bed and trench.
Care shall be taken when laying pipes that no bedding material or building debris is
pushed into the barrel of the pipe of fitting.
Backfilling Excavations
After compaction of granular bed and surround, the trench shall be backfilled using
selected excavated material free from all rocks, large hard objects and builders
debris of greater than 40 mm. Backfilling shall take place immediately after the
specified operations proceeding it have been completed and shall be in layers of 150
mm, each fully compacted over the full width of the trench. Power rammers and
vibrators shall be used compact backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe
exceeds 0.5 meters.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-20/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
19.2.09
SECTION 19
PIPEWORK INSULATIONS
All thermal insulation shall comply with British Standard BS 5970: 1981 and BS 5442:
1989.
All domestic hot and cold water pipes which are exposed to sun shall be insulated.
Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in
accordance with this specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework
prior to pressure testing and inspection by the Consultant giving clear instructions for
further insulation applied. In order that tests may be made of the thickness of
insulation to be applied to each pipe size, plant and equipment, the contractor shall
allow for the cost of cutting away one section for each size of pipe, plant and
equipment for inspection by the consultant. If the insulation proves to be of the
thickness specified, then the cut section shall be made good and the whole
installation completed. Should any cut section show a deficiency of thickness, further
sections shall be cut at the direction of the consultant for inspection.
If a deficiency of thickness or any other defects are found, the contractor shall
remove the whole of the insulation installed or as the consultant directs and then
shall supply, deliver and apply new insulation complying with the specification and
restore it to the satisfaction of the consultant. This work shall be carried out at the
contractor's own expense.
Thermal insulation shall be applied to all valves, strainers, non-return valves,
draincocks, automatic air vents and bosses for gauges/test points. Insulation of
these components in the pipework system up to and including 65-mm diameter
pipework shall be carried out using sectional insulation cut to suit and of the same
size as the line pipework.
No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings or vertical and horizontal
builders work shafts prior to inspection and approval by the consultant.
Thermal insulation shall be 25 mm thick with a density of 64 kg/m2 rigid fiberglass
sections as set down in British Standard Specification BS 5422: 2001. The sections
shall be covered with flameproof calico lapped and pasted down using approved
adhesive and secured using aluminium bands at 1.2-m centres.
All piping, branching above false ceiling shall be insulated as per polypropylene
manufacturers and with cloth fibre insulation.
Where exposed to view, the insulation shall be painted with two coats primer and
one finishing coat rubberized paint to an approved colour prior to the fixing of
aluminium bands at 1.2 m centres. The finishing colour shall be to British Standard
BS 1710: 1975, identification of pipelines complete with direction arrows.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-21/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
19.2.10
SECTION 19
WATER FILTERS
Water Filters
A packaged multimedia filtration system consists of (1 duty-1 standby) filters shall be
supplied for turbidity odor and smell removal.
Tanks shall be of electric welded pressure vessel quality low carbon steel
construction rated for 100 psig, working pressure and hydrostatically tested at 50%
in excess of the working pressure.
Access opening for tank shall be provided. Support for tanks shall be structural steel
strap legs welded to lower tank head or adjustable jacklegs.
Tank shall be sandblasted internally to white metal, and then coated with 8-10 mils
DFT epoxy polyamide. The exterior surface shall be cleaned and coated with 2-3
mils DFT rust resistant primer.
Upper distribution system shall be of the baffle type to evenly distribute the water
over the entire tank area.
Lower distribution system shall be of a proven design constructed with individual fine
slotted non-clogging polyethylene strainers arranged for even flow distribution
through the resin bed.
The main operating valve shall be an industrial Automatic Multiport diaphragm type,
slow opening and closing, free of water hammer. The diaphragm assembly shall be
fully guided on its perimeter when pressure actuated from one position to another to
assure a smooth reliable shut-off without sticking. There shall be no contract of
dissimilar metals within the valve and no special tools shall be required to service the
valve.
The manufacturer of the equipment shall manufacture the main operating valve.
Single units shall have an internal automatic by-pass of untreated water during
regeneration. Valve shall have a treated water sampling cock.
An automatic flow controller shall be provided to maintain proper backwash and flush
rates over wide variations in operating pressures and require not field adjustment.
A factory-mounted and wired cycle controller shall incorporate an adjustable time
switch with multiported pilot valve to control all steps of automatic regeneration.
Provision for push-button initiated regeneration shall be included.
An electrical signaling device shall initiate regeration with 240V / 1 ph / 50 Hz power
supply.
All filter media shall be of good quality possessing characteristics of durability, long
life and resistance to attribution and shall not impart taste, odor or colour to the water
being treated. Filter media shall be selected for removing particulates down to 10micron size.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-22/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The filtration unit shall be supplied to remove suspended matters, dechlorination and
organic removal and odor removal.
The granular media (multilayered) shall consist of three distinct filter layers in
addition to a support layer. Each layer shall be of selected density and particle size
to stratify in the same order following a backwash. The filters‟ layers shall be
stratified with the coarsest layer at the top and the finest layer at the bottom. Particle
retention shall be 10 micron or larger.
19.2.11 STERILIZATION OF WATER SERVICES
All pipework, fittings, and storage tanks shall be sterilized starting with the external
water supplies, storage tanks and finally the water distribution system. Sterilization
shall be done by contractor who specialized and certified by the water department to
perform such works.
No sterilization shall be carried out until the system has been flushed out and
approval received in writing from the Consultant to commence sterilization.
Sterilization shall be performed by specialist water treatment company authorized by
local water authority.
The following procedure shall be adopted for sterilization of the water distribution
systems:
a. Flush out all tanks, pipework, etc.
b. Recharge all water systems adding sufficient sterilization chemical at the roof
tank (loft
area) to a concentration of 1-2 parts per million. The
concentration shall be confirmed by using a measuring instrument approved by
the water department.
c. Starting with the draw-off point nearest the cold-water storage tank, each drawoff point shall be opened until chlorine odour is present at each draw-off.
d. When all draw-off points have discharged chlorinated water, the cold water
storage tanks shall be recharged adding sufficient sterilization chemical to give
the correct concentration of 1-2 parts per million of chlorine. The system shall
then remain charged for a minimum period of one hour.
e. The water shall then be chemically analyzed. Should no residual chlorine be
found, the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
f.
Drain down all storage tanks and pipework, flushing out tank and pipework, and
run the system clean prior to retesting of the water to ensure no residual chlorine
is present.
g. Finally a sample of tank water shall be taken to the Water Department for testing.
The results of these tests shall be forwarded to the Consultant for his approval.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-23/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.2.12 INCOMING WATER SUPPLY AND METER
The plumbing contractor shall take connections from the proposed main water
supply to the main electronic water meter cabinet, which shall be located at internal
boundary wall of the project, as per the tender drawings. The water meter and
cabinets shall be supplied and installed by the contractor and all meters and cabinets
to be as per QCS – Section 19.
19.2.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
General Setting Out of Work and Commissioning
The contractor, having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies
are available, shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction
of the Consultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct
functioning.
After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor
shall demonstrate its operation, at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant. Test shall be in accordance with British Standard Code of Practice CP
310: 1965.
The test shall demonstrate:
a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is
of adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.
b. That all items of plant and equipment operate sufficiently quietly to meet the
specified requirements.
c. That all instruments, protection and control devices, etc., are correctly calibrated
and accurate.
d. That all water systems are properly balanced, vented, and operates satisfactorily
under test pressure.
The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the
Consultant. The Client's representative and the consultant shall be at liberty to be
present at test and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of
his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.
The contractor shall make all the records during the tests and on completion thereof,
shall provide the Consultant with a test report and record both in triplicate.
The contractor shall also provide all test instruments, together with skilled
supervision and adequate labour for carrying out the tests.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-24/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
Pipework Pressure Testing
All pipework services shall be subjected to a test of 500 kN/m2 or one and half times
working pressure whichever is the greater, for not less than 24 hours.
Where pipework is tested in sections, all valves shall be blanked off temporarily
using plugs or blank flanges. The valve wedge shall not be used to retain the water.
The pipework services shall be charged with water allowing all air to escape and
avoiding shock or water hammer. The test pressure gauge shall be mounted within
the pipework system with a loop and cock and shall be calibrated such that the test
pressure falls above its mid-range.
The contractor shall carry out his own test first to ensure there are no leaks prior to
requesting the Consultant to witness the test. The witnessed test shall be maintained
for a minimum of 4 hour without measurable loss and without further pumping.
Pipework main laid in ground shall be tested for 24 hours and leakage shall be
measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main under test. Leakage shall
not exceed five litres per 25 mm of pipe diameter per 1750 metre length of pipe for
33 metres head pressure in a period of 24 hours.
The Consultant shall witness all pipework tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also
provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner of each pipework section to be
tested.
19.2.14 PRE-COMMISSIONING WORKS
Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered stored and maintained in
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves
and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stored in suitable
racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under weather proofed cover to be
supplied by the contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components
are kept clean and dry.
Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests the
entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the
flushing out provision shall be made to exclude any item of plant, which could be
damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the consultant.
19.2.15 LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION
All items of Fire Protection Services shall be labeled and identified as required, and
as per the requirements of the Fire Department.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-25/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.2.16 HOT WATER SERVICE HEATERS
Central Water Heaters (main house )
The hot water service electric heaters shall be centralized vertical floor mounted type,
factory assembled, wired and tested confirming to British standard specifications BS
853-1: 1966 and CP 342-2: 1974 to the size and capacity as shown on the relevant
tender drawings.
The heating elements shall be zinc plated, copper sheathed, screw-in type
individually mounted so as to be field replaceable with standard tools. Heating
elements watt density shall not exceed 8 watts per square centimeter.
The hot water heater shall be suitable for testing pressure of 16 bars and shall be
electrically heated complying with BS 3456 Section 2.21 and be suitable for working
with 240 V/ 415V, 1Ph/ 3Ph 50 Hz Electric supply.
The outer casing shall be complete with bottom domes and be constructed from
sheet steel subjected to anti-corrosion treatment, and finished with white stove
enamel, suitable for floor mounting with concrete plinths over an isolating pad.
The storage vessel shall be constructed to withstand working pressure of 8 bars at
70 deg.C, unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings. Vessel interior shall
be Glass lined. It shall be insulated with polyurethane foam with flame resistant
additives to exhibit low flame transmission, classified as self-extinguishing in ASTM
1692, complying with Class P in BS 476 and with class Q in BS. 4739 or equal
alternatives. Insulation shall be sufficient to prevent standby heat loss from
exceeding 40 watts / square meter or “K” value of 0.02 W/m deg.C for a thickness of
25mm. Welded Lifting lugs shall be provided for safe handling with a hoist.
The water heater shall be complete with the following trim and controls:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Low Water cut-off
Thermostatic Control
Thermometer
Pressure reducing valve, gauge relief valve & Air vent.
Temperature gauge
The tank enclosure shall be minimum 1.25 mm thick in steel, and the entire
enclosure shall be finished in white enamel paint.
The outer casing shall be complete with bottom domes and be constructed from
sheet steel subjected to anti-corrosion treatment and finished with white stove
enamel
Individual Water Heater (Club House, Marine Building)
Water heater shall be thermal - electric, individual constructed from heavy guage
high carbon steel tank with allaying at 2 cm CFC free compact foam insulation
between inner and outer container shall be CFC - free, flame retardant pure-foam of
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-26/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
minimum 30 mm thickness, according to ISO - standard 3582. Internal surface to be
glass lined.
The water heater shall be pressurized type, horizontal or vertical type above false
ceiling, suitable for a working pressure of 8 bar and tested for 16 bar.
The heating element constructed to BS 3456 shall be from zinc-plated, coppersheathed resistance wire, embedded conifer rod type immersion type protected
against stress cracking and pitting corrosion complete with thermostat of 20 Amps.
Minimum rating and an additional safety temperature limiter for protecting the water
heater against over heating. The heating element shall be brazed on to a screw - on
immersion type apparatus plate.
The loading of water heaters shall be 1.5 kW for capacities up to 50 litres and 2.0 kW
for capacities for 80 litres, 240v, 50 Hz. single-phase supplies. The Water heater
shall be complete with pressure relief valve (preset according to allowed working
pressure), non-return valve, and temperature gauge.
a. Glass lined heaters of approval make can be accepted as alternative.
19.2.17
WATER STORAGE TANKS
Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply
strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. The following
tank may be used:
a. Chilled Domestic Water Tanks (Basemnent Floor)
GRP sectional water tank complete with bolted inspection cover and with gunmetal
pipe connections pre-molded in position. The tanks shall be suitable for ultra violet
light and comply with the National Water Council of the United Kingdom and /or
Water department of the State of Qatar, shall be located at roof level.
The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on
the drawing. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which supports the whole of the
tank. The details of the tank base are to be approved by the engineer before any
installation work begins.
All tanks shall be assembled on the supporting bases in accordance with the
Manufacturer's instructions, using torque wrenches to prevent damage to the
sections due to over-tightening of nuts and bolts
The tank shall have the following additional components in addition to the listed
above:
a. Low level electric float switches interlocked to their pressure pumps.
b. External ladder of GRP or aluminium, supplied by the Tank manufacturer.
c. Internal ladder of Fibre Glass or aluminium supplied by the Tank
manufacturer.
d. Vent with wire mesh
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-27/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
External graduated water level indicator
Channel base, of galvanized steel
Interconnecting pipes with valves
Overflow and drain connection
Access cover
The Contractor shall supply and assemble at Site sectional water tank of hot pressed
moulded GRP insulated panels (Glass Reinforced Plastic) of ivory or grey colour
provide with lockable Manhole covers air vent with overflow and all piping
connections. The panels shall comply with BS 7491: part 3: 1994 and shall have
convex shape to assist a complete draining of water of the following characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
b.
Specific gravity of 1.8
Tensile strength of not less than 850 kg/cm²
Flexural strength of 1600 kg/cm²
Impact strength of 50 kg-cm/cm²
Thermal expansion of 2.1 x 10-5 °C
Thermal conductivity of 0.02 kcal/m hr C (insulated panels)
Water absorption less than 0.2%
Glass content more than 30%
No light transmission
Gasket of synthetic rubber
Bolts and nuts of stainless steel
Frame angles and frame plates of hot dipped galvanized steel
External ladder of Stainless steel (316 grade)
Internal ladder of rigid UPVC or SS according to Manufacturer's Standards
Tie rods of stainless steel
GRP panel thick not less than 8 mm
Insulation of 25 mm
Resin cover of 2 mm
Glass tube level indicator for all compartments
Underground reinforced concrete storage tanks
The following design criteria shall be observed during construction:
1. There shall be one access opening to be positioned as follows:
a. one will be located in such a position to have easy access to the float
valve
2. GRP ladder shall be provided for access to the tank.
3. Vent pipe with insect guard shall be provided.
4. Water level controls (low level electric float switches interlocked) for pumps
shall be provided.
5. In case of overflow, warning system shall be provided either by level switch or
by other approved means..
6. Isolating stop-valves shall be provided in the supply and delivery lines
7. Approved non-toxic epoxy coating, resisting fungus growth shall be used on
all internal surfaces.
8. Approved tanking membrane for water tightness shall be used on external
surfaces.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-28/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on
the drawing.
19.2.18 PUMP SET
a)
COLD WATER TRANSFER PUMP SET
The cold-water lifting pump set shall be factory assembled set and shall be of the
multi stage vertical or horizontal type for the duty/standby stated on the drawings and
shall comprise triplicate pumps, two run and one standby.
The Two vertical pumps shall operate as per the duty cycle and the stand by shall
come on in case the duty pump fails to start. Any of the two pumps can be manually
selected to run if the selector is put to manual and the desired pump is selected. The
motors shall be weather proof with isolation vale and a strainer on each of the pump
and a NRV and IV on each of the pump.
The automatic operation of these pumps shall be through two floats (a low level cut
off from ground level tank and a high level cut off from the high level tank. The cut in
command shall be from the low level float at the high level tank.
The control panel shall rate for IP 54 and it shall have provision for signals as
required by the BMS vendor. The front elevation of the panel shall have indicator
panels to show the panel and pump status, all the panels shall have an as built
wiring diagram in each of the panel.
Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall be
provided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on
each suction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. One number
membrane tank of fabricated steel construction housing a removable butyl rubber
bag complete with lock shield gate valve shall be incorporated. 2 Nos. pressure
switch and 2 nos. pressure gauges shall be installed in pipe work.
Automatic control of the pressure set shall be by means of high/low level float
switches located in the high-level storage tanks and pressure switches. The pressure
switches shall be arranged to start the pressure set to refill the high-level cold-water
storage tank.
A low-level float switch shall be incorporated in the basement level cold-water
storage tank and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the event
of no water. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump selector
switch. This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump NO. 2 to be
changed over.
Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 with
stainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade stainless steel impellers to BS 1400.
Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel cage,
conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation in
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-29/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm and shall be
suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.
The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,
finished in stove enameled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,
door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, etc. to provide
sequence control.
Interconnecting pipework headers and manifolds shall be fabricated from copper
tube fittings as previously described. PVC and galvanized mild steel shall not be
permitted
b) VARIABLE SPEED COLD WATER BOOSTER PUMP SETS (Main Villa, club
house)
Variable speed system in this project shall employ a pump that has 1450 RPM and
the speed is reduced based on the system demand through the VFD. The system
shall be so designed that the system can be operated in a manual mode where the
VFD and associated controls will be by passed in case they have any fault. This
provision is made and it is to be tested as water becomes one of the main life
support services. All the associated components shall have 12 months warranty
from the date of successful testing, commissioning and acceptance of the system.
All warranty documents should be transferred to the client on handing over.
Contractor‟s submittals shall include the following:
1. System summary sheet
2. Sequence of operation
3. Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances location, and size of
each field connection.
4. Power and control wiring diagrams
5. System profile analysis including variable speed pump curve and system curve.
The analysis shall also include pump, motor and VFD efficiencies, job specific
load profile, staging points, horsepower, and kilowatt/hour consumption.
6. Pump data sheets
Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals are not accepted.
Contractor shall furnish and install pumps with capacities as shown on plans. Pumps
shall be horizontal / vertical split case, single stage, single / double inlet type,
designed with a foot mounted volute to allow servicing of the impeller and bearing
assembly without disturbing piping connections. Pumps shall meet types, sizes,
capacities, and characteristics as scheduled on the Equipment Schedule.
Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron with integrally cast pedestal support feet.
The impeller shall be cast bronze enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the
shaft and secured by a locking cap screw.
The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the pump shaft by an internally flushed
mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-30/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
operation at 225 degrees F. A replaceable bronze shaft sleeve shall completely
cover the wetted area under the seal.
Pump shall be rated for minimum of 175 psi working pressure. Volute shall have
gauge tapings at the suction and discharge nozzles and vent and drain tapings at the
top and bottom.
Base plate shall be of structural steel or fabricated steel channel with fully enclosed
sides and ends, and securely welded cross members. Grouting area shall be fully
opened. A flexible type coupler, capable of absorbing tensional vibration, shall be
employed between the pump and motor. Coupler shall be shielded by a coupler
guard securely fastened to the base.
Motor shall meet NEMA or IEC specifications and shall be of the size, voltage and
enclosure called for on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall
be realigned by contractor after installation.
Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be
thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high-grade machinery
enamel prior to shipment.
Approved Makes of Motors (Countries of Origin) Or Approved Equal:
1. Siemens (Germany)
2. ABB (Finland)
3. Emerson (USA)
Quality Assurance
A. The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer. An
assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and
construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility for the complete pumping package.
Unit responsibility shall be defined as responsibility for interface and successful
operation all system components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in the design
and construction of variable speed pumping systems.
C. All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the
factory prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors connected to
VFD output and it shall test inputs, outputs and program execution specific to this
application.
D. The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards
Organization per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at the
time of submittal.
E. E Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriter‟s Laboratories as a manufacturer
of packaged pumping systems.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-31/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
F. Contractor shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged
pumping systems. If no deviations are noted, the supplier or contract shall be
bound by these specifications
Variable Frequency Drive
Individual variable frequency drive with individual manual bypass (star delta) shall be
provided for each secondary pump.
1. The variable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type;
microprocessor controlled design, and shall be capable of operating in voltage
ranges of 380 to 460V AC, three-phase, at frequencies of 48 to 63 Hz.
2. The VFD, including all factory-installed options, shall have UL approval.
3. VFD shall be mounted within an enclosure protected to IP54 as minimum,
ventilated for installation as a floor-mounted unit. Drive shall be equipped with an
input disconnect switch, and fuses to protect against ground faults.
4. A manual bypass option shall be available to enable the operator to select normal
or manual bypass of the drive. The bypass includes two contactors. One
contactor is the bypass contactor that connects the motor directly to the incoming
power line in the event that the drive is out of service. The other is the drive
output contactor that disconnects the drive from the motor when the motor is
operating in the bypass mode. The drive output contactor and the bypass
contactor are electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent "back feeding."
5. VFD shall utilize a full wave rectifier to convert three-phase AC to a fixed DC
voltage. Power factor shall remain above 0.98 regardless of speed or load. VFDs
employing power factor correction capacitors shall not be acceptable.
6. Insulated gate bipolar transistors shall be used in the inverter section to convert
fixed DC voltage to a three-phase, adjustable frequency, AC output.
7. The output switching frequency shall be selectable at 4 or 8 kHz.
8. An internal line reactor (3% impedance) shall be provided to lower harmonic
distortion of the power line and to increase the fundamental power factor.
9. The VFD shall be suitable for elevations to 1000m above sea level without
debating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 40
degrees C. VFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95% noncondensing humidity.
10. The VFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English
via an alphanumeric display:
a. Output Frequency
b. Output Voltage
c. Motor Current
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-32/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
d. Kilowatts per hour
e. Fault identification with text
f. RPM
11. All VFDs and controllers shall be furnished by the pump vendor for unit
responsibility for successful system operation.
Approved Makes of VFD (countries of origin):
1. Siemens (Germany)
2. ABB (Finland)
3. Danfoss (France)
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Furnish field mounted differential pressure transmitter(s)-3 sets as required for
measuring differential pressure and transmitting an isolated linear 4 to 20 mA dc
output for use in a standard two-wire 24 V dc system. The unit shall be accurate to
+/- 0.25% of full span and shall have an adjustable span limit applicable for the
system pressure, and shall withstand over ranges upto a static pressure of 2000 psi
with negligible change in output. It shall have a corrosion resistant steel body with
¼‟‟ NPT process connections. Unit shall be protected against radio frequency
interference and shall have a watertight (NEMA type 4) electrical enclosure with 1/2 “
NPT conduit connection.
Contractor shall also include for the supply and installation of interlinking cable
between differential pressure transmitter and pump controller.
Pump Logic Controller
The pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of
Underwriter‟s laboratory, Inc (UL). The controller shall meet Part 15 of FCC
regulations pertaining to Class A computing devices. The controller shall be
specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications.
The variable speed pump controller shall function to a proven program that
safeguards against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
a. Motor Overload
b. Pump Flow Surges
c. Hunting
End of Curve Protection: The pump logic controller through a factory preprogrammed algorithm shall be capable of protecting the pumps from hydraulic
damage due to operation beyond their published end-of-curve. This feature requires
an optional flow meter for activation.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-33/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The pump logic controller shall be capable of staging and destining pumps based on
an efficiency optimization program to provide the lowest kw draw .This optimization
program requires an optional flow meter, kw meter and system differential pressure
sensor for activation.
The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting discrete analog inputs from
zone sensor/transmitters. Ana log input resolution shall be 12-bit minimum, and the
controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every 100 milli seconds.
Use of a multiplexer for multiple sensor inputs is not acceptable. All
sensors/transmitter inputs shall be individually wired to the pump logic controller for
continuous scan and comparison function. All analog inputs shall be provided with
current limit circuitry to provide short circuit protection and safeguard against
incorrect wiring of sensors.
The pump logic controller will select analog input signal that deviates the greatest
amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command
feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting.
The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional integral derivative
control function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be useradjustable over an infinite range. The scan and compare rate that selects the
command set point and process variable signal shall be continuous and
automatically set for optimum performance. Each sensor shall be scanned at least
once every 100-milli seconds.
The pump controller shall be capable of controlling pumps in parallel.
The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be displayed in
plain English. The following features shall be provided:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Multi-fault memory and recall
On-screen help functions
Soft-touch membrane keypad switches
LED pilot lights and switches.
The variable speed pumping system shall be provided with a user-friendly operator
interface complete with membrane switches and numeric keypad. Display shall be
no less than four lines with each line capable of displaying up to twenty characters.
The human interface panel shall display the following values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Flow in GPM (requires optional flow meter)
Pump On/Off status
Pump % Speed
Individual Alarm Conditions
Troubleshooting Diagnostics
User-adjustable parameters such as alternation, PID, set points etc.
A data-logging feature shall be provided as a function of the pump logic controller.
The Alarm log shall include last 20 alarms with date/time stamp. The pump data log
shall display individual pump run timers and pump cycle counters. A system data log
will indicate operation mode, system cycles and panel power cycles, each with
date/time stamp. A signal log shall be provided to display the maximum and
minimum values with date/time stamps for each process variable and flow, when
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-34/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
optional flow meter is provided. The signal log shall also be capable of displaying the
cumulative value of kilowatt-hours for each pump and of system minimum and
maximum flow along with individual counter reset capability.
The logic controller shall incorporate a Flash Memory for saving and reloading
customized settings. These field determined values shall be permanently retained in
Flash memory for automatic reloading of the site specific setup values in the event of
data corruption due to external disturbances. The Controller shall also employ a
sensor setup copy feature.
The pump controller shall be capable of communicating with the Building Automation
System (BAS) by both hard-wired and serial communications. The following
communication features shall be provided to BAS in „hardwired‟ FORM VIA 4-20 ma
analogue signals and digital outputs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Remote system start/stop (dry contact supplied by BAS)
Failure of any system component (relay output from pump controller)
Process variable (4-20 ma analogue output supplied by pump controller)
VFD speed (0-10 VDC analogue output supplied by pump controller)
Optional: Pump On/Off status (relay output supplied by pump controller)
The following communication features shall be provided to the Building Automation
System via an RS 485 port (optional hardware required) utilizing BACnet class ll
MSTPTM protocol:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
All sensor process variables
Individual zone set points
Individual pump failure
Individual pump On/Off status
Individual VFD On/Off status
VFD speed
Individual VFD failure
Individual sensor failure
The cold-water pressure pump set shall be factory assembled set and shall be of the
multi stage vertical or horizontal VFD type for the duty/standby stated on the
drawings and shall comprise duplicate pumps, one run and one standby.
Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall be
provided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on
each suction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. One number
membrane tank of fabricated steel construction housing a removable butyl rubber
bag complete with lock shield gate valve shall be incorporated. 2 Nos. pressure
switch and 2 nos. pressure gauges shall be installed in pipe work.
Automatic control of the pressure set shall be by means of pressure switches. The
pressure switches shall be arranged to the primary water at the desired pressure.
A low level float switch shall be incorporated in the basement level cold water storage
tank and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the event of no
water. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump selector
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-35/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
switch. This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump NO. 2 to be
changed over.
Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 with
stainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade gunmetal or stainless steel impellers
to BS 1400. Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel
cage, conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation
in temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2990 rpm and shall be
suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.
The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,
finished in stove enameled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,
door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, ELCB, Alarm,
lund-off auto, etc. to provide sequence control.
c) COLD WATER BOOSTER PUMP SET (Marine Buildings)
The cold-water booster pump set shall be a packaged set and shall be of the multi
stage vertical type for the duty/standby stated on the drawings and shall comprise
duplicate pumps, one run and one standby.
Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall be
provided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on
each suction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. One number
membrane tank of fabricated steel construction housing a removable butyl rubber
bag complete with lock shield gate valve shall be incorporated. 2 Nos. pressure
switch and 2 nos. pressure gauges shall be installed in pipe work.
Automatic control of the pressure set shall be by means of pressure switches. The
pressure switches shall be arranged to the primary water at the desired pressure.
A low level float switch shall be incorporated in the basement level cold water storage
tank and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the event of no
water. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump selector
switch. This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump NO. 2 to be
changed over.
Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 with
stainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade gunmetal impellers to BS 1400.
Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel cage,
conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation in
temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm and shall be
suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.
The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,
finished in stove enameled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,
door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, etc. to provide
sequence control
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-36/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
d) HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
Hot water re-circulating pumps shall be installed in hot water service to ensure that
hot water is available at all draw-off points with minimum delay. Re-circulating pumps
(one duty, one standby) shall be in accordance with the duties indicated on the
drawings.
Hot water service circulating pumps shall be direct driven in line pumps suitable for
horizontal or vertical mounting. The pumps shall be of the same size as the pipe work
bore. Each pump shall be installed with an isolating valve, strainer or inlet, non-return
valve and isolating valve on outlet.
The pumps casting shall be all stainless steel with stainless steel impellers, the shaft
material shall be stainless steel with tungsten carbide mechanical seal.
Each centrifugal circulating pump shall be driven by an electric motor preferably of
415 volts. Three phase 50 Hz electric supply. Motors shall not exceed 2990 rpm.
Each motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled and be insulated in accordance with
BS 2757 and be suitable for working in an ambient temperature of 50 deg. Class ”F”
insulation.
The panel shall be equipped with timer to operate each pump duty cycle and it will
have run pump indicating lamps. In the event of running pump trips due to any fault,
standby pumps shall come in operation and provide fault indication for respective
pump.
The pump shall be provided with control panel mounted on wall. The panel shall
include isolator, starter, earth leakage circuit breaker on/off automatic and manual
selector switches and indicator lights for each pump./ The control panel shall be
factory wired.
19.2.19 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
Wherever is required even not shown on the tender drawing, it is the contractor‟s
responsibility to provide the system - a pressure reducing valve(s) if the distribution
system available pressure is above in relation to the fixture pressure requirement
being offered. Design working pressure of 5.5 bar should be maintained.
This is to prevent damaged and leaks that may cause and fault that may arise due to
over pressure since note that location of fixtures are installed in different levels
throughout the building.
19.2.20 SWIMMING POOL
The contractor shall be responsible for supply, installation testing and commissioning
for complete works of swimming pools and jacuzzis with the following equipments as
shown in the Tender Drawings.
a. Filtration System
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-37/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Circulating Pumps
Pool Accessories
Over Flow Grating System
Under Water Lights
Chemical Treatment
Heat Pumps
Heater
Control Panel
Balance Tank
Jacuzzi equipments.
For more details please refer to swimming pool drawings.
19.2.21 LPG SYSTEM
General
This specification is to be read in conjunction with the drawings. The complete
installation shall be carried out by a Specialist Contractor and shall comply with the
current B.S. codes and codes of practice. The Contractor shall ensure that the
materials and installation are suitable for local conditions and comply with local
regulations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and execution of the
works described in these specifications for the LPG system to produce a complete,
tested, commissioned and fully operational installation including all necessary labor
and materials whether or not specified in details.
SCOPE OF SUPPLY AND WORK
1. LPG Tank
Tank is designed and constructed to BS5500 and certified by Woqod and Civil
Defense Department. Tank capacity according to the layout.
2. Pressure Regulator
Shall have general shut off valves for source of gas supply, Pressure to be
determined by the LPG specialist contractor.
3. Internal Piping Works
Piping should be includes manual shut off valve with locking in closed,
emergency shut off valve (solenoid valve 220V AC, ½” NPT), safety automatic
shut off, cooker automatic cut off valve and cooker flexible hose. Kitchen shall
have gas leak detection system.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-38/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
4. Emergency Shut Off System
5. Gas Detection System
LPG System
The Contractor shall provide a fully functional system comprising of all components
whether or not mentioned in the drawings. The complete LPG gas detection system
installation shall be carried out by approved supplier cum installer.
Pipes and Fittings
All pipework shall be seamless G.I. pipe sch 40 conforming to ASTM A53. All the
changes in direction of pipes shall be achieved by using proper fittings. No gas pipe
shall be bent. All branch connections shall be taken from the top or sides of
horizontal main lines and not from the bottom. Compression fittings will not be
allowed on gas pipework.
Isolating Valves
Valves shall be of lever operated ball type with an indication of „ON‟ and „OFF”
positions. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated type and constructed of non-ferrous
materials. The valves shall be designed for capillary joint connections to the pipe
lines. Where screwed connections are provided for pipe line connection, they should
have I.S.O. metric thread in accordance with BS 3643. The valves shall be of
wrought copper or bronze. Details of the valves shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
Identification of Gas Installation
All pipes shall be identified with the appropriate color near stop valves, at any
change of direction and at 1.8m intervals along the line by means of self-adhesive 2
ply vinyl tapes. Self adhesive vinyl tapes shall be wrapped to overlap so that the tape
adheres to itself as well as to the pipe. Each junction point shall be clearly marked by
a color band. Self adhesive vinyl banding shall not be less than 50mm wide and shall
include lettering to indicate the LPG.
Testing and Commissioning
Testing and commissioning of the whole installation shall be carried out in
accordance with relevant BS Standards. It shall be the responsibility of the Specialist
Contractor to provide all labor, materials, instruments and equipment required to test
and commission the installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The tests shall be
conducted and all defects rectified before any part of the installation is concealed or
buried.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-39/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The pressure tests on the pipework shall be carried out by the Specialist Contractor
as described below.
Plug all open ends of the pipework and put the pipework on pressure test (7 bars)
with the air. Disconnect the air supply and keep the pipework on test for 24 hours.
No leak shall be observed during this period. If the above pressure is not maintained,
the Specialist Contractor shall detect any leaks by the use of soap solution applied
externally to joints and connections. The soap solution shall be carefully washed off
and dried after testing.
Care shall be taken to ensure that all valves on main and sub-main branches of the
pipework are properly subjected to this test.
19.2.22
HEAT EXCHANGER
Furnish as shown on the drawings / schedule, a parallel flow plate heat exchanger
fully complying to the following specification.
A. The plate heat exchanger shall consist of pressed type, Titanium plates suitable
for portable/domestic water application, as to provide the required heat transfer
area to meet the operating conditions specified. Each heat transfer plate shall
have one piece molded Nitrile CLIP-ON gaskets. Gasketing shall have relieving
grooves to prevent intermixing of fluids and cause leak to flow to outside of unit.
The plates shall not have any holes for sealing of the gasket. Flow principle of
counter-current flow to be followed.
B. Each heat transfer plate to be with herringbone corrugations to optimise heat
transfer with nominal pressure losses. Corrugations to be designed to provide
support to adjacent plates at evenly distributed support points to allow
pressurisation of each circuit to a full differential of 1,3 times the design pressure
without buckling or deformation of the heat transfer plates. Plate and frame
should be designed so removal of an individual plate is possible without having to
remove any plates in front or back of that particular plate.
C. The heat exchanger shall not use welded frame assembly. Entire frame shall be
bolted together to allow unit to be field assembled to permit rigging into place.
The unit cover plates shall be of sufficient thickness for the design pressure and
code requirements and shall have no welded reinforcements or stiffeners. All
steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting, painting
over mill scale is not acceptable. All steel components shall be coated with a two
part aliphatic acrylic polyurethane or two part blue paint.
D. Supplier to confirm presence of Manufacturer‟s Factory Trained and Qualified
Service Engineer to assist in installation and carry out commissioning at site.
E. The compression bolts shall not require special tools and shall be arranged to
permit plate pack tightening at fixed cover only. Bolts shall be provided with rolled
threads to reduce galling and minimum high width hexagonal nuts to adequately
distribute the load.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-40/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
F. The complete assembly to be factory assembled and tested in accordance with
PED pressure vessel code requirements or equivalent European pressure vessel
code requirements and furnished with a certification for stated design pressure
for both circuits.
G. The supplier to confirm availability locally in the Middle East of all essential spare
parts for the plate heat exchanger proposed.
H. The quality of domestic water entering the heat exchanger shall be accordance
with the manufacturer recommendations.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-41/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
19.2.23 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURES
ITEM
MANUFACTURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
1. Copper Pipes
YORKSHIRE
WEDNESBURY
MUELLER
CONEX
UK
UK
UK
UK/EUROPE
2. Copper Fittings
CONEX
YORKSHIRE
WEDNESBURY
MUELLER
UK/EUROPE
UK
UK
UK
3. Valves
HATTERSLY
CRANE
PEGLER
KITZ
UK
USA
UK
USA
4. PPR Pipes and Fittings
AQUATHERM
COPRAX
WEFATHERM
BANNINGER
BANNINGER
GERMANY
UK
GERMANY
GERMANY
GERMANY
5. Thermal Insulation
KIMMCO
ARABIAN FIBREGLASS
ARMAFLEX
KUWAIT
KSA
UK
6. Pressure Reducing Valves
GRINNELL
ECONOSTO
NIBCO
UK
UK
USA
7. Pipes Hangers & Supplies
HELTI
FISHER
GRINELL
GERMANY
GERMANY
USA
8. Water Pumps
SPP
WILO
GRUNDFOSS
UK,USA
GERMANY
DENMARK
9. Water Heater
SANTON
A.O.SMITH
INDISIT
IGNIS
UK
CHINA
ITALY
ITALY
10. GRP Tanks
EXTRACO
BK PLATECH
11. Water filters
CULLIGAN
AQUA SEA
AEB-872-10-REV. A
UAE
UAE
USA
NETHERLANDS
S-19-42/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
INNOVA
ITALY
14. Heat Exchanger
ARMSTRONG
ALFA LAVAL
FUNKE
USA
USA
GERMMANY
15. Swimming Pool
PROMINENT
HYWARD
ASTRA POOL
KRIPSOL POOL
GERMANY
USA
SPAIN
SPAIN
16. LPG System
GASCO
QATAR
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-43/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
19.3.00
SECTION 19
IRRIGATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this project is to supply, install and commission an automated
irrigation system with all related components for the Luxury Villa at The Pearl, Qatar”
consisting of field AC electric control valves, control wires, filter, integrated dripper
lines, drippers, flush valves, and central control system
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work shall be read in conjunction with the contract material
specifications, contract drawings and installation details and it includes but not limited
to the following:
A. The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings showing but not limited to The
Main line, Laterals, solenoid valves, control wires route and numbers, Irrigation
Controllers, integrated dripper lines, on line drippers, Bubblers and flush valves.
B. The contractor shall submit for client approval the technical information and
samples of the material he intends to use which should be in accordance with the
material specifications of this project.
C. The contractor shall commission the irrigation system upon completing the work
and then shall be handed over.
D. The contractor and upon completing the work shall provide the client with four
original sets of As-Built drawings accurately reflecting the executed works and
installation details.
E. The contractor shall upon completing the works provide the client with detailed
Operation and Maintenance Manuals (With applicable Arabic translations) in four
originals. The manuals shall include but not limited to; complete and marked
literature of all products used on the project and its reordering part numbers. It
shall also include a list of the recommended spare parts for a period of 5 years. It
shall include original print of the As Built drawings.
F. The client prior to issuing the Project Handing Over Certificate shall approve the
As-Built Drawings and the Operation & maintenance Manual.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-44/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
1.03
SECTION 19
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of irrigation
equipment, central control systems, pumps and fittings whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B. Installers: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of irrigation works of a
similar quality and scope as this project for at least 5 years.
1.04
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
ISO R 161
Confirming to German Standards Din 8061 & 19532
BS: CP312 - Code of Practice for Plastics Pipe work (Thermoplastic Materials) of a
uPVC Pipe work and Fittings
1.05
BS: 1780 -
Specification for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges.
BS: 3505 -
Specification for uPVC pressure pipes for cold potable water.
BS: 4346 -
Joints and fittings for use with uPVC pressure pipes.
BS: 5150 -
Specification for cast iron wedge and double disk gate valves for
general purposes.
BS: 5154 -
Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and
gate valves for general purposes
BS: 8010 -
Code of practice for pipelines.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - The contractor to prepare the project shop drawings in 6 sets
which to be approved by the client representative prior to commencing installation
work. The shop drawings shall show but not limited to valves, control wires route
and numbers and controllers location
B. Products – The contractor shall submit for client approval prior to commencing
installation works; the products he intends to use with all technical details and
literature in accordance with the specifications below.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals-The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the
detailed Operation & Maintenance Manual with equipment reordering codes and
literature.
D. As-Built Drawings- The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the complete project asbuilt drawings reflecting the actual site installation.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-45/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. All primary distribution pipe work shall be Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride
(uPVC) to Class 5
B. All primary distribution pipe fittings shall be solvent welded uPVC 16 bar
C. As an alternative to the Specifications in items A&B, uPVC pipe work confirming
to BS 3505 Class E and fittings to BS 4346 of equivalent pressure rating may be
used.
D. Un plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes:
1. All uPVC pipes shall be manufactured by the local manufacturer approved by
the client and consultant. They shall be Class E (16 Bar) / Class D (10 Bar) as
per BOQ and confirm to ISO 4422. Pipes up to 90 MM nominal diameter shall
have solvent welded joints and pipes of 110 mm and above diameter shall
have rubber ring sealing pipes.
2. Pipes may be supplied in random lengths no length smaller than six meters.
Each pipe shall legibly and indelibly marked with manufacturing standard, the
manufactures name, date of manufacture, nominal bore and working pressure
/ class. Pipe shall be smooth finished inside and outside and shall show no
evidence of blisters, grooves or other extrusion marks. The contractor shall
provide three samples of all size pipes of one meter in length for approval
prior to installation of any plastic pipe.
3. On no account shall uPVC saddle type connection to be made for solenoid
valve assembly.
4. The Engineer shall select samples during the course of the works from each
size of pipe for testing by an independent authority to ensure strict
compliance with the ISO Specification. All cots of packing, shipping, testing,
reporting and the like for all such test shall be deemed to be included in the
tender price.
E. Fittings
1. All uPVC fittings shall be ISO/DIN Specification and have a minimum rating of
16 kg/cm2 at 20 degree C Fittings shall be suitable for use with the above
specified pipes. Where uPVC flanges are required these shall be drilled to
NP16 as detailed in BS 7622 and BS 4772. All fittings above 160 mm shall be
fusion bonded epoxy coated ductile iron or cast flanged GRP. The Contractor
shall use only fittings that are approved by the Engineer. All nuts and bolts
shall be 316 stainless steel.
F. uPVC Cement Thinner and Tape
1. uPVC cement and thinner shall be of the type approved by the Engineer. All
cans of solvent and primer shall have labels intact and shall be stamped with the
date of manufacture and shelf life. No cans with an expired shelf life will be
permitted. Joints compound for threaded connections shall be PTFE tape or
approved equal thread sealant.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-46/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
G.
SECTION 19
Underground Warning Tape
1. Marking tape shall be laminated polyethylene and aluminum foil construction
capable of detection by low output generator equipment.
2. Tapes shall remain legible and colour fast in all soil conditions at pH values of
2.5 to 11.0 inclusive.
3. Warning tape for irrigation pipe lines shall be yellow / orange in color as
approved by engineer.
4. Tape shall not less than 150 mm wide and shall have the phrase
“IRRIGATION PRESSURE MAIN” or
“ CAUTION – IRRIGATION PIPE LINE AND CONTROL CABLES”
in English and Arabic stamped in black letters and repeated at maximum intervals
of two meters.
H. Flexible Piping for on Line Drippers
1. Flexible Pipes for irrigation on line drippers shall be in the required sizes as
shown on the drawings and B.O.Q extruded from linear low density polyethylene
version raw material.
Pipes shall be resistant to algae and ultraviolet
deterioration with Carbon Black content not less than 2.25 %.
2.02
APPLICATION DEVICES
SPRAY POP-UP SPRINKLER
The sprinkler shall be equipped with an adjustable arc (1-360 ) nozzle discharging
4.3 gpm, for the full circle and it shall be available in sizes to cover up to a radius of
17 feet at a pressure of 25 psi.
The sprinkler nozzle shall automatically adjust the flow depending on the arc setting
in order to have a matched precipitation rate. It shall be an integral part of the riser
assembly that can not be removed, and has the ability to open fully to allow flushing.
It shall have grooves on the inner surface to allow dirt to go out of the nozzle easily.
The sprinkler shall have radius reduction capability by means of a stainless steel, arc
and radius adjustment screw. It shall also be possible to adjust arc and radius from
the top of the riser assembly, using an adjustment key. This adjustment shall be
possible in all the phases of installation (before and after installation, while static and
while operating).
The sprinkler shall have an inlet screen of length not less than 100 mm. It shall have
30 mm exposed diameter after installation. The body and riser of the sprinkler shall
be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy duty A.B.S The sprinkler shall accept a drain
check valve, installed in the field from in the base of the riser to prevent drainage.
The sprinkler shall carry a one-year, exchange warranty (not prorated).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-47/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
ROTOR POP-UP SPRINKLER (8 – 12m radius)
The sprinkler shall be of the gear-driven, closed case rotary type, capable of covering
a 14 (meter) radius at 50 PSI with a discharge rate of 5.5 GPM. The sprinkler shall
have a patent gear drive reversing mechanism.
The sprinkler shall be available with eight standard nozzles discharging from 0.9 to
8.2 GPM or four low-angle nozzles discharging from 1.6 to 4.7 GPM.
The sprinkler shall have radius adjustment capabilities by means of a stainless-steel
nozzle retainer/radius adjustment screw. It shall be available in both full-circle and
adjustable part-circle configurations. The adjustable part circle unit shall be minutely
adjustable from 40° to 360°. The adjustable unit shall be adjustable in all phases of
installation i.e., before installation, after installation while static, and after installation
while in operation.
The sprinkler shall have a FloStop™ feature that will enable the user to stop the
water flow through an individual sprinkler head. The sprinkler shall have a constant
rotation speed irrespective of the nozzle installed. It shall have a minimum of 4-inch
(100-mm) pop-up stroke to bring the rotating nozzle turret into a clean environment.
The sprinkler shall have a thick rubber cover firmly attached to the top of the sprinkler
riser. It shall be equipped with a drain check valve to prevent low head drainage, and
be capable of checking up to 10 feet (3, 0 m) in elevation change.
It shall have an exposed surface diameter after installation at least 40 mm.
The sprinkler shall have an overall height of 19 cm. The sprinkler shall have a 3/4inch Female National Pipe Thread (FNPT) inlet. The sprinkler shall be serviceable
after installation in the field by unscrewing the body cap, removing the riser
assembly, and extracting the inlet filter screen.
The body of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy-duty A.B.S. It
shall have a stainless steel spring for positive retraction of the riser when irrigation is
complete. The sprinkler shall have a stainless steel riser and shall carry a five-year,
exchange warranty.
DRIPPER LINES AND DRIPPERS
Integrated Dripper Lines for Ground Cover and Shrub Beds
The dripper line shall consist of a ultra violet resistant low density Linear polyethylene
tube with internal pressure compensating continuously self cleaning integral flat
drippers welded to the inside of wall of the tube at the specified spacing as an
integral part of the tubing assembly.
The tube shall have a 17mm or 16 mm outside diameter.
The dripper shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and
a self cleaning EPDM diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. It shall have
an inlet filter raised from the wall of the tubing. It shall have the ability to
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-48/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
independently regulate discharge rates with a constant flow at an inlet pressure of 770 psi.
The drippers shall have a manufacturer’s coefficient of variability (CV) of 0.03 or less.
The dripper discharge shall be 0.4, 0.61, or 0.92 gph utilizing a combination turbulent
flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and an EPDM diaphragm to
maintain uniform discharge rates. It shall also be continuously self-cleaning during
operation and under pressure and have a flow exponent X = 0 and a Kd of 1.3.
The dripper flow versus pressure shall be tested by an independent organization
such as the Center of Irrigation Technology, and shall have available reports to be
presented upon request.
The dripper flow shall not be affected by temperature up to 60 degrees Celsius and
shall not have a spike at start up.
The filtration requirement of the dripper shall be a maximum of 80-120 mesh.
The dripper line shall have a 7 years guarantee against solar radiation and 5 years
warranty against manufacturing defects.
Drippers for Trees and Palm Trees
The dripper shall be single outlet and it shall have a fixed flow of 24 Liters per Hour
(6.34 Gallons Per Hour) for a pressure range of 7-60 psi.
The dripper shall have an independent pressure compensation mechanism with dual
regulation having an EPDM diaphragm and a turbulent flow labyrinth path. It shall be
continuously self-cleaning during operation and under pressure.
The dripper shall have a flow path of the following dimensions: depth 0.057”, width
0.053”, and length 0.59”.It shall have no emission spike at low pressure start ups of 7
PSI. It shall also be provided with a built-in anti-siphon mechanism to prevent suction
of external impurities.
The dripper shall have a color coded cap to identify flow.
The drippers shall have the Anti-Leak mechanism to prevent water draining out of the
dripper at a pressure of 7 PSI. It shall have a barbed inlet having an inlet filter.
The dripper shall have a Coefficient of Manufacturing Uniformity (CV) 0.03 or less.
Drippers for Scattered Shrubs and Ground Cover
The dripper shall be single outlet and it shall be available with a flow of 4, and 8
Liters per Hour (LPH) and shall be of the pressure compensating and continuously
self-cleaning type.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-49/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The dripper shall have an independent pressure compensation mechanism with dual
regulation having an EPDM diaphragm and a turbulent flow labyrinth path.
The dripper shall have a uniform flow rate at a pressure range of 7-60 psi and shall
have no flow emission spike at start up low pressure of 7 PSI.
The dripper shall have a built in anti-siphon mechanism to prevent suction of external
impurities with the need of dust cap. It shall have the Anti-Leak mechanism to
prevent water draining out of the dripper at a pressure of 7 PSI.
The dripper shall have a nipple outlet with color coded cap to identify flow for each
type.
It shall have a barbed inlet having an inlet filter.
The dripper shall have a Coefficient Of Manufacturing Variation (CV) 0.03 less.
BUBBLERS
The bubbler shall be of the pressure compensating type having a fixed flow under a
pressure range of 20 to 90 PSI. It shall be constructed of corrosion and UV resistant
plastic material.
The bubbler shall have an integral electrometric flow bushing to maintain a constant
flow at different pressure range.
The bubbler shall have a plastic screen filter to protect it from debris that could be
available in the water. It shall have a ½ inch female threaded inlet (FNPT) for
connection to a ½ inch male threaded riser.
The bubbler shall be available in 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 GPM flow rates. The bubbler
shall carry a two years warranty
VALVES
Remote Control Electric Solenoid Valves
The electrical solenoid valves shall be of the globe type normally closed,
electronically actuated, diaphragm operated.
The valve’s body and bonnet shall be molded of non-corrodible, glass-reinforced
nylon, rated at an operating pressure of 200 PSI. The body of the valve shall have
brass inserts, with through holes, which will accept the bonnet Stainless steel bolts.
The diaphragm shall be of molded construction, reinforced with nylon fabric. A heavyduty removable seat shall be available to protect and support the diaphragm.
The valve shall be equipped with an internal filter as well with a self-cleaning
metering rod, so only clean water can enter the solenoid chamber. A filter cleaning
system, that continuously cleans the filter when the valve is operating, shall be
available.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-50/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which
regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an accurate set
pressure regulator, to keep the downstream pressure constant after setting it. The
regulator shall be of the top dial model with clearly shown pressure values in bars
and PSI. It shall regulate the flow at a pressure range of 20 to 100 PSI.
The valve shall be available in 1, 1.5, 2 and 3 inch size and it shall have a BSP
female thread inlet and outlet. It shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.1 gpm (1”size)
to 200 gpm (2”size)
The valve shall have a 24 volts 60 cycle solenoid with a 370 mA in-rush current and
190 mA holding current.
The solenoid shall be an encapsulated, one-piece unit with a captive plunger. The
Valve shall be equipped with a manual internal bleed only giving the capability to
release the upper chamber water to the down stream piping, allowing the valve to
open. No external bleed shall be available
The valve shall carry a five years exchange warranty.
Plastic Glass Nylon Hydraulic Control Valves
The electrical solenoid valves shall be of the globe type normally closed, 3 way
hydraulic type electronically actuated, diaphragm operated.
The valve’s body and bonnet shall be molded of non-corrodible, glass-reinforced
nylon, with a maximum operating pressure of 200 PSI.
The valve shall be controlled with a hydraulic control signal. It shall be equipped to
operate with a Radio Valve Actuator. The actuator shall be designed and the same
manufacturer of the Irrigation Central Control System.
The Valve diaphragm shall be made of EPDM, highly resistant to chemicals and
fertilizers.
The internal pilot shall have a large full bleed path to allow the valve working with low
quality Treated Sewage Effluent water without any clogging.
The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which
regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an insert able field
installed pressure regulating module, to ensure constant downstream pressure.
The valve shall be available in 1.5 and 2 inch size and it shall have a BSP female
thread inlet and outlet.
The valves shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.4 gpm to 150 gpm with a pressure
loss of 4.4 psi at 105 gpm flow in the 2” hydraulic globe valve, and 7.1 psi in the
1.5”size.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-51/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
Cast Iron Electric / Manual Hydraulic Control Valves
The Control Valve shall be made of epoxy coated cast iron. It shall be of the
hydraulic type with 3-way pilot design. The electric version shall be operated by 5
watts electric solenoid actuator.
The Valve shall be able to be outfitted in a number of combinations of control
functions including manual, solenoid , pressure reducing, and pressure sustaining
flow control, pump control, quick release slow closing and two way control.
The valve shall be of the flow through design with the diaphragm used as the direct
sealing surface. It shall be fully serviceable in place without removal from the line.
The valve shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi. The only moving parts
inside the valves shall be the diaphragm and the spring. The valve diaphragm shall
be of natural rubber and it shall be available in nitrile and EPDM
The valve shall be available in sizes 3”, 4”, 6”, 8”, 10”, 12”, 16”, 18”and 20”.
PVC Electric Hydraulic Control Valve
The Valve shall be made of PVC material rated at 8 bars and of hydraulic type. It
shall be of available in 3” inch and 4” sizes.
The inlet and outlet connections of the valve shall be of the solvent weld type. The
valve shall be of the flow through design, and of the diaphragm direct closing type
which will allow very low friction loss at high flows.
The valve shall be of the normally closed type with a normally open 3-way solenoid
24VAC installed from outside. It shall be operated manually by means of a three-way
selector knob.
The internal parts of the valve shall be only a natural rubber diaphragm and a spring.
The valve shall be serviceable in place just by unscrewing and removing the top. It
shall also have the possibility of adding controls such as pressure regulation,
pressure sustaining, etc.
Quick Pressure Relief Valve
The valve shall be of bronze construction 2”size with angle configuration.
The valve shall be of the flow through design with the diaphragm used as the direct
sealing surface. It shall be fully serviceable in place without removal from the line and
shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi.
The valve shall have a pressure pilot for the adjustment of the pressure setting. It
shall immediately open fully when the network pressure exceeds the set pressure.
The valve shall close slowly as the network pressure drops in order to prevent shock
to the system and the on/off cycling of the pump.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-52/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The valve shall also be available in sizes 3”, 4”, 6”, and 8” with flanged connections.
Check Valves
The valve shall be of constructed of Aerospace quality composite and stainless steel
(SAE 303) materials, 100% non-corrosive. It shall allow flow in one direction by the
action of a spring loaded flap which closes against a rubber seal. The spring and the
flap shall be connected via a moment arm in order to ensure that the spring pressure
is maximum when the valve is closed.
The valve shall have a pressure rating of 16 bars. It shall have an external position
indicator that may be made electric for signaling a control system.
The valve shall be available in 3”, 4”, and 6”size.
Air Release Valves
Air relief valves shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings and shall be of the
kinetic/automatic type that will automatically release air when the lines are being filled
with water and when air entrapment occurs while the system is working.
The Valves shall be of the 2”size with plastic or brass male base. The body of the
valve shall be constructed heavy duty plastic.
The working components of the valve shall be constructed of 100% corrosion
resistant materials to ensure maximum life and minimum water loss due to leaks.
The Air Release valve shall employ rolling seal mechanism made of EPDM and shall
remain open even when pipeline air pressure reaches 10 psi.
Line End Auto Flush Valve
The automatic line end flush valve shall allow for temporary, automatic flushing of
irrigation lateral lines during pressurization of the system.
The valve shall be designed in a way that it will not close prematurely at high
pressure. It shall allow for disassembly for servicing. It shall have a operating
pressure range of 15 to 57 psi.
The valve shall be constructed entirely of non-corrosive plastic with a silicon
diaphragm. No springs shall be employed in the operation of the valve.
The connection of the valve shall be either ½ inch male thread or 17 mm insert.
Quick Coupling Valves
The Valve shall be operated by insertion of a compatible hollow coupler key.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-53/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The valve shall be operated by a 90º turn in clockwise direction with reverse turn for
closure and be capable of 360-swivel action.
The valves shall be of the low-pressure loss type.
The Valve Body shall be made from brass material and have the two-section type
with removable upper body. It shall be supplied with spring loaded locking cover
made from thermoplastic rubber. The cover spring shall be of stainless steel material.
Gate Valves
Gate valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 10 bar and
water operating temperature of 45° C.
Valves shall be the same size as the incoming line size with a clear waterway equal
to the full nominal diameter of the valves and shall be opened by turning
counterclockwise.
The operating nut or wheel shall have an arrow cast in valve indicating the direction
of opening.
Valves smaller than 3” shall be all bronze or brass conforming to BS 5154 with
screwed and connections. Valves 3” and larger shall be cast iron body, and shall
conform to BS 5150 with flange end connections.
Valve Boxes
The valve boxes shall have enclosures, which are injected molded polyofin plastic
with ultra violet additives, according to ASTM-D-V1248. It shall be light in weight with
reduced side angles and increased break resistance.
The valve box shall be non-conductive or sparking.
The valve boxes shall be available in sizes 910, 1015, 1320, 1324 depending on
installation requirements as per scope of work, specifications and drawings.
REGULAR CONTROLLERS AND CONTROL CABLES
Irrigation Control Cables
The irrigation control cables shall be used between the solenoid valves and the
irrigation controllers. The cables shall be of the single conductor type UF and they
shall be engineered for direct burial use.
The wires shall be of the solid or stranded construction with soft bare copper
conductor. They shall have extra heavy thickness of special polyvinyl chloride
insulation highly resistant to the saline, acid or alkaline contaminants.
The copper conductors of the wires shall meet the requirements of ASTM B-3, B-8.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-54/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
The thermoplastic insulation shall meet ASTM D-2219. All irrigation wires shall have
surface printing on insulation.
Irrigation Controllers
The controller shall be of a modular design with a standard 8-station model. There
shall be an insert able add-on 4 station and 8 station modules that enable the
controller to be customized from 8 stations up to 48 stations in 4 or 8 stations
increments.
The controller shall have three independent programs (A,B,C) with 8 start times per
program and one program (D) that can run concurrently with the other programs.
Watering time shall be available from 1 minute to 2 hours in 1-minute increment per
station in programs A, B and C and from 1 minute to 12 hours in program D.
The controller shall have 4 weekly schedule options to choose from: 7-day calendar,
31 days calendar, odd days programming and even days programming.
The controller shall also have a 365 days calendar clock to accommodate true odd
even watering. All programming shall be accomplished by use of a programming dial
and selection buttons with user feed back by LCD display.
The controller shall be equipped by a rain sensor.
The controller shall have a cycle and soak scheduling capability that allows a cycle to
be programmed for up to 60 minutes and a soak period up to 60 minutes.
The controller shall have a seasonal adjust feature that allows for station run times to
be changed from 10% to 150% in 10% increments to compensate for weather
changes.
The controller shall have automatic short circuit detection.
The controller shall be equipped with a programmable pump circuit that can activate
the pump start relay by zone. It shall have a programmable delay between valve
stations.
Programs backup shall be provided by a non-volatile memory circuit that will hold the
program, time and date indefinitely.
The controller shall have a Stainless Steel cabinet and it shall be pedestal mounted.
The pedestal shall be stainless steel.
The controller shall be compatible with a programming kit (SRP) that transfer the
irrigation program from a personal computer and upload them into the memory of the
controller.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-55/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
Automatic Filtration System
The filtration system shall consist of a disc filter Battery having 2 or more 4”units
depending on the flow and the water quality as specified on the drawings. Each unit
shall be capable to filter 120 gpm of average quality water.
Filtration unit shall have 5 Nos. 3” disc filter elements enclosed in Anodized
Aluminum Housing with Stainless steel Clamp and EPDM O-ring seals.
The filter elements shall be of the grooved disc design providing both surface and
depth filtration in a compact package.
The grooved discs shall be fitted on a spine in a way that when the filter fills with
filtrate the ring compress to prevent the outflow water. They shall be manufactured
and laser cut so the width of each groove shall be constant from inside to out.
The grooves in the disc shall be cut at an angle so that the grooves on the upper disc
shall intersect with those on the lower disc.
The filter battery shall be equipped with a fully automatic backwash mechanism
consisting of 4”x 3” backwash valves and a backwash controller.
The backwash system shall work on pressure differential and/or time.
The backwash valves shall be plastic that accepts victaulic connection.
During the backwash process the discs of the elements shall spin under the water
pressure coming out from the outlets of the spine to ensure complete cleaning of the
discs.
The filtration units shall be assembled on epoxy coated steel manifolds.
The maximum operating pressure shall be 10 bars and the minimum pressure at the
battery outlet shall be 3.5 bars
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-56/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
PART 3
3.01
SECTION 19
EXECUTION
PROTECTION
A. All materials shall be shipped or otherwise conveyed in such a manner as to
assure no damage. All boxes shall be securely sealed and clearly marked with
the name of the manufacturer. All pipes shall be protected from crimping,
crushing and splitting. All non-metallic system components shall be protected
from sunlight exposure as per the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Work and materials shall be protected from damage during storage, handling and
construction. Particularly, non-metallic pipes and fittings shall be protected from
direct sunlight during storage. Facilities of the necessary dimensions shall be provided and maintained for storage of all non-metallic irrigation materials in their
entirety. All non-metallic materials shall be handled carefully and stored under
cover to avoid damage. Pipes that have been damaged or dented will not be
used in this work.
C. In addition to the provisions for the protection of non-metallic components,
special attention shall be given to the protection of the control system components; protection shall be provided as per the manufacturer's written
recommendations.
D. Openings into the system, apparatus and equipment shall be securely covered,
both before and after being set in place, to prevent obstruction in the pipes and
the breakage, misuse or disfigurement of the apparatus or equipment.
E. Barricades, guards, warning signs and lights as necessary or required, for the
protection of the public and the work force shall be provided.
F. Utilities: The location of existing underground utilities shall be determined and the
works performed in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavation, as required shall be carried out to minimize the possibility of damage to
existing underground utilities.
3.02
PERFORMANCE
A. Layout and Verification
1. The Contractor shall stake-out the locations of all pipe and valves and the
layout of work as accurately as possible.
2. The Contractor shall verify all horizontal and vertical site dimensions prior to
staking.
3. The Contractor will be responsible for relocating any existing services after
first obtaining the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall remove and
relocate such services, at his own expense, if so directed by the Engineer.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-57/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
4. Before starting work on irrigation systems, the Contractor shall carefully check
all grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the
specified material depths.
5. Fittings installed on pipes beneath pavements or walls shall be shown on
drawings.
6. All changes shall be recorded daily on the " As-Built" worksheets.
3.03
INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall inspect all products for damage immediately before
installation. Any products that are found to be damaged or not in accordance with
the specifications shall immediately be repaired or removed from the site and
replaced. Repairs shall not be undertaken without the Engineer's approval of
Contractor's proposed action.
3.04
INSTALLATION
A. Excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with detail drawings.
B. In bedding and backfilling granular material shall be used below and above the
pipes. The back fill material shall be free of stones bigger than
C. Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance shall be in accordance with the
common civil works standards covering the concrete class, shattering work,
curing procedures etc.
D. All products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction
and the drawings.
E. Location of Irrigation Lines
1. Where the location of an irrigation line is not clearly dimensioned on the
Drawings, the irrigation line shall not be laid horizontally closer than 3.0
meters from a sewer.
2. However, where the bottom of the irrigation line will be at least 0.3 meters
above the top of the sewer pipe, the irrigation line shall not be laid closer
horizontally than 1.5 meters from the sewer.
3. Where irrigation lines cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe
shall be fully encased in concrete, for a distance of at least 3.0 meters each
side of the crossing or shall be made of pressure pipe with no joint located
within 1.0 meters horizontally of the crossing.
4. Irrigation lines shall, in all cases, cross 0.6 meter above sewage pressure
mains.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-58/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
5. Generally, where the irrigation distribution or secondary main with
accompanying cable bundle is running under hard surfaces or landscaped
areas the pipe and the cables will be directly buried in a clean sand bed with
a marker tape above. At road junctions or other locations where pipes cross
the road they shall be contained in a direct buried PVC sleeve. The sleeve
shall extend beyond the road crossing by at least one meter on both sides.
The sleeve shall be a minimum of 100 mm diameter, and for larger pipes will
be at least 25mm greater in diameter than the pipe running through it.
6. Header mains shall be direct buried in sand in the landscaped areas only.
F.
Placing and Laying
1. Pipes shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are otherwise
unsuitable for the work. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the material
in the joints has hardened or until caulking or jointing is completed. When
work is not in progress, open ends of the pipe, fittings, and valves shall be
securely closed so that no substance will enter the pipes or fittings.
2. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged or capped, and
anchored, as shown or as directed. Pipes that have the grade or joint
disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relaid.
3. All piping with the exception of the flexible irrigation drip line shall be
surrounded by a sand bed to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings.
G.
Plastic Pipes
It shall be installed in accordance with BS 8010: Part 1 and the Manufacturer's
recommendations. Pipes with threaded joints shall be snaked from side to side of the
trench to allow for expansion and contraction.
H.
Jointing
1. Pipe joints of uPVC shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of
the manufacturer. Excess jointing material shall be removed.
2. uPVC male adaptors with specified threaded joint compounds to make
connections between plastic pipe and valves shall be used as detailed, and
tightened with light wrench pressure.
I.
Concrete thrust blocks shall be constructed on main pipelines at all changes in
direction or size. The thrust blocks shall be un-reinforced concrete and shall
have a minimum dimension of 300 mm. The pipelines shall be located centrally
in the thrust blocks.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-59/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
J. Irrigation piping from the remote control valve boxes to the end of the irrigation
drip lines shall be buried to the depths as shown on the Drawings.
K. Closing of Pipe and Flushing Lines
1. Closing: Openings in piping systems shall be capped or plugged, leaving
caps and plugs in place until removal is necessary for completion of the
installation. Dirt and debris shall be prevented from entering pipe or
equipment.
2. Flushing: All pipes and tubing shall be thoroughly flushed out before
installation of the emitter control valves. Butt joints, fittings and connections
shall remain visible.
L. Tagging and Identification: All remote control valves, motor-operated valves,
pressure reducing valves, manually-operated gate valves and controllers shall be
tagged and identified. All identifying numbers shall be consistent with like
designations indicated on the irrigation controller schedule.
M. Site Equipment Installation
1. Isolation Valve/Gate Valve: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated
on Drawings.
2. Remote Control Valve Assembly: Shall be installed in the positions as
indicated in the details, remote control valve assembly comprising gate valve,
remote control valve with pressure regulator , and all appurtenances. Valve
boxes containing the assembly shall not be placed closer than 300mm to
paved areas. When the pressure gauge has been properly attached, the
outlet pressure shall be set as required during coverage tests.
3. Valve Boxes: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated on Drawings.
All valves and valve assemblies shall be mounted in boxes as detailed.
a. The top of all boxes shall be set parallel with the grade and as detailed in
a neat and orderly fashion.
b. Shall be placed parallel to paving, kerbs, walls or similar structures and
where more than one box, parallel to each other.
c. All box locations shall be reviewed with the Engineer prior to installation of
valves.
d. Valve boxes shall not rest on or come in contact with the valve, piping,
hose or conduit.
e. Valve circuit number of the remote control valve shall be painted on rim of
box, such that:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-60/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
i. Minimum height of letters and numerals - 38 mm.
ii. Black enamel paint.
iii. It shall be located on inlet side of box with bottom of letter aligned with
outer edge of box.
iv. A soak away 500 mm deep shall be provided under all valve boxes
using clean crushed aggregate 20 - 30 mm nominal size.
N. Control System
1. Irrigation Controller
a. An irrigation controller shall be installed in locations approved by the
Engineer, with the control cables, clearly marked with identification
markers, attached to the appropriate terminals in the approved manner.
b. Shall be secure to a concrete pad with approved anchor bolts. Chipping,
cracking, or otherwise marring the finish of enclosure when securing to
the concrete pad shall be avoided.
c. Programming of Irrigation Controller: Using the controller schedule
provided on the drawings, as a guide, the irrigation controller shall be
programmed to correspond with the initial irrigation sequencing and
duration of the cycles for each zone. The Contractor may find that during
establishment and maintenance the schedule has to be modified to
achieve a correct irrigation regime in accordance with good horticultural
practice.
O. Irrigation - Electrical
1. The Contractor shall provide, install, test and commission all items of
electrical equipment associated with the irrigation systems.
2. All electrical works shall be in accordance with the BS and IEC, and as further
specified in Sections under Division 16.
3. The irrigation system shall commence at the controllers which shall be fitted
into a dwarf type distribution cabinet with solar shade and shall have a bolting
down foot for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base. All incoming and
outgoing cables shall be from below ground level. The cabinet shall have a
hinged lockable opening door to provide full front access to the controller and
equipment and shall be sized according to the equipment being installed.
4. All equipment, conductors, termination, etc., within the pillar and throughout
the irrigation system generally shall be fully insulated such that there are no
live parts or connections exposed and shall be to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-61/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
5. The irrigation pillar shall have sufficient free space for fitting a kWh meter
together with any additional equipment or accessories required to complete
the equipment.
6. Each irrigation pillar shall have permanently fixed on the inside of the door, a
distribution diagram showing all circuits connections, ratings, cable sizes, etc.,
together with a current controller schedule.
7. All terminals shall be of the crimped spade type with insulated grip. At all
connection locations 150 mm of "slack" shall be provided.
8. Conductor markers shall be used throughout which shall clearly indicate the
circuit reference or number. These shall be white plastic with black letters or
numbers and of the type which acts as a sleeve over the conductor insulation.
9. Connections onto valves shall be made in a below ground PVC resin filled
molded waterproof connector with integral wire clamp.
P.
Drip Line/Soft line Testing
1. Drip lines shall be carefully uncoiled and laid in position without kinking. Any
kinked section shall be cut from the line and subsequently rejoined with a line
joiner section.
2. Drip lines shall be snaked as required for maximum coverage without the use
of compression fittings. Sharp bends shall be avoided where there is a
likelihood of causing kinks in the line.
3. Drip lines shall be laid on the ground surface for a minimum of 48 hours prior
to the installation of irrigation emitters or stakes.
4. After this period the drip lines shall be realigned and secured to the ground
with stakes at 5 m intervals.
Q. Concrete Pads
1. Installation as detailed and where shown on the Drawings.
2. The exact location shall be confirmed to the Engineer prior to pouring.
3. Specified non-metallic conduit shall be provided as required to penetrate
boxes and enclosures as approved by the Engineer.
4. The anchor bolts shall be set in coordination with enclosure hole locations.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-62/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
R. Pumps
1. Installation
a. Installation shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein.
2. Fabrication
a. All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same manufacturer
shall be interchangeable.
b. Whenever possible, the pump shall be manufactured such that it shall be
possible to disassemble the rotor assembly with minimum disassembly of
other parts, such as suction and discharge nozzles, bearing supports, etc.
c. All castings shall be clean without defect. Casting repairs shall be done
only after agreement is reached between the Engineer and the
Contractor.
d. All foundry and machine work shall be in accordance with good practice
for the class of work involved.
e. All parts shall conform to the required dimensions and shall be free from
defects that will prevent proper functioning of the pump.
f.
Assembly of parts shall be well fitted and smoothly operating.
g. All internal parts, such as impeller, requiring surface treatment shall be
sprayed with PVC epoxy primer in accordance with pump manufacturer's
standard practice.
h. Pump exterior shall be sprayed with PVC epoxy primer and shall be
painted to meet specific application requirements in accordance with
pump manufacturer's standard practice.
3. Shop Testing
a. Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with BS 5316.
In addition, each pump shall be tested at five points of operation from
shut-off head to run out condition, including the guaranteed pump's
performance point.
b. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design
pressure. There shall be no leakage during the one-hour test period.
c. The Contractor shall submit Manufacturer's test certificates, including test
data to show that pump meets performance specifications.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-63/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
3.05 SYSTEM TESTING
A. Purging
1. Immediately prior to hydrostatic testing, all irrigation lines shall be thoroughly
purged of all entrapped air.
2. Mainline piping system may be tested in sections. Lateral Systems shall be
tested valve by valve.
3. Water shall be discharged from a single outlet by manipulation of isolation
control valves and installation of temporary caps.
4. Water shall be introduced into lines to be tested at full operating head and the
water flow at end discharge point, and observed until all air and residual
debris has been expelled from the line.
B. Initial System Test
1. Individual parts of the main network between isolation valve points having a
length not greater than 500 meters shall be tested together with dead legs
before backfilling operation.
2. Test shall be made only after completion of the above operations and not until
at least seven days after the last concrete thrust anchor block has been cast.
3. Contractor shall supply all testing material and equipment, including all caps,
valves, pumps, tanks and gauges as required.
4. Pressure gauges shall be dual reading in bar and psi units. Calibration shall
be such that accurate determination of potential pressure loss can be
ascertained.
5. The section of the main pipeline to be tested shall be filled with potable water
and all air expelled. After the main pipeline has been completely filled, the
pressure shall be steadily and gradually increased until the specified test
pressure has been reached. Simultaneous pressure and leakage tests and
separate pressure test shall be made at 150 % of working pressure at the
point of test, but not less than 125% of normal working pressure at highest
elevation. Separate elevation test shall be made at 150 % of normal working
pressure of the segment tested. Duration of simultaneous pressure and
leakage tests shall be 2 hours and duration of separate pressure tests shall
be 1 hour. All testing shall comply with AWWA M23-80, Polyvinyl Chloride
Pipe Design and Installation. A graph shall be produced showing water input
against time and the test shall run until the graph curve flattens out. Testing
shall comply with AWWA specifications and requirements.
6. Separate tests shall be applied to the lateral distribution pipe work and the
irrigation pipe work from the remote control valves outwards. Test pressures
for these shall be as described above.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-64/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
7. When testing the irrigation lines from the valves, discharge devices shall be
replaced with temporary plugs or caps.
8. All trenches with pipe installed shall be immediately backfilled with preliminary
sand backfill sufficient to prevent arching or slipping under pressure. All joints,
fittings and connections are to remain exposed until successful completion of
hydrostatic testing.
9. Other than for preliminary sand backfill over pipes, no work shall be covered
before it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer.
10. During the tests, all exposed couplings, fittings and valves shall be carefully
examined for defects and leakage. Leaking pipes, couplings, joints, fittings
and equipment shall be repaired or replaced and the section retested as
previously specified.
11. Upon receipt of approval of the Engineer to proceed, the remaining backfill
shall be placed and compacted to ninety percent (90%) of maximum dry
density. For further details refer to Section 02221 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, COMPACTION AND GENERAL GRADING.
C. Final System Test: The tests as specified above shall be repeated for the entire
network after pipelines have been backfilled, cleaned and inspected. Each test
shall be restricted to pipes of one class and particular care shall be taken to
isolate air valves, etc. and not to apply higher pressures than specified at any
point on the pipeline and to ensure that the pipelines are adequately anchored
before any test is carried out.
D. Test Results: Written records of every test clearly identifying the tested section
of the pipe together with time of test and name of testing engineer in tabulated
format shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer upon
completion of the tests.
3.06
FLUSHING
A. General: On completion of the system test, the system is to be thoroughly
flushed, the velocity of water being at least 1 m/s. Should the main water supply
be unavailable or inadequate for this purpose at the time of flushing, then a swab
of adequate size shall be used to remove all foreign matter from the pipeline. This
process shall continue until the pipeline is completely clean. Each control valve
shall be opened separately and the terminal systems also thoroughly flushed.
After completion of flushing, the emitters and other discharge devices shall be
fitted.
B. Operation Test: After the hydrostatic test, emitters shall be installed and the
system completed and tested to demonstrate functional efficiency. This shall be
prior to covering the laterals with mulch.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-65/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 19
C. The lines shall be operated for a period of 24 hours, not necessarily in one
continuous period, and all emitters checked for satisfactory operation. Any
faulty/blocked emitters shall be replaced.
3.07
IRRIGATION TANK
Irrigation water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply
strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. The following
tank may be used:
Reinforced Concrete Storage Tank
The following design criteria shall be observed during construction:
a. There shall be one manhole to be positioned as follows:
 One will be located in such a position to have easy access to the float
valve.
b. Stainless steel or GRP ladder shall be provided for access to the tank.
c. Vent pipe with insect guard shall be provided.
d. Water level controls(low level electric float switches interlocked) for pumps
shall be provided.
e. In case of overflow, warning system shall be provided either by level switch or
by other approved means.
f. Manholes shall be provided with at least 100mm upstaged concrete and
double sealed to prevent leakage.
g. Isolating stop-valves shall be provided in the supply and delivery lines
h. Approved non-toxic epoxy coating, resisting fungus growth shall be used on
all internal surfaces.
i. Approved tanking membrane for water tightness shall be used on external
surfaces.
The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on the
drawing. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which supports the whole of the tank.
The details of the tank base are to be approved by the Consultant before any
installation work begins.
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
IRRITROL
RAIN BIRD
HUNTER
TOURO
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-19-66/66
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION – 20
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
SL. NO.
TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
20.1.00
DRAINAGE GENERAL
20.1.01
Site
20.1.02
Site Conditions
20.1.03
Definitions
20.1.04
Scope of Works
20.1.05
Compliance with Specifications and Regulations
20.1.06
Drainage System
20.1.07
Programme
20.1.08
Contract Drawings
20.1.09
Working Drawings
20.1.10
Co-ordination of Drawings
20.1.11
Material Submittals
20.1.12
Material Inspection
20.1.13
Alternative Materials
20.1.14
Setting Out of Works
20.1.15
Safety
20.1.16
Contractor’s License
20.1.17
Permits
20.1.18
Damage to Plant and Materials
20.1.19
Protective Finishes
20.1.20
Works Test and Certificate
20.1.21
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
20.1.22
As Built Drawings
20.1.23
Period of Maintenance
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-1/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
20.2.00
DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK
20.2.01
Pipes and Fittings
20.2.02
Above Ground Pipes
20.2.03
Below Ground Pipes
20.2.04
External Drainage Pipes
20.2.05
Pipes and Fittings, Installation and Inspection
20.2.06
Manholes
20.2.07
Sump Pumps
20.2.08
Manhole Covers and Gully Gratings
20.2.09
Grease Interceptors
20.2.10
Protection of Drainage Pipes
20.2.11
Testing and Commissioning
20.2.12
Schedule of Approved Manufacturers
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-2/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
20.1.01
SECTION 20
SITE
The Pearl, Doha, Qatar
20.1.02
SITE CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all the Drainage Materials & Equipment shall be capable
of withstanding the following site conditions:
1. Maximum Ambient
Temperature
:
50 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in summer
& 8 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in winter
2. Altitude
:
Sea Level
3. Maximum Relative Humidity
:
95 %
4. Maximum Wind Velocity
:
140 Kms. per Hour
5. Prevailing Wind
:
North and northwesterly
6. Storms
:
Dusty Sporadic and Irregular
7. Annual Rainfall
:
50mm between January & April
20.1.03
DEFINITIONS
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:
Site
:
The Locations where the works are to be
carried out.
KAHRAMAA
:
Qatar general electricity and water corperation
KAHRAMAA Regulations
:Regulations issued by the KAHRAMAA regarding the
installation of Electrical equipment, Wiring & Air
conditioning of residential and commercial Buildings.
BS
:
British Standard Specifications
CP
:
British Standard Code of Practice
Tender Drawing
:
The Drawing on which the tender is based and the
schedules therein.
QCS
:
Qatar Construction Specifications
Working Drawings
:
The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the
purpose of execution of work at site.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-3/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
As Built Drawings
:
This is the true record of the actual work carried out at
site.
Works
:
To include the provisions for all the materials and
works to be carried out by the contractor as per these
specifications and for the satisfactory completion of the
installation.
Approved
:
Shall mean APPROVED by the consultant in writing.
Submitted
:
Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant in writing.
Accepted
:
Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant in writing.
Provide
:
Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission.
Install
:
Shall mean install, test and commission.
Furnish
:
Shall mean supply only.
Concealed
:
Shall mean hidden from normal sight in the shafts,
ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions.
Exposed
:
Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces,
which may be reached without the use of ladders or
any other temporary means of access.
20.1.04
SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works consists of furnishing, installing, commissioning and testing the
complete foul, waste and storm water drainage systems along with all associated
manholes, and soakaways as indicated on the contract drawings, and in accordance
with this specification and the requirements of section 20 of the QCS and shall be
installed to BSEN 752-3 : 1997.
The contractor shall provide all supervision, labour, materials, equipment, machinery
and any other items necessary to complete the systems in all respects.
The drainage system shall include the following:
1. ESVC buried system as shown on drawing and specified elsewhere.
2. UPVC soil, waste, vent, rainwater pipes as shown on drawing and specified
elsewhere.
3. Floor drains, floor gullies, gully traps, overflows, bottle traps as shown on
drawings and specification
4. Manhole, Soakaways, Manhole Covers, Gully Grating, Steps, grease
interceptor and submersible pumps
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-4/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
20.1.05
SECTION 20
COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS
The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition.
The contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and non-skilled labour to
complete the works in accordance with the program of works.
The installations shall comply with the following regulations:
i.
The installation of works shall be as per the latest edition and publication of
Sewerage Division, Civil Engineering Department, Ministry of Public Works, State
of Qatar.
ii.
The equipments shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes of
practice (current editions including all amendments).
iii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipment other than
the specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approval
from the consultant shall be obtained. However the consultant reserves the right
for such approval/s.
iv. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings
but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or
work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready
for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or
carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.
Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any such cases
at the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the
construction, the consultant’s decision shall be final and binding on all such
matters.
Applicable Standards:
1. All Local Codes
2. National Standard Plumbing Code
3. NSF National Sanitation Foundation
4. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
5. ASSE (American sociaty of safety engineers)
20.1.06
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
The Drainage system includes various UPVC pipeworks including all the necessary
fittings and fixtures for the safe disposal of Soil, Waste and Rain Water from the
project site, along with the provisions of various Manholes, and Sewer pump station,
finally connected to the Municipal Drainage and Disposal system available in the
vicinity and Soakaways can’t be connected to Municipal line it can be discharged at a
specified flow rate only.
The scheme for the drainage system is detailed and provided in the Contract
drawings for handling and disposal of:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-5/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
a) Soil Water
b) Waste Water
c) Rain Water
20.1.07
PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method
or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to
complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the
Program:
1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of accessories
9. Testing
10. Commissioning and Handing Over
20.1.08
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The Drainage tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the
Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have
been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general
arrangement required for the project.
These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractor’s
responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative
and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings.
Any
discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the consultant in writing at the time of
tender.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of Floor Gullies, Drains and other
accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances.
The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the
local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders’ work associated with
these drawings.
20.1.09
WORKING DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5 for
details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultant’s approval. The
contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-6/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
i.
Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and
other accessories and fittings.
ii
Typical connection details of the various drainage systems of appliances, like
Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc.,
iii Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect
to the other services Installations like, Electrical, Air-conditioning & Ventilation
and Plumbing.
iv. Levels, Center Lines and Slopes/Gradients of the pipework installations.
20.1.10
CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS
The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical,
Plumbing and Drainage systems.
The Main contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.
20.1.11
MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.
The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for the necessary
review and approval.
If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted: in
the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.
In case of items involving aesthetic, like Floor Gullies, Floor Clean Outs, Manhole
covers (if located Inside of Building) etc., samples must be submitted for approval
along with the materials submittals.
Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the
equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either
Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.
The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the
Materials submittals of the Drainage Materials & Equipment in the following proforma
to the consultant:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-7/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
i. Submittal Number
ii. Type of Material
iii. Manufacturer / Local Agent
iv. Date of Approval
v. Date of Order / Order Number
vi. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )
vii. ETA on Site
viii. Status as on date of Report
a. Equipment Supply
All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. above).
In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,
then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from
the consultant specifically.
b. Equipment Size and Delivery
Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations
in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction
program and the method of access.
c. Design References
Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires
amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturer’s range of production or availability etc., The contractor
shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the
Consultant. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the
Consultant’s advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.
In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed
to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.
20.1.12
MATERIAL INSPECTION
The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used
at site, which is not approved earlier specifically, shall stand rejected without notice.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-8/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or
the sample submitted will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall
make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Consultant. Any
time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractor’s account.
The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and
debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.
Materials Storage
The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the
materials at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that
on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective
finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be
strictly as per QCS, section 20 Part – 6.1.5.
20.1.13
ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
Equipment and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturer’s. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the
equipment or material for the Consultant’s consideration. Only in case if the
specified item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the
alternatives will be considered by the Consultant, before the tender is accepted and
the Consultant’s decision will be final regarding the matter.
In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed
in writing by the Consultant. During the execution of the contract, no alternative
equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the
contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the
specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not
permit, then such replacements shall be at the client’s convenience, but nevertheless
at the Contractor’s expenses etc.
20.1.14
SETTING OUT OF WORKS
The location of Floor Drains/Gullies, routes, Manholes etc., as indicated on the
tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site
requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed
working drawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and coordinated with furnishing and other services.
20.1.15
SAFETY
The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect manpower
and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-9/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipment at
any point of time.
20.1.16
CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE
The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage
works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.
The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Mechanical Engineer, Foreman and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the
project and obtain approval from the consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the
contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes
necessary, re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the
old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site.
In such cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years
local experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience will be
rejected by the consultant.
20.1.17
PERMITS
The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of
7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for
obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for
any connected works to others.
20.1.18
DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS
Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used
in the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the
plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the
attention of the consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the
necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from
the consultant shall any remedial work be carried out.
Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a “as-new” condition following
such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of
the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.
20.1.19
PROTECTIVE FINISHES
The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipment used in this
contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climatic
conditions.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-10/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before
shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.
20.1.20
WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION
Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Consultant or Consultant’s
representative to witness hydraulic tests as specified elsewhere, of major pipe work
executed by the contractor.
The Consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the
contract the list of works that to be inspected and the contractor shall give the
Consultant the required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which
the plant will be ready for testing.
The Consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test
certificates in original to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the
project.
20.1.21
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents for the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Step by step operating procedures.
Preventive maintenance schedule.
Technical literature.
Spare parts list
Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. telephone no., and
contact person. - Local as well as overseas.
f. Work test certificates, if any.
g. Routine Test results carried out at site.
20.1.22
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings which are to
be submitted to the Consultant within one month of completion of the project.
Two sets of process negatives & CD’s along with three sets of drawings shall be
submitted after approval of the Consultant for onward submission to the client.
20.1.23
PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire Drainage System installed against Faulty /
improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-11/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
(Four Hundred) from the date of final handing over and the installation is tested,
commissioned and accepted by the Consultant. Also where longer guarantee or
warranty periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or materials such longer
terms shall apply.
The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states
that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the
period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of
notification at no additional cost to the contract.
In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within
the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault
but nevertheless at the Contractor’s expense.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-12/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
20.2.00
DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK
20.2.01
PIPES AND FITTINGS
All uPVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured under a BS 5750 and BS 5572, to
BS 4514 for Internal above ground, and BS 4660 for the internal under ground
installations, and shall comprise the whole range of integrated system of same
manufacturer allowing the easy plumbing of an installation.
All external under ground pipes shall be uPVC and manufactured under BS
standards.
The system shall comply with appropriate British Standards and bear the Kitemark.
20.2.02
ABOVE GROUND PIPES
Soil, Waste and Overflow Systems
Reference should be made to the following Codes and Standards:
BS 3943 : 1979
BS 4514 : 1983
BS 5254 : 1976
BS 5255 : 1976
BS 5572 : 1978
CP312
: 1973
Specification for plastic waste traps
Unplasticised PVC soil and ventilating pipe fittings and
accessories.
Polypropylene waste pipe and fittings
Plastic waste pipe and fittings
Code of Practice for Sanitary pipework
(formerly CP 304)
Plastic pipework (Thermoplastic material) Part 1 & 2
Materials and colour : pipes and fittings shall be in uPVC in gray, white or rustic
brown.
Socketed fittings shall be solvent-welded with plain ended pipes.
expansion joints shall be provided where required.
Seal ring
The system shall be compatible with buried drain system. Weathering Apron
(solvent-weld socket) shall be solvent-welded to the soil, waste, vent pipes for
weather flashing around pipe at roof.
Adjustable, plastic coated steel holderbats shall be used to support pipes or secure
fittings. Galvanized mild steel support bracket with packing piece shall be used for
horizontal pipes. Smaller pipes and fittings shall be secured to wall by zinc-plated
steel brackets.
Floor gully inlet shall be in uPVC with stainless steel / bronze covers.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-13/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
20.2.03
SECTION 20
BELOW GROUND PIPES
20.2.03.1 Vitrified Clay (VC) Pipes and Fittings for Buried Drainage System
A. All underground drainage pipes are to be 150 mm ESVC, Extra Strength Vitrified
Clay Pipe conforming to BS EN 295, 1991 unless otherwise specified. Pipes shall
have spigot and socket joints complying with the relevant provisions of BS
EN295. Joints shall have elastomeric joint seals. Complying with the relevant
provision of ISO 4633 or, BS 2494 (Type D) and shall be obtained from the pipe
manufacturer. For pipes up to 150 mm diameter, push-fit (sleeve type)
polypropylene flexible couplings may be used in place of spigot and socket joints.
All other requirements related to the manufacture, inspection and testing of
vitrified clay pipes shall be in accordance with the relevant provision of Section 8,
Sewerage.
B. Pipes up to and including 450mm diameter shall be "Extra Strength" and pipes
above 450mm diameter shall be "Super Strength" as specified in Table 3 of BS
65.
C. Pipes shall be supplied with an approved rubber ring joint and shall have clearly
defined indelible marks to show their Class. Except on the approval of the
Engineer's Representative pipes shall not exceed 1.2m in length exclusive of the
depth of any socket.
D. All materials used shall be obtained from one manufacturer only. The integration
of any materials from different manufacturers shall not be acceptable.
20.2.05
PIPES AND FITTINGS, INSTALLATIONS AND INSPECTION
A. Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers
All pipework shall be adequately supported in such manner as to permit free
movement due to expansion contraction, vibration or other changes in the system.
Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction.
Spacing of supports shall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS
5572 : 1978 Code of Practice for sanitary pipework.
Vertical stacks shall be adequately supported at the base to stand the total weight of
the riser. Under no circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipes be the
means of support for the vertical pipework.
High temperature UPVC waste pipework 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm shall be
supported using two piece holderbats screwed to the wall using round head zinc
plated wood screws.
Brackets shall be galvanized steel and be rigid. Where soil and ventilation pipes are
suspended from the underside of slab, they shall be held rigid in position. Single
angle iron supports may be used for pipework up to 500 mm from underside of slab.
Double angle iron supports shall be used for pipework 500 mm, 1000 mm from the
underside of the slab. All supports shall be proprietary brand and manufactured from
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-14/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
galvanized steel. Double angle iron braces shall be installed on both single and
double angle iron supports at 6 metre centres of vertical and horizontal runs of
pipework and anchored as necessary.
B. Rodding Eyes
Rodding and cleaning eyes shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings
and as required.
C. Roof Termination
All soil ventilation pipes shall terminate 300 mm above the point of exit from the
services duct.
D. Jointing
Jointing of UPVC shall be fusion welded. Prior to jointing all pipework fittings and
accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned. Pipework shall be cut square, end
chamfered and swarf and dust removed. Prior to jointing pipes and fitting should be
checked for correct position and alignment and marked to ensure accurate
assembly.
Jointing of W.C outlet to UPVC pipework shall be by means of either a straight or
bent connector as required complete with rubber seal ring and suitable connection
for W.C spigot outlet.
E. Laying Rigid Pipe
Each pipe immediately before being laid shall be carefully brushed out and inspected
for defects.
Pipes with flexible joints, except concrete protection is provided as specified
hereafter shall be laid on a well compacted bed of granular bedding material
extending for the full width of the trench and with sufficient material at the side to
permit the pipes to be worked into the granular material and firmly supported to true
line and level. Sufficient space should be left to enable the joints to be made tested
and inspected but the contractor shall ensure that at least three quarters of the pipe
length is fully supported. After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the
Consultant the trench shall be carefully filled to 300 mm above the crown of the pipe
with granular material.
F. Laying Plastic Pipe
All operations involving the laying, bedding, jointing, backfilling etc., of pipes plastic
materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
subject to the approval of the Consultant.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-15/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
G. Setting Out and Pipe Alignment
All pipes and pipelines shall be laid to the lines and depths shown on the drawings or
as otherwise directed by the Consultant.
All pipelines shall be laid accurately to line and gradient so that, except where
otherwise specified, the finished pipeline is in a straight line in both horizontal and
vertical planes. Where shown on the drawings or other wise permitted by the
consultant small changes of direction shall be achieved by deflection at joints within
the maximum permitted by the manufacturer. Where the angle of the bend required
is greater than that obtainable by joint deflection then manufactured bends of the
appropriate degree shall be used. Manufactured bends shall only be used where
shown on the drawings or where otherwise permitted by the Consultant.
All pipelines forming part of a drainage system shall be laid to the specified line and
levels so that every pipeline lies in straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes
between successive manholes on the line. No bends will be permitted other than at
manholes.
Every pipe shall placed in position individually and shall be set out accurately to the
line and level required. All setting out to line and level of both pipelines and
individual pipes shall be achieved by methods approved by the Consultant.
Where pipelines of constant gradient are to be laid the contractor shall provide, fix
and maintain at such points as may be directed by the Consultant properly painted
sight rails and boning rods of pre-determined measurement for the boning in of
individual pipes to correct alignment. The sight rails shall be situated vertically over
the line of pipes or immediately adjacent to and there shall at no time be less than
three sight rails in position on each length of pipeline under construction to any other
gradient.
If the contractor wishes to propose an alternative method of controlling pipeline
alignment, he shall submit his proposed method to the Consultant for approval.
INSPECTIONS
Written notice on prescribed form shall be given for the purpose of inspection,
measurement and testing for each of the following cases :
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Setting out completed
Excavations completed
Beddings Laid
Drainage Laid and ready for testing
Drainage bedding cover complete and compacted
Backfilling complete and compacted with ground level finish complete and ready
for final testing.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-16/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
20.2.06
SECTION 20
MANHOLES
CEMENT AND CONCRETE
A.
Cement
All cement used in all classes of concrete for drainage and sewerage works whether
above or below ground level shall be sulphate resistant cement complying with BS
4027.
Cement mortar shall consist of sulphate-resisting cement and sand gauged by
volume in suitable boxes in the proportions given in Section 20 of QCS.
Unless otherwise specified cement mortar shall be SRC Class No. 1.
The ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or
shall be mixed together dry on a clean wooden stage until the mix is homogeneous
in colour. Water shall then be added through a rose in sufficient quantity to give no
more than stiff workability. The whole shall then be turned until perfectly mixed.
Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing and shall not be remixed or worked
up again after it has stiffened. Any mortar that has commenced to set shall be
removed from the works.
Rendering to manhole benching shall comprise a 12 mm thick layer of approved
epoxy mortar.
MANHOLES
A. General
Manholes shall be provided at all changes in direction gradient or diameter.
The manholes shall be of the sizes and grades indicated on the Contract drawings
and fully comply with CED regulations and QCS Section 20.
B. Blockwork Manholes
Blockwork manholes shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to
the dimensions indicated on Drawings or as directed on site by the Consultant.
The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphate
resisting cement and shall comply with the requirements of QCS Section 20-5-1.
Hollow concrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-17/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
Each manhole shall be built on a minimum of 75 mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25
concrete which shall be laid on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsound
material. If the bed of the excavation is wet the top surface of the blinding shall be
coated with an approved waterproofing material.
Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ Mass concrete foundation, slabs shall be
of concrete Grade SRC 20. Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of
concrete Grade SRC 30.
Internal and external faces of the blockwork walls shall be finished with 12 mm thick
SRC mortar rendering Class 1.
All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel
fittings shall be painted with one primer coat and tow final coats of black bitumen
coating water proofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or equal and approved.
All exterior faces of manhole chambers shall be protected with 1000 gauge
polythene membrane with hardboard protection against damage during backfilling.
Where indicated on the Drawings, manhole cover frames shall be supported on solid
precast concrete bricks, manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete.
Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where manhole accesses opening are less
than the internal dimensions of the manhole chamber.
The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile or cast iron manhole covers and frames
of the quality specified. The covers in roads and paved areas shall be accurately set
on precast concrete brick-work to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.
Manhole inverts shall be constructed of half section vitrified clay channels. Half
section vitrified clay channel branch bends shall be used for branch connections.
Benching in manholes shall be carefully formed according to the number, diameter
and positions of the incoming and outgoing pipes. The benching in the manholes
shall have vertical sides extending from the vitrified clay channels at least to the level
of the crown of the highest pipe. The benchings shall be sloped towards the
channels at a gradient of 1 in 10 or as otherwise detailed on the drawings.
The benching shall be rendered with a 12 mm thickness of epoxy mortar rendering.
The ends of all pipes entering and leaving the manhole are to carefully cut to shape
to suit the internal dimensions of the manholes, and shall project through on the
inside, the benching being continued round the pipe to form a fillet.
20.2.07
SUMP PUMP
Electric submersible sewerage pumps shall be suitable for wet sump or dry pit
installation and for intermittent or continuous operation.
Pump shall be suitable for a maximum depth of submersion of 10 M with the outlet
directed vertically upwards.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-18/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
Motor shall be of the synchronous squirrel cage type IP 68 rating, hermetically
enclosed within the stator housing. Stator shall be wound with double lacquered wire
and subsequently triple dipped to provide insulation in accordance with IEC 85
temperature class “F” (155 deg. C) Stator winding over temperature shall be
prevented by bimetallic thermal switches or thermistors embedded in each of the
stator phase windings. Motor shall be designed for a maximum of 15 starts/hour.
Cable entry glands shall be suitable designed to effectively seal the junction box
from the surrounding liquid at depths up to 10 mtrs and to mechanically restrain the
cable to avoid distortion of the gland rubbers and to prevent kinking of the cable
adjacent to the cable entry.
Motor shaft shall be stainless steel and mounted on robust pre greased rolling
element bearings. The shaft seal assembly shall comprise of two independent
mechanical face seals mounted in tandem with an interposing oil chamber to cool
the seals and to act as an additional leakage barrier. Seal combination shall be high
wear resistant tungsten carbide.
Motor and pump casing constructed of cast iron.
Pump casing shall be smooth profiled volute geometry for clog free operation fitted
with replaceable inlet wear rings.
Impeller shall be dynamically balanced screw depending on the pump selection and
duty specified.
Pump set shall be supplied with a control panel complete with breakers, fuses
starters duty/standby pump selector switch, pump on/off/fault indicator lights, auto
change over facility etc. Panel enclosure shall be to IP 65.
Pump operation shall be automatic controlled through float switches installed in the
sewage collection pit.
Pumps shall be supplied with all accessories including foot bends, guide rails
stainless steel lifting chains, float switches etc.
20.2.08
MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY GRATINGS
Manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1976 and shall be of the sizes
and types as shown on the contract drawings.
In general, manhole covers and frames shall be one of three types, as follows unless
otherwise specified.
Heavy Duty to BS 497 Grade A
Medium Duty to BS 497 Grade B
Light Duty to BS 497 Grade C
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-19/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
Heavy Duty
All manholes installed in roadways or trafficked areas shall be heavy to BS 497
Grade A. Reference M.A 60.
The cover and frame shall be made from ductile iron and the cover shall be of the
loosely-bolted double triangular type with three point suspension to provide stability
under load.
Medium Duty
All manholes installed external to buildings, but not in roadways or trafficked areas,
shall be medium duty to BS 497 Grade B1.
The over and frame shall be of grey or ductile iron and the cover shall be either
rectangular or circular as specified in the Manhole Schedule. Such manholes shall
incorporate a single seal between cover and frame. Following flushing out and
testing of the drainage system, the sealing groove shall be filled with grease to
provide an airtight seal.
Light Duty
All manholes installed within buildings and not subject to motor vehicles or industrial
trolleys etc. shall be light duty to BS 497 Grade C of the lockable type
The cover and frame shall be made from grey iron and shall incorporate a double
seal between cover and frame. Following out and testing of the drainage system,
the sealing grooves shall be filled with grease to provide an airtight seal.
In those areas where it is required to accept a tilled floor finish, the manhole covers
shall be of the recessed type. In kitchens or other areas subject to washing-down
manhole covers and frames shall have stainless steel edging and trim. Double cover
units shall be provided where specified in the Manhole schedule.
The contractor shall provide two sets of lifting key for each type of manhole.
Manhole covers and frames shall be as approved.
Step Irons
Step irons shall be manufactured from galvanized malleable cast iron and shall
comply with BS 1247 – 3 : 1991 - BSEN 13101 : 2002 and be of the general purpose
or precast concrete manhole pattern as applicable.
The tail length shall be 230 mm for both manhole types.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-20/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2.09
SECTION 20
GREASE INTERCEPTORS
The construction of Grease Interceptors shall be in accordance with BS : 8007,
1987. All cement shall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS :4027, 1980. All
reinforced concrete base slab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade
25 concrete and comply with BS:8110, Part 1, 1985.
The grease interceptors shall be constructed to take into account the ground
conditions, strictly in accordance with the structural engineering details.
Grease interceptor tank shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy
(2 coats) and externally with one coat of bituminous emulsion paint. A 600x600-mm
access manholes shall be provided at the end, with heavy duty manhole covers as
detailed in the schedule of manholes. Galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall
be provided at 300 mm centers both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450
mm below cover level. The inlet and outlet foul sewer shall be cast iron and have a
puddle flange located within the holding tank wall. The inlet shall be via a cast iron
inlet tee complete with access cap.
20.2.10
PROTECTION OF DRAINAGE PIPES
A. Concrete Protection to Pipelines
All underground drainage pipework shall be surrounded with 150 mm thick Grade
SRC 20 sulphate resisting concrete, along its entire length in the following locations:
1. All drainage below buildings or structural elements
2. All drainage with less than 600 mm cover.
3. Drainage with a cover of between 600 mm and 1200 mm where there is
vehicular traffic over the ground above the drain line.
4. Elsewhere as indicated on the Contract drawings.
The required depths of concrete bed and height of concrete backfill shall be as
indicated on the Contract drawings.
Where a concrete bed and surround is specified, a minimum of 75 mm blinding of
concrete Grade 25 shall first be laid over the full width of the trench.
The pipes shall be laid jointed and supported on precast concrete blocks which shall
be separated from the barrel by 25 mm thick timber packing.
After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Consultant the top of the
concrete bed shall be thoroughly cleaned and additional concrete Grade SRC 20
carefully placed and compacted under and around the pipe to a height of at least 150
mm above the crown of the pipe.
Where pipes with flexible joints are to be surrounded 13 mm thick fiberboard or
polystyrene sheets shall be fixed at the pipe coupling joint extending for the full cross
section of the remaining concrete bed and surround, and accurately cut to fit the
profile of the pipe.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-21/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
B. Pipelines Protection from Extraneous Material
The pipelines shall at all times be kept free of extraneous material and when work is
not is progress the open ends of the pipeline shall be securely plugged with an
approved watertight plug or stopper. Claw type plugs or any type liable to damage
the pipe will not be approved.
The contractor shall clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length immediately prior
to jointing and shall swab all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt sand or other
matter that may contaminate the pipeline.
The entire absence of foreign matter from the completed line shall be a condition
precedent to acceptance.
C. Trenches
All trenches excavation shall comply fully with all the relevant clauses of QCS
Section 20-2 and this specification,
Trench depths shall be sufficient to allow the installation of the required pipe
bedding, granular or concrete as specified. Generally the depth of cover shall not be
less than 600 mm unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings.
Trench width shall be in accordance with the following table:
Nominal
Pipe Bore
mm
100
150
200
Minimum
Width
mm
430
490
560
Maximum
Width
mm
630
690
760
The maximum and minimum widths shall apply from the bottom of the trench to 300
mm above the crown of the pipe.
Should the trench be excavated to a depth greater than is required in the opinion of
the Consultant. The contractor shall fill in the bottom of the trench to the required
depth with concrete or other such materials as the Consultant may direct.
In the case of trench excavations made in roads, footpaths, verges, central strips or
within 5 metres of buildings the contractor will be required to execute the works so as
to minimize damage and disturbance. Vertical trench side will generally require
support by timbering or other suitable means. Under-cutting of trench sides will not
be permitted.
D. Granular Bedding Material for Rigid Pipes
Granular bedding material for rigid pipes shall consist of gravel or broken stone and
shall be a suitable "all in" ballast or stone.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-22/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
For pipes up to 1200 millimeters nominal bore the material shall be graded 12
millimeters to 5 millimetres all passing 12 millimetres and not more than 20 percent
passing 5 percent millimetres B.S sieve.
E. Backfilling Excavation
After compaction of the granular bed and surround or completion of concrete
surround, the trench shall be backfilled using selected excavated material free from
all rocks, large hard on objects and builders debris of greater than 40 mm.
Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified operations preceding it
has been completed and shall be in layers of 150 mm. each fully compacted over the
full width of the trench. Power rammers and vibrators shall be used to compact
backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds 0.5 metres.
20.2.11
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
All drain pipes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and
the requirements of Section 20 – 5.3.1 of the Q.C.S.
The Consultant shall witness all drainage tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also
provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner for each drain section to be tested.
The contractor having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies
are available shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction
of the consultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct functioning.
After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor
shall demonstrate its operation at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant. Tests shall be in accordance with British Standard BS 6700: 1987.
The tests shall demonstrate:
a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is
of adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.
b. That all items of plant and equipment operate quite sufficiently to meet the
specified requirements.
c. That all instruments protection and control devices etc. are correctly calibrated
and accurate:
d. That all drainage runs satisfy the required water tests.
The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the
Engineer. The Client's representative and the Consultant shall be at liberty to be
present at tests and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of
his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-23/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
The contractor shall make all records during the tests and on completion thereof
shall provide the Consultant with a test report and record, both in triplicate. The
contractor shall also provide all test instruments together with skilled supervision and
adequate labour for carrying out the tests.
A. Proving Tests
All under slab, underground drainage, soil and waste system shall be cleaned down
and thoroughly flushed out to remove all dirt within each pipework system.
After each system has been flushed and each draw off fitting opened and the
drainage, soil and waste system shall be checked for satisfactory rate flow.
Particular attention shall be given to groups of sanitary fittings to ensure satisfactory
flow when a number of fittings are flushed and air not drawn into the system via any
trap.
B. Water Test
All drains shall be tested before backfilling immediately after the drain has been
properly laid on the correct trench bed and after joining materials has had time to
set. A water test pressure of 1.3 m head above the soffit of the drain shall be
applied at the high end, but not more than 2.4 m head at the low end. The test shall
be carried out on lengths of drain not less than half the distance between manholes,
all to be agreed with the Consultant on site. The lower end of the drain shall be
plugged and the higher end shall have a stand pipe not less than 1.2 m high. The
drain shall be filled, taking care to eliminate trapped air. After repair of leakage due
to defective pipes, joints and plugs the drain under test shall be left for one hour to
allow water absorption by pipes and fittings. The loss of water over a period
measuring vessel at intervals of ten minutes and noting the quantity of water
required to maintain the original level in the stand pipe. For drains up to 300 mm
diameter, the water quantity added shall not exceed 0.06 litre per hour per 100 linear
metres per millimeter of nominal bore of the drain under test.
All drains shall be tested for a second time as described above after correct bedding
cover and selected backfill have been consolidated and the finished surface
complete.
C. Air Test
A gauge in the form of a "U" tube shall be connected to the plug fixed at one end of
the length to be tested and all junctions and connections to the sewer on drain shall
be plugged. Air shall then be pumped in from the other end of the drain under test
until a pressure equal to 100 mm of water is indicated on the gauge. Without further
pumping the pressure shall not fall more than 25mm during a period of five minutes.
Air tests shall be carried out after 3 p.m. and all pipework shall be shaded from the
sun at all times. Should an air test fail a water test shall be carried out as described
in this specification.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-24/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 20
D. Profile Test
A hardwood ball of an approved profile shall be drawn through all foul drains from
manhole to manhole and through branch foul drains before soil pipes, gullies and
W.C's are filled. The diameter of the ball or profile shall differ from the nominal
internal diameter of the pipe by not more than 6mm or by not more than 45% of the
nominal internal diameter of the pipe whichever is the greater difference.
During commissioning all manhole cover shall be removed and water flow tests shall
be carried out to ensure that the drains are flowing at their designed capacity and
that they are free of debris.
E. Manhole Test
All manholes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and
the requirements of Section 20 of Q.C.S.
The Consultant shall witness all manhole tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contract shall also provide
test sheets set out in an agreed manner for each manhole to be tested.
All concrete manholes cast in situ and precast concrete manholes shall be water
tests by plugging all necessary connections and filling the manhole with water to a
minimum height of 600 mm above the top of the benching. Water shall be added at
ten minute intervals until absorption has ceased. No change of water level shall
occur for an uninterrupted period of three hours.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-20-25/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
20.2.12
SECTION 20
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
ITEM
MANUFACTURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
1. UPVC Pipes
HEPWORTH
TERRAIN
MARLY
HUNTER
SD QATAR
UAE
UK
UK
UK
QATAR
2. UPVC Fittings
HEPWORTH
TERRAIN
MARLY
HUNTER
SD QATAR
UAE
UK
UK
UK
QATAR
3. Rain Water Outlet
TERRAIN
HUNTER
SMITH
ZURN
UK
UK
USA
USA
4. M.H. Cover
KSA CAST
GLYNWED
PAM ACESS
ST. GOBAIN
KSA
UK
UK
FRANCE
3. Floor Gully, Cover
WADE
ACO
FORST
SMITH
ZURN
USA
UK
UK
USA
USA
5. Sump Pump
ITT BELL & GOSSETTE
NOCCHI
FLYGT
GRUNDFOS
HOMA
USA
ITALY
SWEDEN
DENMARK
GERMANY
6. ESVC Pipes
SVCP
KSA
7. Grease Interceptors
AEB-872-10-REV. A
F.C FROST LIMITED
SMITH
HEPWORTH
KSACAST
UK
UK
UAE
KSA
S-20-26/26
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
Luxury Villa
FOR
MR. KHALID ALMISNAD
SECTION – 21
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
21.0.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
21.1
GENERAL
21.1.1
Site
21.1.2
Site Conditions
21.1.3
Definitions
21.1.4
Scope of Works
21.1.5
Compliance - Specifications and Regulations
21.1.6
Electrical Supply System
21.1.7
Program
21.1.8
Contract Drawings
21.1.9
Working Drawings
21.1.10
Co-Ordination of Drawings
21.1.11
Material Submittals
21.1.12
Material Inspections
21.1.13
Alternative Materials
21.1.14
Setting Out of Works
21.1.15
Safety
21.1.16
Contractor's License
21.1.17
Permits
21.1.18
Damage to Plant and Materials
21.1.19
Protective Finishes
21.1.20
Labels and Identification
21.1.21
Works Testing and Certificates
21.1.22
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
21.1.23
As Built Drawings
21.1.24
Period of Maintenance
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-2/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
21.2
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION
21.2.1
Sub-Main Switchboards
21.2.2
Distribution Boards
21.2.3
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
21.2.4
Miniature Circuit Breakers
21.2.5
Fuses
21.2.6
Motor Starters and Motor Control Center
21.2.7
Contactors – Overload and Control Relays
21.2.8
Switchboard Operator
21.2.9
Fuse Switches and Isolators
21.2.10
Cables
21.2.11
Conduits
21.2.12
Cable Trunkings and Trays
21.2.13
Electrical Ducts
21.2.14
Light Fittings
21.2.15
Wiring Accessories
21.2.16
Fire Detection and Alarm System
21.1.17
Emergency Pack for Lighting
21.2.18
Standby Diesel Generator Set
21.2.19
Uninterruptible Power Supply System
21.2.20
Structured Cabling and Telecom Services
21.2.21
CCTV and Security System
21.2.22
Background Music and Audio Visual System
21.2.23
Central Battery / Emergency Pack For Lighting System
21.2.24
Testing and Commissioning
21.2.25
Warranty and Guarantee
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-3/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
21.2.26
Testing and Commissioning
21.2.27
Schedule of Approved Manufacturers
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-4/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
21.1
SECTION 21
GENERAL
21.1.1 SITE
For site location, refer to the Project Specifications.
21.1.2 SITE CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all the Electrical Equipment shall be capable of
withstanding without deterioration the following site conditions:
1. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 50oC (Dry Bulb) in Summer Temperature
& 5oC (Dry Bulb) in winter.
2. Design Ambient Temperature: 50oC.
3. Maximum Metal Surface Temperature Exposed to Sun: 85oC.
4. Altitude: Sea Level.
5. Maximum Relative Humidity: 100 %.
6. Design Ambient Humidity: 100%.
7. Maximum Wind Velocity: 162 Km per Hour.
8. Prevailing Wind: North and North Westerly.
9. Storms: Dusty, sporadic and Irregular.
10. Annual Rainfall: 50mm – 100mm between January & April.
21.1.3 DEFINITIONS
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:
1. Site: The Locations where the works are to be carried out.
2. Contractor: The Contractor to be appointed for the works covered by this
section of the specification.
3. Consultant: The Client‟s appointed representative and advocate with regards
performance of these works and the Author of this specification document.
4. QGEWC: Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation
5. SED: State Electricity Department
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-5/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
6. Q-TEL: Qatar Telecom
7. KAHRAMAA Regulations: Regulations issued by QGEWC for the
Installation of Electrical Equipment, Wiring & Air-conditioning of residential &
Commercial Buildings (February 2010 Edition).
8. IEE Regulations: BS 7671:2008 Requirements for Electrical Installations
(IEE Wiring Regulations 17th Edition) issued by BSI.
9. BS: British Standard Specifications published by the British Standards
Institute (BSI).
10. CP: British Standard Code of Practice published by BSI.
11. Tender Drawing: The Drawing on which the tender is based and
the schedules contained there-in.
12. Working Drawings: The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the
purpose of execution of work at site.
13. As Built Drawings: Which form an accurate and true record of the actual
work carried out at site.
14. Works: To include the provisions for all the materials and tasks to be carried
out by the contractor as per this specification and for the satisfactory
completion of the installation.
15. Approved: Shall mean APPROVED by the consultant in writing.
16. Submitted: Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant in writing.
17. Accepted: Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant in writing.
18. Provide: Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission.
19. Install: Shall mean install, test and commission.
20. Furnish: Shall mean supply only.
21. Concealed: Shall mean hidden from the normal line of sight in shafts, ceiling
spaces, walls, slabs, partitions, enclosed voids..
22. Exposed: Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces, which may be
reached without the use ladders or any other temporary means of access.
23. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (USA).
24. NEC: National Electrical Code (Standard 70) (USA) published by the NFPA.
25. IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission.
26. EN: Euronorm (European Harmonized Standards).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-6/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
27. UL: Underwriters Laboratories.
28. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (USA).
29. ANSI: American National Standards Institute (USA).
30. DIN: German Industrial Standards.
31. VDE: Verband De Utscher Elektro Techniker (Germany)
21.1.4 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works to be executed under this contract includes the supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical materials and equipment as
per the specifications drafted in these sections and the drawings.
The contractor shall provide complete installations for the project and other
associated works such as supporting structures, ancillary works etc. A brief
description of electrical works will be as follows:
1. Sub-Main Distribution Boards & MCC Panels: Provide the Sub-Main
Distribution Boards and Motor Control Centers within the development as
described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.
2. Distribution Boards: Provide the lighting & power Distribution Boards within
the development as described within this specification and as shown upon
the drawings, inclusive of the final circuit cables and connections to the
associated lighting & power loads.
3. UPS System: Provide necessary UPS system as shown in the design
drawings.
4. Emergency Diesel Generators: Provide emergency diesel generator as
describe within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.
5. Lighting & Power: Provide the lighting & power installations within the
development as described within this specification and as shown upon the
drawings.
6. Emergency Lighting: Provide the Central Battery Emergency Escape
Lighting installations within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.
7. Wiring Containment: Provide the Wiring Containment for all the electrical
systems within the development as described within this specification and as
shown upon the drawings.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-7/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
8. Fire Detection & Alarm: Provide the Fire Detection & Alarm Systems within
the development as described within this specification and as shown upon
the drawings.
9. ELV Systems: Provide all the extra low voltage systems such as Background
music, Audio Visual, Structured Cabling, Telephone, TV, Data & Voice,
CCTV and Security Systems.
10. Earthing & Lightning Protection: Provide the earthing networks,
conductors, connections & bonds for the complete Earthing & Lightning
Protection systems within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.
11. Lifts: Provide power supplies plus lighting and small power installations
within the lift machine rooms and shafts of the development as described
within this specification and as shown upon the drawings. The lift machine
installations shall be provided by a specialist Contractor.
21.1.5 COMPLIANCE - SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS
The installations shall comply with the following regulations:
1. Electrical Installations: These shall comply with the KAHRAMAA
Regulations issued by QGEWC for the Installation of Electrical Equipment,
Wiring & Air-conditioning of residential & Commercial Buildings (February
2010 Edition).
2. Equipment & Fittings: All equipment & fittings shall conform to the relevant
British Standard specifications & codes of practice (current editions including
all amendments).
3. Fire Detection & Alarm Installations: Shall comply with the coordinated
requirements of NFPA 72, BS 5839-1:2002 and the Qatar Civil Defense
Department whose requirements shall take precedence over all others.
4. Emergency Lighting Installations: Shall comply with the coordinated
requirements of NFPA 101, BS 5266-1:2005, and the Qatar Civil Defense
Department whose requirements shall take precedence over all others.
5. Earthing & Lightning Protection Installations: Shall comply with the
requirements of BS7430:1998 & BS EN 62305:2006.
If the Contractor wishes to use installations or equipment other than those specified
and conforming to different standards, then a written approval from the consultant
shall be obtained. However the consultant reserves the right to reject any
applications for such approvals without the right to appeal.
Any apparatus, appliance, materials or works not shown on the contract drawings but
mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or work
necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-8/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried
out by the contractor without any additional costs to the contract sum.
Clarification shall be obtained at the tendering stage by the Contractor from the
Consultant in writing for any installations where it is perceived that the extent of
specified installations and the expected content or works are not clear. In case of any
discrepancy arises afterwards or during the construction, the Consultant‟s decision
shall be final and binding on all such matters.
21.1.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM
The following supply system is prevails in the State of Qatar:
1. Supply: Alternating current (ac), 4-wire.
2. Nominal Voltage: 415 V phase-phase & 240 V phase-neutral or earth
(tolerance ± 6%).
3. Nominal Frequency: 50 Hz (cycles per second) (tolerance ± 0.5%).
4. Number of wires: 4 (3 phases + 1 neutral) + Earth conductor.
5. Neutral: Full capacity and same size as phase conductor, solidly earthed to
transformer star point at MV Panel (TN-S).
NOTE:
All the equipment and accessories shall be fully rated and compatible with the above
Qatar electricity supply parameters. No other variants will be permissible i.e.,
220/380 V or 115/220 V etc. equipment will be summarily rejected.
21.1.7 PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall produce the work program based on the CPM (Critical Path
Method or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations
to complete the project on time. The following construction milestone dates shall be
highlighted in the Program:
1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Distribution Equipment
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Light Fixtures
9. Testing
10. Power-on dates for each phase of the works for both temporary and
permanent power supplies.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-9/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
11. Commissioning and Handing Over.
21.1.8 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The electrical tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the Schedule
of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have been
prepared to show the bidder the principal equipment and general arrangement
required for the project.
These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work and as such are not to be
interpreted as working drawings. It is the Contractor‟s responsibility to check the
positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be checked
against the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy found shall be
brought to the attention of the consultant in writing at the time of tender.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of lighting points in relation to the
furniture and equipment. The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services
drawings based on all the local regulations and have included in his prices for all the
necessary installations and builders work associated with these drawings.
21.1.9 WORKING DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare the working drawings to a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5
for details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultant‟s approval.
The contractor shall detail the following in the working drawings:
1. Actual conduit routes with circular junction boxes indicating the size of
conduit, number and size of wires it is carrying, where it is to rise up or fall
to below etc.
2. Separate drawings shall be prepared for both the small power and lighting
layouts.
3. Reflected ceiling plans showing coordinated services, light fittings and
other ancillary equipment such as fire alarm, A.C diffusers etc., with
respect to the ceiling.
4. Mounting arrangement of light fittings, cables, cable trays, trunking etc.
5. Sectional views for coordinating the electrical wiring and other services i.e.,
Air-conditioning, Drainage and Plumbing to the Consultant‟s requirements.
21.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS
The Main contractor will produce working drawings for building works required for the
services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical,
Plumbing and Drainage systems.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-10/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The Main contractor is to ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the QGEWC Regulations.
21.1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
a. General
The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.
The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment intended for use on the project, to the consultant for the necessary
approval.
If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted:
in the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by the written confirmation from the manufacturer for confirmation.
In the event that items involving aesthetics, like light fittings, wiring accessories,
smoke / heat detectors, etc., samples must be submitted for approval along with the
materials submittals.
Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the
equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either
Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.
The contractor shall maintain and submit to the Consultant a status report every
month, of all the materials submittals for electrical equipment in the format that
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Submittal Number
Equipment / Model Number
Manufacturer / Local Agent
Date of Approval
Date of Order / Order Number
Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )
ETA on Site
Status as at the date of the Report
b. Equipment Supply
All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed
local agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the
spare parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The Contractor shall mark
the same clearly on the submittals (item No. 3. above).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-11/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
In case of any item/s required to be purchased direct from outside the country
(only for valid reasons) then the contractor shall mention the same in the
submittal and obtain prior and specific written approval from the consultant.
c. Equipment Size and Delivery
Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for
installation in the position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of
structure, construction program and the method of access.
d. Design References
Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, that require
amendments or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturer‟s range of production or availability etc., then the
contractor shall discuss the matter with the Consultant and obtain an approved
readily available alternative. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh
submittal based on the Consultant‟s advice and obtain approval to provide the
revised system.
In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is
deemed to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as
obtained clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for
the execution.
21.1.12 MATERIAL INSPECTIONS
The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same by the Consultant.
Any material used at site not approved specifically prior to delivery shall stand
rejected.
Any item of supply found at site that differs from the examples shown in the submittal
catalogue or the submitted sample will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the
contractor shall make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the
Consultant. Any time-delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractor‟s
account.
The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expense. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works with the assistance of other
agencies and debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.
The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials
at site and provision of such protective covering as may be necessary to ensure that
on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective
finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be
strictly as per the relevant QCS sections.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-12/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
21.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
Equipment and materials that shall be used as the basis for the design are listed in
the Schedule of Manufacturers. The bidder may submit alternative proposals for any
of the equipment or material for the Consultant‟s consideration but only in cases
where the specified item(s) are not available due to valid reasons. The Consultant
will only consider such alternatives before the tender is accepted and the
Consultant‟s decision will be final regarding the matter.
If the proposed alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the acceptance
of the same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no alternative
equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the
Contractor is cautioned that any item provided by him which is not up to the
specification requirements, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where
time will not permit, then such replacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, but
nevertheless at the Contractor‟s expense.
21.1.14 SETTING OUT OF WORKS
The location of switches and other electrical accessories as indicated on the tender
drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements.
The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings
as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and coordinated with the Interior
Design scheme and other services.
21.1.15 SAFETY
The Contractor shall maintain all the necessary safety procedures at site to protect
manpower and machinery. Temporary electricity supplies either generated on-site or
obtained from supply authorities shall be effectively earthed and protected with
suitable earth leakage circuit breakers.
The socket outlets used for construction shall have enclosures and construction with
ingress protection rating IP67, and shall be of the industrial type with suitable plugs
etc. to comply with BS EN 60309. The cables and socket outlets shall be protected
against mechanical damage at site. The assembly of the socket outlets shall be
properly wired and mounted on purpose made racks fabricated out of sheet steel
and angle iron. These racks shall be securely fixed on the wall at convenient places
and shall also be earthed. Wooden racks will not be allowed to be used for this
temporary supply.
The cables shall also be properly supported on the wall. Only those wires used for
the final connections from the socket outlets to the tools will be allowed to lie on the
floor preferably protected against mechanical damage.
The Contractor shall provide single line wiring scheme for the construction site
temporary power supplies for the approval of the Consultant and carry out the works
strictly in accordance with QGEWC Regulations.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-13/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
21.1.16 CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE
The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Electrical
works shall have a valid license from the QGEWC. The grade of license shall also
be in accordance with the total load of this project. A copy of the License shall be
submitted to the Consultant.
The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Electrical Designers, Electrical Foreman and Electricians to be employed on the
project along with their QGEWC license copies, and obtain approval from the
consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the contractor shall not replace the staff
from site. In case the same becomes necessary, re-approval should be obtained
and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for a minimum period of 30 days
before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such cases, the proposed replacement
personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience. The consultant will
reject any application with less than 5 years of experience.
21.1.17 PERMITS
The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the relevant authorities, a
minimum of 7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully
responsible for obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site
as well as for any works in connection with others.
21.1.18 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS
Any plant or material that is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used in
the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the
plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the
attention of the Consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the
necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining written permission from
the Consultant shall any remedial work be carried out.
Any damaged plant or material allegedly brought to an “as-new” condition following
such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal and only at the
discretion of the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and
binding.
21.1.19 PROTECTIVE FINISHES
The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in
this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local
climatic conditions.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-14/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The Contractor or his representative shall before shipment inspect all materials and
equipment to ensure that the finishes are in accordance with the specifications and
protected against deterioration.
21.1.20 LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION
All main switches, isolating switches, distribution boards and main switch boards
shall have labels fixed to the outside by means of four small round-head screws.
Labels shall not be less than 50 mm x12 mm. high, and engraved with 6 mm or
more, black lettering to indicate the purpose of the switch or distribution board. The
labels shall be of white / black / white Traffolyte substrates. The minimum height of
lettering for switchgear equipment shall be 6 mm.
Each distribution board shall be provided with a type-written circuit chart on cartridge
paper protected by a perspex envelope (pocket) and fixed to the inside of the door.
The circuit list shall give the number and details of points served by each circuit and
the rating of the fuse or circuit breaker. Sample lists shall be submitted to the
Consultant for approval before installation.
Each underground cable shall have its size and feeder‟s name engraved / punched
on an aluminium strip 12 mm wide of 16 gauge thickness and shall be tightened on
each end where cables enter / come out of the trench or soil.
All accessible switchboards and distribution boards shall be provided with warning
plates “DANGER - 440 VOLTS” having 8 mm red letter on white vitreous enamel
plate.
21.1.21 WORKS TESTING AND CERTIFICATE
Provision shall be made by the Contractor for the Consultant or the Client or the
Client's representative to witness tests of major items of equipment at the
manufacturer‟s works.
The Consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the
contract of the list of equipment to be inspected and the contractor shall give the
Consultant the required notice of the date on which the plant will be ready for witness
testing.
The Consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets without witness. The contractor shall supply all the original test
certificates to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.
21.1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The contractor shall provide six copies of the project Operation & Maintenance
Manuals in the form of Lever Arch type bound documents indicating the following:
1. Step by step operating procedures.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-15/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
2.
3.
4.
5.
Preventive maintenance schedule.
Technical literature.
Spare parts list.
Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. Telephone no., and
contact person. - Local as well as overseas.
6. Works test certificates.
7. Routine Test results carried out at site.
8. Record Drawings (complete set).
The O&M Manuals shall also be provided as full content soft copies (x6) recorded
upon DVD discs.
21.1.23 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Consultant. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings, which are to
be submitted to the Consultant within one month of on-site project completion.
21.1.24 PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire Electrical System installed against faulty /
inappropriate materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400
days (Four Hundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and
accepted by the Consultant, and shall commence only after the availability of the
QGEWC mains Electric Supply at site. Also where longer guarantee or warranty
periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms
shall apply to these items.
The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for the entire contract works, which
states that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents. For
the duration of the maintenance period, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies,
within 24 hours of notification at no additional cost to the contract.
If the Contractor fails to promptly attend to any such faults as mentioned above
within the specified time, then the client shall make his own arrangements to rectify
the fault but nevertheless at the Contractor‟s expense.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-16/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
21.2
SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION
21.2.1 SUB-MAIN SWITCH BOARDS
The complete sub main switchboard shall be capable of withstanding, without
damage, a symmetrical prospective fault current of the system which shall be
assumed as 25 kA for 3 seconds duration.
The switch board shall be of panel board type suitable for Wall mounting as
indicated upon the drawings and comprise of both an incoming and outgoing
moulded case circuit breakers as indicated on the drawings. The switchboard shall
comply with BS EN 60947-1:2007 and as a minimum the internal separation shall be
of Form 2b plus ingress protection to IP54.
The sub-main switchboard shall incorporate all the items detailed on the drawings
and as detailed in this specification. The sub-main switchboards shall be installed so
as no operating handle is placed at a height that exceeds 2100 m from the finished
floor level.
The main incoming isolator shall form an integral part of the unit and be of the
moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) type with adjustable thermal and magnetic
settings complying with BS EN 60947-2:2006.
The bus-bars shall be of tinned hard drawn copper type and insulated with PVC heat
shrink sleeves, supported on non-hygroscopic insulating material conforming to BS
159 and suitably de-rated taking into account insulation applied to the bus-bars and
connections.
The equipment current ratings that have been indicated are the minimum acceptable
but the manufacturer‟s standard items may be utilized provided that they are not
lower ratings than those specified.
The switchboard shall contain a suitable earth bar to at which all circuit protective
conductors, cable glands and required bonded metalwork shall be connected. The
minimum cross sectional area of this earth bar shall be not less than the csa of the
feeder cable conductors. Similarly the neutral bar shall be provided of the same
cross section as the live bus-bars. The neutral and earth bars shall remain
electrically isolated from each other.
The manufacturer‟s blank insulated fillers shall be securely fitted to fill and shield all
unused outgoing circuit breaker spaces plus bus-bar connections. In addition the
circuit breaker sections shall be provided with a hinged metal cover complete with
locking mechanisms.
The switchboard shall be constructed to conform to the specified requirements of
KAHRAMAA and the relevant British Standards. The drawings of proposed
arrangements should be forwarded by the Contractor to the Consultant and
KAHRAMAA for approval prior to commencement of manufacture.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-17/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The contractor shall be responsible for checking access plus builders work details in
order to confirm that the switchboard is constructed and installed as required by the
KAHRAMAA regulations and the relevant British Standards.
The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (ICS) of all outgoing MCCB shall be
equal to or greater than 25 kA for 3 seconds duration.
All outgoing MCCB in the sub-main switchboards shall be of the selective type to
provide full discrimination with the downstream circuit breakers and conform to BS
EN 60947-2:2006, and shall be of triple-pole in construction with magnetic and
o
thermal overload protection, de-rated for an ambient temperature of 50 C.
The rating of all MCCB‟s to be provided in the sub-main switchboards are indicated
upon the drawings.
All sub-main board panel fascia shall have installed 3 no. maximum demand
indicating ammeters (1 no. for each phase), a voltmeter with selector switch, control
fuses and 3 No. phase live indication lamps.
21.2.2 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
General
Distribution boards shall conform to BS EN 60439-3:1991+A2:2001 and be suitable
for operation at 415 V / 240 V, 50 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz. The required fault
minimum withstand fault level shall be 10 kA for 3 seconds duration.
These boards shall be “Type B” factory assembled suitable for flush or surface
mounting as indicated on the tender drawings. Distribution boards shall be complete
with all the specified outgoing circuit protective devices eg. MCB / ELCB / RCCB‟s,
incoming isolators and other accessories as indicated or required.
The enclosures shall be fabricated from zinc coated sheet steel having adequate
gauge to ensure a rigid and robust construction free from distortion. Each enclosure
shall be of adequate size to accommodate all components specified and be finished
in stove enamel.
The enclosure shall be fitted with a sheet steel front panel, which shall be firmly fixed
by a minimum of 4 no. cheese-head screws of minimum of 6 mm in length.
The front panel shall be manufactured with neatly cut apertures to allow, the MCB‟s /
RCCB‟s levers to comfortably protrude through. The front panel shall however
effectively conceal and segregate all conductors, contactors, bus-bars and any other
live parts installed within the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be fitted with a rigidly
constructed double-hinged sheet steel door with locking mechanisms.
All doors shall be provided with gaskets and fitted with at least two robust hinges.
The bus-bars shall be of the electro–tinned copper type. Multi-terminal bus-bars shall
be provided for all the neutral & earth conductors and shall not be shared (a single
conductor per terminal only).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-18/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Each enclosure shall be fully equipped to accommodate the number of MCB‟s /
RCCB‟s of ratings as indicated on the drawings. The contractor shall supply and
install additional spare circuit protective devices of the ratings / types indicated upon
the drawings / circuit schedules. The manufacturer‟s purpose made blank shields
shall be provided and securely fitted to the blank spare circuit ways.
Distribution boards located remote from the Main Panel, or sub-main boards shall be
mounted at a height of not less than 1200mm to the center of the board from the
finished floor level and the maximum height from the finished floor level to the top of
the board shall be 2200mm.
Where single phase distribution boards are specified, they shall be complete with
double-pole incomer isolator and where 3 phase distribution boards are specified,
they shall be complete with triple-pole incomer Isolator and removable / demountable
neutral link. An ELCB shall not be accepted or used as the DB main disconnect
switch for any distribution board.
Earth and Neutral bars located in distribution boards shall have the same number of
connections as there are for phase connections.
All phase and neutral bars shall be sized to carry the full rated current of the
associated protective device and shall be of the flat tinned-copper type rigidly
mounted, supported on shock resisting, non-hygroscopic, high-grade insulators with
high resistance to tracking, not subject to mold growth or termite attack with
adequate space and clearances.
Connections from the bus-bars to the breakers shall be made by using solid circular
conductors or insulated and tinned copper strip neatly set and formed. Each
connection to or from the phase or neutral bar shall have its own brass fixing screws,
washers and locknuts. Each distribution board shall be fitted with an identification
label on its front cover.
The label shall be suitably inscribed stating the distribution board‟s reference number
/ rating in volts and amperes and the number of ways in both English and Arabic.
In addition to the above a reference card shall be fitted inside the distribution board
giving details of each circuit, MCB size, cable size, the SMDB to which it is
connected and the location etc., The reference cards shall be fixed to the inside of
the distribution boards door within a protective transparent plastic envelope.
All live terminals and parts shall be shrouded with insulating materials in the form of
shields, barriers and applied insulation to ensure that it is impossible for any live part
to be touched while withdrawing or replacing the MCB‟s. All distribution boards
should conform to a minimum ingress protection of IP 30.
Outgoing circuit breakers shall generally be MCB that comply with BS EN 608982:2006. The circuit breakers with the indicated ratings (calibrated for an ambient
temperature of 50oC) but the rating must never exceed the declared current carrying
capacity of the final circuit conductors.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-19/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
All distribution boards and the circuit breakers shall be selected and sourced from a
single manufacturer and the same range throughout the whole of the works.
21.2.3 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
The Contractor shall provide the moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) as indicated
on the tender drawings for the outgoing sub-main circuits. They shall be triple-pole,
415 volts, 50 Hz, with both thermal and magnetic over load protection complying with
BS EN 60947-2:2006+A1:2009. At sub-main distribution level the fault withstand
capacity of the circuit breakers shall be not less than 25 kA for 3 seconds duration. If
installed at the Main MV panel level then the fault withstand capacity shall be not less
than 44 kA for 3 seconds duration.
Circuit breakers of 100 A frame size and above shall be supplied complete with
adjustable thermal and magnetic trip settings plus short–time / delay trip selection.
Circuit breakers shall be constructed of high quality mouldings with all essential parts
treated for corrosion resistance and plated for good electrical conductivity. The
declared over-current capacity of the MCCBs is not to be less than 125% of the
current rating (In) for a time to trip duration of 90 minutes.
Where MCCBs are mounted individually, then, the enclosure shall be manufactured
from heavy sheet steel with removable front plate, and removable gland plates at top
and bottom. Knockouts shall not be accepted. These enclosures shall also include
the necessary cable spreader boxes to comfortably terminate all the cables to be
installed.
21.2.4 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be utilized to protect all outgoing circuits and
shall be of an approved make to comply with BS EN 60898-2:2006. The trip
mechanisms shall be of the temperature compensated thermal overload and short
circuit trip type. MCB shall be of the single or triple pole type rated and calibrated as
shown on the drawings for an ambient temperature of 50oC. All MCB shall be of
hermetically sealed type with a minimum rated breaking capacity (ICU) of 10kA rated
at 415 V.
The rated short circuit withstand capacity of all distribution boards shall be a
minimum of 10 kA for 3 seconds duration.
The modular frame size of all MCBs shall be identical so that they can be easily
interchanged. The MCBs shall be of the DIN-rail mounting type (plug-in type are not
acceptable). Circuit breaker dollies shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing
the breaker on a faulty circuit without resetting and shall also clearly indicate the
ON/OFF positions. The standard commonly available ratings of MCBs shall be used
for ease of availability.
Earth leakage protection shall be afforded final circuits of distribution boards that
feed power to socket outlets, water heaters and domestic appliances. For three
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-20/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
phase circuits a four-pole ELCB device shall be used and double-pole device for a
single-phase supply. The trip setting shall be 30 mA, unless specified otherwise. The
ELCB device shall be supplied integrated with the MCB (RCBO) as a single device
and shall comply with BS EN 61008-1:2004.
MCBs shall be suitable for use without any distinction to be made between supply
side & load side.
The fault withstands rating for the combined MCB / ELCBs shall not be less than 6
kA.
21.2.5 FUSES
High rupturing capacity (HRC) cartridge fuses shall be used for overload protection
and short circuit protection only where indicated upon the drawings.
The contractor shall include for the provision of HRC fuses of the maximum rating of
all equipment, in compliance with BS 88 for AC 46 Category of Duty and Class Q1
fusing factor.
Confirmation of fuse ratings shall be obtained from the Consultant before placing any
order. HRC fuses provided on this contract shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer and be of the same class or type to ensure adequate discrimination
and grading throughout the distribution system.
Exposed or Semi-enclosed fuse elements shall not be provided or used. Cartridge
fuses for use in conjunction with lighting and small power accessories shall be
comply with BS 1362.
2.2.6 MOTOR STARTERS AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
a. Description
Starters shall be manufactured and type tested in accordance with BS EN 60947-41:2001.
All motors shall be provided with heavy duty contactor type motor (fuse-less) starters,
generally complying with the following and protected by means of moulded case circuit
breakers for both overload and short circuit fault conditions. The type of motor starter
to be employed shall be governed by the motor electrical input rating as follows:
1. 11 kW and below
2. 11 kW to 37.3 kW
3. 37.5 kW and above
> Direct on-line starting
> Star-Delta starting.
> Reduced voltage electronic soft-starter.
All motor starters shall be grouped and housed with motor control centre (MCC) panels
as indicated upon the drawings. Each MCC panel shall be provided with a main
incoming MCCB capable of carrying the full-load current.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-21/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Each starter shall comprise as a minimum:
1. On load triple-pole MCCB with two normally open and one normally closed
auxiliary switches. The MCCB shall be mechanically interlocked with the starter
component door and capable of breaking the motor starting current and of
making onto a fault located at the motor terminals. Provisions shall be made for
padlocking the MCCB in the 'OFF' position.
2. Four-pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three normally
closed auxiliary contracts. All the auxiliary contacts shall be wired down to the
starter terminal block.
3. One triple-pole thermal over current relay incorporating over current (with
adjustable trip settings), phase sequence and lost phase protection. An
external panel fascia mechanical hand reset button is also to be provided.
4. An appropriately rated (6 A) MCB and one copper link provided to protect the
controls power circuit.
5. Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop push buttons and a
local/remote/auto selector switch (hand/off/auto) as required. Each starter
control wiring terminal block shall include terminals for connection of remote
push buttons, automatic control circuits and local / remote emergency stop
push buttons.
6. Where more than one motor with a duty/standby (duty/backup) function are
used, the starter control wiring shall be arranged to automatically change duty
upon a fault condition tripping the manually selected duty motor. A duty/standby
sequence selector switch shall also be provided for automatic timed (hours run)
duty sharing between the selected motors.
7. Each starter shall be fitted with transformer operated lamps indicating
a. Motor running (green)
b. Motor stopped (red)
c. Overload tripped (amber)
8. Each starter shall be fitted with an ammeter and selector switch for motors of
rating 3 kW and above.
9. Each starter to be equipped with labels both in English and Arabic giving drive
designation, plant number and control operation.
10. Each starter shall include the wiring terminals and control relays as necessary
to achieve electrical interlocking as may be specified elsewhere.
Starter units that include manual operation facilities shall have push buttons provided
for both starting and stopping operations, together with auxiliary contacts for remote
indicator lights where specified. Starter units arranged for automatic operation shall
have hand/off/auto controls and remote push buttons.
All Star-Delta starters shall be provided with mechanical and electrical interlocks
between the star and delta contactors to prevent short circuiting. Star-Delta starters
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-22/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
shall also be provided adjustable time-delay devices for the automatic change-over
from star to delta.
b. Enclosures
MCC Panels enclosures shall be constructed of minimum 2mm thick electrogalvanized coated steel plate with a high quality solid polyester enamel electrostatic
spray paint finish.
Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP54.
All MCC panels shall be arranged for front access for cabling and maintenance
operations to be carried out and be equipped with robust hinged lift-off doors (only by
means of a tool). Dust and damp proof gaskets shall be provided around the door
panel edges. Each access door with MCCB located behind shall be fitted with lockable
cam type chromium plated handle that shall be mechanically interlocked with the
starting MCCB to require electrical isolation before the door can be opened.
All equipment shall be mounted on sheet steel mounting plate with screws into tapped
holes and all live parts shall be shrouded to a minimum IP2X.
The minimum short circuit withstand rating for the different components shall be 25 kA
for 3 seconds duration. However, the contractor shall forward a short circuit calculation
and upgrade the components if found necessary.
c. Internal Wiring
The MCC panels shall be fully wired internally at the manufacturer works to terminal
strips.
The control panel internal wiring shall accord with BS 7671:2008. All internal wiring of
the control panel shall utilize 600/1000V grade single core, circular Tri Rated PVC
(heat resistant) insulated cables of appropriate current carrying capacity complying with
BS 6231.
The control circuits live conductors shall be wired using white colour insulation while
the neutral conductors shall have black colour insulation.
All cabling within the panel shall be run within appropriately sized purpose made
slotted, plastic trunking, fitted with appropriate retaining clips and arranged to run
continuously around inside the panel. Cables to items of control gear shall then leave
the trunking slots adjacent to their location, with any quantity of cables from the
trunking to control item being formed into a loom using flexible plastic loom wraps.
d. Fixings
No item of equipment secured within the control panel shall incur penetration of the
main cabinet enclosure for riveting, bolting, etc.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-23/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
All fixings shall be achieved with adequately sized brass bolts and nuts (or threaded
inserts).
Any fixing bolt visible from the front face of the panel shall be mushroom headed and
bright chromium plated with similar sized visible bolt heads generally used, with the
possible exception of main panel fascia plate retaining bolts which may be larger.
e. Identification & Referencing
Each isolator switch, indicator lamp and panel component shall have its function clearly
identified and labeled.
Adjacent to each external connections terminal block shall be fixed a label identifying
each field device to be connected with each wiring terminal individually referenced to
the main wiring diagram. Each circuit breaker and starter shall be labeled to define the
item protected and the rating or overload settings to be used.
For ease of tracing cabling, at each termination position the cable shall be identified
with a numbered Helerman cable identification ferrule corresponding to the workshop
wiring diagram provided with the control panel.
All label plaques shall be screw fixed engraved black traffolyte having white substrate
with clear and legible letters / numbers, graded in size for emphasis and positive
identification. The intended labeling text and formats shall in all cases be submitted to
the Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing. Warning labels shall be provided
in all compartments and spaces fixed in prominent locations to warn of any dangerous
voltages that may be present eg. 415 V and 240 V.
Engraved traffollyte mimic diagrams plaques shall be provided fixed to all MCC panel
fascia to clearly chart in a single-line format the configuration of electrical connections.
The intended labeling diagram, text and format shall in all cases be submitted to the
Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing.
f.
Compensated Equipment
Any motorized valves and damper controlled via a compensated system, shall be
arranged such that a manual selector switch is provided to override compensated
selection and enable manual opening/closing or on/off control, as appropriate. Any
compensator unit mounted within the control cabinet shall remain in the manufacturer's
purpose made enclosure and be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
The panels shall contain all the necessary devices for the automatic restart of units
after power failure where required.
21.2.7 CONTACTORS - OVERLOAD AND CONTROL RELAYS
Contactors used for any application in the project shall be type tested to AC3 duty and
comply with BS EN 60947-4-1:2001.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-24/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The contactors shall be 4-pole units designed for use on ac electrical systems. The
magnet and contact movements shall be horizontal. The contacts shall be double
break, butt- type and each moving contact shall be individually spring-loaded. All fixed
and moving contacts shall be of the silver-cadmium oxide type.
The contactor coils shall be of the continuous rated type. These coils shall be wound
on moulded formers and shall be vacuum impregnated.
The contactors shall be factory calibrated and compensated for operation at an
ambient temperature 50oC and be sealed.
Each contactor shall be provided with an adequate number of auxiliary switches of N/O
and N/C types.
Contactors shall be complete with provisions for manual operation (ON/OFF),
indications and overload relays.
a. Overload Relays
These are to be used in conjunction with motor starters to provide protection against
overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage
conditions.
The relays shall be selected such that the full-load current of the equipment protected
falls at the centre of the relays adjustment range.
For Star-Delta starting, the overload relays shall be placed on the mains supply
contactor.
b. Control Relays
Shall be of the encapsulated plug-in type and incorporate positive visual indication that
the operating coil is energized. Bases for relays shall be mounted horizontally, to
ensure relay is vertical above the base when the control cabinet is in its intended
location. Cable terminals shall be of the screw type, suitable for receipt of spade type
crimped/soldered lugs.
Adjustable time-delay relays used for Star-Delta starters shall ensure precise tolerance
for the timing function. The relay shall have a linear setting scale over a 350o rotation
by means of a knurled knob with calibrated timer setting marks. The relay shall be
equipped with two electrically separated time-delayed contacts, one normally open and
one normally closed.
21.2.8 SWITCHBOARD OPERATOR
All electrical switch rooms and plant room switchboards / motor control centre panels
shall be provided with a 1000 mm wide carbon free rubber floor mat complying with BS
921, having a ribbed upper surface and span the full extent of each switchboard.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-25/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
These insulating mats shall each be certified to have sustained, without failure, a one
minute voltage flash test at 2 kV level.
21.2.9 FUSE SWITCHES AND ISOLATORS
a. General
These shall be metal clad with front operated handles interlocked with the enclosure
to prevent opening while the switch is closed and Shall comply with BS EN 609473:2009.
The switches shall have clear and positive "On/Off" indications and a means of
locking in "Off" or out of service position.
Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP65 for external or
damp locations and IP54 for other situations.
Load break switches and switch-fuses should be „ARC TESTED‟ (complete system
along with enclosure) and type tested from by a reputed international testing
laboratory for the degree of ingress protection as well as electrical arc testing.
The enclosure should have a reliable position indicator so that in the event the switch
contacts are welded together, the handle (front operated) should deviate from the
ON-Position less than 45o.
b. Fuse Switches & Switch-Fuses
Shall comply with BS EN 60947-3:2009.
Fuses shall comply with BS 88 and be of bolted fixing type, class Q1, certified for
415V and AC3 duty, rated as indicated.
Fused switch carriages shall be of the withdrawable type.
Fuse switches shall be ASTA certified to 50 kA minimum.
c. Disconnect Switches (Isolators)
These shall be of the same design as the switch-fuses, fitted with solid copper links
in place of the fuses.
Single-pole and neutral (SP&N), or triple pole and neutral (TP&N).
Ratings: Minimum rated fused short-circuit current, 50 kA RMS.
Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP65 for external or
damp locations and IP54 for other situations.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-26/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Some applications (as identified upon the drawings) may require 2-pole (SPN), 4pole (TPN) or 6-pole versions of these switches and these shall be provided where
ever indicated.
21.2.10 CABLES
a. Trunking and Conduit Wiring
Wiring to general purpose lighting and power circuits shall be via pvc insulated single
core cables with stranded copper conductors which shall be contained within
adequately sized cable trunkings and conduits. The cables shall be of 450/750 volts
grade conforming to BS 6004:2006 and be sized and configured for each circuit as
described upon the drawings and in conformance with the KAHRAMAA regulations.
The number and sizes of cables drawn into the conduit / trunking shall not exceed
than that given in the appropriate tables of the KAHRA MAA regulations. In all
cases, it must be possible to draw-in and withdraw any cable(s) without incurring
damage to the remaining cables. The cables to be used shall be colour coded
insulation - Red, Yellow and Blue for the respective phase wiring. Black shall be
reserved for the neutral cables and Green/Yellow stripe for the earth conductor. The
cables shall be installed on the ' loop-in' system (no through wiring), no joints being
made anywhere in the installation.
Cable ends shall be stripped with purpose made cable stripping tools correctly
adjusted to suit the conductor size. All terminations to fittings and accessories
subject to a temperature rise in excess of 130oF shall be carried out with conductors
insulated with heat resisting material such as Butyl Hypalon or Equal and approved.
Within distribution boards the wires comprising each circuit shall be bound together
and neatly wired into position in an approved manner in-line with good workmanship
practice.
When cables are installed in trunkings the conductors of each circuit shall be bound
together in an approved manner at 600 mm. intervals. In vertical trunkings, cables
shall be supported by means of racks to prevent stress caused by the weight of the
conductors. The overall cross-sectional area of all conductors installed shall not
exceed the 45% space factor permitted by KAHRA MAA.
To identify the wires, each phase wiring insulation shall be of the designated color
and provided with cable marker ferrules to identify the circuit number.
No more than two cable conductors shall be joined in a terminal of any lighting or
small power accessory including light fittings. The minimum conductor size to be
used for lighting circuits shall be 2.5 mm2, and for 13 A socket ring circuits it shall be
4 mm2.
The cable core identification ferrules or sleeves shall be made of a heat resistant
elastic insulating material which shall be white with a gloss finish. The cable marker
ferrules shall not be adversely affected by contact with oil or moisture. Text
characters shall be suitably and indelibly marked in black.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-27/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
b. Surface Wiring
Wiring for sub-main wiring and large items of plant shall in general be by multi-core
armoured cables run exposed on the surfaces of cable ladders / trays or fixed and
cleated direct to the building fabric as indicated upon the drawings. The cable
conductors shall be sized to comply with the following:
1. Derating regulations of KAHRA MAA.
2. Switch rating of the load.
3. Allowance for 2.5% maximum voltage drop from the transformer secondary
terminals or KAHRA MAA supply point to the furthest most circuit load.
The contractor shall provide armoured cables where-ever specified. These cables
shall be designed for 600/1000 V systems and shall be either PVC/SWA/PVC or
XLPE/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/LSOH type as indicated on the drawings.
Any armoured cable being used at site must bear the manufacturer's name on the
outer sheath and the voltage rating for which it is manufactured.
1. PVC/SWA/PVC cables shall comply with BS 6346.
2. XLPE/SWA/PVC cables shall comply with BS 5467.
3. XLPE/LSOH/SWA/LSOH cables shall comply with BS 6724.
Cables carrying 3 phase and neutral loads shall be 4 cores, the neutral conductor
having the same cross-sectional area as the phase conductors.
The minimum internal radius of bends in cables shall not be less than that given in
the appropriate Table of the BS 7671:2008.
Parallel cable runs comprising more than one cable shall be fixed by suitable sized
nylon cable cleats at an interval not to exceed 1500 mm along the cable tray or cable
ladder.
Cables shall be installed as indicated upon the drawings. The arrangement of cables
and the methods of drawing and laying down shall be approved by the Consultant
prior to commencing installation. Where cables are installed in areas or locations
that may be subjected to direct sunlight, the contractor shall provide suitably
approved sunshield made of an inverted 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet and fixed
in position with approved nut and bolt fixings.
Cables indicated on the drawings to be installed in floor trenches shall be provided
with adequate cable racking / tray / ladder supports appropriate for the quantity and
weight of cables to be installed. Cables shall be run neatly and arranged to make the
most efficient use of the space provided within the cable trench.
Cables indicated upon the drawings to be buried direct below ground shall be laid at
a minimum depth of 600 mm below the finished grade. The cables shall be laid as a
single layer on a cushion of graded and washed fine builders sand of 200 mm depth
and shall be covered with another layer of 200 mm depth above it. Cable marking
tape shall be installed on the top layer of sand throughout the cable route. A
minimum horizontal clearance of 50 mm shall be maintained between the cables.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-28/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Where indicated upon the drawings cables installed below ground shall be drawn
into concrete encased duct banks to cross below roads, paths and paved / concrete
areas. Concrete encased duct banks shall comprise circular PVC ducts of minimum
150 mm diameter buried at a depth of 800 mm. below ground level and surrounded
by a concrete layer of 100 mm. thickness from all sides, unless otherwise specified.
Cable route and joint marker posts of an approved type shall be provided along the
route of buried cables as instructed by the Consultant. Markers shall be installed at
all cable joint positions and all places where the route changes direction and on
straight routes at distances not exceeding 100 m. The provision and installation of
cable markers shall be included in the schedule of rates for excavation and
reinstatement.
Where any part of the cable is buried in the ground, the armouring shall not be used
as the earth and instead a separate pvc sheathed earth conductor shall be provided
and buried alongside the power cable. The size of the earth conductor shall not be
less than half the associated phase conductor but not less than 16 mm2.
The Contractor will be responsible for removing and replacing of all cable trench
covers, free of charge, during the execution of his work as directed by the
Consultant.
All single core and multi-core main power cables shall be installed with cleats or
saddles when fixed along vertical routes. Small power cables, those having
conductor areas of 16 mm2 and less, shall be installed on trays but segregated from
other cables on the same tray by a space of at least 30 mm. All multi-care / pair
control cables shall also be installed on trays dedicated to controls cables.
All cable terminations shall be carried out using compression type cable glands
designed to adequately and firmly secure the steel wire armouring. All armouring
and all faces of armour clamps making contact with them shall be thoroughly
cleaned during installation and all clamps shall be adequately tightened to ensure
good electrical contact. The installation shall be such that there will be no electrical
discontinuity along the armouring and no local hot spots or high resistances. The
means of earthing the armouring to the earth bar at either end shall be provided by
means of an approved metallic bond of adequate conductance and the bonding
connection shall be as short and straight as practicable. All terminations are to be
fitted with PVC shrouds so as no exposed cable armouring exists.
c. Fire Barriers
Where cable ladders, trays, conduits or trunkings pass through fire-resistant
structural elements such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings
made shall after installation be sealed or fire stopped according to the appropriate
degree of fire resistance of the breached fire wall. In the case of cable trunkings or
conduits an approved internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent
the spread of fires.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-29/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
d. Mineral Insulated Cables
MICC/PVC covered cables 600/1000 V grades Conforming to BS 6207 Part 1, shall
be used mainly for the sub-station wiring within the HV switchgear and transformer
rooms.
Mineral insulated cables shall have copper conductors with copper sheath and PVC
over sheaths in all applications.
Neoprene conductor sleeves shall be fitted to the exposed conductors and cold
setting compound shall be used packed within the pot seals for normal applications.
Terminations shall comply with BS 6081-1. The temperature classification of the seal
shall be “Class 105” unless otherwise indicated or directed by the consultant. Glands
shall be Type “Y” and a PVC shroud shall be neatly fitted over gland terminations.
Before fitting the shroud in place, all bare metal shall be wrapped with pressure
sensitive adhesive PVC tape.
On three phase circuits, the insulation sleeves shall carry distinctive coloured
(red/yellow/blue) bands identifying each phase, and for single phase circuits then a
red band shall be used to mark the phase conductor. For circuits involving 3 phases,
the correct phase identification colour bands shall be used, and the markers shall
conform to BS 1710.
Cables shall be fixed to walls or cable tray by means of PVC covered copper clips.
Cable clips and/or saddles shall be of the correct type fire-resistant as made by the
cable manufacturer, or by special copper saddles for runs of large number of cables.
The distance between fixing centres shall follow manufacturer's recommendations
and the completed installation shall present a neat, appearance, with all cables held
rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed.
Cables rising from the floor in exposed positions shall have some form of mechanical
protection for approximately 450 mm. above floor level. This may either be a short
length of metal channel (mainly cable tray).
Frequent insulation tests shall be made during the course of the work to ensure that
pot seals have been installed correctly and in the case of cables buried in the
structure a test shall be made as soon as possible after the cables and its protection
channel have been covered.
While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the cable
run in order to take up possible expansion movements.
e. Fire Rated Flexible Multi-core Cables
Fire rated flexible multi-core cables conforming to BS 7629-1 shall be used as shown
in the drawing for applications that do not require cable armouring. These
thermoplastic LSOH sheathed / insulated cables shall have stranded copper
conductors with high performance damage resistant insulation and an aluminium foil
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-30/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
/ polyester tape screen in contact with adequately sized bare tinned annealed copper
stranded circuit protective conductor.
The Fire rated flexible cables shall comply with the following fire performance
standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Resistance to Fire: BS 6387 category CWZ.
Smoke Emission: BS 7622.
Acid Gas Emissions: BS 6425-1 <0.5% Acid gas.
Flame Retardant: BS 4066-1.
Reduced Flame : BS 4066-3 Category C propagation.
In addition the cables shall have excellent data/signal transmission characteristics,
manufactured under an ISO9001Quality system and be BASEC certified.
These cable shall be run in PVC conduits or cable tray / trunkings or run in open
execution (no more than two parallel cables) in the ceiling voids by means of LSOH
coated single hole, fire resistant metal fixing clips. Cable clips and/or saddles shall
be of the correct type as made / recommended by the cable manufacturer or by
special LSOH coated saddles for runs of large number of cables.
The distance between fixing centers shall follow the manufacturer's
recommendations and the completed installations shall present a neat, appearance,
with all cables held rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed.
While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the cable
run in order to take up possible expansion movements.
21.2.11 CONDUITS
a. General
Polyvinyl Chloride Conduits and accessories shall be used for lighting and small
power circuit wiring in concealed in cast within the slabs, walls and floor screeds. All
the exposed & surface mounted above false ceiling conduits shall be galvanized (GI)
steel conduits and accessories shall be used..
b. uPVC Conduits
The plastic conduits (uPVC) shall be manufactured from heavy gauge, rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride compound of the high impact grade. The impact
strength shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 61386. No conduit smaller than
20 mm in diameter shall be used.
The minimum wall thickness for the conduits shall be as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
20 mm dia.: 1.8 mm
25 mm dia.: 1.9 mm
32 mm dia: 2.5 mm
38 mm dia.: 2.5 mm
50 mm dia.: 2.5 mm
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-31/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
All PVC conduit accessories shall be manufactured from rigid uPVC of the same
manufacturer as that of the conduits.
Where a solid fixed joint between a conduit and accessory is required, use shall be
made of an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the plastic conduits
selected. When making a joint, care must be taken to ensure that the plastic conduit
is thoroughly cleaned at the ends to ensure good adhesion.
Flexible joints shall be made using a non-hardening adhesive and shall be used in
conjunction with approved expansion couplers. Conduit installations that become
distorted or flexed through thermal expansion will not be accepted.
Where bends or off-sets are required, these shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer‟s instruction without altering the section of plastic conduit/s. For plastic
conduits up to 25 mm diameter, cold bends shall be acceptable. The bends shall be
formed with the use of a bending spring obtained from the plastic conduits
manufacturer.
For large sizes of conduit/s, bends shall be formed by pre-heating the tube before
inserting the spring to prevent shrinking. Pre-heating shall be done with a suitable
electrically heated and powered blow lamp (NOT a naked flame) and sufficient care
shall be taken to avoid physical damages of the conduits (deformation). Any other
method of bending can also be considered subject to the approval of the consultant.
Deep circular boxes shall be used where more than 10 nos. of 2.5 mm2 cables are
crossing within the box. Plastic conduits shall not be installed in situations where the
continuous ambient temperature exceeds 50oC or where, for intermittent periods, the
o
ambient temperature exceeds 70 C; badly formed or damaged plastic conduits shall
not be permitted to be installed. Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight
runs of plastic conduits exceeding 6000 mm in length. The plastic conduit shall be
free to slide within saddles to if used in a surface mounting application..
Special consideration should be given to fixing of all accessories in situations where
the temperature fluctuates excessively. The plastic conduits shall be fixed at 1000
mm intervals by spacer bar saddles; draw-in points shall be provided at every 8000
mm interval along straight runs or after not more than one right angle bend; where
such points are provided exclusively for draw-in purpose, they must comprise
inspection couplers.
Where the conduit system are required to be laid concealed then all the lighting
conduits shall be laid at the roof level and dropping down to each point and all the
power circuit conduits shall be laid in the screed of the floor wherever possible or in
the floor slab using only the correct manufacturers fittings and accessories.
The Electrical Contractor shall exercise care when installing plastic conduits to
prevent interference with or from other services and shall keep at least 300 mm clear
of any hot water pipes.
No equipment weighing more than 12 kg shall be suspended from the circular plastic
boxes. For loads more than 12 kg in weight then approved and purpose made
supporting systems shall be used with flexible cable and plug-in type roses used for
the final wiring connections.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-32/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Where purpose made junction boxes are used to draw-in the cables, then the covers
of these boxes shall be of the same finish as that of the switch / socket plates.
Where enclosed bulkhead type light fittings are fixed directly to a high impact circular
uPVC conduit box, steel insert clips must be used for fixing the luminaries on the
box.
c. Galvanised Steel Conduits
Steel conduits shall be new, heavy gauge, solid drawn, galvanized (GI) and shall
comply with BS EN 61386. Each length of the conduit shall bear a stamp
guaranteeing it to be as per the required specifications. The use of conduits less
than 20 mm in diameter will not be permitted.
All conduit fittings and accessories including screwed couplers, ordinary clips,
saddles, pipe hooks, screwed reducers, stopping plugs, lock nuts plus male and
female brass bushes shall comply with BS EN 61386 as applicable. All screwed
couplers, screwed reducers, and locknuts shall only be used on surface installations,
Screwed or push-fit inspection elbows, bends and inspection couplings must not be
used.
Galvanized steel sheet adaptable inspection boxes shall be provided and fixed in
inspection and in locations where more than two conduits cross. These boxes shall
be 150 x 150 x150 mm deep, (inside measure). Where the boxes are fully recessed,
they shall be provided with 14 SWG galvanized steel lids, overlapping the boxes by
6mm all round.
d. Methods of Installation
Conduits buried in concrete shall have 37 mm depth minimum of cover over the
entire length; conduits buried in plaster shall have 6 mm depth minimum of cover
over its entire length. Conduits penetrating through the roof slabs shall be complete
with goose neck and sealed. Conduits laid on concrete floor slabs shall be fixed by
means of corrugated steel saddles and secured by hardened steel pins at 1200 mm
centres. On pre-stressed concrete floor slabs fixings must be in to the joints between
the beams unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.
In the case of cast “in-situ” applications, the contractor shall ensure that adequate
precautions are taken for the secure fixing, positioning, alignment and protection of
all conduits and boxes during the construction operation. These conduits and fittings
must also be suitably plugged to prevent the ingress of foreign matter in order to
prevent the conduit system from becoming blocked during the building construction.
Any additional costs resulting from blockages or damage to conduits due to
negligence or lack of attendance shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Female brass bushes shall be fitted on to all free ends of the conduit system.
Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and water tight
after the installation is completed.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-33/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until
dry and clean. No steel conduit installations shall be used as a sole earthing system.
Separate circuit protective conductors shall be installed within the conduits in all
cases.
All spare ways in junction boxes etc., left for possible future extensions shall be fitted
with brass stopping plugs. For wiring purposes, all draw-in and inspection boxes
must be installed in readily accessible positions, as agreed by the Consultant.
No more than one right angle bend or equivalent sets must be made in conduit runs
between inspection boxes. On straight runs, inspection boxes must be inserted after
each second conduit length.
Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold without altering the section
or opening the seams of the conduit. No bend shall have an inside radius of less
than three times the external diameter of the conduit. All bends must be machine
made.
The inside surface of the erected conduit and conduit fittings shall be smooth and
free from burrs and other defects. Exposed GI conduits shall be painted with two
coats of paint to match with the color of the walls.
21.2.12 CABLE TRUNKING ANDTRAYS
a. Steel Trunking
Cable trunking shall be used where it is accessible and can replace numerous final
circuit conduit runs.
A reputed and approved Engineering company shall manufacture all the trunking and
fittings.
Galvanised (GI) sheet metal cable trunking shall be used throughout in all vertical
rising ducts, in the positions detailed on the drawings or for terminating conduits and
cables at distribution boards etc. Cable trunking must be used in ceiling voids where
otherwise large runs of multiple conduits would occur.
Cable trunking and fittings shall comply with BS EN 50085 and shall be Class 3
galvanized (G) protected as detailed in the following specifications and drawings.
All cable trunking shall consist of abutted sections manufactured from Zintec coated
high-grade steel sheet of not less than 16 swg. All accessories such as bends, tees,
offsets, reducers etc., shall be of the same manufacture and finish and be of the
gusseted type to aid the installation of cables.
Multi-compartment trunking shall be divided into the required number of
compartments by means of continuous steel sheet separators running the full length
of the trunking. Each partition shall be at such a height that when the trunking cover
is fastened in position there shall be no gap between the top edge of the partition
and the inside face of the cover. Corresponding separate compartments shall be
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-34/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
provided in all tees, angles, reducers etc., to ensure that segregation of the various
services is effected as detailed in the specifications and drawings.
All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded corners. All
angles formed in wall trunking shall have fillet corners.
Adjoining lengths shall be correctly aligned and the trunkings shall be joined together
by means of internal fishplate connector and mushroom headed set screws or
purpose made coupling pieces depending on the design of the trunking. After
joining, there shall be no gap visible between sections of the trunking or
compartment partitions.
Internal fish plate connectors shall be not less than 2.5 mm. thick and attached by
means of not less than 4 nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws
for trunking having a total cross sectional area below 5700 mm2 and 8 nos. cadmium
plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking having cross sectional areas
in excess of 5700 mm2 each passing through clearance holes, shake proof washers
and nuts. Two pairs of screws on either side of the joint shall be connected by
tinned copper links with split washers under the nuts to provide guaranteed electrical
continuity across the joints.
The nuts shall be located on the outside of the trunking and the tinned copper straps
shall be provided across all joints formed by straight lengths, angles, tees etc. The
copper straps shall be fixed on the external faces of the trunking to be visible.
All joints shall be securely bolted together and the whole assembly shall be fixed at
intervals not greater than 1200 mm dependent upon the size of the trunking and
number of cable contained.
The trunking shall be fitted with a continuous lid made from the same material which
shall be secured to the trunking by means of cadmium plated mushroom head
screws spaced not greater than 450 mm.
Where trunking terminates at
switchboards, distribution boards and equipment enclosures, a proper-flanged
coupling piece shall be used, securely bolted to the trunking and to the enclosure.
Solid end stops shall be a manufacturer‟s purpose made steel sheet terminal piece.
In case of trunking covers, which are cut, the contractor shall ensure that the cut
edges are true and match with the adjacent covers. The over lapping of covers will
not be permitted and under no circumstance either will gaps be accepted.
Where trunkings passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be
permanently fitted before erection such that the cover plate extends a minimum of 50
mm. beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors.
The wiring within the trunking shall be securely held in position by means of the
manufacturer‟s own clips or bars fitted at regular intervals throughout the run of
trunking, with separate cable clips being provided for each compartment of the
trunking.
Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment and connected
to different distribution boards i.e. single phase and 3 phase power circuits, they
shall be distinguished by separating the cables and binding with insulated tape at
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-35/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
intervals of 1200 mm together with an approved means of identification sleeve
adjacent to each binding that clearly denotes the circuit type and reference.
All connections between trunking and/or bus-bar chambers and to each item of
switch, switch-fuse or distribution boards are to be made direct and without
intermediate conduit or conduit couplers. The top and/or bottom glanding plates of
the items being connected are to be removed and a suitable dimensioned slot is to
be cut to accommodate passage of all the cable plus a further 6 mm. all around with
similar slot in the appropriate position in the trunking or busbar chamber. A
laminated paxolin fillet 5 mm. thick is to be inserted between the item plate and
trunking and bus-bar chamber with a slot 6 mm to be smaller all around than the slot
cut in the metal parts so that damage to the cable is avoided.
All covers shall be easily removed with a hand tool and the trunking shall be properly
spaced away from any surface which may prevent this.
Dimensions obtained from site shall determine the shape of purpose-made pieces of
trunking. On-site welding shall not be allowed. Flexible expansion joints shall be
provided in trunking runs where they cross building expansion joints and as required.
Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity minimum for the installation of any
future cables. Due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the correct space factor
of the fully loaded trunking is provided.
Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings wherever
possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in a horizontal plane with
the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking and all conduits connected to the top
and sides of the assembly.
The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the false ceiling structure
and below the concrete soffit.
Conduits shall be used to complete the final containment of each circuit from the
general trunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated and
shall emanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of the cable trunking and
rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits shall then be taken through the
structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the various lighting,
power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points.
For recessed cables terminating in recessed DBs, a recessed trunking shall be used
with cover flush with the outer surface of wall. In case of new cables being installed
on the surface of existing wall, surface trunking shall be used. In both cases, cables
shall be terminated with glands of appropriate type and size.
The whole of the trunking shall be installed in a skilled workman like fashion so that it
presents a neat appearance and shall ensure that continuous cable access is
maintained so that cables may be laid in the trunking and not drawn-in.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-36/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
b. Underfloor Trunking
The trunking shall be 3 compartment type including junction boxes and 3 way outlet
boxes for telephone, socket outlet (small power) and computer terminals as shown
on the tender drawings.
All the under floor trunkings and under floor service outlet boxes used for the
installation shall be pre-galvanized and conform to BS EN 50085.
The junction boxes, outlet boxes offset units, intersections shall be manufactured of
Zinc Alloy die cast and base frame shall be moulded in one piece. The trunkings
shall be divided into three equal compartments. The trunking shall be held in
position using fixing clips. Trunking lengths shall be supplied with one pair of
connectors and one earth continuity link.
The intersections shall be supplied with a flyover unit and cover to give a complete
unit ready for installation into an in-cavity trunking system. All accessories,
compartments and connection shall be of the same manufacturer. Custom made
attachment units will not be accepted.
Outlet boxes shall be adjustable height type and allowance shall be made for carpet
thickness in order to have final even level flooring.
The outlet box shall
accommodate one twin socket outlet, one telephone outlet and one computer outlet.
The conversion packs shall be allowed for in the Tender price and the contractor is
to supply and install all the terminal outlets, including the computer outlets at the
model and type as requested by the Consultant.
The outlet box frame shall be finished with flanged ends to allow insertion of carpet
over it.
The Main contractor shall render the cement screed under, above and around the
system with the Contractor in attendance at all times.
Additional spare conduits, though not indicated on the drawings, may be requested
to be drawn from the junction boxes to the walls at the time of installation for
additional outlets. The contractor is to allow for such additions in his tender price
since no variation costs will be entertained later for this item.
c. Cable Trays
The cable trays shall be of the conventional perforated pattern with return flanges
manufactured from a minimum of 2 mm or above Aluzink steel.
Aluzink is a sheet steel known for it inherent strength with an alloy coating consisting
of Silicon (1.6 %). Aluminium (55%) for protection against corrosion and zinc (43.4%)
safe guarding the steel. The Aluzink used should be of grade B500A, AZ150 in
conformity with grade DX 51D +AZ 150 as per EN 10215.
Sections of tray shall be jointed together with mushroom head screws, nuts and
spring washers. These shall be plated or treated with rust inhibitor. The screws and
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-37/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
nuts shall be so arranged to ensure that no projecting screw threads occur on the
part of the tray upon which the cables are laid.
The cable trays shall be securely fixed to purpose made brackets with space behind
to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening up of nuts. The brackets shall be
spaced in such a way so as to prevent sagging. The contractor shall ensure that
overall tray arrangement is rigid. The contractor shall include for all the cable trays
necessary to complete the works and as indicated upon the drawings.
The cable trays shall be of sufficient width to take all cables without crowding and
shall allow for possible future additions to the proportions of the present
requirements. Cables shall be run as a single layer: Stacking will not be permitted.
Cable trays fixed to walls or flat ceilings shall be installed with the flange outwards or
downwards respectively to suit and shall be anchored with an approved fixing with
spacing and washers such that the tray is spaced at least 25 mm from the surface of
the wall or ceiling. Earth continuity shall be maintained between each section of
cable tray and each total run of tray shall be effectively bonded to the nearest earth
continuity conductor.
Each section of tray shall be securely bolted to the next with sufficient overlap to
prevent sagging and twisting. Normal bends of not less than 450 mm radius shall be
used.
The method of fixing each run of cable tray shall be approved by the Consultant prior
to installation. In all instances, the cable trays shall be supported from the structure
of the building. The method of fixing the cable tray and brackets shall be approved
by the Consultant before installation.
The manufacturer shall confirm a guarantee of at least 12 years for the cable trays
against any corrosion in the Qatar climatic conditions.
Wherever tees or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factory made. No
cutting of tray shall be permitted. Wherever necessary, the same shall be properly
painted with the prior permission of the Consultant. Deviation from the straight shall,
if possible, be made with purpose made bends. Where purpose made bends cannot
be used, the tray may be cut and the bends fabricated on site to the approval of the
Consultant.
All the supports shall be fabricated out of appropriately sized galvanized steel
channels.
21.2.13 ELECTRICAL DUCTS
For electrical power and low current system cables to be buried below ground the
cables ducts shall be made of high impact resistant uPVC compound. Ducts shall be
of the diameter and number indicated upon the drawings. In any event any duct run
run / bank shall include at minimum 1 no. spare duct (not indicated on the drawings)
of the same size to be installed in parallel.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-38/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Each duct shall include a suitably sized nylon draw rope to protrude at both ends for
the future drawing-in of cables. Power cable ducts shall be as follows:
1. Material - High Impact Resistant uPVC.
2. Internal Diameter - 150 mm / 100 mm / 75 mm / 50 mm.(as indicated
upon the drawings).
3. Minimum Wall thickness - 3.6 mm for 150mm Dia.
- 2.4 mm for 100mm Dia.
- 2.4 mm for 75mm Dia.
- 2.4 mm for 50mm Dia.
4. For Telephone Cables -
90mm Dia., as per Q-Tel Standards.
uPVC pipe ducts shall be installed for the incoming QTel cables in accordance with
the configuration and methods detailed QGEWC (Electricity) standard drawing for
road crossings and elsewhere as described on the drawings.
uPVC pipe duct continuous pathway systems shall be installed in accordance with
Qatar Telecom ( Q-Tel) publication, with which the contractor is deemed to be
familiar.
Electrical Ducts used for Cables etc., shall be of the following types, as per QGEWC
regulations & Q-Tel standards and supplied by an approved manufacturer.
21.2.14 LIGHT FITTINGS
The contractor shall include in his costs for supply, erection, and connection of all
specified light fittings complete with suitable lamps in the positions shown upon the
drawings, unless otherwise directed.
No lighting fittings shall be purchased until the express authorization has been
received, in writing, from the Consultant to do so. This authorization shall be sought
by the Contractor in good time in order to allow the programme of works to continue
unaffected.
All light fittings shall be of types specified or be both equal and approved by the
Consultant. No alternative light fittings will be considered unless the Contractor
receives in writing the express approval from the Consultant.
All fluorescent lamp fittings, as a minimum, shall be complete with low loss epoxy
filled ballasts, switch start control gear and power factor correction condensers to
give a minimum power factor of 0.9 lagging and the control gear noise level shall be
limited to 24 dB.
The Contractor shall provide fluorescent lamps with electronic high frequency
ballasts if this is required on the schedule of light fittings. The units shall be of high
quality, low loss and low noise level units superior in all respects to the equivalent
conventional wound ballasts. These units and the lamps shall also be compatible for
use with the standard available dimming technologies.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-39/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The light fitting shall not be considered complete without the lamps of specified
wattage.
The connections between the circuit wiring and the light fittings mounted upon the
underside suspended ceilings shall be effected by means of plug-in type ceiling
roses and 1.5 mm2 3 core heat resistant flexible cable. The same method shall be
used for lighting fittings installed with chain or steel wire suspensions.
For light fittings fixed direct to conduit systems the cables shall loop-in to the light
fitting via a neoprene bush provided to protect the cables. The cables shall then be
terminated in the light fitting terminal block. No through wiring shall be permitted in
light fittings and the cables that do enter shall be kept as short as possible and be
fitted with heat resistant sleeves. All metal work shall be bonded to earth.
Where surface mounted light fittings are installed, conduit boxes, either of the loop-in
type or standard type shall be installed above each fitting position. Extension rings
shall be fitted as necessary so that the bottom of the ring is flush with the underside
of the ceiling. White break joint rings shall also be provided between the fittings and
conduit box to mask the joints as shall be deemed necessary by the Consultant.
In areas where the ceiling is of the suspended type, the weight of the conduit and
light fittings shall under no circumstance be carried by this type of ceiling and
suitable independent suspension fixings shall be provided and installed by the con
tractor to carry the weight of the fittings.
All lamps throughout the installation shall be supplied and fixed in position as per this
contract. They shall be of the sizes and types specified. All lamps over 150 W shall
be of the Edison screw-cap type. The lamps shall be supplied complete with end
caps compatible with the fittings into which they are to be inserted.
o
Fluorescent lamps shall be of correlated colour temperature of 3000 K unless
otherwise specified.
Each and every light fitting shall be fitted with power factor correction capacitors to
raise the power factor to 0.9 lag or better.
All lighting luminaries shall comply with BS EN 60598.
The contractor shall ensure that fluorescent fittings are connected to the three phase
distribution boards such that there is no stroboscopic effect.
With the exception of certain light weight domestic and commercial pendant types of
light fittings, no fittings shall be suspended by means of flexible cables. Where light
fittings are suspended they shall be by means of purpose made metal supports.
The contractor shall supply and install all necessary materials and equipment to
provide external lighting as shown on the drawings.
All excavation of cable trenches shall be carried out by the Main Contractor with the
Contractor in attendance. The Contractor shall supply all the electrical cable ducts,
warning tapes and marker posts required to complete the works. The electrical
contractor shall include for the necessary liaison with the Main Contractor in the
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-40/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
instruction and execution of this work. Before excavations are backfilled the
Consultant shall be notified by the Contractor in writing that the cable installation is
complete in order that an inspection may be made of the exposed cable installation.
All cables serving the luminaries shall loop in and out of the designated fittings and
joint boxes. No other intermediate cable joints shall be permitted.
An efficient and durable earth connection shall be made between the metalwork of
the luminaries and the wire armour of the cables.
All cables used for the external lighting installation unless otherwise detailed, shall be
of PVC/SWA/PVC sheathed type supplied and installed in accordance with the
relevant clauses of this specification and the details indicated upon the drawings.
21.2.15 WIRING ACCESSORIES
a. Switches
The switches shall be single-pole type rated for 240 V and a 10 A inductive load. No
de-rating of the switches shall be required in the case of use fluorescent light fittings
or other inductive loads.
All 1 way lighting switches shall be arranged to switch on the lights when the rocker
is pushed downwards.
Switches shall be of robust construction to provide a long trouble free operational
life.
All the cover plates, switches, grid mounted systems and mounting boxes shall
conform to BS EN 60670 and BS EN 60669–1:2000.
Wherever more than one switch is shown on the drawings, they shall be multi-gang
grid switch assembly and where they are powered from different phases, then the
manufacturers phase barriers shall be provided and correctly installed.
Switch terminals shall be of the screw down type to avoid any to give firm and secure
electrical connections.
b. 13 A Socket Outlets
All 13 A socket outlets shall be of the switched type with 240 V, 13 A rated 3-pin
socket. The socket outlets shall comply with BS 1362-2:1995. Twin socket outlets
shall be used wherever two adjacent sockets are indicated together unless otherwise
mentioned.
All socket outlets shall be adequately earthed, the circuit protective conductor shall
terminate direct and a flying lead shall be installed between the outlet earth terminal
and outlet box. For switched socket outlets exposed to external environmental
conditions or internally in damp areas shall be weather proof (IP65 rated) and
corrosion resistant.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-41/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The switched socket outlets shall be provided with integral neon indicating lamp to
indicate the 'ON' status of switch, unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.
All switch socket outlets shall be connected in ring circuits unless otherwise specified
and no spurs shall be permitted.
c. Connection Plates
All connection plates shall be provided flexible cable outlets and shall be installed
adjacent the equipment served such as fan coil units, water heaters and exhaust
fans. The connection plates shall be of a suitable rating having 3-way terminal
blocks and brass screws for direct connection of the flexible heat resistant cables.
They shall be of robust construction, of approved finish and of very high quality. All
flex outlets shall conform to BS 5733:1995.
d. Ceiling Roses
Ceiling roses shall be of an approved manufacture and be constructed from plastic
with a white finish conforming to BS 67:1999. All ceiling roses shall be fitted with an
integral 3-plate (high capacity) terminal block with earth terminal to comply with the
KAHRAMAA regulations. Where ceiling roses are mounted direct to recessed
conduit boxes they shall be fitted with a break joint ring (halo).
e. Double-Pole Switches
The switches for window A.C s. water heaters, hand dryer‟s units etc., shall be
double-pole, rated for either 20/30/50 A as appropriate and the selection made
based on the connected load. The switches shall have indicating lamps and the face
plates to match the finished required for the area concerned. These switches shall
conform to BS EN 60669-1:2000.
f.
Time Switches & Photo-Cell Controls
Photo-cells shall be of the photo-resistor type mounted externally in suitable location
to be approved by the Consultant. These photo-cells shall be equipped with
adjustment for the trigger light level.
A robust electro-mechanical time switch shall be provided. The time switch shall be
of the solar dial type suitable for the geographical latitude at which it shall operate. It
shall have a spring-reserve winding so that during power failure the clock
mechanism shall automatically keep accurate time for a minimum period of 12 hours.
The time-switch and photo-cell shall be wired and configured as shown upon the
drawings. The lights shall be switched by a multi-pole contactor also wired and
configured as shown upon the drawings. The contactor shall be of the rating
indicated on the drawings and shall be equipped with a coil that operates at 240 V 50
Hz, single phase ac.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-42/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The contractor shall also provide an override switch to switch on and switch off the
lights in the event the time and photo-cell controls fail to operate.
21.2.16 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
a. General
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a complete fire detection &
alarm system (analogue addressable) comprising of a main fire alarm control panel,
satellite fire alarm control panels, slave / repeater panels, mimic panels detectors
and field devices.
The main fire alarm panel and system components shall be interconnected using a
multiplex data transmission cable. The main panel, slave and repeaters shall be self
contained and capable of stand - alone operation.
The fire alarm equipment and installation shall comply with the following Standards:
1. CDD (Qatar Civil Defense Department) requirements.
2. BS 5839-1:2002+A2:2008
3. NFPA 72 & 70.
b. System of Operation
Operation of an analogue addressable detector or break glass call point shall signal
to the main panel to indicate the loop, device number / type. etc. in which the signal
was originated and an LED display shall be provided in the main panel for this
purpose.
Upon receipt of an alarm signal, the sounders through the system shall sound for 5
seconds in the loop zone where the call originated shall sound continuously. In other
loops the processor shall be programmable so that for each alarm signal the
sounder shall remain silent (after the first 5 second pulse) or shall sound
intermittently one second on five seconds off. The alarm signal shall alert the
Project‟s Staff first to check and respond properly, then in case of a true alarm it
should go general.
Provision shall be made at the main panel to silence the alarms but the visual
indication shall remain until the system is reset. A further call shall not be inhabited
whilst the sounders have been silenced.
Provision shall also be provided at the main panel to operate the alarm sounders in
any loop to indicate that the area should be evacuated.
In the event of an alarm call output signals shall be provided to release the
automatic doors closers, unlock fire escape exit doors, send a signal to shut down
the A/C and ventilation system through the BMS system (if applicable), etc.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-43/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
In addition operation of an analogue addressable detector in a lift motor room shall
provide a signal to the particular lift or lifts associated with the motor room and
dispatch the car to the ground floor.
The repeater panels (if applicable) shall incorporate a LED display and shall indicate
for each loop on the system the name of the loop where an alarm call has
originated.
Alarm calls shall be relayed to the Local Civil Defense Department by an auto dial
machine with recorded message via a dedicated telephone line.
Fire alarm system shall be interfaced and connected to the BMS (if applicable).
c. System of Wiring
Fire alarm wiring shall be completely segregated from all other systems.
All cables associated with the fire alarm installation shall be fire retardant copper
cables with a red PVC over sheath. Joints in cables shall be made only at
accessories unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer when the joint box shall be
detailed on record drawings.
All wiring shall be fire retardant/resistant and comply with BS 6387 category CWZ.
2
2
Cable conductors shall not be less than 1.5mm for detectors and 2.5 mm for alarm
loops.
Equipment shall all be connected on a two wire fully maintained closed circuit. Fire
alarm cables shall be installed in pvc conduits concealed in the building fabric except
in plant rooms and service where a surface installation shall be provided.
d. Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP)
The main control panel shall be an analogue addressable.
The panel shall be flush mounted in a polycarbonate or sheet metallic box with
epoxy powder finish. The panel shall comply with EMC requirements
(electromagnetic compatibility).
Digital codes shall be incorporated to allow on site reprogramming and isolation of
inputs and outputs. All programming shall be possible on site.
The panel shall be complete with a battery and charger unit. SLA free maintenance
for 48 hour in normal operation and 1 hour in general alarm.
The panel and associated equipment shall have capacity for all alarm and fault
signals required in the Contract and shall be capable of future upgrading to serve a
15% extension of the project.
MFACP shall contain a microprocessor-based central processing unit (CPU). It shall
communicate with & control the following types of equipment used to make up the
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-44/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules, transponders, local &remote
operator terminals, printers, annunciators, alarm system, and other system
controlled devices.
MFACP shall perform the following functions:
1. Supervise and monitor all intelligent/addressable detectors and monitor
modules connected to the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions.
2. Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits throughout the facility
by way of connection to transponders.
3. Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm
condition. Operate all notification appliances and auxiliary devices as
programmed.
4. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory or alarm, condition
on operator‟s terminal, panel display, and annunciators.
Operation
5. MFACP shall include a full featured operator interface control and
annunciation panel, which shall include a liquid crystal display (LCD),
individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an alpha-numeric keypad for
field programming.
6. All programming or editing of the existing programming in the system shall be
achieved without special equipment or interrupting the alarm monitoring
functions of the fire alarm control panel.
7. The system shall include alarm-annunciating system utilizing distributed
sounders such that loss of operation by the MFACP will not result in the loss
of alarm signal throughout the project.
8. MFACP shall be capable of providing the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
Block acknowledge for trouble conditions.
Rate charger control.
Control by-time (delay, pulse, time of day, etc.).
Automatic Day/Night sensitivity adjust (high/low).
Device blink control (turn of detector LED strobe).
Environmental drift compensation (selectable ON or OFF).
Smoke detector pre-alarm indication at control panel.
Smoke detector sensitivity test.
System status reports.
Alarm verification, by device, with tally.
Multiple printer interface.
Multiple CRT display interface.
Non-fire alarm module reporting.
Automatic detector test.
Programmable trouble reminder.
S-21-45/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
Upload/download system database to PC computer.
Smoke detector maintenance alert.
Security monitor point.
Alpha-numeric pager interface.
On-line or off-line programming.
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
1. MFACP shall include a central processing unit. The CPU shall comminute
with, monitor, and control all other modules within the control panel. Removal,
disconnection or failure of any control panel module shall be detected and
reported to the system display by the CPU.
2. The CPU shall contain and execute all control-by- event interlock for specific
local and network action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the
system. Control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile
programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and
secondary power failure occurs.
3. The central processing unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time
annotation of all system displays. The time-of-day and date shall not lost if
system primary and secondary power supplies fail.
e. Manual Call Point
Manual call points shall be analogue addressable type break glass units and shall be
semi-recess mounted. They shall have a plastic coated glass cover, which can be
broken without the use of a hammer and incorporate a key operated test facility.
f.
Point Type Detectors
All detectors shall be of analogue addressable type suitable for mounting to a
common base and connected to a two-wire looped circuit.
Heat detectors shall generally be designed to operate on "rate of rise" and a fixed
temperature 57C. Where heat detectors are installed in kitchens, plant spaces etc.,
where rapid temperature changes may occur they shall be fixed temperature type
only set for 85C. Rate-of rise shall operate at temperature rise gradients of between
8.25C – 13.5C.
Smoke detectors shall be of the photo-optical type. They shall incorporate green
coloured LED's to indicate that the unit is operational. Smoke and heat detectors
shall also incorporate red coloured LED's to indicate when the unit is in an "alarm"
state.
Where detectors are located in inaccessible positions, a remote LED (red) indicator
unit shall be provided close by in a normally visible location to illuminate when the
detector is in an alarm condition. This shall be engraved (Fire detector in void.).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-46/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
All programming and setting should be done from the FACP and not the detector
base. All devices shall therefore be “soft addressable” with device addresses being
automatically assigned from the MFACP.
All fire alarm detectors shall have As built in short circuit isolator.
All the required addressable interface modules shall be provided for ventilation duct
smoke detectors, transfer, switches, lifts, sprinkler flow switches …etc.
g. Beam Type Smoke Detectors
Beam type smoke detectors (analogue addressable type) shall be provided to be
deployed in high ceiling areas sand hall comprise a pulsed infra-red light source and
a matching receiver unit incorporating a time-delay feature (2-5 seconds).
The units shall be positioned to provide maximum protection of the area and to be
agreed on with the Engineer.
Each detector shall be suitable for use on 2 wire alarm circuits.
h. Sounders
Sounders/Bells - Alarm sounders shall be connected through an analogue
addressable module and be mounted directly over a flush conduit box at 500 mm.
below ceiling level and clearly labeled "Fire Alarm". Sounders shall all be of the
electronic type with an output of approximately 103 dB(A) with a distinctive
selectable tone. Sounders for installation outdoors shall be weatherproof. Sounders
shall have different selectable toner.
combined strobe light and siren unit shall be provided for mechanical plant rooms,
gymnasiums and similar areas with high ambient noise levels.
i.
Firemans Phone
A direct two-way voice communication fire telephone system shall be installed as
shown on the respective drawings. The system shall comprise of a central
exchange, operator Panel and a number of fire phone handset outstations distributed
as shown.
A pair of conductors shall discretely connect each outstation to the central exchange
as a radial (star) circuit. The system shall be entirely non-blocking and display the
status of all fire phone outstations.
Response from the outstations shall be indicated upon the operators panel and shall
be latched onto the memory of the system immediately. The central exchange and
operating Panel shall have built-in facility for transferring the selected outstation to
the building‟s public address and voice communication system loud speakers.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-47/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The Operator Panel shall be housed in a extruded aluminium enclosure, finished in
red epoxy painting (red to ral 3020), and shall have a capacity of 80 outstation
zones. Fire phone handset and momentary push button corresponding to each Fire
Telephone outstation shall be integral to the Operator‟s Panel. A pair of LED‟s
corresponding to each Fire Telephone shall be provided to indicate “Outstation Call
in” and “Outstation Circuit Trouble”.
The momentary Push button station shall facilitate following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Initiation of audible alert to selected Fire Phone Outstations.
Initiation of audible alert to all Fire Phone Outstations.
Testing of Lights and Sounders.
Acknowledge fault sounder push button.
Identify System healthy, System Trouble, A.C Supply healthy and DC charger
healthy, through visual display LED indications.
The Power supply to the Central Exchange and Operator‟s Panel shall be 240 V,
A.C. 50Hz, and the system shall operate on transmission audio frequency of 300 Hz,
and the signaling principle shall be loop disconnect.
The outstations shall be housed in a surface mounted Mild steel enclosure with 220º
swing hinged door with magnetic catch. The enclosure shall be complete with
sounder and termination chamber behind tamper proof fixing plates. An outstation
shall be fixed at each floor at the fire escape staircase.
j.
Peripheral Devices
The following devices and equipment shall be supplied and installed by the
Contractor as indicated on the drawings:
1. System color graphics station - The display shall be of the have colour type,
non-glare, 17 inch (diagonally measured) touch screen. The detachable
keyboard shall be of the enhanced, 101 key type and shall permit data
communication with the system CPU to permit the operator to acknowledge
system alarms and request status reports. Features shall be provided as
follows:
2. Graphical annunciation and control.
3. Up to 25,800 custom graphics screen, field generated / edited Via Auto CAD
DXF file format drawing tools.
4. Custom alarm and system error messages to guide operator dispatch
response.
5. Seven access levels for 256 Users.
6. Include network Interface for wired or fiber optic communications.
7. 17" High Resolution Monitor.
8. Desk top enclosures.
9. Touch screen and Mouse Operation.
10. Extensive Historical Logging:
a. Compatible with spread sheet and database programs for report
customization.
b. Operator notations can be added.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-48/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
c. Graphical diagnostics tools to identify exact status of network nodes and
wiring.
d. Dial-up service modem for remote network access.
e. RS232 Ports for connection to printers, paging Systems, or Third Party
Systems.
f. Up to 500,000 Events.
11. System Printer - The printer shall be provided with the following operational
capabilities:
a. Able to provide a permanent hard-copy record of all pertinent details of
system activity. Included on this record shall be all unscheduled status
change events, all operator acknowledgments of these events and all
operator control commands into the system and the time and date of all
occurrences.
b. The system printer shall record all alarm, supervisory and trouble
conditions by address number and custom label.
c. The custom labels of up to 40 characters and spaces, and time and date
of alarm, supervisory or trouble condition activation shall be printed out in
a language text so that the source of the condition is clearly understood
without referring to a code directory. Printout by address or code number
only shall not be considered as functionally equivalent.
d. The custom label (location message), of up to 40 characters and spaces,
for a specific device or circuit shall correspond to that displayed on the
fire alarm control panel LCD.
21.2.17 EMERGENCY PACK FOR LIGHTING
The emergency pack for lighting shall consist of individual power packs installed
within the light fittings, as shown on the tender drawings. The light fittings to be
provided with these power packs have been indicated with a symbol. These power
packs shall consist of converter/inverter with nickel-cadmium battery to provide 3
hours operation for one of the lamps in these fittings.
The design of the unit shall be such that it can be fitted easily into all types of fittings
including batten luminaries. The unit shall have the capability of sustaining high
temperature so that it can be accommodated into the fittings with high internal
temperature. However, if the internal temperature of the fitting exceeds 50 deg. C,
then the provision of mounting it in remote location shall be made. In case of remote
mounting, a purpose made remote box shall be provided.
Charger system shall have solid-state constant current with full recharge time of 24
hours. The inverter shall be high frequency transistor oscillator, producing sine wave
output.
There shall be red light emitting diode type charge indicator and an internal control
circuit to prevent the battery from deep discharge. The circuitry shall have two live
supplies, one switched and one Un Switched. Failure of Un switched supply shall
operate the change over circuit.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-49/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The system shall be suitable for operation on 240 V, 1 ph, 50 Hz., A.C system.
21.2.18 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET
a. General
Provide all labour, materials, and equipment to furnish, install, and place in operation
the power generation system in accordance with the contract documents and
manufacturer's drawings and installation instructions. These specifications also
describe requirements for the design, fabrication, and testing of the power system.
The installation of the power generation system shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Engine-driven generator set.
Control system.
Cooling system.
Fuel supply and storage system.
Generator set accessories.
Mounting system.
System control and switchgear.
b. Related Works
Refer to the following Tender Specification sections for related mechanical and
electrical considerations.
c. System Description
Generator sets shall be of the Prime Power rating for standby application and these
ratings shall be as indicated upon the drawings.
Prime Power rating is defined as 10% overload for 1 hour duration in any 12 hours
period of continuous operation at full-load.
d. System Loads
The diesel generator set(s) shall be sized to accept a minimum of 50% the full-load
rating upon starting and the voltage transient shall remain within 10% of nominal
output voltage.
e. System Function
The generator set(s) shall include the all the necessary controls and equipment to
automatically control the optimum generator set operation. After starting, the unit(s)
shall automatically attain rated speed and voltage, and accept the rated load. The
engine governor shall control generator set speed, while generator output voltage
regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic voltage regulator. Facilities
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-50/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
for the manual adjustment of the generator speed and voltage shall also be
provided.
f.
Diesel Fuel
The engine shall be designed and constructed to run on type 2 diesel, under the
specified environmental and site conditions.
g. Performance
The power generating system shall meet the performance criteria that follow:
1. Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full rated
generator set kW / kVA when operated at rated rpm and equipped with all
engine-mounted auxiliary and external loads such as radiator fans etc.
2. Conditions - The rating shall be based on ISO 3046/1 standard conditions of
o
100 kPa and 27 C (29.53 in Hg, 81F); BS 5514, DIN 6271, SAE J1349 and
API 7B-11C also apply.
3. Fuel - Diesel engines shall be able to deliver rated power when operating on
o
Type 2 diesel fuel having 35 API (16C, 60F) specific gravity.
4. Fuel Consumption - Diesel fuel rates shall be based on fuel having a low
heating value (LHV) of 42,780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29oC
(85oF) and weight 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs. / U.S. gal).
5. Start Time & Load Acceptance - Engines shall start, achieve rated voltage
and frequency, and be capable of accepting full-load within 10 seconds when
properly equipped and maintained.
6. Block Load Acceptance - Transient response shall conform to ISO 8528
requirements.
7. Power Delivery - Prime rating with 10% overload capability for a duration of 1
hour in any 12 hour period of operation at the rated full-load.
8. Frequency - 50 Hz
9. Voltage – Phase to phase = 415 V & phase to neutral = 240 V.
10. Allowable maximum Voltage Dip - upon the application of 50% of full-load
power rating – Within 10%.
11. Average Power Factor - 0.80 lag.
12. Steady State Speed Tolerance - +/- 0.50 %.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-51/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
h. Build Quality
The complete power generation system, including engine, alternator and control
panel shall be supplied by same manufacturer and the authorized dealer who has
been regularly engaged in the supply and support of complete diesel generator
power system products. All components shall be designed to achieve optimum
components and performance compatibility and prototype tested to prove integrated
the design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated,
assembled, and production tested. The naming of a specific manufacturer does not
waive any requirements of this specification. Any exceptions or variations must be
individually and separately listed as part of compliance statement.
i.
Responsibility
The responsibility for performance to this specification shall not be divided among
individual component manufacturers, but must be assumed solely by the primary
system supplier. This includes generating system design, manufacture, test, and
having a local supplier responsible for service, parts, and warranty for the total
system.
j.
Sub-Assembly & Packaging
Generator set mounted sub-assemblies such as cooling system, base, air intake
system, exhaust outlet fittings, and the generator set mounted controls shall be
designed, built, and assembled as a complete unit by the engine - generator
manufacturer.
k. Production Tests
The system manufacturer shall perform post production tests on the generator set
supplied. A certified report of these tests shall be made available when requested
and shall also be included in the O&M Manual.
l.
Drawings
All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the generator set, controls, and
switch gear must conform to a common and approved format.
m. Submittals
Submittals for approval shall be made in accordance with CSI Division 1. Submittals
shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Component List - A breakdown of all components and options including
switchgear.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-52/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
2. Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data
sheet identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including
relevant component design and performance data.
Engine:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Type, aspiration, compression ratio, and combustion cycle
Bore, stroke, displacement, and number of cylinders
Engine lubricating oil capacity
Engine coolant capacity without radiator
Engine coolant capacity with radiator
Coolant pump external resistance (maximum)
Coolant pump flow at maximum resistance
Alternator:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
Model
Frame
Insulation class
Number of leads
Weight, total
Weight, rotor
Airflow
Efficiency at 0.8 power factor for - 50% / 75% / 100% load.
Time constants; short circuit transient (T'D).
Time constants, armature short circuit (TA).
Reactance, sub transient - direct axis (XD).
Reactance, transient - saturated (XD).
Reactance, synchronous - direct axis (XD).
Reactance, negative sequence (X2).
Reactance, zero sequence (X0).
Fault current, 3 phase symmetrical.
Decrement curve.
Radiator:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Model
Type
Fan drive ratio
Coolant capacity, radiator.
Coolant capacity, radiator & engine.
Weight both, dry & wet.
System:
a. Dimensions - length x width x height. Weight, both dry & wet.
b. Performance - Based on SAE J1349 standard conditions of 100
kPa (29.61 in Hg) and 25oC (77F); also at conditions of ISO
3046/1, DIN 6271 and BS 5514. Fuel rates are based on ISO
3046 and on fuel oil of 35o API (16oC or 60oF) gravity, having a
LHV of 42780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29oC-(85oF)
and weighing 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs./U.S. gal).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-53/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
c. Power rating at 0.8 power factor.
d. kVA rating.
e. Fuel consumption at standard conditions for:
1) 50 % load.
2) 75 % load.
3) 100% load.
f. Combustion air inlet flow rate.
g. Exhaust gas, flow rate.
h. Stack temperature.
i. Exhaust system backpressure (maximum).
j. Heat rejection to:
1) coolant
2) after cooler
3) exhaust
4) atmosphere from engine
5) atmosphere from generator
Auxiliary Equipment:
a. Specification or data sheets, including switchgear, transfer switch,
vibration isolators, and day tank.
b. Drawings – General arrangements & dimensions drawings
showing overall generator set measurements, mounting location,
and interconnect points for load leads, fuel, exhaust, cooling &
drain lines.
Wiring Diagrams:
a. Wiring diagrams, schematics & control panel outline drawings
published by the manufacturer in Joint Industrial Council (JIC)
format for controls & switchgear showing interconnected points
and logic diagrams for use by contractor & owner.
Warranty Statements:
a. Warranty verification published by the manufacturer.
Service:
a. Location & description of supplier's parts & service facility
including parts inventory and number of qualified generator set
service personnel.
n. Service & Warranty Qualifications
The manufacturer shall have a local authorized dealer who can provide factorytrained servicemen, the required stock of replacement parts, technical assistance,
and warranty administration.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-54/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall have a local parts and service facility,
preferably near to the jobsite.
The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall be capable of administering the
manufacturer and dealer's warranty for all components supplied by the selling dealer
(who may or may not be the same as the servicing dealer).
The manufacturer's and dealer's warranty shall in no event be for a period of less
than one year from date of hand-over to the Client.
The generator set supplier shall have factory trained service representatives and all
the tooling necessary to install, test, maintain, and repair all provided equipment.
The generator set supplier shall have sufficient parts inventory to maintain over the
counter availability of at least 90% of the component parts.
The generator set supplier shall provide a scheduled oil sampling service to monitor
the engine condition on an ongoing and regular basis.
The oil samples shall be analyzed at the generator set supplier's facility by factory
trained personnel.
o. Component Requirements
The engine shall be stationary, Jacket water after cooler, 1500 RPM, four cycle
design with DRY exhaust manifolds. It shall be manufactured in the United States,
Western Europe or in Japan. It shall not be manufactured with any Class I ozone
depleting substances (ODS) as defined by Federal Register Vol 5, No. 86.
The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure gauge,
lubricating oil cooler, filters, and pressure gauge, water pump and temperature
gauge, service hour meter, flywheel, and flywheel housing when applicable.
The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive displacement type that is integral with the
engine and gear driven from the engine gear train. The system shall incorporate full
flow filtration with bypass valve to continue lubrication in the event of filter clogging.
The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or receptacle. Systems
where bypass valves are located in the replaceable oil filter are not acceptable.
Pistons shall be oil cooled by continuous jet spray to the underside or inside of the
crown and piston pin.
The filter shall incorporate a self-lubricating, free rotating seal and have a
nonmetallic core sufficiently rigid to minimize movement or shifting of the filtration
media.
The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of fuel filter,
transfer pump, injection pumps, lines, and nozzles. The transfer pump shall deliver
fuel under low pressure to individual injection pumps - one for each cylinder.
The injection pumps shall be driven from the camshaft and simultaneously controlled
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-55/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
by a rack and pinion assembly that is hydraulically actuated by signals from the
engine governor. The pumps shall be of a variable displacement type to alter the
volume of fuel delivered to the spray nozzles according to load demand.
The nozzles shall inject fuel directly into the cylinder in the optimum spray pattern for
efficient combustion.
In addition to the standard filter, the fuel system shall include a primary fuel filter
between the fuel tank and transfer pump to screen large contaminants.
A fuel/water separator shall protect the fuel system from water damage.
A manual fuel-priming pump shall facilitate priming and bleeding air from the system.
Flexible fuel lines between engine and fuel supply shall be installed to isolate
vibration.
A Free floor standing tank with capacity for 8-hour full-load operation shall be
provided. The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections; float switches, fuel
gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contact. A manual shutoff valve on the fuel line to
the engine and a tank drain valve shall also be included.
The engine governor shall be Electronic type and transient load response within
commercial and ISO 8528 tolerances. It will be selected, installed, and tested by the
generator set manufacturer to meet step load starting kVA requirement specified
within this document.
The engine control shall be of Electronic Programmable type. The control will
monitor all significant engine parameters,
The engine control shall be configured to avoid interruption of power whenever
possible. Engine Control system shall be provided with a programmable relay to
activate in case the load exceeds predefined level to shut down a non-essential load.
It shall display real time and historical data to allow user to optimize operation and
provide accurate service information in the event of a malfunction. Information shall
be accessible through a data link for remote monitoring, or through an RS 232 port.
A data link failure shall not cause an interruption of engine operation.
The engine Jacket water-cooling system shall be a closed circuit design with
provision for filling, expansion and de-aeration. The cooling pump shall be driven by
the engine. Coolant temperature shall be internally regulated to disconnect external
cooling systems until operating temperature is achieved.
Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the atmosphere
through a close-coupled radiator. The radiator shall be sized to cool the engine
continuously while operating at full rated load and at site conditions. It shall be a
folded core design consisting of individually replaceable core assemblies sealed
between the top and bottom tank and which can be replaced individually at the job
site.
The radiator-cooling fan shall be a blower type driven from the engine. Air shall be
drawn from the engine side and exhausted through the radiator core.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-56/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The engine air cleaner shall be engine mounted with dry element requiring
replacement no more frequently than 500 operating hours or once each year. If
external ducting is required, maximum restriction to the combustion air inlet shall be
6.7 kPa (27 in H2O) with airflow of 932 cfm.
Turbochargers shall be of the axial turbine type driven by engine exhaust gases and
direct - connected to a compressor supplying engine combustion air.
The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion gases quickly
and silently with minimum restriction. System including silencer shall be designed for
minimum restriction, and in no case shall backpressure exceed 6.7 kPa (27 in H2O).
Piping shall be supported and braced to prevent weight or thermal growth being
transferred to the engine and flexible expansion fittings provided to accommodate
thermal growth. Support dampers and springs shall be included where necessary to
isolate vibration.
Long runs of pipe shall be pitched away from the engine and water traps installed at
the lowest point. Exhaust stacks shall be extended to avoid nuisance fumes and
odors, and outlets cut at 45 to minimize noise.
Exhaust piping shall be insulated and clad with aluminium to limit the surface
temperature within 65oC.
An exhaust thimble shall be installed at the point where the exhaust pipe penetrates
the building.
The engine starting system shall include 24 volt DC starting motor(s), starter relay,
and automatic reset circuit breaker to protect against butt engagement. Batteries
shall be maintenance free, lead acid types mounted near the starting motor. A
corrosion resistant or coated steel battery rack shall be located to avoid spillage from
servicing of fuel and oil filters. Required cables will be furnished and sized to satisfy
circuit requirements. The system shall be capable of starting a properly equipped
engine within 10 seconds at ambient temperatures greater than 22oC (70oF).
Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by the generator set
manufacturer. They shall be a heavy-duty lead acid type with thru-partition
connectors, and housed in a hard rubber or polypropylene case with provision for
venting.
Batteries shall be located as close to the starting motor as practical, away from spark
sources, in a relatively cool ambient, and permit easy inspection and maintenance.
Battery warranty shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer.
The alternator(s) shall be Prime rated for Standby Application 415 V, three phase, 4
wire, 50 Hz, 0.8 1500 rpm.
The alternator(s) shall be capable of withstanding a three-phase load of 300% rated
current for 10 seconds, and sustaining 150% of continuous load current for 2
minutes with field set for normal rated load excitation. It shall exhibit less than 5%
waveform deviation at no load.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-57/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Alternator to be suitable for Motor Starting duty of 50% of Generator set rating and
maximum 10% voltage dip.
Alternator to be driven by a synchronous driver.
Alternator is to be hot, equivalent to the stabilized temperature band between the
alternator's 75% and 100% continuous load rating.
Alternator efficiencies shall be calculated according to IEC 34-2 Section 4, with all
I2R losses corrected to 115oC.
As a minimum the alternator shall be designed, manufactured to meet following
specification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rating - 415V, 3 phase, 50Hz, 0.8 pf.
Insulation Class - Class H.
Number of Poles – 4.
Excitation -Permanent Magnetic
The revolving field coils shall be precision wet layer wound with epoxy-based
material applied to each layer of magnet wire. Alternator pitch shall optimize
efficiency and minimize total harmonic distortion. The field shall be prototyped
tested for two hours at 150% of rated speed at 70oC, and production tested at 125%
of rated speed. It shall be dynamically balanced to 0.5 mil peak-to-peak.
The alternator shall be of class IP 22 designed to operate in a sheltered drip-proof
environment.
Alternator(s) shall be equipped with 240 V ac single-phase space heaters to
minimize condensation while the alternator set is idle. The heaters shall be capable
of easily mounting in the assembled alternator.
The alternator exciter shall be brushless with the circuit consisting of a three-phase
armature and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft.
Surge suppressors shall be included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage
spikes.
The permanent magnet excitation system shall derive excitation current from a pilot
exciter mounted on the rotor shaft. It shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% of
rated current for ten seconds during a fault condition.
Voltage regulator shall be Digital Programmable type. As installed, the voltage
regulator shall meet the applicable sections of the following standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with fully programmable
operating and protection characteristics. The regulator shall maintain generator
output voltage within +/- 0.25% for any constant load between no load and full-load.
The regulator shall be capable of sensing true RMS in three phases of alternator
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-58/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
output voltage, or operating in single phase sensing mode. The voltage regulator
shall include a VAr / Pf control feature as standard. The regulator shall provide an
adjustable dual slope regulation characteristic in order to optimize voltage and
frequency response for site conditions. The voltage regulator shall include standard
the capability to provide generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and
reactive differential compensation.
The voltage regulator shall communicate with the Generator Control Panel via a
J1939 communication network with generator voltage adjustments made via the
controller keypad. Additionally, the controller shall allow system parameter setup and
monitoring, and provide fault alarm and shutdown information through the controller.
A PC-based user interface shall be available to allow viewing and modifying
operating parameters in a windows compatible environment.
The engine and generator shall be assembled to a common base by the enginegenerator manufacturer. The generator set base shall be designed and built by the
engine-generator manufacturer to resist deflection, maintain alignment, and minimize
resonant linear vibration.
The base mounting frame shall be original diesel generator set manufacturer‟s
design.
Linear vibration isolators shall be provided for installation below the Generator set
skid.
Fuel storage facilities shall conform to the requirements of Qatar Petroleum
Company Specification and other relevant local regulations.
The bulk fuel store shall be a steel tank with a capacity of 1 day full-load operation.
It shall be in accordance with local code requirements. The tank shall be equipped
with the necessary openings including fill, vent, sounding, gauges, suction and return
openings set within a 600 mm x 600 mm manhole.
Submittals - Shop drawings shall be submitted showing all dimensions, supports and
connections.
The tank shall be buried below grade in accordance with the drawings provided by
the Structural Engineers.
The daily service fuel storage shall be separate from the diesel generator set and
located within the Generator Room as shown upon the drawings. All the necessary
fuel transfer pumps & pipe work to transfer fuel from the bulk storage tank to the
daily service tank and then to the diesel generator set shall be provided by the
Contractor. The tanks shall incorporate pipe connections, fuel transfer pump, float
switch, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contacts wired to an indicating light on
the generator set control cubicle. A manual shut-off valve on the engine supply line
and a drain valve shall be included.
The controls, protection and monitoring systems necessary for the generator set and
its operation shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer. All subsystem components, interfaces and logic shall be compatible with the enginemounted devices.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-59/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Provide a fully solid-state, microprocessor based, generator set control. The control
panel shall be designed and built by the engine manufacturer. The control shall
provide all operating, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The
control panel shall provide real time digital communications to all engine and
regulator controls via SAE J1939.
The generator set control shall be tested and certified to the following environmental
conditions:
Ambient temperature - –40°C to +70°C Operating Range.
95% humidity non-condensing at 30°C to 60°C.
IP22 protection.
4. 5% salt spray 48 hours, +38°C, 36.8V system voltage.
Sinusoidal vibration 4.3G's RMS, 24-1000Hz.
Electromagnetic
Capability (89/336/EEC,
91/368/EEC,
93/68/EEC, BS EN 50081-2, 50082-2).
7. Shock: withstand 15G.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
93/44/EEC,
Functionality shall be integral to the control panel as follows:
1. The controls shall include a minimum 64 x 240 pixel, 28mm x 100mm, white
backlit graphical display with text based alarm / event descriptions.
2. The controls shall include as minimum a 3-line data display.
3. Audible horn for alarm and shut-down with horn silence switch.
4. Standard ISO labeling.
5. Multiple language capability.
6. Remote start / stop controls.
7. Local run/off/auto controls integral to system microprocessor.
8. Cool down timer.
9. Speed adjustment.
10. Lamps test.
11. Push button emergency stop button.
12. Voltage adjustment.
13. Voltage regulator V/Hz slope – adjustable.
14. Password protected system programming.
The controls shall provide digital read outs for the engine and generator and the
readings shall be indicated in either metric or imperial units based upon selection.
The indications shall be as follows:
Engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
Engine oil pressure
Engine oil temperature
Engine coolant temperature
Engine RPM
Battery volts
Engine hours run
Engine crank attempt counter
Engine successful start counter
Service maintenance interval count down
S-21-60/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
10. Real time clock
11. Oil filter differential pressure
12. Fuel temperature
13. Fuel pressure
14. Fuel filter differential pressure
15. Fuel consumption rate
16. Total fuel consumed
17. Engine intake manifold temperature
18. Engine intake manifold pressure
19. Engine crankcase pressure
20. Air filter differential pressure
21. Boost pressure
22. Oil filter differential pressure
23. Engine exhaust stack temperature (if using optional RTD/TC Module)
Generator
1. Generator ac volts (Line to Line, Line to Neutral and Average)
2. Generator ac current (Average and Per Phase)
3. Generator ac Frequency
4. Generator kW (Total & Per Phase)
5. Generator kVA (Total & Per Phase)
6. Generator kVAr (Total & Per Phase)
7. Power Factor (Average & Per Phase)
8. Total kW-hr
9. Total kVAR-hr
10. % kW
11. % kVA
12. % kVAR
13. Generator stator winding temperature
Voltage Regulation
1. Excitation voltage
2. Excitation current
The control shall monitor and provide alarm indication and subsequent automatic
shut-down for the specified conditions. All alarms and shut-downs shall be
assigned a time, date, and engine hours run tag that to be stored by the control
panel for both the first and last occurrences. The alarm monitoring and shutdowns shall include the following:
Engine Alarm / Shut-down
1.
2.
3.
4.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
Low oil pressure alarm / shut-down
High coolant temperature alarm / shut-down
Loss of coolant shut-down
Over speed shut-down
S-21-61/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
5. Over crank shut-down
6. High intake manifold temperature alarm / shut-down
7. High exhaust manifold temperature alarm / shut-down
8. High crankcase pressure alarm / shut-down
9. High air inlet temperature alarm / shut-down
10. Emergency stop actuation shut-down
11. Low coolant temperature alarm
12. Low battery voltage alarm
13. High battery voltage alarm
14. Control switch not in auto position alarm
15. Battery charger failure alarm
Generator Alarm / Shut-down
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Generator over voltage
Generator under voltage
Generator over frequency
Generator under frequency
Generator reverse power
Generator over current
Voltage Regulator Alarm / Shut-down
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Loss of excitation alarm / shut-down
Instantaneous over excitation alarm / shut-down
Timed over excitation alarm / shut-down
Rotating diode failure
Loss of sensing
Loss of PMG.
The Controller shall include the ability to accept 18 programmable digital input
signals. The signals may be programmed for either high or low activation using
programmable normally open or normally closed contacts.
The control shall include the ability to operate 14 programmable relay output signals,
which shall integral to the controller. The output relays shall be rated for 2A @ 30 V
DC and consist of 6 “Form A” (Normally Open) contacts and 2 “Form C” (Normally
Open & Normally Closed) contacts.
The control shall include the ability to operate 2 discrete outputs, integral to the
controller, which are capable of sinking up to 300 mA.
All engine, voltage regulator, control panel and accessory units shall be accessible
through a single electronic service tool. The following maintenance functionality shall
be integral to the generator set control:
1. Engine run hours display.
2. Service maintenance interval (running hours or calendar days).
3. Engine crank attempt counter.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-62/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
4. Engine successful starts counter.
5. 20 events are stored in control panel memory
6. Programmable cycle timer that starts and runs the generator for a
predetermined time. The timer shall use 14 user-programmable sequences
that are repeated in a 7-day cycle. Each sequence shall have the following
programmable set points:
a. Day of week.
b. Time of day to start.
c. Duration of cycle.
The controls shall include Modbus RTU communications as standard via RS-485 half
duplex with configurable baud rates from 2.4k to 57.6k.
Monitoring Software shall also be provided with the functionality that follows:
1. Provide access to all date and events on generator set communications
network.
2. Provide remote control capability for the generator set.
3. Ability to monitor up to 12 generator sets.
4. Ability to communicate via Modbus RTU or remote modem.
The Contractor shall also provide a local control panel mounted annunciator to meet
the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1 as follows:
1. Annunciators shall be networked directly to the generator set controls.
2. The local annunciator shall include a lamp test push button, alarm horn and
alarm acknowledgment push button.
3. Individual lamp indications for protection and diagnostics as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
Over crank.
Low coolant temperature.
High coolant temperature warning.
High coolant temperature shut-down.
Low oil pressure warning.
Low oil pressure shut-down.
Over speed.
Low coolant level.
EPS supplying load.
Control switch not in auto.
High battery voltage.
Low battery voltage.
Battery charger AC failure.
Emergency stop.
Spare.
Spare.
The Contractor shall provide a remote annunciator to meet the requirements of
NFPA 110, Level 1 as follows:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-63/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
1. The annunciator shall provide remote indications of all the points listed above
and shall incorporate ring-back capability so that after silencing the initial
alarm, any subsequent alarms will sound the horn.
2. Ability to be located up to 250 m from the generator set
An 18 A battery charger shall be provided to accept a 240V volt ac single phase
input and the output shall be 24 volt DC. The ac input and DC output shall be
protected by fuses and incorporate current limiting circuitry to avoid the need for a
crank disconnect relay. An ac voltage power switch shall be mounted on the face of
the charger and shielded from accidental switching. The charger shall include an AC
ammeter and voltmeter, failure / malfunction alarm for ac failure and DC level low
voltage and be housed in an enclosure suitable for wall mounting.
The following articles and paragraphs are intended to define acceptable procedures
and practices of inspecting, installing, and testing the generator set and associated
equipment.
A pre-delivery inspection must be performed by the system manufacturers' local
dealer at the dealer's facility to insure no damage occurred in transit and all the
diesel generator set components, controls, and switchgear are included as specified
here-in.
Prior to delivery and acceptance, the generator set shall be tested to show it is free
of any defects and will start automatically and carry full-load. This testing shall be
performed at the facility of the system manufacturer's authorized local dealer.
The testing shall be done on dry type, resistive load banks capable of definite and
precise incremental loading. Salt water brine tanks or load banks requiring water as
a source of cooling will not be allowed.
Load bank testing shall be done in the presence of the owner's engineer or his
appointed representative. Testing shall be for a minimum of four hours under fullload.
The bidder shall furnish all consumables necessary for testing. Any defects, which
become evident during the test shall be corrected by the bidder at his own expense
prior to shipment to the jobsite.
Delivery shall be made to the project construction site by the system manufacturer's
authorized dealer.
The installation shall be performed in accordance with shop drawings, specifications,
and the manufacturer's instructions.
The complete installation shall be checked for procedural and operational
compliance by a representative of the system manufacturer's authorized local dealer.
The engine lubricating oil and antifreeze, as recommended by the system
manufacturer, shall be provided by the generator set dealer.
If different
manufacturers furnish switchgear and generator sets, technical representatives of
both manufacturers' authorized dealers shall verify the installation meets
requirements. Any deficiencies shall be noted and corrected by the Contractor.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-64/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The system manufacturer's dealer representative shall be present to assist the
Contractor during start-up, systems check, adjusting, and any site testing required
after the installation is complete.
Following installation, the tests shall be performed by the system manufacturer's
local dealer representative(s) in the presence of the owner's engineer or designated
appointee all as follows:
Pre-Start Checks
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Oil level.
Water level.
Day tank fuel level.
Battery connection and charge condition.
Air start supply pressure (if so equipped).
Engine to control interconnects.
Engine generator intake / exhaust obstructions.
Engine room ventilation obstructions.
Removal of all packing materials.
Operational Tests
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Load test performed with resistive load bank
Load test performed with resistive load bank
Load test performed with resistive load bank
Load test performed with resistive load bank
Load test performed with resistive load bank
– 25% / 15 minutes.
– 50% / 30 minutes.
– 75% / 30 minutes.
– 100% / 240 minutes.
– 110% / 60 minutes.
For the duration of each load test the engine and generator parameters shall be
recorded at 15 minute intervals as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Date / Time.
KW, Voltage & Amperage (3 phase), frequency.
Fuel pressure, oil pressure and water temperature.
Exhaust gas temperature at engine exhaust outlet.
Generator Winding & Bearing Temperature.
Ambient temperature
The correct operation of controls, engine shutdown, and safety devices shall also be
demonstrated and recorded as witnessed and verified.
The manufacturer's representative shall provide the necessary resistive load banks
to test the diesel generator set for all the prescribed load tests at no additional cost
to the contract.
Should these tests indicate that the equipment does not meet the specified
performance requirements, then the cost of all corrective measures and re-testing
shall be borne by the manufacturer's representative.
The system manufacturer's authorized dealer shall provide a complete orientation for
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-65/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
the owner's engineering and maintenance personnel. Orientation shall include both
classroom and hands-on instruction.
Topics covered shall include controls
operation, schematics, wiring diagrams, meters, indicators, warning lights, shutdown
system and routine maintenance.
p. Operating & Maintenance Manuals
The system manufacturer's authorized local dealer shall furnish six hard and soft
copies of each of the manuals and books listed below for each unit provided under
this contract:
1. Operating Instructions - with description and illustration of all switchgear
controls and indicators and engine and generator controls.
2. Parts Books - which illustrate and list all assemblies, subassemblies and
components, except standard fastening hardware (nuts, bolts, washers,
etc.)
3. Preventative Maintenance Instructions - on the complete system that
cover daily, weekly, monthly, biannual , and annual maintenance
requirements and include a complete lubrication chart.
4. Routine Test Instructions - for all electronic and electrical circuits and for
the main AC generator.
5. Troubleshooting Flowcharts - covering the complete generator set
showing description of trouble, probable cause, and suggested remedy.
6. Recommended Spare Part Lists - showing all consumables anticipated to
be required during routine maintenance and test.
7. Wiring Diagrams & Schematics - showing function of all electrical
components.
All manuals and books described above shall be contained in rigid plastic pouches.
q. Acoustic Enclosure
An acoustic enclosure meeting a minimum of 85 dBA @ 3 metres to suit the rating of
the diesel generator set shall be provided. To ensure the correct co-ordination and
quality assurance in design, manufacturing and testing of the acoustic enclosure,
then these duties shall be within the responsibility of the diesel generator set
supplier.
The complete unit shall be designed for a noise suppression to 85dBA @ 3m at the
external. The enclosure shall be fabricated from durable, weather-resistant steel,
treated for a high degree of corrosion resistance. This Enclosure shall be painted
with environmental friendly polyester paint for durability and appearance. Enclosure
dimensions shall be according to diesel generator set dimensions. Construction shall
be with rigid, fully welded support steel work with inserted sheet steel panels fully
welded in position.
Engine room ventilation will be supplied to the generator set compartment via the
radiator fan or by air intake fans as indicated upon the drawings. Crankcase fumes
and the fluids from disposal lines shall piped and vented to exterior in a clean and
efficient manner.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-66/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
One exhaust gas silencer shall be integrated in the enclosure roof and direct
connected by flexible joints to the engine outlets.
To prevent additional heat loads being transferred to the enclosure interior,
interconnecting pipes will be insulated by means of non-combustible mineral wool,
covered with aluminium sheets.
A radiator with engine driven or electric motor driven fan is to be provided for
sufficient engine cooling. The radiator air outlet shall be provided with a bird
protection mesh.
All interconnecting pipes between engine and radiator shall be provided, inclusive of
flexible expansion joints as required.
The Enclosure shall be provided with emergency Stop Buttons conveniently located
at external side of Enclosure entrance doors.
Below the lube oil filters will be a suitable sized drip tray to collect leakages coming
from the lube oil filters. The drip tray will be fitted with a drain and a valve for manual
drain.
The diesel engine combustion air will be drawn through the engine mounted air
cleaners from the engine compartment.
The daily service fuel tank (in the form of base fuel tank) shall be provided and
equipped with engine fuelling and filling armatures. Interconnecting pipe work
between the engine and tank in shall also be provided.
Before delivery to completed and assembled containerized diesel generator set shall
be tested at the works.
The test runs will include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Noise Measurement tests.
Testing of the Generator alarm system.
Testing of the generator set & auxiliaries.
Start-up & Load tests –
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
15 minutes - warm-up.
15 minutes - 25% rated load.
60 minutes - 50% rated load.
60 minutes - 75% rated load.
180 minutes - 100% rated load.
60 minutes - 110% rated load.
15 minutes - cool down.
r. Information
The Contractor shall furnish certified performance data and curves as a part of his
proposal and a description of his quality control program. The Manufacturer shall
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-67/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
ascertain that his equipment withstands the starting kW and kVA requirements of
the connected loads as shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall furnish an outline drawing showing principal dimensions, space
requirements and the location of the connections to the equipment quoted, mainly
for starting, cooling, fuel and lubricating systems plus the ventilation requirements.
The Contractor shall provide a basic tool kit, engine maintenance handbook, spare
parts manual and generating set instruction handbook.
The Contractor shall itemize all sight flow indications, temperature sensing devices,
and pressure gauges and indications which will be furnished for local indication
of the critical items as recommended. If these indicators are provided as standard
with the equipment, it shall be so indicated.
The Contractor shall furnish comprehensive information and catalogues along with
schematic and detailed diagrams showing all equipment furnished and shall include
the control system and shall clearly describe the operation, manufacturing and types
of all instruments and control items.
All literature and catalogues shall be in English.
s. Safety Considerations
All external electrical and mechanical connections shall be with flexible end
connections to allow free movement of the diesel generator set on resilient
mountings. All exposed rotating parts shall be fully guarded to prevent contact by
personnel. Guards shall comply with BS 5304, and shall be removable for
maintenance purposes.
A permanently fixed warning notice with 6 mm white lettering on a red background
shall be fixed to the set in a prominent position.
The warning shall be as follows:
"THE GENERATING SET IS UNDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND MAY START
AT ANY TIME WITHOUT WARNING".
t.
Manufacturers
The diesel generator set manufacturer shall preferably also be the manufacturer of
either the alternator and shall be responsible for the assembly. The diesel generator
set manufacturer shall have a reliable local representative of good repute, keeping
adequate stocks of spare parts and providing efficient after sales services.
The Contractor shall submit for approval shop drawings for the diesel generator set
including all necessary civil work details, such as trenches, concrete bases, etc.,
generator starting characteristics and manufacturers approval for the generator's
correct selection as to connected load, de-rating factors, etc., wiring diagrams and
description of operation.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-68/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
A copy of these shop drawings shall also be sent to the local power authorities for
approval (if needed).
Any modifications to the drawings required by the Engineer or the Local Power
Authorities to allow the equipment to comply with the codes, standards and
specifications called for here-in shall be carried out with no extra cost to the
contract.
u. Spare Parts
The Contractor shall at the time of tender furnish a comprehensive priced list of
recommended spare parts for 2 years and 5 years service. (over and above the one
year defect liability period achieving a total of 3 years and 5 years of extended
operating maintenance).
The Client / Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject the same either in full or
in part and the contractor shall supply the spare parts as per the final approved list,
at the time of handing over/ taking over of the Project.
Spare parts shall be packed in suitable containers or boxes bearing labels, clearly
designating the contents and the particular of equipment for which they are
intended.
The Contractor shall securely store and protect the spare parts until the completion
of the works and deliver the same to the Client's stores.
v. Applicable Standards
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General Requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines - BS 4999.
Fuel oils for non-marine use – BS 2869.
Code of Practice for the Safety of machinery.
Radio Frequency Interference suppression – BS EN 55014 & BS 1597.
Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines Performance - BS 5514.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Fuel Oil Consumption - BS 5514 Part 1:1987.
Speed Governing - BS 5514 Part 4:1984.
Torsional Vibrations - BS 5514 Part 5:1984.
Over speed Protection - BS 5514 Part 6:1992.
w. Automatic Transfer Switch
Automatic transfer switches complete with all accessories shall be provided as
indicated upon the drawings.
They shall be rated for continuous operation at the prevailing ambient temperature.
They shall be rated for all classes of load both inductive and resistive. They shall be
able to close on an in-rush current up to and including 10 times the continuous rating
of the switch and be capable of enduring 6000 cycles of operation at the rated
current and a rate of 6 cycles per minute without failure. The automatic transfer
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-69/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
switch shall be interlocked to positively prevent the load from being simultaneously
energized by normal and emergency power. ATS‟s shall comprise a set of two
mechanically and electrically interlocked motorized air circuit breakers if current for
rating in excess of 630 A. For ratings of 630 A and below then two electrically and
mechanically AC3 duty contactors may be utilized instead.
Voltage sensors and time-delay relays of 5 minutes or less shall be of the solid state,
plug-in type devices. The control relays shall be modular dust protected, plug-in
devices. These control accessories shall mount on a dead-front, swing-out control
accessory panel to avoid shock hazard while adjusting control functions, but will
swing- out exposing the wiring to facilitate servicing. A controls disconnect plug
shall be provided to de-energize the control circuits when the panel is in the open,
swing-out position. Indicating lamps and meters shall be set in a front mounted
meter panel to be visible without the opening covers.
Control accessories shall be provided for the following:
1. Monitor each un-grounded line with calibrated dial adjustable voltage, solid
state sensors to sense a decrease of voltage below a set point, or a loss of
voltage on any phase of the normal power source. Voltage sensors shall be
temperature compensated for 2% maximum deviation over the temperature
range - 25F (-32C) to 175 F (+ 79C).
2. Signal the engine of the generator sets to start in the event of a power
interruption (or as selected by ATS). A solid-state time-delay (adjustable from
0.5 to 10 seconds) relay shall provide this signal to avoid nuisance start-ups
on momentary voltage dips or power outages.
3. Transfer the load to the diesel generator set after it reaches the correct
voltage and frequency. A solid-state time-delay (adjustable form 0.5 to 10
seconds) shall also delay this transfer to allow the engine-generator to
stabilize.
4. Automatic return of the load to the mains supply after normal power
restoration. A time-delay (adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes) shall delay this
transfer to avoid connection to an unstable mains supply.
5. Automatic transfer of the load from diesel alternator set to normal mains
source in the event the diesel generator set output fails and the mains supply
is available.
6. A signal for the engine of the diesel generator set to stop after the load is
transferred to the mains supply. A solid-state time-delay on stop (adjustable
from 0.5 to 5 minutes) shall permit the engine to run unloaded to cool down
before shutdown (or as selected by ATS).
7. Provide a switch to select “with load” or “without load” to test or exercise as
follows:
a. “Without Load” the generating set runs unloaded.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-70/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
b. “With Load” the automatic transfer switch transfers load to generating
set, after a time-delay, the same as it would for a normal source
interruption.
8. Provide a device to electrically disconnect the control section from the
transfer switch for maintenance and service during normal operation.
Indicating meters and lamps shall be front mounted for easy reference without the
need to open covers. Meter and lamp combinations shall be provided as follows:
1. Green (normal) and red (emergency) lamps to indicate which source is
supplying power to the load.
2. AC Voltmeter to measure generator output voltage.
3. Frequency meter with pointer indicator and run-time meter to monitor the
electric generating set
The bypass / isolation switch shall be provided to comply with the requirements of
standards applicable to the type of emergency and stand-by power system plus the
applicable safety codes.
The switch shall be a manual operation type arranged to select and connect either
the source of power directly to the load, isolating the transfer switch from the load
plus both the power sources.
The switch shall include the features that follow:
1. A means to lock the switch in the position that isolates the transfer switch,
with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of the transfer
switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks shall prevent transfer switch
operation except for testing or maintenance.
2. Draw-out arrangement for the transfer switch, provides physical separation
from live parts for testing and maintenance operations.
3. Current voltage, Closing, and short Withstand ratings: Equal or greater than
that of the associated ATS, with the same phase arrangement and number of
poles.
4. The contact temperatures of the switch shall not exceed those of ATS
contacts when they are carrying the rated load.
5. Operability: Constructed so that the load bypass and transfer switch isolation
can be performed by a single person in no more than two operations in 15
seconds or less.
6. Legend: A manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction
signs giving clear and detailed operating instructions.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-71/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
7. Maintainability: Fabricate the switch to allow easy and convenient removal of
major components from the front without removal of other parts or the main
power conductors and terminations.
21.2.19 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
a. General
The Contractor shall provide Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems as shown
upon the drawings. The UPS units shall be of a high efficiency type with low noise
(acoustic) output.
The Contractor shall ensure the capacity, voltage, performance and the output wave
form are compatible with the connected equipment and shall submit his offer subject
to the approval of the Consultant.
Each UPS shall consist of two parallel-connected units in an active redundancy
configuration. The arrangement shall compose mainly of a rectifier-charger, inverter,
battery racks, batteries, electro-mechanical and static by pass, rectifier by pass,
digital monitoring and alarm system, remote control and signaling cabinet and filters
and wave shapers to suit the equipment. The batteries shall have the capacity to
run the full connected load for at least 30 minutes.
The storage batteries shall be installed on special racks and within cabinets as
shown on drawings.
The UPS and Rectifier shall have the following specification.
b. Rectifier
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Three phase input voltage
Voltage Tolerance
Frequency Deviation
Output Voltage Fluctuation
Efficiency at Rated Load
:
:
:
:
:
415/240V, 50 Hz.
 10 %.
 5 %.
 1 %.
96 - 98 %.
:
415/240V, 50 Hz.
c. Inverter
1. Three phase input voltage
2. Voltage Tolerances: Fixed load steady state: 0.5 % from no Load to fullload.
3. Dynamic output voltage regulation:
of 50%.
+10 % - 8 % with a load variation
4. Recovery time of the steady
< 20 ms for ^ U  1 %.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
:
S-21-72/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
5. Steady State value
:
< 40 ms for ^ U  0.5 %.
6. Output Frequency
:
50 Hz, tolerance +/- 0.5 % no
matter what the load variation.
7. Phase Displacement
:
 3% (^ P  30 %).
8. Harmonic Content
:
< 4 %.
d. Efficiency
The efficiency of the whole system at full-load shall not be less than 20%.
e. Visual Indications
The visual indications shall be provided for the following:
1. Rectifier “ON”.
2. Rectifier “Fault”.
3. Battery Operation.
4. Inverter “Fault”.
5. Static Switch Locked.
6. Acoustic Alarm.
7. Stop Imminent.
8. Inverter “ON”.
9. Inverter “OFF”.
10. Inverter “In Use”.
11. General Alarm Cancel.
12. Load “OFF”.
13. Rectifier Output Voltage - Display.
14. Rectifier Output Current - Ditto.
15. Inverter Output Voltages - Ditto.
16. Inverter Output Currents - Ditto.
17. Inverter Mains Failure.
18. Rectifier Temperature.
19. Inverter Temperature.
20. Transformer Temperature.
21. Static Switch Temperature.
22. Absence of Mains By- Pass.
23. Mains Frequency Outside Tolerances.
24. By-pass Lock.
25. Inverter / Mains Supply Out of Phase.
26. Switch to Mains by Static Switch.
27. Transfer to Mains Supply by Static Switch.
28. Overload.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-73/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
f.
SECTION 21
Warranties
The Contractor shall guarantee the UPS and its installation for 24 months during
which period the Contractor shall maintain and repair any defects due to either
manufacture, or workmanship, at no extra cost to owner.
g. Standards
The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance program. In
particular, the main equipment manufacturing stages shall be sanctioned by
appropriate tests such as:
1. Incoming components inspection.
2. Discrete sub-assembly testing and complete functional checks on the final
product.
The UPS unit shall undergo an on-load burn-in before leaving the factory. Final
inspection and adjustments shall be documented in a report drawn up by the
supplier‟s quality inspection department.
The UPS shall comply with the standards that follow:
1. Safety: EN 50091-1
2. Design / Manufacturing: ISO 9001
3. EMC: EN 50091-2
All the above specifications and standards shall be certified, for each proposed UPS,
by an independent approved laboratory.
21.2.20
STRUCTURED CABLING AND TELECOM SERVICES
Minimum Contractor and Manufacturers Qualifications
All equipment and all work under this section shall be furnished and installed by a
certified telecommunications contractor- certified by Q-TEL, hereafter referred to as
the contractor.
The contractor shall have the following qualifications in Telecommunication Systems
installation:
a. Contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience in application,
installation and testing of the specified systems and equipment.
b. All supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any
of its components shall have factory certification from each equipment
manufacturer that they are qualified to install and test the provided products.
General electrical trade staff (electricians) shall not be used for the
installation of the premises distribution cables and associated hardware.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-74/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
c. All installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of these
components shall have a minimum of five years experience in the installation
of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components.
The equipment and hardware provided under this contract will be from
manufacturers having a minimum of five years experience in producing the types of
systems and equipment specified.
STRUCTURED CABLING
1. General
Equipment Criteria
A. All cables connectors, outlet points, sub-distribution frames and patch cords shall
meet or exceed the latest requirements on EIA/TIA, for category 5E & 6
transmissions at 250 MHz
B. All cabling from the main distribution frames located in the Q-TEL equipment
room to the sub-distribution frames shall be multi-pair UTP category 5E cables
and 4 cores multi mode fiber optic cables fixed to galvanized steel cable trunks.
All cabling between the IDF's and each outlet points shall be 4 pair UTP category 6
OR 5E cables at 155 / 250 MHZ enclosed in GI trunking.
Generally telephone / computer sockets shall be 4 (four) gang outlet RJ45 type
suitable for category 6 &5E equipment and mounted within a suitable face plate to
match the power accessories. Each outlet shall be c/w labeling facility for
identification of each socket.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of
structured cabling system of types, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with the latest editions of the requirements of
applicable local codes, and the following standards:
1. Electronic industries association (EIA), Telecommunications industries
Association (TIA) for commercial buildings.
2. The institute of electrical and electronic engineers, Inc. (IEEE).
3. International organization for standardization (ISO).
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-75/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
5. International Electromechanical Commission (IEC).
C. Service Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse at which spare parts are
stocked were a field service engineer who is a permanent, full time employee of
the manufacture, factory trained and qualified individual whose primary duty is
field service resides.
D. All work must be installed by system manufacturer‟s certified system
installers/vendors who are certified and experienced in implementing the
selected data cabling system and to perform related testing programs.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers‟ data and installation instruction details for
structured cabling system.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background
drawings.
C. Samples: Submit samples from all accessories, fittings and cabling.
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A. The system manufacturers shall provide a minimum TEN (10) year warranty on
all passive components included in the structural cabling system. These
warranties shall be provided in written certificate form.
B. The system manufacturers shall provide in writing to the Owner that in event of
the demise or failure of the installing certified system installer/vendor,
the
manufacturer shall be responsible for providing another
certified
system
installer/vendor to fulfill the remainder of the warranty conditions.
C. The Contractor shall provide a guaranteed twenty-four (24) hour response time to
any warranty claims.
CATEGORY 6 OR 5E CABLES
A. All horizontal cat 6 & 5E cabling shall be EIA/TIA standards compliant
throughout, terminated to 1000BaseT specifications.
B. All cables shall be high performance 4 pair category 6 & 5E UTP UL listed
consisting of 23 AWG, 100 ohm characteristic impedance, solid conductors
formed into four individually twisted pairs and enclosed by PVC jacket.
C. Cables shall be run from the user outlet to the cabling rack (as indicated on
drawings) without any transition points.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-76/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
D. All UTP cabling must be tested using a level III field tester by the supplier and full
documentation must be provided to demonstrate that the cabling meet the
industry standards (i-e IEEE 802.3, EIA / TIA 568 – B.2-1).
E. Category 6 / 5E defines four-wire twisted –pair UTP copper cable that can
transmit data and proven support for 100 Mbps fast Ethernet, 155 / 250 MHZ
Broadband Video, Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-T and155 Mbps ATM.
F
The Cat 6 / 5E cable shall be of low–capacitance and exhibits low crosstalk.
However, all figures of the cable must be Category 6 / 5E compliant.
G The cables short term bending radius is 6 times the cable diameter in operation
and 10 times the cable diameter in installation.
MULTI-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLES
A. 4 cores, 50/125 m multi-mode fiber optic cables shall be installed from each IDF
up to the main data rock.
B. The cable shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use in ducts and risers, rodent
resistance type with LSZH – flame retardant outer sheath.
C. Fiber Optic Cables shall be suitable for 10/100/1000 Base F and to be tested @
850 and 1300 nm, Full OTDR tested shall be performed before and after
installation.
D. The cable shall be with tight buffer structure, glass yarn reinforcement and waterblocking elements
E. Low friction jacket for ease of pulling through ducts.
G. The cables short term bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter in the no
load condition and 20 times the cable diameter when under load.
RJ-45, CAT 6 & 5E OUTLET
A. The outlet shall be category 6/5E eight - position angled RJ-45, T568B pinned
and modules mounted within the service floor outlet box or on wall flush
mounting. The cabling contractor should coordinate with the electrical contractor
to ensure compliance and matching between the RJ-45 data connectors with the
floor boxes and face plates.
B. The presentation of the outlets shall be provided for labeling and identification.
The outlet shall be complete with a transparent window to protect the labeling
tag.
C. All conductors of the 4-pair cat 6 /5E horizontal cable shall be terminated on the
respective contacts. To avoid installation errors, the wire organizer of the snap-in
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-77/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
connector should be identified by the same standard color coding as the cat 6
cable wires.
D. Each connector shall provide both T-568A and T-568B color code identification
for the pins at the rear of the connector. The punched down should be in
accordance with the T-568B color code.
E. Each outlet to receive one 4 pair cable. Submit sample of the socket for review
and approval.
F. Outlets shall be supplied Complete with Faceplate from the same Wiring Devices
Manufacturer.
CAT 6 COPPER PATCH PANEL
A. All cat 6 cables shall be terminated on Cat 6 patch panels which shall be rack
mounted type.
B. The presentation of the patch panel shall be provided for labeling using printed
numbering system.
C. The cat 6 patch panel shall provide both T-568A and T-568B color code
identification for the pins at the rear of the panel. The punch down is to be in
accordance with the T-568B color code.
D. All conductors from the 4 pair cable shall be terminated on the respective
contacts. To avoid installation errors, the wire organizer of the snap-in connector
must be identified by the same standard color coding as the wires of cat 6
cables.
E. Each patch panel shall be provided complete with a holder to locate and clamp
the incoming cables without causing damage to the cable or affecting the
performance of the link.
F. In the rack cabinet, the patch panels shall be separated by metallic patch-guides
to protect the patch cords. The height of these guides shall be 1HU or 2HU
depending on the rack space.
CAT 6 COPPER PATCH CORDS
A. A category 6 copper patch cords shall be provided to connect between the patch
panels and switches. The number of the Cat 6 copper patch cords shall be equal
to the number of outlets.
B. Patch Cords shall be supplied in various colors to match purpose of outlet ie Grey
for Data, Blue for Voice.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-78/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
C. The length of the patch cord to determined by the contractor based on the
arrangement of the equipment inside the cabinet rack, but in any case it shall not
be less than 1.2m.
D. The characteristic impedance of the pairs must be identical to that of the
horizontal cat 6 cables.
E. The patch cords shall have a guaranteed performance level of greater than 750
insertions without degradation to the performance level of the solution.
FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS
A. Fiber optic patch panels shall be rack mounted with 24 duplex SC ports and shall
take no more than one unit of vertical space on the rack cabinet, the patch panel
shall be complete with splicing tray.
B. The patch panel shall be equipped with a mechanism that ensures the retention
and support of the incoming fiber optic cables.
C. The patch panel shall be designed with a sliding mechanism enabling front
installation and maintenance work to be carried out without having to remove the
entire panel. The patch panel shall be delivered complete with top cover.
D. The patch panel shall provide facilities to recess the front connector plate deeper
than the front of the 19” rails of the cabinet. This will provide sufficient bend
radius for the patch cords once connected to the panel. This shall also prevent
damage to the patch cords when the cabinet door is closed.
E. Cable management unit shall be provided with the fiber optic patch panel.
F. Fiber Optic Patch Panels Shall is supplied complete with all SC connectors
needed for terminating the Multi Mode Fiber Cables.
G. One, 24 Duplex SC, Fiber Optic Patch Panel Shall be provided in each Q.tel
Distribution Rack at each Q.tel Room in addition to Main Fiber Optic Patch Panel
Which shall be provided in the Main ELV room Located at ground Level, the
Capacity of the Main Fiber Patch Panel shall be sufficient to connect all of the
Riser Fiber Optic Cables to all of the Q.tel distribution rooms in addition to 10%
Spare Capacity, Main Fiber Optic Patch Panel Shall be housed in 19" Rack
Cabinets which shall have at least 50% Free Space for any needed Active
Equipment.
EQUIPMENT / PATCHING RACKS
The contractor shall provide the following equipment racks within ELV rooms. The
racks and their configuration shall be as follows:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-79/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The 42 U rack (80X80cm) cabinets with front Plexiglas door and rear metal door for
LAN services requirement, complete with all required mounting hardware, label kits,
silent type ventilation fans, Velcro style fasteners and all needed ancillary devices.
Rack shall be complete with side panels lockable glass front access door and
lockable rear metal door, the rack shall be able to support cable entrance from both
top and base.
Each rack shall have a power distribution strip unit mounted at each side for full
height of rack complete with a minimum of ten outlets. Provide adequate cable
management facilities within the racks to support the cables and ensure that cables
are properly secured to prevent stress.
Adequate air flow within rack is required to maintain the expected levels of
equipment to be located within each rack; therefore fan assemblies are to be
supplied.
The contractor shall provide all necessary cable management units, brackets,
required accessories and labeling required for complete installation.
The rack shall be equipped for electrical grounding to meet EIA/TIA 606 stables with
fans and power strip unit.
Each Rack shall have at least 50% free Space for installing of Active Equipments.
TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINETS -APPROVED BY QTEL
A. 110 connect cross connect blocks (CAT 5) shall be provided in each QTEL
Distribution Room with capacity sufficient to connect both the Riser Multi-pair
Cables and the Horizontal Telephone Cables.
B. The connection blocks shall be suitable for telephone cables termination, i-e
accept 24 AWG (CAT 5) telephone cables.
C. The connectors shall be installed inside the 19 inch Rack Cabinets
MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME
A. The main distribution frame (MDF) shall be of free standing type enclosure and
shall consist of two parts:
1. The first part is to connect all incoming trunk lines of the Building plus 10%
spare. All circuits of this part shall be protected against over voltage and
over current.
2. The second part is to connect all of the Riser Multi-Pair Cables to all IDF's
with at least 10% Spare Capacity.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-80/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
B. Terminals shall be identified by numbered tags corresponding to the respective
lines or extensions. The contractor shall submit the proposed numbering
scheme for prior approval by the Engineer
C. Two sets of the special tools required for MDF wiring (e.g. IDC insertion tool...)
as well as test cords shall be provided with the main distribution frame.
D. In addition, 42U rock cabinets shall be provided for the main fiber patch panel
which shall connect all of the riser fiber optic cables.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which structured cabling are to be installed. Notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Install commission and test to work structured cabling systems in accordance
with the manufacturer‟s recommendations and telecommunications service
providers regulations.
3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Plan and install all structured cabling systems in accordance with the cable
manufacturer‟s recommendations. Label and record all data communication
cables.
B. All Installation shall be as per Q.tel Recommendation, Contractor shall be
responsible to provide Q.tel approval for the Site Work.
C. Install optical fiber cables in accordance with BS 7718 and all other standards.
D. Handle, store and install equipment and components of the structured cabling
systems in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.
E. Obtain all equipment and components from a single approved structure cabling
manufacturer.
F. Inspect all equipment and components on delivery, before fixing and after
installation and reject and replace any which are defective.If a cable fails its tests
and has to be replaced then all cables in the same bundle must be retested.
G. All copper \ Fiber cables shall be installed without splices or cuts to ensure the
elimination of
reflections, discontinuities, impedance mismatches, etc.
H. The maximum length from the data outlet and voice outlet to patch panels shall
not exceed 90 m.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-81/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
I.
SECTION 21
Wiring shall be mechanically protected by cable trunking.
J. Installation of Outlets
Each cable shall be tested and identified with the face plate.
All outlets shall be installed as shown on the drawings, exact location shall be
coordinated with the ID drawings.
K. Separation of Data / Telephone Communication Cables From Sources of
Electromagnetic Interference
All communication cables shall be separated from sources of electromagnetic
radiation in accordance with EN 50174 parts 1-3.
L. Installation of Racks
Provide enclosed racks with front and rear doors where shown on drawings and
secure to wall/floor/ceiling as equipped.
In locations where more than one rack is required, butt multiple racks together.
All wiring shall be run neatly bundled with wiring management channels.
Properly ground racks and equipment to room ground bus.
M. System Identification
A complete identification system shall be provided that clearly designates the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The horizontal cable.
The workstation (or faceplate).
The horizontal/passive patches panel port.
The patch cords.
-
Cable Identification
Horizontal UTP cables for both data and telephone systems shall be permanently
identified at both ends.
-
Faceplate Identification
Faceplates shall be labeled.
-
Patch panel And Patch Cord Identification
Patch panel ports shall be identified in simple numeric form.
Patch cords shall be identified at both ends in simple numeric form, not
necessarily corresponding to port numbers.
-
Identification Log
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-82/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
All cable and workstation identification shall be recorded in a hard copy “CABLE
IDENTIFICATION LOG” which is to be handed over to the Owner after cable
testing and certification is complete. A duplicate copy is to be forwarded to the
Project Manager.
N. Co-Ordination With Network Integrator
Co-ordinate work with the work of the Owner‟s Network Integrator.
The Network Integrator must be present on site to witness and co-ordinate the
required system testing. The cabling Contractor and the Network Integrator must
together perform a job walk through upon completion of testing, together sign the
cabling test reports to verify that network cabling is properly installed and performs
to acceptable standards.
O. Cable Testing and System Certification
The structured cabling system certification shall include 100% cable testing and
verification according to the standard.
The verification of each cable shall be performed by the contractor and shall be
documented on a cable testing sheet which shall form part of the hard copy
documentation supplied at the end of the installation.
Testing Procedures
Testing shall be performed as per the enclosed sample cable test
documentation sheet. Testing shall include, but not be limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Cable length
Attenuation
Near end crosstalk (next)
Noise
Resistance
End to end continuity
Opens or shorts
Pair polarity
Any cable not passing the testing procedure shall be replaced in its entirety. No
splicing is permitted in the repair of any defective cable.
21.2.21
CCTV, ACCESS AND SECURITY SYSTEM
The various components and major constituents of the system shall be sourced from
manufacturers, who have proper and local representation of the products in Qatar
and can technically support the total system through qualified and trained personnel.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-83/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
The system shall be IP based system and shall be wired independently of other
wiring systems. The contract drawings only show the scheme and location of the
processors, monitors, and so on. The actual routes of conduits wires, trunking etc.
to the various equipments shall be clearly shown by the contractor on the working
drawings.
SECURITY ACCESS AND CCTV SYSTEM
Security System Overview
CCTV Cameras shall be installed at various vantage points as indicated at contract
drawings. These locations are based on general safety and security surveillance.
The cameras shall be the following types
a. Indoor Color Network Fixed Dome
1) The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD Imager,
380,000 [659(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a microlens on each pixel. The
camera shall be equipped with digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high
quality picture with a minimum illumination of 0.19 lux with Sensitivity UP Mode
ON (8X) and 1.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode OFF.
2) The camera shall have the capability of password protecting all menu settings.
3) The camera shall be equipped with an auto back light compensation and shall
feature mask setting and level adjust capability.
4) The camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment for two
specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures between
2200°K ~ 6000°K and manual white balance shall be settable in the range of
2000°K ~ 10,000°K.
5) The camera shall also be equipped with an electronic sensitivity up feature to
enhance camera performance in extreme low light conditions.
6) The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 20 characters.
7) The Camera's zoom lens shall have a ¼" format and a focal length of 2.8 to
10mm.
8) The zoom lens shall provide digital zoom (3X) for a total maximum magnification
of 10.8X. The aperture throughout this range shall vary from a minimum of f/1.3
at the wide angle setting.
9) The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas and
level adjustment capability.
10) The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
11) The power source shall be IEEE802.3af compliant (4.2W) or 12VDC @ 350mA
or 24VAC @ 4.2W
12) The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.
13) The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
a 3.5mm mini jack.
14) The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG:
VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4:
VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-84/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)
15) The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
16) The camera shall have a built in web server so that access to the IP video stream
can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web browser
shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera. The web
browser shall include the ability to electronically zoom the picture at 1x, 1.5x, 2x,
2.5x and 3x.
17) Up to 3 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Camera without any additional software required.
18) The camera shall have built in Audio input and output jacks and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
19) The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput
levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
20) The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps
or unlimited.
21) The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
22) Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.
b. Indoor PTZ Color Network Camera
1) A semi-flush-mounted digital signal processing (DSP) Super Dynamic III color
CCD camera. The camera shall incorporate a 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD
Imager with Super Dynamic III, 380,000 [768(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a
microlens on each pixel. The camera shall display S/N ratio of 52dB with Super
Dynamic III ON, shutter speed OFF.
2) The unitized camera/dome assembly shall be a self-contained unit that
incorporates an integral color camera, pan-and-tilt motor, zoom lens and
receiver/driver.
3) The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" interline transfer CCD with 768(H) x
494(V) pixels with a micro-lens on each pixel. The camera shall be equipped with
digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high quality picture with a minimum
illumination of 0.02 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode ON (32X) at lens
F number 1.4 and 0.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode OFF, lens F
number 1.4, a minimum illumination of 0.0013 lux in black and white mode with
Sensitivity Up Mode ON (32X), 0.04 lux in black & white mode with Sensitivity
Mode OFF at lens F number 1.4
4) The camera shall use a pixel based dual speed CCD charged with long and short
charges, creating both standard shutter speeds and fast shutter speeds
simultaneously, on a single image field.
5) The camera shall automatically apply each exposure pattern to bright and normal
areas on a pixel by pixel basis. The camera shall feature a digital signal
processor for image processing of both long and short signals, for a wide
dynamic range of up to 128 times over standard CCTV cameras.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-85/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
6) The camera shall feature an image hold capability for retaining images during
preset acquisition phase.
7) The camera shall have the capability of password protecting all menu settings.
8) The camera shall be equipped with an auto back light compensation and shall
feature mask setting and level adjust capability.
9) The unitized camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment
for two specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures
between 2700°K ~ 6000°K and Sodium Vapor and other Nighttime illumination
through Daylight with color temperatures between 2000°K ~ 6000°K. In addition,
manual white balance shall be settable in the range of 2000°K ~ 10,000°K.
10) The camera shall be equipped with a built-in digital motion detector with mask
setting and level adjustment.
11) The camera shall also be equipped with an electronic sensitivity up feature to
enhance camera performance in extreme low light conditions.
12) The camera shall be equipped with image stabilization capable of electronically
stabilizing the image should the camera mounting become subject to mechanical
vibration.
13) The unitized surveillance device shall feature an electronic shutter adjustable
from 1/60 to 1/100 second.
14) The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 16 characters.
15) The camera unit shall include 8 privacy zones that mask areas dynamically with
gray or mosaic; the zones shall change size automatically with camera lens focal
length and camera pan/tilt position. The privacy zone shall feature a supervisor
override function.
16) The Camera's zoom lens shall have a ¼" format and a focal length of 3.8 to
114mm (30X). The zoom lens shall have an auto iris and auto focus feature that
shall allow manual override if the need arises.
17) The camera shall provide continuous digital zoom (10X) for a total maximum
magnification of 300X. The minimum aperture throughout this range shall vary
from a minimum of f/1.4 at the wide angle setting to f/3.7 at the telephoto lens
position.
18) The pan-and-tilt motor shall be a high-speed unit allowing 360° endless panning
with a tilt range of -5 to +185°.
19) The camera shall feature a direct drive motor assembly. Belt driven unitized
camera units shall not be acceptable.
20) The pan-and-tilt shall allow for preset sort and sequence rotation speed of
approximately 400° per second.
21) The camera shall use variable manual pan speed control to allow for super fine
pan control of 0.065° to 120°/s. Pan speed shall be proportional to zoom setting
22) The unitized surveillance device shall feature a minimum of 256 preset positions.
23) The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas per
scene and level adjustment capability.
24) The unitized camera shall be capable of automatically tracking and following a
single moving indoor target that 10 feet from the camera and occupies
approximately 10% of the field-of view, in indoor light conditions greater than 2
lux. The Auto tracking function shall not require an external video processor to
control the unitized camera. The Automatic Tracking mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
tracking mode.
25) The camera shall be able to automatically sequence through the preset positions
in logical programming order (sequence mode) or actual position (sort mode).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-86/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
26) The pan-and-tilt section shall feature automatic panning mode. The Automatic
Preset Sequence or Sort mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual
operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.
27) Motor driving feedback circuit shall assure pre-programmed preset position
accuracy
28) The camera unit shall include an autopan feature in which the camera may rotate
360° endless panning or preprogrammed rotation angle, pausing at the
endpoints for a preprogrammed duration. The Autopan mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
mode.
29) The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
30) The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.
31) The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
BNC connector for local adjustment
32) The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG:
VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)
33) Picture quality mode is dynamically changed by camera itself upon picture
characteristic to feed 30 fps at MPEG-4 mode.
34) CCD captured digital signal data is converted from serial to parallel through slipring by keeping digitally transferred and the data is taken over to video encode
process
35) The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
36) The camera shall have a built-in web server so that access to the IP video
stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web
browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.
37) Up to 15 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Model WV-NS950 Camera without any additional
software required.
38) The camera shall have full duplex two-way audio feature and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
39) The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput
levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
40) The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps
or frame priority mode (4096kbps/unlimited).
41) The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
42) Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.
43) The power source shall be 220-240VAC, 50Hz at 16W
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-87/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
c.
SECTION 21
PTZ Vandal-Proof Network Camera
1. 26x day/night camera
2. In low-light conditions, Legend‟s camera automatically switches from color to
monochrome mode.
3. A 26x optical and 12x digital give you total zoom up to 312x.
4. Prone to vibration such as light poles and parking garages.
5. Closed-loop position system
6. Closed-loop system program presets accuracy of ±0.015º
7. Spherical privacy masking
8. Built-in coax and UTP vide oconnections
9. 32 macros; 16 steps per macro; linkable
10. 16 shadow tours; 20 minutes total duration
11. 127 presets with title and individual camera settings
12. Auto return:1 to 60 minutes; any preset, tour, macro, autopan
13. Continuous zoom adjusted pan/tilt
14. Electronic image flip
15. 120 programmable areas per dome, each with title
16. 24 total privacy masks; 8 displayed simultaneous; with spherical privacy masking
17. 8 built-in alarm inputs
18. 2 relay outputs Environmental• Operating temperature, without theater/blower:32
to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
19. Operating temperature, with heater/blower:-40 to 122°F (-40 to 50°C)
20. Resolution:470 TVLNTSC; 460 TVLPAL
21. Synchronization: Internal/line lock
22. Lens:F=3.5 mm (wide)to 91 mm(tele); F1.6 toF3.8
23. Angle of view (H): 42.0°(wide)to 1.6° (tele)
24. Sensitivity:2.0 lux at 1/60 sec NTSC or 1/50 sec PAL; 0.14 lux at 1/4 secNTSC or
1/3 sec PAL
25. Sensitivity, ICR-on:0.7 lux at 1/60 sec NTSC or 1/50 sec PAL; 0.05 lux at1/4 sec
NTSC or 1/3 sec PAL
26. Electronic shutter speed:1/1 to 1/10,000 sec, 14 steps, NTSC; 1/1 to1/10,000
sec, 14 steps, PAL
27. Video output:1.0 Vp-p
d. Outdoor PTZ Color Network Camera
1. The camera shall incorporate a 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD Imager with Super
Dynamic III, 380,000 [768(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a microlens on each
pixel. The camera shall display S/N ratio of 52dB with Super Dynamic III ON,
shutter speed OFF.
2. The integrated housing shall have a polycarbonate lens, cast aluminum body and
use tamper resistant hardware. The housing shall have a built in sunshield. The
housing shall be weatherproof to IP66.The unitized camera/dome assembly shall
be a self-contained unit that incorporates an integral color camera, pan-and-tilt
motor, zoom lens and receiver/driver.
3. The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" interline transfer CCD with 768(H) x
494(V) pixels with a micro-lens on each pixel. The camera shall be equipped with
digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high quality picture with a minimum
illumination of 0.02 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode ON (32X) at lens
F number 1.4 and 0.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode OFF, lens F
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-88/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
number 1.4, a minimum illumination of 0.0013 lux in black and white mode with
Sensitivity Up Mode ON (32X), 0.04 lux in black & white mode with Sensitivity
Mode OFF at lens F number 1.4
4. The camera shall use a pixel based dual speed CCD charged with long and short
charges, creating both standard shutter speeds and fast shutter speeds
simultaneously, on a single image field.
5. The camera shall automatically apply each exposure pattern to bright and normal
areas on a pixel by pixel basis. The camera shall feature a digital signal
processor for image processing of both long and short signals, for a wide
dynamic range of up to 128 times over standard CCTV cameras.
6. The camera shall feature an image hold capability for retaining images during
preset acquisition phase.
7. The camera shall have the capability of password protecting all menu settings.
8. The camera shall be equipped with an auto back light compensation and shall
feature mask setting and level adjust capability.
9. The unitized camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment
for two specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures
between 2700°K ~ 6000°K and Sodium Vapor and other Nighttime illumination
through Daylight with color temperatures between 2000°K ~ 6000°K. In addition,
manual white balance shall be settable in the range of 2000°K ~ 10,000°K.
10. The camera shall be equipped with a built-in digital motion detector with mask
setting and level adjustment.
11. The camera shall also be equipped with an electronic sensitivity up feature to
enhance camera performance in extreme low light conditions.
12. The camera shall be equipped with image stabilization capable of electronically
stabilizing the image should the camera mounting become subject to mechanical
vibration.
13. The unitized surveillance device shall feature an electronic shutter adjustable
from 1/60 to 1/10,000 second.
14. The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 16 characters.
15. The camera unit shall include 8 privacy zones that mask areas dynamically with
gray or mosaic; the zones shall change size automatically with camera lens focal
length and camera pan/tilt position. The privacy zone shall feature a supervisor
override function.
16. The Camera's zoom lens shall have a ¼" format and a focal length of 3.8 to
114mm (30X). The zoom lens shall have an auto iris and auto focus feature that
shall allow manual override if the need arises.
17. The zoom lens shall provide continuous digital zoom (10X) for a total maximum
magnification of 300X. The minimum aperture throughout this range shall vary
from a minimum of f/1.4 at the wide angle setting to f/3.7 at the telephoto lens
position.
18. The pan-and-tilt motor shall be a high-speed unit allowing 360° endless panning
with a tilt range of -5 to +185°.
19. The camera shall feature a direct drive motor assembly. Belt driven unitized
camera units shall not be acceptable.
20. The pan-and-tilt shall allow for preset sort and sequence rotation speed of
approximately 400° per second.
21. The camera shall use variable manual pan speed control to allow for super fine
pan control of 0.065° to 120°/s. Pan speed shall be proportional to zoom setting.
22. The unitized surveillance device shall feature a minimum of 256 preset positions.
23. The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas per
scene and level adjustment capability.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-89/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
24. The unitized camera shall be capable of automatically tracking and following a
single moving indoor target that 10 feet from the camera and occupies
approximately 10% of the field-of view, in indoor light conditions greater than 2
lux. The Auto tracking function shall not require an external video processor to
control the unitized camera. The Automatic Tracking mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
tracking mode.
25. The camera shall be able to automatically sequence through the preset positions
in logical programming order (sequence mode) or actual position (sort mode).
26. The pan-and-tilt section shall feature automatic panning mode. The Automatic
Preset Sequence or Sort mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual
operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.
27. Motor driving feedback circuit shall assure pre-programmed preset position
accuracy
28. The camera unit shall include an autopan feature in which the camera may rotate
360° endless panning or preprogrammed rotation angle, pausing at the
endpoints for a preprogrammed duration. The Autopan mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
mode.
29. The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
30. The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.
31. The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
BNC connector for local adjustment.
32. The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4:
VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)
33. Picture quality mode is dynamically changed by camera itself upon picture
characteristic to feed 30 fps at MPEG-4 mode.
34. CCD captured digital signal data is converted from serial to parallel through slipring by keeping digitally transferred and the data is taken over to video encode
process
35. The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
36. The camera shall have a built-in web server so that access to the IP video
stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web
browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.
37. Up to 15 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Model WV-NW960 Camera without any additional
software required.
38. The camera shall have full duplex two-way audio feature and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
39. The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput
levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
40. The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps
or frame priority mode (4096kbps/unlimited).
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-90/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
41. The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
42. Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.
43. The power source shall be 220V to 240V AC, 50 Hz at 90W (WV-NW960, Heater
ON), or 24V AC, 50 Hz at 85W
E. Network Video Recording
1. The recorder shall be capable of connecting up to 64 network cameras without
extra license fees and their images can be recorded simultaneously.
2. The cameras shall be equipped with a 1000GB hot plug HDD and 8 additional
hot plug HDD slots. It shall allow up to 9TB of HDD storage to be installed in the
main unit. The recorder shall have the capability of expansion up to 54TB by
adding five optional Hard Disk Extension Units, each with 9 HDD slots.
3. The recorder shall have Intelligent VMD search function that allow motions in a
specified area in the recorded images of the compatible i-Pro cameras* to be
quickly searched.
4. The recorder shall be appliance based with an embedded real-time operating
system and shall not be based on a Microsoft Windows OS. The OS must reside
completely within the hardware and not be installed on the hard disk drives.
Installed disk drives must be dedicated to recording video.
5. The recorder shall have MPEG-4 and JPEG multi format capabilities.
6. The recorder shall provide Various Recording Mode: Manual, Schedule, Event
(Pre/Post), Emergency, and External Timer. It shall have the capabilities to
control: Pan/Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Brightness and Preset Positions. It shall be able
to search using: Time & Date, Event Type and Camera number.
7. The recorder shall have eight recording programs including individual recording
mode for each camera, and 6 time schedules per day.
8. The recorder shall have up to 36 audio capabilities and can be recorded and
played back at G.726 (ADPCM) 32 kbps.
9. The recorder shall have various alarm sources to include 32x Terminal inputs,
64x Camera alarm. The alarm actions shall include Alarm recording, E-mail
notification, Alarm message, Camera positioning, FTP image transfer, Terminal
output, alarm protocol output, Buzzer and LED
10. The recorder shall have 2x built-in network interfaces (10Base-T / 100Base-TX /
1000Base-T) for camera recording and client access.
11. Quick IP Setup for i-Pro network cameras through Easy Setup Utility Tool
12. The recorder shall have the capabilities to transfer recorded images to FTP
server upon alarm and/or live image periodically. Images recorded in the SD
memory card in the i-Pro network cameras can be transferred to the recorder
automatically even when the recorder is in recording status
13. The recorder shall have User/Host authentication, 4 programmable user levels,
16 user priorities and User-Camera View/Control partitioning setup for
sophisticated user management. It shall be capable of up to 32 user
registrations.
14. The recorder shall have Alteration detection and recorded data encryption for
data security.
15. The recorder shall have RAID5/6 redundant recording for data security. The
RAID6 feature allows the recorder to recover from a two-disk failure without any
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-91/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
loss of data (minimum four HDDs are required). With hot plug support, drives can
be replaced without any downtime, allowing 24/7 operations. It shall have Disk
partitioning to include Normal, Event, Pre-Event and Copy for flexible record
management
16. The recorder shall be viewable from any properly connected PC using Microsoft
Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later
17. The recorder shall provide for user authentication and support different user
privileges based on logon ID. From the client the user should (with proper
authentication) be able to do the following:
a. Setup camera
b. Define live viewing, recording rates and quality settings.
c. Define recording programs and schedules.
d. View live video in either single or quad views.
e. Search and playback recorded video.
f. Download selected recorded video.
g. Control connected PTZ cameras
18. The recorder shall provide for optional viewer software that is capable of viewing
multiple cameras from multiple recorders on a single screen and provide the
following features:
19. Software shall be able to display live video from any camera on any connected
recorder.
20. Software shall be able to display 1, 2x2, 3x3 or 4x4 multiplexed video.
21. Software shall show registered recorders on the network as icons in a drop down
menu. Cameras will be shown as icons on the same menu, indented under the
attached recorder.
22. Software shall enable user to assign any video from any recorder into any
window on the multiplexed display
23. Software shall permit the registration of up to 32 user registration and passwords
and provide up to 5 different levels of user privileges.
24. Software shall permit the remote operation of properly configured Pan, Tilt, Zoom
cameras subject to the user privilege level.
25. Software shall provide search capabilities for attached recorders and allow
search by Event, Mark or Motion. It must apply these search criteria across
multiple recorders.
26. Software shall permit the playback of up to 16 simultaneous video files.
27. Software must be able to run on an IBM-PC/AT compatible computer with the
following minimum specifications:
28. Windows XP Home SP2/ XP Professional SP2/ Vista Ultimate
29. Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or later
30. Intel Core2Duo 2.66GHz Processor
31. 1024 x768 16 Bit Graphics Card with Video Monitor
32. 2Gbytes or more of RAM
33. 64Mbytes or more of VRAM
34. 10/100 Ethernet Network Card
35. Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later
36. Mouse, Keyboard
Monitor
LCD Display
AEB-872-10-REV. A
17" LCD
S-21-92/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Resolution
1280 x 1024 SXGA
Color
16.7 M
Contrast Ratio
500: 1
Effective Display area 337.92 x 270.34 mm
Input Signal Video (loop-thru) , S-Video (Loop-thru) and VGA
VGA Signal
Audio
Analogue VGA / 15 Pin-D-Sub connector
1x Phono (loop-thru) 1 Watt max
SECURITY HARDWARE – MAIN CONTROL PANEL (MCP)
General Overview
Operating Voltage and Current
The Main Control Panel shall contain an on-board switched mode power supply with
battery charger and obtain power from a 230V 50Hz/23VAC 2.0A transformer.
Physical Enclosure Parameters
The enclosure shall be steel fabricated and powder coated beige. Two enclosures
are available:
Large: The outside dimension in the closed position shall be (475w) x (460h) x
(160d).
Standard: The outside dimension in the closed position shall be (315w) x (445h) x
(88d).
Inputs
A. Alarm Inputs. The Main Control Panel shall monitor up to sixteen (16) EOL
supervised inputs with expansion capabilities for up to two hundred and fifty six (256)
Inputs via DGPs. The option of two or four state Input monitoring may be selected.
Three EOL resistance values (4.7kΩ, 10kΩ and 2.2kΩ) shall be available.
Outputs
Main Control Panel itself shall feature the following outputs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
One (1) supervised external siren output
One (1) internal siren output
One (1) flash/strobe output
One (1) programmable relay (12 VDC – 2A)
Four (4) programmable Open Collector outputs
One (1) switched 12 VDC outputs (to reset latching sensors)
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-93/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Output Expansion
Relay boards and Open Collector boards provide up to two hundred and fifty five
(255) programmable outputs per MCP. The relays should have a minimum rating of
12 volts – 50mA, and relays on the Intelligent 4 door/elevator controller shall use
relays rated at 12 volts – 10 Amps. All relay should be Form C.
Remote Arming Stations
(RAS) The Main Control Panel shall support up to sixteen (16) RAS on the RS485
data bus. At least one LCD RAS shall be connected to each MCP for programming,
control and display of system status and events. In addition, various forms of card
readers and/or PIN keypads or combinations of both may fill each additional RAS
position.
Data Gathering Panels (DGP)
1. The Main Control Panel shall support up to fifteen (15) DGPs on the RS485 data
bus. DGPs provide the ability to expand the number of EOLR supervised inputs
2. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be two hundred and fifty six (256)
per MCP.
3. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be one hundred and twenty eight
(128) per MCP.
4. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be sixty four (64) per MCP.
5. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be thirty two (32) per MCP.
6. Intelligent Door Controller DGPs, shall also have the ability to be used as a four
(4) door access controller (4DC) and shall have the ability to control and monitor
up to forty eight (48) “intelligent” doors in addition to the sixteen (16) doors
supported by the MCP. Intelligent features shall include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Users shall be stored locally on each door controller.
Door groups shall be stored locally on each door controller.
Time zones shall be stored locally on each door controller.
Door Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all door
controllers connected to a control panel.
e. The ability to use a card plus PIN
f. The number of users per region shall be controlled.
g. Incorporate door interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports.
h. Provide door shunting until the door is closed.
i. Provide a door open too long alarm.
j. Ability to require the two-card rule.
Intelligent Lift Controller DGPs, shall also have the ability to be used as a four (4) lift
access controller (4LC) and shall have the ability to control and monitor up to sixty
four (48) floors per Lift. Intelligent features shall include:
a. Users shall be stored locally on each lift controller
b. Floor groups shall be stored locally on each lift controller.
c. Time zones shall be stored locally on each lift controller.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-94/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
d.
Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all lift controllers
connected to a control panel.
e. The ability to use a card plus PIN
f. The number of users per region shall be controlled.
g. Incorporate lift interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports.
h. Ability to require the two-card rule.
i. Users shall be allowed to only access allowed floors
Intelligent Bank Controller (IBC) DGPs, shall shall also have the ability to be used as
an ATM access controller and shall have the ability to control and monitor up to 7
ATMs. Intelligent features shall include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Users shall be stored locally on each Bank controller
Door groups shall be stored locally on each bank controller
Time zones shall be stored locally on each bank controller.
Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all bank controllers
connected to a control panel.
e. The ability to use a card plus PIN
f. Ability to require the two-card rule.
g. Utilizes interlock to enable opening ATM vaults in a structured method.
h. Shall allow for different delays when opening ATM vaults for Hold-Up, normal
opening of first ATM vault or normal opening of the next ATM vault.
Outputs
DGPs, excluding Wireless DGPs shall have sixteen (16) outputs, available through
Relay cards or open collector cards.
Intelligent Addressable DGPs shall have up to thirty two (32) outputs available
through IADS Output devices.
Intelligent Controllers shall have four (4) relays for switching door locks.
All DGPs with built-in power supply shall have a siren output.
Data Bus Communications
All devices on the RS485 data bus shall be polled continuously to ensure correct
operation. Should any of the bus devices fail to respond to a series of polls from the
Main Control Panel, a trouble alarm shall be generated on the system specifying the
off-line device details. The alarm shall be notified on LCD display, keypad trouble
LED and be reported to a Central Station.\
The system shall operate in real time mode and distribute processing activity to the
intelligent controllers. It shall also be capable of communicating to all remote devices
using an integrated fiber optic module.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-95/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
SYSTEM MONITORING
General Overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting all the alarm, access and
system events to a Host PC running a Management Software.
Local Host PC
It shall be possible to have a permanent direct connection between the Main Control
Panel and the Host PC using an optional Computer and Printer interface installed
onto the MCP. Connection over IP shall be provided by an optional IP interface A 10digit password is required to allow initial connection. The number of connection
attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.
Temporary Remote PC
It shall also be possible to have a temporary remote connection between the Main
Control Panel and a PC via leased line, PSTN, ISDN or GSM using the built-in or an
optional plug-on digital dialler.
1. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing installers or service
providers to dial into the system from a PC running the Management Software.
There shall be two ways of dealing with a remote connection request;
i.
j.
An authorized user shall clear the incoming call via a LCD RAS.
The Main Control Panel shall call back the originator of the call on a preprogrammed phone number. In both cases, a 10-digit password is required to
allow any connection and the number of connection attempts is
programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed ) to 255.)
An authorized user shall be capable to initiate a connection to a remote PC
running the Management software either by calling a pre-programmed phone
number or by entering a new phone number through a LCD RAS.
2. Regardless of the type of connection, it shall be possible to programme the
system in such a way that any change to the system database is impossible if
any area is armed.
Permanent Remote PC
It shall be possible to have a permanent remote connection between the Main
Control Panel and a PC via the optional Computer and Printer port and an optional
IP interface.
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing local operators and/or remote
operators to connect to the system from a PC running the Management Software. A
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-96/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
10-digit password is required to allow any connection and the number of connection
attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.
1. Multiple Control Panels
The Host PC and its Management Software shall be capable of monitoring up to
sixty four (64) Control Panels simultaneously. It shall be possible to have any
combination of direct and remote connections between the Host PC and the sixty
four (64) Control Panels.
If dial-up is required, the PC shall support the required number of modems.
ALARM REPORTING
General overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting alarm and specified events to
commercial Central Monitoring Stations. These would be events such as:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Input(s) in alarm or in fault condition
Input(s) inhibited (report immediately or when system armed)
Areas armed or disarmed
Areas armed or disarmed out of normal hours
RAS, DGP, 4DC or SDC off line, de-polled, inhibited or in fault condition
Controllers with AC fail, low battery, fuse fail, tamper, siren fail or CPU restart
RAS with duress code entered
Dead-man alarm
System test started, over, incomplete or completed
Service technician on-site or off-site
Remote Log-in and log-out attempts
Program mode entered and exited
Time or Date Changed o SIA and XSIA Event Codes
Contact ID Event Codes o FSK 200 baud Event Codes
VdS Event Codes A total of four Central Station shall be available, each
having a primary and backup number.
Main Control Panel Event Storage
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of holding 255 reporting events within the
buffer.
1. PSTN Connection
A PSTN connection to a CMS shall be done using the built-in digital dialer. The
Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the PSTN line and display “Report
Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or
there is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-97/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first
number fails.
PSTN shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a
Central Station.
2. ISDN-B or ISDN-B/D Connection. An ISDN-B or ISDN-D channel connection
to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer. The Main Control
Panel shall monitor the status of the ISDN line and display “Report Fail” on all
LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no
answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number
fails.
3. ISDN-B or ISDN-D shall also be available as backup to any other type of
connection to a Central Station.
GSM Connection
A GSM connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer.
The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the GSM line and display “Report
Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there
is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.
GSM shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.
IP Connection
An IP connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional add-on IP Interface (in
addition to an RS232 Computer Interface) . The Main Control Panel shall monitor
the status of the IP Connection and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the
connection is not capable of communicating to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.
IP shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.
Reporting Formats and Logic
a. Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting events and alarms using a
variety of formats such as SIA (large or small), XSIA (large or small), Contact ID
(large or small), FSK 200 baud, VdS 2465 (large or small), X.25 ENAI or Voice
Reporting (with or without acknowledge)
b. The Main Control Panel shall support up to four CMS, with each CMS having two
phone numbers. This gives eight possible connections through which an event
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-98/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
can be reported. It shall be possible to programme different formats including
Voice Reporting, to report via each CMS. Each CMS can be used to report via
any medium (PSTN, ISDN, GSM or IP), including for backup purposes. The Main
Control Panel shall support Multiple as well as Dual Central Stations Reporting.
Multiple Central Stations Reporting is where an event will be market as reported
once it has been successfully sent to any of the CMS programmed
7. Dual Central Stations Reporting is where an event must successfully report to all
the CMS, programmed as Dual Reporting, before it is marked as reported and
removed from the queue.
8. Voice Reporting
Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of playing back pre-recorded voices
messages through optional module(s) connected on the MI expansion bus. It shall
be possible to connect two (2) Voice Reporting modules per MCP and there shall be
a minimum of eight (8) Messages per module; the leader message, the address
message and six alarm messages. If a second module is installed, all eight
messages for the second module will be alarm messages. The total recording time
per module shall be thirty five (35) seconds.
Voice messages shall be programmed to report on the occurrence of specific
reporting codes. Several reporting codes may have the same voice message
programmed. Reporting codes 1-11 are general alarms (BA, FA, TA…), while
reporting codes 12-21 are zone specific, that is, you can link a reporting code to
specific zones. This means that any zone activation or event happening in the MCP
shall be able to trigger a voice message.
REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS FACILITY
General Overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of running a diagnostic session upon
request of a PC Management Software. The PC Management Software shall upload
the results of the checks. The parameters checked by the diagnostic facility shall be
in line with the EN50131 and include the measurement of analogue values like the
input resistance and the voltage supplied to each DGP and RAS on the RS485 data
bus. It shall be possible to launch a diagnostic session either locally or from a remote
location through a PSTN, ISDN or leased line connection.
Checked Parameters
The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;
a. Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel.
b. Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel
and the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-99/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Check that the system log is still accepting new entries.
Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line.
Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line.
Identify any input on soak test.
Identify any inhibited input.
Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances
(Ohms).
i. Check anti-mask of motion detectors.
j. Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last
six (6) hours before arming.
k. Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the
MCP).
The diagnostic facility shall also be able – upon specific request - to activate the
sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA “RX” test message to the
Central Monitoring Station.
Standard Memory
As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following
numbers of system parameters;
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
50 Individual Users.
74 Alarm Groups
10 Door Group
10 Floor Groups
250 Alarm event buffer
10 Access event buffer
24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods.
64 Holidays.
365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities
Intelligent Controller Note
The memory capabilities in used in the Main Control Panel and the Intelligent
Controllers shall be equal. If the Main Control Panel is fitted with IUM‟s (read below),
the Intelligent Controllers need to be upgraded to have the same memory
configuration.
Software IUM
When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable
reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits
or checksums included in the card data.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-100/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Expanded 1MB memory
An optional 1 Meg Memory Expansion unit shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel to
increase the following system numbers;
a. 11,466 Individual Users, up to 1000 with PIN codes (without Soft IUM mode
enabled)
b. 2000 Individual Users with both Card & PIN code (with Soft IUM mode
enabled)
4MB IUM memory
An optional 4 Meg Intelligent User Module (IUM) shall be fitted to the Main Control
Panel and Intelligent Controllers to provide the above listed features in addition to
the following functions:
a. 17,873 Individual Users.
b. Each User may be assigned both a Card & programmable PIN code
8MB IUM memory
An optional 8 Meg Intelligent User Module (IUM) shall be fitted to the Main Control
Panel and Intelligent Controllers to provide the above listed features in addition to
the following functions:
a. 65,535 Individual Users.
DATA BUS COMMUNICATIONS
General Data Bus Parameters
The Main Control Panel shall communicate with all remote devices by using a data
bus. This network shall use RS485 data bus multi-drop protocol at a data rate of
4800bps. All devices on the data bus may be polled in a star or loop configuration. A
470 Ohms resistance shall terminate the longest cable run to balance the
impedance.
1. The maximum distance between the Main Control Panel and any device, whether
a RAS, DGP or Intelligent controller shall be no more than 1.5Km on approved
cable.
2. The data bus shall be cabled in Belden 8723 or equivalent (shielded, twisted, 2
pair). The shield shall be connected to the common earthing point, but strictly at
one end of the cable. When the data bus stretches across different buildings, all
the DGPs with power supply should be connected to the safety earth with a
separated earth cable of no less than 2.5mm2 connected to ground at a common
point.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-101/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all
POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall
be able to display numerically all errors per device.
Fibre Optic Capability
The Main Control Panel, or any other devices, such as RAS units, DGPs or intelligent
controllers, shall have the capability of communicating on a Fibre Optic bus using
RS485/Fibre Optic converters.
The Fibre optic units shall be capable of true signal repeating and multi-dropping to
RS485 data bus protocol within the same unit. The distance between Fibre Optic
units shall not exceed 1.5Km. Up to thirty two (32) Fibre Optic repeaters may be
connected on one data bus in daisy chain configuration.
Leased Line Modems
When data bus device distances in excess of 1.5Km are required, or a different
media is utilized, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of communicating with
remote devices via Leased Line modems. Interfaces may be used to convert the
RS485 data bus to an RS232 protocol and vice versa.
Area Operation/Control
For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following:
1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes.
2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers.
3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed
independently (area link).
4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s
5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s
6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as „Access
Granted‟, „Region Counting‟ and different Badging techniques.
7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system event
8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event
9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit
10. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open
11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open
12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition
13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time zone
14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed
15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open
16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited
17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm
18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time
19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time
20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning)
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-102/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode
System Area Reporting Local
The status of every area shall be shown clearly on the RAS. The Main Control Panel
shall be capable of displaying the status of individual areas on card readers, LED
RAS units as well as third party equipment such as consoles and mimic panels etc,
by using the system outputs. System area status may also be controlled and
monitored by the Host PC.
REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS FACILITY
General Overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of running a diagnostic session upon
request of a PC Management Software. The PC Management Software shall upload
the results of the checks. The parameters checked by the diagnostic facility shall be
in line with the EN50131 and include the measurement of analogue values like the
input resistance and the voltage supplied to each DGP and RAS on the RS485 data
bus. It shall be possible to launch a diagnostic session either locally or from a
remote location through a PSTN, ISDN or leased line connection.
Checked Parameters
The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;
a. Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel.
b. Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel
and the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute.
c. Check that the system log is still accepting new entries.
d. Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line.
e. Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line.
f. Identify any input on soak test.
g. Identify any inhibited input.
h. Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances
(Ohms).
i. Check anti-mask of motion detectors.
j. Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last
six (6) hours before arming.
k. Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the
MCP).
The diagnostic facility shall also be able – upon specific request - to activate the
sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA “RX” test message to the
Central Monitoring Station.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-103/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Standard Memory
As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following
numbers of system parameters;
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
50 Individual Users.
74 Alarm Groups
10 Door Group
10 Floor Groups
250 Alarm event buffer
10 Access event buffer
24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods.
64 Holidays.
365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities
Intelligent Controller Note
The memory capabilities in used in the Main Control Panel and the Intelligent
Controllers shall be equal. If the Main Control Panel is fitted with IUM‟s (read below),
the Intelligent Controllers need to be upgraded to have the same memory
configuration.
Software IUM
When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable
reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits
or checksums included in the card data.
Expanded 1MB memory
An optional 1 Meg Memory Expansion unit shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel
to increase the following system numbers;
c. 11,466 Individual Users, up to 1000 with PIN codes (without Soft IUM
mode enabled)
d. 2000 Individual Users with both Card & PIN code (with Soft IUM mode
enabled)
DATA BUS COMMUNICATIONS
General Data Bus Parameters
The Main Control Panel shall communicate with all remote devices by using a data
bus. This network shall use RS485 data bus multi-drop protocol at a data rate of
4800bps. All devices on the data bus may be polled in a star or loop configuration. A
470 Ohms resistance shall terminate the longest cable run to balance the
impedance.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-104/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
1. The maximum distance between the Main Control Panel and any device,
whether a RAS, DGP or Intelligent controller shall be no more than 1.5Km on
approved cable.
2. The data bus shall be cabled in Belden 8723 or equivalent (shielded, twisted,
2 pair). The shield shall be connected to the common earthing point, but
strictly at one end of the cable. When the data bus stretches across different
buildings, all the DGPs with power supply should be connected to the safety
earth with a separated earth cable of no less than 2.5mm2 connected to
ground at a common point.
3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting
all POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and
shall be able to display numerically all errors per device.
Fibre Optic Capability
The Main Control Panel, or any other devices, such as RAS units, DGPs or intelligent
controllers, shall have the capability of communicating on a Fibre Optic bus using
RS485/Fibre Optic converters.
The Fibre optic units shall be capable of true signal repeating and multi-dropping to
RS485 data bus protocol within the same unit. The distance between Fibre Optic
units shall not exceed 1.5Km. Up to thirty two (32) Fibre Optic repeaters may be
connected on one data bus in daisy chain configuration.
Leased Line Modems
When data bus device distances in excess of 1.5Km are required, or a different
media is utilized, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of communicating with
remote devices via Leased Line modems. Interfaces may be used to convert the
RS485 data bus to an RS232 protocol and vice versa.
Area Operation/Control
For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following:
1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes
2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers
3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed
independently (area link).
4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s
5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s
6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as „Access
Granted‟, „Region Counting‟ and different Badging techniques.
7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system event
8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event
9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-105/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
10. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open
11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open
12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition
13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time zone
14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed
15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open
16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited
17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm
18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time
19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time
20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning)
21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode
System Area Reporting Local
The status of every area shall be shown clearly on the RAS. The Main Control Panel
shall be capable of displaying the status of individual areas on card readers, LED
RAS units as well as third party equipment such as consoles and mimic panels etc,
by using the system outputs. System area status may also be controlled and
monitored by the Host PC.
Biometric reader
Keypad finger biometric reader
The biometric key pad reader should integrate easily into access control systems.
The fingerprint must be enrolled and stored on contactless smart card or directly on
the reader and this can be done through the software included with the reader or
through an Administrator Mode accessible through the keypad and display. Once a
fingerprint is enrolled, authentication may be performed any number of times.
Authentication may be initiated either through the keypad (if a template is stored
directly on the reader) or by presenting a smart card to the reader. After
authentication, the smart card biometric shall send a Wiegand string to the Access
Control System or other host equipment for appropriate action.
Fingerprint Template Capacity
The unit shall support an unlimited number of users since the fingerprint template file
is stored on the smart card itself rather than on the reader‟s local memory. A
maximum of two fingerprint templates may be stored per contactless smart card. If
templates are stored on the reader‟s local memory, whereby the verification is
initiated by providing an ID number via keypad entry, the unit shall store up to 3550
fingerprint templates.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-106/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Supported Cards
The Unit shall support the following contactless smart cards: HID Corp. iCLASS
16kbits (2kBytes) 2-Application Area cards HID Corp. iCLASS 16kbits (2kBytes) 16Application Area cards Honeywell Access Systems 16kbits (2kBytes) OmniSmart
cards
Memory
The reader shall utilize non-volatile flash memory to store all templates and data
configurations and shall therefore not lose any templates or configuration information
if the reader is powered down.
The SiteKey shall be stored within the internal memory of the reader and shall be
encrypted and stored on the smart card itself. For security purposes, the SiteKey
shall not be stored within the Admin software or PC, and may NOT be retrieved by
the reader.
Admin Management Software
The Software supports Windows 98/NT4.0/ME/2000/XP.
IT Manages a network of biometric readers Secure smart cards with a SiteKey.
Configure biometric smart card reader security settings Read/Write the fingerprint
template information to a smart card Enroll new user fingerprint templates Edit
existing user fingerprint templates Delete user fingerprint templates Distribute the
user templates from the reader or PC to other readers in the installation Adjust the
parameters (communications, biometrics, Wiegand, line trigger, etc.) of an individual
reader or all readers connected on a network Configure the operation of the
biometric top LED Create user access, holiday, and biometric schedules Download
the reader transaction log Upload alternate menu prompts (i.e., Arabic menu prompt)
Perform firmware upgrades
Other Supported Formats
The Unit shall support the following Pre-Defined Wiegand formats:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Standard 26-bit
Apollo 44-bit
Northern 34-bit
Northern 34-bit (no parity)
Andover 37-bit*
Generic 64-bit*
Ademco 34-bit
HID Corporate 1000 35-bit
HID 37-bit
Wiegand 4002 40-bit*
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-107/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
k. Generic 34-bit*
Custom Pre-Defined Formats
The reader shall support the use of a Custom Wiegand Format.
Pass-Thru Formats
The reader shall support a Pass-Thru mode. In this mode, critical information about
the format is provided to the biometric unit, which shall allow the reader to correctly
generate the card ID required to send to the Access Control System. To support your
proprietary Wiegand format in a Pass-Thru mode.
Smart Card
Features:
a. 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card and 125 kHz technology
provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity.
b. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication,
encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities.
c. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure
HID access control application area.
d. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte) or 16k bit (2k Byte) configurations.
e. Meets ISO standards for thickness for use with all direct image and thermal
transfer printers.
f. Add a magnetic stripe, barcode, anti-counterfeiting, or photo ID.
All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:
a. Available in two application area configuration only.
b. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other
application area for user customization.
c. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications.
d. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control
installation.
All 16k bit (2k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:
a. Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates.
b. Available in a two or sixteen application area configuration.
c. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the
HID standard access control application, and support future growth.
d. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-108/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Smart Card Reader
Features
Security 64-bit authentication keys are extremely secure.
All RF data transmission between the card and reader should be encrypted, using a
secure algorithm.
Typical Maximum Read Range
2.5-4.5” (6.3-11.4 cm) with smart Card
Indoor/Outdoor Design
Rugged, weatherized polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand harsh
environments, provides reliable performance and resistance to vandalism.
Permanent magnet built into housing facilitates tamper alarm when used with a
magnetic reed switch.
Barrier
3.0 Mt. Maximum arm length , opeing time approximately 3 seconds
2mm thickness A 1 quality steel – cabinet
Need to fix in 20cm in concrete
A Microprocessor controlled electronics, A high torque continuous two way operation
AC motor is utilized in the barrier.
Door Locks
Holding force
Voltage
Power
550kg
DC12v
12v/240mA
Necessary L&Z Brackets need to provided for the access doors.
Emergency exit should be provide at all the exits
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-109/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
21.2.22
BACKGROUND MUSIC AND AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special
Conditions apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work section applies to work of this section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and
tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation background music,
digital signage and audio visual system in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
B. The systems wiring shall be completely separated from any other system.
C. The drawings issued with the specification indicate the approximate location of
all apparatus. The exact and final location shall be subject to the prior approval
of the Engineer.
D. Provide with the tender a schedule of all equipment to be supplied with a
recommended layout of the system.
E. The Background Music System shall consist basically of the following:
1. Metal rack cabinet (s) which shall incorporate:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Digital Signal Processor
Dual Channel Power Amplifier
IPOD Docking Station
Audio Server
Control System Processor
Color Touch Panel.
Power Sequencer
Double Cassette Players.
AM/FM radio tuner with relevant antennas.
Power conditioner (Main distribution panel).
Monitor panel.
Interface with fire alarm system.
High Definition Plasma Screen
Mounted Ceiling Loudspeakers
Volume controls.
Home Theatre System
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-110/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
1.3
SECTION 21
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer‟s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of
main background music system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5
years. Provide main background music system produced by a manufacturer
listed as an Acceptable manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,
DIN/VDE, IEC.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer‟s data and installation instructions for main
background music system.
B. Shop Drawings : Submit dimensional layout on architectural background
drawings.
C. Riser diagram : Submit riser and block diagrams for the main background music
system indicating type of different components in the system, interface with other
systems and also the arrangement of the central equipment inside the rack
cabinets.
D. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this
specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the
stated function or specification in a manner different from that described and
specified, a full description of the deviation shall be provided.
1.5
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective
parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer‟s and dealer‟s standard
warranties for a period of not less than one year from date of initial start-up and
Engineer acceptance of the system and include labor and travel time for
necessary repairs at the job site.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
REQUIRED FEATURES
A. The equipment shall be stacked in rack Cabinets with front glass door and
latitudinal chassis support elements. The design shall be such that all units may
be drawn out from the front of the rack and internal connections shall be long
enough to permit withdrawal without prior disconnection.
B. Electrical connections other than those of low level signal shall be effected by
means of soldering push-on space clips or multi-connector blocks. Low level
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-111/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
signal wiring shall be of heavily braided screened cable sheathed in PVC and
connections as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Each active item of equipment shall have its own power supply circuit, be
independently fused on the live conductor and bear a front panel mains indicator
light ON/OFF switch and standard cartridge type fuse holder. A permanent
inscription shall indicate the fuse rating.
D. Positive electric contact shall be made between each equipment and the main
racking assembly. The racks shall be independently earthed and it is the
responsibility of the contractor to ensure that hum producing earth return loops
are avoided.
E. Amplifiers output shall be tested and rated in accordance with the I.E.C.
Standard and 100 V line matching techniques shall be used.
F. All equipment shall be designed for a continuous trouble-free operation in the
climatic conditions of the site.
G. All components and equipment shall be in full compliance with I.E.C safety
regulations and be proofed against tropical conditions.
H. All units of the system shall be protected from the normal hazards of operation
such as mismatch, over-load, short- circuiting of output and connection mistakes
etc.
I.
All items of equipment shall under any normal circumstances of operation be
capable of withstanding any surges which might be produced by sudden
re-establishment of mains or standby power supplied after a power failure.
J.
Heat limits as specified and guaranteed by the manufacturer shall under no
circumstances be exceeded. louvers and vents shall be provided to this effect.
K. The two sides and the rear door of the rack(s) shall be capable of being opened
to permit any required maintenance at the rack.
L. The levels shall be measured at 1.5 m above floor level (1m above floor level in
seating areas) in all normally-accessible areas, using a sound level meter
complying with I.E.C 651 Type 1 or 2, set to „S‟ (slow) response and calibrated
immediately before the measurements shall be witnessed by the Owner‟s
Authorized Representative who will be provided with a written set of results. The
sound pressure level shall be 88 + 2dB and the sound transmission index (STI)
shall be > 0.7 at least 85 % of floor area.
M. The system shall be sub-divided into zones to allow broadcasting of different
sources (BGM / Paging) to different zones.
2.2
SYSTEM OUTLINE
A. The background music system shall be in all public (living/dining/majilis) areas,
lobbies and individual bedrooms. The system shall be offering different zones
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-112/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
especially for main majilis, all living/dining areas and all bedrooms. For these
zones it should be possible to have an additional local input by the means of
iPod docking station or Aux input.
B. The design concept for the Background Music System is to locate music source
equipment in the Computer / Server room and integrate signal distribution direct
to the outlet or zone via the building LAN.
C. A high quality site wide background music system shall be provided for Villa
general circulation areas, lobbies, lounges and bedrooms using music quality coaxial loudspeakers. The BGM system shall be independent of the Fire / Voice
Alarm system and an interface provided between the background music system
and the fire evacuation system, in compliance with standards BS5839, in order
that the background music system is automatically muted in the event of an
alarm condition.
D. The background music should be digital and IP based, to leverage the
capabilities of the IP infrastructure. It should be able to take benefit from existing
audio and audio on demand or streamed IP sources available through the IPTV
system as well as extra sources.
2.3
BGM (Background Music) Concept
A. Background music for living/dining, majilis, general circulation, lobbies and
bedrooms.
B. Dedicated background music for all bedrooms with local input facility and facility
to interconnect with main system.
C. In addition to existing IP sources there should be provision for extra sources and
IP encoders for CD-DVD players and MP3 compatible players.
D. The system should be able to adapt typical stereo content to a mono/single
speaker restitution system. The subsystem should be able to adapt to content
provided as unicast or multicast streams.
E. Amplifiers must be distributed and zoned towards the facilities and taking their
content from the IP network. From the amplifier discreet signal distribution shall
be done towards the speakers.
F. Speaker external color and look feel must be coordinated / agreed with internal
design project authority and client.
G. The system should be offering pre-empting capabilities at scheduled intervals or
on demand, to push to all or selected venues special events like fire alarms,
general notices or prayer time.
H. The Background music system should be offering a management interface
allowing schedule as well as on demand configuration of content per zone. The
management interface must be web based and should also include pre-hearing
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-113/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
capabilities. Different level of authority should be provided by the system
allowing, by example, modifications on a single pre-assigned zone.
I.
The management system should be able to report any failure of belonging
components and amplifiers.
J. The music sources for the BGM system shall be provided as digital audio servers
located in Technical room. The contractor to assess the number of individual
music channels that shall be required to serve the development.
Zoning and Control
A. The system shall be configured into logical zones based on the building layout.
B. All bedrooms shall be provided with higher quality loudspeakers and configured
as dedicated zones capable of standalone operation but with connection to the
central music sources.
C. Refer to project drawings for zone areas and zone controls
D. Each zone shall be provided with appropriate number of volume controllers. The
contractor shall coordinate with Home Automation system supplier for necessary
integration of BGM wall controls inside Home automation touch panels.
1. Each Bedroom outlet shall to have its own unique music source and the
ability to select from any of the central sources.
2.
General areas and lobbies shall be on a single control zone with on/off and
volume controls at central control.
3. All public washrooms to be on one control zone with source, on/off and
volume controls at Computer / Server Room.
2.4
EQUIPMENT
2.4.1
DUAL POWER AMPLIFIERS
A. The power amplifier shall be a solid-state two-channel model employing MultiMode output circuitry.
B. The amplifier shall contain protection circuitry which limits the drive level placed
on the output devices before their SOA (Safe Operating Area) is exceeded. This
protection circuitry shall calculate the instantaneous voltage across and current
through the output devices while factoring in their simulated junction
temperatures to predict how close they are to their operating limits.
C. The amplifier shall contain protection from shorted, open and mismatched loads,
general Overheating, DC, high-frequency overloads, under/over voltage, and
internal faults.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-114/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
If an amplifier channel starts to overheat, the Thermal Level Control (TLC) circuit
shall engage that channel‟s input compressor in an amount proportional to the
amount of overheating, in order to generate less heat. If the channel becomes
too hot for safe operation, the channel shall shut off, and the Thermal Indicator
for that channel shall illuminate brightly to alert the user that a state of thermal
stress or overload has caused the channel to shut down.
D. Rear-mounted controls shall include Channel Level Controls, High Pass Filter
Switches (one per channel), and a Mode Switch.
E. The recommended load impedance in Dual mode shall be 2/4/8/16 ohms, 70V,
and 100V With T-170V or TP-170V. The load Impedance in Bridge-Mono mode
shall be 4/8/16 ohms. The amplifier shall be safe when driving any kind of load,
including highly reactive ones.
F. The rear-mounted output connector shall be one four-pole touch-proof terminal
strip. Rear-mounted input connectors shall be 3-Pin balanced barrier connectors
on the standard PIP2-BBY module. This module shall include a “Y” Input Switch
which combines both input signals.
G. Front panel indicators shall include a yellow Bridge-Mode Indicator that
illuminates when the Mode Switch is set to the “Bridge” position (and flashes if
the Mode Switch is changed while the amplifier is powered up, indicating that the
amplifier must be powered off and on to reset the Mode), a green Ready
Indicator (one per channel) that illuminates when the channel is initialized And
ready to produce audio output, a green Signal Indicator (one per channel) that
illuminates To indicate the presence of input signals above –40 dBu, a red Clip
Indicator that illuminates when the THD of the channel‟s output signal rises to a
level typically considered as the onset of audible clipping (and illuminates during
Thermal Level Control or input overload), a red Thermal Indicator (one per
channel) that illuminates when a state of thermal stress or overload has caused
the channel to shut down (and Illuminates in all channels if the power supply
goes into thermal overload), a red Fault Indicator (one per channel) that flashes.
When a fault condition has occurred in the channel, a yellow Data Indicator that
flashes during Control data activity, and a blue Power Indicator that illuminates
when the amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available (and flashes
when the amplifier shuts off due to an under-/over-voltage condition on the AC
mains).
H. The power amplifier shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria.
Input sensitivity for rated output: 1.4 V. Rated output with both channels driven in
Dual mode with 0.1% THD (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 250 watts per channel into 2
ohms, 600 watts per channel into 4 ohms, 600 watts per channel into 8 ohms,
300 watts per channel into 16 ohms, 600 watts per channel (70V), and 600 watts
per channel (100V with T-170V or TP-170V). Rated output in Bridge-Mono mode
with both channels driven at 0.1% THD (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 500 watts into 4
ohms,1200 watts into 8 ohms; 1200 watts into 16 ohms, 1200 watts (100V with
T-170V or TP-170V), 1200 watts (140V), and 1200 Watts (200V with T-170V or
TP-170V). Frequency Response at 1 watt, 20 Hz to 20 kHz: ±0.25dB. Signal to
Noise Ratio below rated power (20 Hz to 20 kHz): better than 105 dB Aweighted. Total Harmonic Distortion at full rated power from 20 Hz to 20 kHz:
less than 0.1%. Damping Factor: greater than 3000 from 10 to 100 Hz. Crosstalk
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-115/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
(below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): greater than 80 dB. Common Mode
Rejection (20 Hz to 1 kHz): 50 dB. DC Output Offset: less than 2 mV. Input
Impedance (nominal): 10 kilohms balanced, 5 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum
Input Level (before input compression): + 20 dBu rms. Power Draw at Idle (120
VAC mains, all channels in 4/8 ohm mode): 24 watts (standby mode).
I.
The amplifier chassis shall be constructed of steel with a durable black finish and
shall be designed for continuously variable speed forced-air ventilation from the
front panel to the back panel. The dimensions of the amplifier shall allow for 19
inch (48.3cm) EIA standard (RS-310-B) rack mounting. The amplifier shall be 3.5
inches (8.9 cm) tall, and 14.25 inches (36.2 cm) deep behind the rack-mounting
surface.
Specification
A. Minimum Guaranteed Power: 25% more than number of Speakers watts per
Channel
Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) :
±0.25 dB.
Signal to Noise Ratio below rated power (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 105 dB A-weighted.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at full rated power, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz: < 0.1%
Damping Factor: 10 Hz to 100 Hz
:
> 3000.
Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz)
:
> 80 dB.
Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz) :
50 dB.
DC Output Offset
:
< ±2 mV.
Input Impedance (nominal)
:
10 kilohms balanced, 5
kilohms unbalanced
Maximum Input Level
:
+20 dBu before input
compression, +32 dBu
absolute maximum.
Load Impedance: Stereo
:
2/4/8/16 ohms, 70V,
Bridge Mono: 4/8/16
ohms, 140V.
Ceiling Speaker
A. The loud speaker shall be of in-ceiling design, consisting of a 165 mm (6.5 in)
low frequency transducer, a coaxially-mounted 19 mm (¾ in) high frequency
transducer, and frequency dividing network installed in a ported enclosure. The
low frequency voice coil shall be 25 mm (1 in) in diameter and the coil former
shall be of aluminum for maximum heat dissipation.
B. Performance specifications of a typical production unit shall be as follows:
Measured sensitivity (SPL at 1m [3.3 ft] with 4V input, averaged from 100 Hz to
10 kHz) shall be at least 89 dB-SPL. Usable frequency response shall extend
from 75 Hz to 20 kHz (10 dB below rated sensitivity in half-space) with no external
equalization. Rated power shall be at least 6 watts continuous pink noise power,
defined as conforming to international standard IEC268-5 (shaped pink noise with
peak-to-average ratio of 6 dB) for a period of 100 continuous hours. The high
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-116/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
frequency transducer shall be horn-loaded to more evenly cover a minimum 110°
polar conical coverage area.
C. The back shall be constructed of formed steel and the baffle of UL94V-0 fire rated
medium impact polystyrene. An enclosed terminal box shall be included proving
strain relief for use with either plenum-rated wire, ½ in (13 mm inside diameter)
conduit, or flexible conduit up to 22 mm (⅞ in) outside diameter. The external
wiring shall be accomplished via a removable lockable wiring connector with
screw-down terminals to provide both secure wire termination and pre wiring
capability before loudspeaker
IPOD Docking Station
A. Power supply
Power consumption
Maximum external dimensions
:
:
:
Weight
Terminal
:
:
AC adapter
Rated voltage
Rated current
:
:
:
DC 6V
1W (When iPod is disconnected)
104 (W) x 28.5 (H) x 76.5 (D) mm
(4-3/32" x 1-1/8" x 3-1/64")
240 g (7.8 oz)
Analog audio output terminals x 1,
S-Video output terminal x 1,
Control terminal x 1
(KSAFC0600150W1UV-1)
100 - 240 V. 50/60 Hz
0.3 A
Audio Server
A. The audio server must be is a hard disk based audio system with instant access
from its front panel, from a computer, or from third party control system. Music
can be selected whether by a track by title, album, artist, or genre. It must have
an internal hard drives up to 250GB.
Specification
Operating System
Ethernet
:
:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Embedded
10/100BaseT, static IP or DHCP/DNS
Storage Hard Drive
Network Attached Storage :
Supports In front Ready NASTM and
NAS devices running Windows®
Storage Server
Products tested include Dell TM Power Edge TM, and Iomega® Store Center TM
Pro Server*
Encoding
Formats
MP3 Bit Rates
AEB-872-10-REV. A
:
:
MP3, WMA, WAV (uncompressed)
128k - 320k, or variable
S-21-117/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Audio (Analog)
D-A Conversion
Frequency Response
S/N Ratio
Dynamic Range
THD
Channel Separation
:
:
:
:
:
:
Wolfson Delta-Sigma 24-bit
20Hz to 20kHz ±0.5dB typical
100dB at 1kHz A-weighted
>96dB
0.003% at 1kHz typical
110dB at 1kHz typical
IR IN
:
LAN
:
1) 3.5 mm TRS mini-phone jack, wired
IR control input
(1) 8-wire RJ45 with 2 LED indicators;
10/100BaseT Ethernet port;
Green LED indicates link status;
Yellow LED; indicates Ethernet activity
RGBHV OUT
Format
Resolution
Output Voltage
H and V Sync
Output Impedance
:
:
:
:
:
:
(1) DB15HD female, RGB display output;
RGBHV;
SVGA 800 x 600 pixels;
0.75 VP-P nominal;
5.0 VP-P nominal;
75 ohms (R/G/B), 100 ohms (H/V)
VIDEO OUT
Output Voltage
Output Impedance
:
:
:
(1) RCA female, composite video output;
1.0 VP-P nominal;
75 ohms
S-VIDEO OUT
Output Voltage
Output Impedance
:
:
:
(1) 4-pin mini DIN female, Y/C S-Video output;
1.0 VP-P nominal;
75 ohms
Connectors
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL OUT: (1) JIS F05 female (TOSLINK) optical fiber
connector; S/PDIF optical digital audio output
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT: (1) RCA female; S/PDIF coaxial digital audio output;
Maximum Output Level: 0.5 VP-P;
Output Impedance
:
75 ohms
ANALOG AUDIO OUT A – D :
Output Impedance
:
(4 or 8) RCA female providing unbalanced
stereo line-level audio Output Level: 2 VRMS;
600 ohms
Control System Processor
Summary of control system processor architectural specifications are as follows.
Minimum control system requirements:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-118/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
1. Control System shall utilize a Motorola Cold fire processor at no less that 257
MIPS.
2. Control System shall include [3] RS-232/422/485 Ports.
3. Control System shall include [8] IR/Serial Ports.
4. Control System shall include [8] Isolated Relay Ports
5. Control System shall include [8] I/O Ports.
6. Control System shall include [1] Cresnet Port.
7. Control Power Applications (i.e. e-Outlook, e-PowerPoint, etc.).
8. Control System shall include a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Port that supports all of
the following features:
a. TCP/IP Communications
b. DHCP and DNS Support
c. 802.11b and Bluetooth Compatibility
d. Native Email Client
e. Remote Diagnostics
f. Remote Program Loading and Administration
g. Built-In Web Server
h. FAT32 File System for easy data management
i. SSL security plug in
j. PDA Integration and Control, XPanel PDA - Pocket PC 2002
k. Web Tablet Integration and Control – Microsoft Tablet PC
l. Self Generating Executable GUI, XPanel EXE – Microsoft Family of OS
m. Self Generating ActiveX powered IE Integration and Control, XPanel IE
n. Self Generating Java powered Web Integration and Control
9. Control System Processor shall utilize a real time, event driven, multitasking,
multi-threaded operating system with a dual bus
10. High speed processor shall communicate directly with Ethernet, control ports and
proprietary control network utilizing high speed, parallel bus infrastructure.
11. Control processors that communicate via a serial bus shall not be accepted.
12. Control processor shall contain enough of memory.
13. Control System processor shall utilize a FAT32 file structure.
14. Support internal communications speed via two, independent communications
busses. First control bus speed shall be at least 40 mb/s, second control bus
speed shall be at least 300 mb/s.
15. Full API (Applications Interface) directly to control system via TCP/IP for
integration with Visual Basic, C++, Java, etc.
16. Applications. API support through included Creston ActiveX module and/or
Creston Dynamic Link Library (.DLL).
17. Patent pending Network Analyzer to continuously monitor the integrity of the
Cresset network for wiring faults, marginal
18. Communication performance, network errors – all information is viewable.
19. Support RS-485 token passing network with data communication for a minimum
distance of 5000 feet.
20. Allow proprietary network expansion via Ethernet or RS-232 ports, which can
allow for high-speed network acceleration.
21. Support a minimum of 253 proprietary network devices simultaneously.
22. Control system shall support object-oriented logic based programming language
and a C-like language programming language.
23. Both programming types are supported to run simultaneously and integral to
each other.
24. Control system manufacture shall supply Windows-based graphical
programming software for drag and drop object oriented
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-119/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
25. Programming for the control system operation.
26. Control system manufacture shall provide Windows-based graphical
programming software, which is self-documenting in that it
27. Generates a symbolic flow diagram printout from the system program.
28. The control system shall support a variety of wireless communication modes,
including one-way and two-way radio frequency and infrared transmission.
5.7” Color Touch Panel
A. Summary of touch panel architectural specifications are as follows.
Touch screen Display
Display Type
:
TFT Active matrix color LCD
Size
:
5.7 inch (14.48 cm) diagonal
Aspect Ratio
:
4:3 SVGA
Resolution
:
640 x 480 pixels
Brightness
:
350 nits (cd/m2)
Contrast: 400
:
1
Color Depth
:
18-bit, 256k colors
Illumination
:
Backlit fluorescent
Viewing Angle
:
±80° horizontal, +80°/-70° vertical
Touch screen
:
Resistive membrane.
Motorized Projection Screen
Motorized projection screens must be with a size of 147h x 264w (cm), Electrically
operated 220VAC. 3-wire motor mounted inside screen roller, 1.1 amp draw,
instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated, with internal thermal over load protector and
electric brake, with preset accessible limit switches. Roller to be 3" dia. metal,
mounted on rubber insulated supports. Viewing surface of GREENGUARD for
Children and Schools certified Matt white, fire retardant and mildew resistant.
Viewing surfaces shall qualify as low emitting and meet all of the requirements of the
GREENGUARD for Children and Schools and GREENGUARD certification program,
which are: emissions of total volatile organic compounds < 0.22 mg/m3,
formaldehyde < 0.0135 ppm, total aldehydes <0.043 ppm, individual volatile organic
compounds < 1/1000 TLV and < ½ chronic REL and total phthalates < 0.01 mg/m3.
Bottom of viewing surface attached to weighted dowel. Case of 22 ga. steel with flat
back design and scratch-resistant white polyester finish. Case formed from one
piece steel. Endcaps finished to match case, forming universal (wall or suspended)
hanging brackets. 3-position control switch to stop or reverse screen at any point.
Switch complete with cover plate. Optional white aluminium. Ceiling Opening Trim
Kit shall be available to trim opening when screen is to be recessed above the
ceiling. Entire unit certified by Underwriters‟ Laboratories, Inc. for the U.S. and
Canada.
Motorized Projector Scissor Lift
Motorized projector scissor lifts for projectors weighing up to 350lbs. Dove grey
baked powder coat finish. Projector bolts on too pirating pan, or mounts to pan with
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-120/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
mounting bracket. Electrically operated 240 VAC. UL recognized gear motor, with
metal Chain drive system, to be lifetime lubricated. Projector to be suspended from
2¾" x 20" x 20" x 11 ga. steel pan supported by steel scissor arms and operated by
two 1/8" aircraft cables with 2000 foot/pounds tensile strength per cable equipped
with 3 sets of stabilizing scissors, positioned on the left, right, and rear sides. Also
equipped with fail-safe inertial safety belt system and Cable Management System
with projector power cord. Factory set limit switches to automatically stop travel at
store, show, and service positions. Single Station Control, standard, consists of one
12V toggle switch to lower lift from “stored” to“show ” positions, and one 12V
momentary key switch to lower lift from “show” to “service” position. Optional LVC-III
for operation from “stored” to “show” positions only; required for use with Key
Operated Switch.
Optional Environmental Air Space Housing. Consists of suitable painted steel panels
for use in return air plenum situations.
Optional ceiling closure panel, finished in white baked textured powder coat, shall
descend smoothly with projector.
Wireless Presentation Gateway
The wireless presentation gateway must let the user to wirelessly connect notebook
or desktop PC to any projector or monitor. It should support resolutions up to
1024x768 for near DVD-quality full-motion video so they are displayed in crisp, clear
detail.
Fast animation and slide transitions must be ensured so that presentation never
misses a beat. It should be with 802.11B/G wireless connectivity to effortlessly takes
presentations anywhere. Presentation should be changed without connecting cables.
It should support any projector, LCD TV or any large screen display with a VGA or
DVI connector.
Wired Microphone
The microphone should be a unidirectional (cardioid) dynamic vocal microphone
designed for professional vocal use in sound reinforcement and studio recording.
With a highly effective, built-in, spherical filter minimizes wind and breath “pop” noise.
A cardioids pickup pattern isolates the main sound source while minimizing unwanted
background noise. Rugged construction, with shock mount system, and a steel mesh
grille that ensure that even with rough handling, it will perform consistently.
Specification
Type
:
Frequency Response :
Polar Pattern
:
Voltage)
AEB-872-10-REV. A
:
Dynamic (moving coil)
50 to 15,000 Hz
Unidirectional (cardioid), rotationally symmetrical about
microphone axis, Sensitivity (at 1,000 Hz Open Circuit
–54.5 dBV/Pa (1.85 mV) 1 Pa = 94 dB SPL
S-21-121/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Impedance
Polarity
:
:
150 ohms – 300 Ohms
Positive pressure on diaphragm produces positive
voltage on pin 2 with respect to pin3
Wireless Handheld Microphone
The dual 31 band graphic equalizer should have the following features and
specification.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Automatic frequency scanning
200 selectable UHF channels
True diversity operation
Advanced digital Tone Lock™ squelch
LCD information display
Balanced XLR and unbalanced 1/4" outputs
Step-through menus for setting preferences
Transmitter battery-life fuel gauge on receiver
Up to 16 simultaneous systems per frequency band for a total maximum of
32 simultaneous systems across two bands
INTERFACE WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. There shall be an interface between the background music system and fire alarm
system, to mute the background music zones which are corresponding to the
active fire alarm zones.
INTERFACE WITH HOME AUTOMATION SYSTEM
A. The contractor shall fully coordinate with the engineer, end user and client for
necessary integration of BGM system with home automation system.
B. The contractor shall coordinate with Home Automation System supplier for the
location and integration of wall control stations (channel select, volume control,
iPod Docking station) woth Home Automation System.
C. The Wall control stations shall be integrated in to the Home Automation System
Touch pads.
D. The contractor shall provide necessary conduits and provisions for the
interconnection of Home Automation with BGM.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-122/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Rough-in locations of component ( i.e. speakers ) and obtain Interior Designer
and Client approval of locations before final installations. Install devices in
accordance with system supplier‟s instructions.
B. Provide ceiling mounting speaker assemblies complete with back boxes and
grilles in location as shown on drawings.
C. Include for system manufacturer‟s authorized representative to perform final
equipment connection, system programming, testing and adjustments.
D. Mount specified sound equipment in rack and connect components with required
cabling. Speaker cable terminations shall be punched down onto labelled
connection blocks in terminal cabinet and neatly tie wrapped, secured and
identified. The racks shall be wired to dedicated AC circuits. Co-ordinate AC
power cable and wiring installation with trade responsible for respective work. AC
power distribution within rack shall be accomplished by means of wiremold or
approved equal plug strip. The AC circuits distribution shall be exclusively
switched and protected by the panelboard breakers serving rack. Ground
equipment racks in accordance with system manufacturer‟s authorized
supplier/installer instruction, and provide insulated ground wiring to each main
equipment rack of background music system. The ground conductors shall
extend to isolated ground bus of panelboard feeding respective system
equipment. The equipment racks shall be isolated from the floor by rubber
isolators and isolated from all connecting conduits.
E. Provide amplifiers, music source units and control unit in rack mount enclosures
in central equipment room. Connect complete to speaker circuits and control
circuits.
F. Install all system wiring in conduit in accordance with cerified " REVIEWED "
wiring schematic shop drawing. Ensure that all wiring is in accordance with the
system supplier's recommendations and is colour coded and properly identified
at terminals. Sound system wiring shall be twisted pair copper conductors, PVC
insulated with overall PVC jacket and minimum size No. 16 AWG. OR CAT 6A
Power and communication wiring shall be run in separate conduits from each
other. Run shielded cables continuously without splices. All shielded signal
cables shall have shields isolated from both the conduit system and any other
shielded cables. Speaker and DC control circuits are to be spliced only in
accessible junction boxes. Exact wiring types must be confirmed with the system
manufacturers. Low level audio signal wiring shall maintain a minimum 1 m
separation from power conductors. High level audio signals (100 Volt) shall
maintain a minimum 0.5 m separation from power conductors.
G. Do not splice wiring in conduit runs. Where required, make splices in proper
junction boxes utilizing terminal strips.
H. All audio circuits shall be balanced to ground.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-123/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
I.
SECTION 21
All conduits containing audio system wiring shall be permanently bonded to a
dedicated building ground. All electronic equipment shall exclusively receive its
technical ground via the isolated equipment ground conductor run to AC outlets.
Comply with manufacturer‟s ground instructions.
J. Confirm colour finishes of loudspeakers with the ID Consultant prior to ordering.
K. All work shall be performed in accordance to the manufacturer‟s instructions and
requirements.
L. The system shall be tested during the installation process so that any problems
can be detected and corrected as they occur. Evaluate the following:
1. Safe rigging practices including safety cables.
2. Safe grounding practices – each component is earth grounded through its
AC cord, rack rails or both, and not produce audible hum.
3. Hums resulting from ground currents.
4. Proper system polarity.
5. Susceptibility to radio frequency interference.
6. Susceptibility to electromagnetic interference.
7. Proper system gain structure.
8. Consistency and accuracy of coverage.
9. Adequate acoustic gain.
3.2 WARRANTY
A. Provide the services of a system engineer to assist the personnel provided by
the Employer during the installation and commissioning period.
B. Five (5) sets of instruction manuals shall be provided for the sound system. All
manuals shall be in the English language.
C. Obtain from the manufacturer of the equipment a warranty that all equipment
supplied will be free of defects in labour, materials and workmanship and will
perform satisfactorily in compliance with all pertinent specification for a period of
one (2) year after commissioning.
D. During the warranty period, the services of a factory representative qualified to
advise on the operation and maintenance of the equipment specified shall be
provided by the manufacturer.
3.3 SYSTEM CABLES
All cables should have color code conductors and to be as per manufacturer
recommendation.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-124/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
PART 4 PRODUCTS
4.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ATEIS
DENON
PROXIMA
SONY
POLKAUDIO
CRESTRON
MERLAUD
Or equal and approval
Note: For data cable and IT equipment should be the same brand of IT
Equipment approval
21.2.23 CENTRAL BATTERY / EMERGENCY PACK FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM:
The Emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed & installed
to meet the local fire department requirements & the respective EN & BS standards
and regulations applicable on the project. The product shall bear CE certification for
electromagnetic compatibility. The product shall have a binding agency agreement
with a local company in Qatar and the product shall have installation references in
Qatar and shall have installations in the Middle East for at least 5 years. Spares/
Engineering support shall be constantly available for the product both during
installation/ commissioning as well as operation period. Local Fire department
approval shall be available for the product.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions,
Illuminate the escape routes.
Indicate the escape route direction clearly
Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors.
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life saving
equipment on the premises are illuminated.
6. Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all
hazardous process
Each emergency supply panel shall be used for supply, automatic testing &
monitoring of maximum 20 Nos. Escape route, EXIT & Safety on each circuit. Panels
should be distributed on the building based on Security Zone or Typical Areas etc.,
to minimize wiring. Number of panels shall be as per the layout/riser drawings. The
system shall be fully addressable type with individual light monitoring facility.
1. Input Voltage
:
2. Output Mains
:
3. Output Emergency :
240V AC
240V AC
220V DC
Battery back up required for Duration of Three Hours under emergency operation,
with minimum of 75 -100% light output on connected fittings.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-125/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Mechanical Construction
The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP21 with
removable screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the
batteries. The electronics section shall have IP21 sheet steel enclosure with
transparent polycarbonate window. Substation panels shall be with IP54 degree of
protection and shall draw their battery supplies from the central battery panels.
The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable
entries from top via four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. All
incoming cables & looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fused terminals
as per ENVDE0100. All outgoing luminaries circuits shall be connected direct to
relevant components via plug-in type terminals 2.5 sq. mm.
ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
Changeover Module
The system shall be built up in a modular format with all modules being plug-in-type
encapsulated design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover
modules. Each module is capable of switching two separate circuits with maximum
load of 3 Amps or 20 Nos. light fixtures connected to it. Emergency & Exit lights will
be connected to each circuit, thereby allowing connection of luminaries of all
switching modes, namely Maintained, Non-maintained and Switched Maintained in
the same circuit. All the changeover modules will be plug-in type and are no load and
short circuit protected with independent fuses for mains and battery supply and will
have LED type status indication for operation & failure.
Battery
Each panel will have maintenance free sealed lead acid batteries with 10 years
service life at 250C and capable of supporting the connected load for 3 hours. The
central batteries shall be located in air conditioned room with maximum room
temperature of 250C. The room shall be air-conditioned using a re-circulation airconditioning system without any special battery room ventilation requirement. Where
the space required for the batteries does not permit the installation of same in
standard enclosure, the batteries shall be installed in a fire rated room, on purpose
built support stand / enclosure.
Charger
Charger module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, microprocessor controlled
module with temperature controlled voltage charging to IU characteristics. Automatic
boost charging facility shall be built in to the system depending on the required total
battery capacity. It shall have charging & supervising method via battery monitoring
at intervals of 5 minutes or less for failure indication of battery circuit as well as
battery charger. The charger shall be designed for a 90% recharge of a fully
discharged battery set within 20 hours.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-126/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Charger shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for battery circuit
monitoring. It shall be provided with LED indications for,
1. Operation
2. Charger On
3. Booster On
4. Mains Operation
5. Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100%
6. Charging Failure
7. Insulation fault
Charger shall have potential free indicator contacts for,
1. Charging failure
2. Fast charge
3. Insulation fault
Charger shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures. It shall include
plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains & battery accessible
via the front plate of the charger
Control Module
Each panel will have modular plug in type freely programmable control module with
4x20 character contrast controlled liquid crystal display, touch pad keys for
programming and monitoring of the panel & constant memory back up with two years
logbook facility. It should have separate buttons for Test, Function Test and Battery
duration test. Additionally three freely programmable buttons should be provided to
conduct functions as per user‟s priority. Each control module shall be programmable
as master / slave to access status of the other panels installed on site.
The control module should have the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Monitor & control all test cycles & functions
Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminaries
Display & program the status of each circuit
Conduct an Earth Leakage test on each circuit.
Luminaries‟ failure will be displayed with text location
Communicate and program the function of addressable electronic ballast on
every slave luminaries.
7. Programming for the potential free contacts for BMS operation.
8. Programming and status of the Sub circuit monitoring inputs and the
associated luminaries.
Control Module also displays battery voltage level, withdrawn battery current in test
or emergency modes, charge failures, interrupted battery charge circuit, luminaries
failure with address with text location, sub circuit or sub distribution board supply
failure with address & text location, function test, battery test, earth leakage failure
with respect to circuit. Both tests can be manually programmed. The control module
has three LED‟s for status indication of mains supply ON/OFF, luminaries or unit
failure & battery supply.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-127/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Failure recognition for each individual safety / EXIT light in conjunction with
proprietary electronic ballast including two wire monitoring module without additional
data line.
Programming of the control module will be possible through a smart card & all the
information including the logbook shall be stored on smart card, which is readable on
PC directly.
An electronically regulated monitoring loop output is included to monitor the mains
failure at distribution/sub-distribution board. Sub circuit monitoring shall be carried
out from the panel in such a way that emergency lights‟ pertaining to specific areas
where power has failed will only be energized.
Central monitoring shall be carried through an Open Protocol network. Each central
battery/ substation panel shall be fitted with a terminal to facilitate communication to
the BMS system / Central monitoring unit via an open protocol to provide the
complete panel status.
Automatic & Cyclic Function Monitoring & Logging Facility
An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanent cyclic
charger and battery monitor at intervals of five minutes or less with daily/weekly
function test of the complete load supplied from the battery, charger, wiring,
luminaries, registration and logging of tests and results. A manually operated test
feature shall also be provided in addition to the automatically operated testing
feature. The monitoring system and data transfer shall be carried out based on a
current multiplexed system in DC mode.
Central Monitoring Facility
When not centrally monitored through a BMS system, a separate central monitoring
computer shall be provided for the emergency lighting system. The central
monitoring shall be via a central group monitoring hardware & software, monitoring &
programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of an IBM compatible PC with
monitor, Pentium generation processor, keyboard, mouse and a printer. The unit
shall operate with latest visualization software to give detailed address & information
of all luminaries connected to system. The program shall be user friendly with
visually clear fault indication screens on the monitor.
The CG Vision should have the following features:
1. Monitor & control all test cycles & functions
2. Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminaries
3. Display the status of each circuit
4. Luminaire status & failure information will be displayed with text location
5. Log the events on the system in a separate window to facilitate easy access.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-128/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
Sub Circuit Monitoring/ Switching Interface
Exit lights shall remain in Maintained mode of operation. Dedicated luminaries used
for emergency operation shall remain in Non-Maintained mode of operation. Sub
circuit monitoring shall be carried out for Non-Maintained lights using 24V-monitoring
loop in the panel wired to phase monitoring relays in the relevant Lighting DB‟s, all
up to the approval of the Engineer. Where Mains lights in Switched Maintained mode
is used for Em. Operation, the switching shall be co-ordinated using fully
encapsulated switching interface modules such that the same switch is used for
switching Mains and E. Lights. A detailed schematic shall be presented for approval
of the Engineer.
EMERGENCY PACK
The emergency pack for lighting shall consist of individual power packs installed
within the light fittings, as shown on the tender drawings. The light fittings to be
provided with these power packs have been indicated with a symbol. These power
packs shall consist of converter/inverter with nickel-cadmium battery to provide 3
hours operation for one of the lamps in these fittings.
The design of the unit shall be such that it can be fitted easily into all types of fittings
including batten luminaries. The unit shall have the capability of sustaining high
temperature so that it can be accommodated into the fittings with high internal
temperature. However, if the internal temperature of the fitting exceeds 50 deg. C,
then the provision of mounting it in remote location shall be made. In case of remote
mounting, a purpose made remote box shall be provided.
Charger system shall have solid state constant current with full recharge time of 24
hours. The inverter shall be high frequency transistor oscillator, producing sine wave
output.
There shall be red light emitting diode type charge indicator and an internal control
circuit to prevent the battery from deep discharge. The circuitry shall have two live
supplies, one switched and one unswitched. Failure of unswitched supply shall
operate the change over circuit.
The system shall be suitable for operation on 240 V, 1 ph, 50 Hz., A.C system.
21.2.24 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
a. General
The contractor shall fully test and commission the whole of the electrical installation
in accordance with the KAHRAMAA & IEE regulations and the requirements of this
specification.
The testing activities shall be recorded in detail and the results submitted to the
Consultant. The contractor shall then demonstrate that the installations are properly
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-129/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
commissioned, that they operate in the correct manner and are capable of
functioning to accomplish the design intention as outlined herein.
b. Site Tests
Site testing of all systems and components comprising the works shall be carried out
in the presence and to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant after the
contractor has first satisfied himself that the installation is functioning properly.
The contractor shall provide all certified instruments, equipment, plant, labour and
materials necessary for conducting specified site tests and shall be responsible for
and prepared to demonstrate the accuracy of all the test instruments supplied by
him.
The contractor shall give the Consultant, notice in writing when any portion of the
electrical installation is complete. Should the Consultant or his representative not
attend within 7 days of receipt of such written notice, the contractor may proceed
with the test, however duplicate certified copies of the results obtained shall be
forwarded the Consultant.
All electrical installations, plant and equipment tests shall fully satisfy the
requirements of KAHRAMAA and those laid down in the IEE regulations.
The contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all safety devices
etc., as required by KAHRAMAA. Once the contractor has satisfied himself that the
installation complies with KAHRAMAA requirements, he shall arrange for
KAHRAMAA to conduct their own test prior to handing over. Observations shall be
made of the operation and performance of the installation and subsequent
readjustments shall be made as necessary.
Records of commissioning and testing shall be kept and when the contractor has
satisfied himself that the installation is functioning correctly, the results shall be
comprehensively reported in a bound copy to the Consultant.
c. Maintenance and Servicing
The contractor shall be held responsible and shall replace any defective part of all
and every part of the works for the period of the guarantee from the date of the
acceptance test carried out by the Consultant.
The contractor shall also be held liable for any cost of dismantling or erection and
making good of any works, which may have to be undertaken in order to replace
defective parts.
d. Electrical Tests
As a minimum the contractor shall carry out the tests that follow:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-130/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
1. All alarm, control and protective circuits shall be tested for correct operation.
2. All lighting circuits shall be energized and checked to ensure that they are all
operational.
3. All single pole switches shall be checked to ensure correct polarity and that
the live conductor has been connected. Neutrals must not pass through any
switch
4. All motors, plant and any electrical equipment connected with mechanical
services shall be checked to ensure that they run freely in the correct
direction of rotation and that they run without undue noise or vibration.
5. A test shall be made to verify the continuity of all conductors (including the
earth continuity conductor) of every ring circuit and all readings shall be
tabulated.
6. Insulation resistance tests shall be made before completing an installation or
major alteration to an existing installation if permanently connected to the
supply. For these tests, large installations may be divided into groups. A D.C
test voltage of not less than twice the normal voltage of the supply (R.M.S.
value of a A.C supply) shall be applied for the measurement of insulation
resistance provided that for tests on low voltage circuits, the test voltage
need not exceed 500 v. D.C. When measured with all fuse links in place, all
switches (including if practicable, the main switch) closed and except where
earthed concentric wiring is installed the insulation resistance for whole
installation shall not be less than 1 mega ohm. When measured between all
the conductors connected to any one pole or phase of the supply and in turn
all conductors connected to each other pole or phase of the supply, the
insulation resistance shall be not less than 1 mega ohm. Wherever
practicable, so that all parts of the wiring may be tested, all lamps shall be
removed and all current using apparatus shall be disconnected and all local
switches controlling lamps or apparatus shall be closed; where the removal of
lamps and/or the disconnection of current using apparatus is impracticable,
the local switches controlling such lamps and/or apparatus shall be open.
This test is not applicable to earthed concentric wiring system. Where
apparatus is disconnected for the tests, the insulation resistance between the
case or framework and all live parts of each item of fixed apparatus shall be
measured separately and shall comply with the requirements given in the
appropriate British Standard for the apparatus. If there is no appropriate
British Standard, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 0.5 mega
ohm.
7. A verification of polarity shall be made to ensure that all fuses and single pole
control devices are connected in the phase conductor only. The centre
contact of Edison type screw lamp holders is connected to the phase
conductor and outer metal threaded part is connected to neutral conductor.
Wiring to plugs and socket outlets should be such that they are connected
with phase conductor on right when inspected from front. A proprietary type
of polarity testing device shall be used for the tests. The complete installation
shall be tested to ensure that all main switch gear is connected to give the
correct phase rotation.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-131/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
8. The contractor or others responsible for the work shall test the effectiveness
of the earthing of each completed installation by means of an earth fault loop
impedance test. This test shall be carried out by using earth fault loop
impedance test instrument.
e. Commissioning
The contractor shall carry out the following:
1. Set all units and apparatus to work.
2. Adjust and set up all automatic controls, regulating devices, measure and
adjust any plant under his responsibility, duties and ratings and performance
of all components for all items installed separately and integrated into the
installation as a whole.
3. Record in detail each step and stage of commissioning and test results,
reporting the test stages until the tests are satisfactory.
4. The contractor shall carry out insulation, continuity, earth loop impedance,
switching and sequencing, direction of rotation and all other tests required
under the IEE regulations.
5. Should the test carried out fail to demonstrate that the plant and equipment is
correctly installed and / or functioning correctly, then the Consultant shall
decide whether such failure is due to negligence upon the contractor's part
(including in this context as defined all his sub-contractors and suppliers) in
which case, the contractor shall carry out all remedial works entirely at his
own expense.
6. After remedial works have been completed the Contractor shall again report
to the Consultant for further tests to be carried out. The Consultant's
decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory result shall be final.
7. The completed installation or parts thereof shall be subjected to acceptance
tests as instructed by KAHRAMAA or the Consultants before being
connected to the Supply. Tests shall be includes as follows:
a. Tests as prescribed in the KAHRAMAA regulations.
b. Tests in accordance with British Standards and Codes of Practice
contained therein.
c. Insulation resistance.
d. Earth continuity.
e. Continuity resistance of conductors and sheathing of each section and
the whole installation.
f. Full-load tests as required by the Consultant.
g. Current injection tests of all over-current devices and residual current
operated circuit breakers etc.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-132/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
These tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Consultant and the Contractor
shall give 7 days written notice of intentions to carry out any of the tests.
21.2.25 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee for a period of 400 days after the practical completion
of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any defects due
to defective material and bad workmanship and that any part found defective during
this period shall be replaced free of cost by the contractor.
If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to
do so by another agency at the contractor's entire risk and expense without prejudice
to any rights of the Client.
21.2.26 SPARES
1. General
a. Provide sufficient spare parts for all the electrical items included within the
scope of works. Submit to the Engineer a list of all spare parts to be required
for a further two years operation from the date of issue of the Maintenance
Certificate (b) spare parts required include but not necessarily limited to those
listed below, provided specified in the Project Documentation or where
quantities for each item or equipment is recommended by the manufacturer
(c) spare parts to be delivered to central stores.
2. Main Low Tension Boards
a. 2 % spare moulded case circuit breakers of all different frame sizes, but in
any case not less than 2 nos. circuit breaker of each size
b. 5 % spare indicating lamps for each indicating lamp in the switchgear
c. one set of tools required for switchgear maintenance
d. provide complete spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer for
different sizes of ACB.
3. Switchboards, Motor Control Centers and Distribution Boards
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5 % spare combination magnetic motor starters
5 % spare circuit breakers for each rating of each MCCB
5 % spare HRC fuses for each rating
5 % spare of load break switch (isolators) of each size
5 % spare of current operated ELCB of each size
4. Disconnecting Switches
a. 5 % spare switch of each size.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-133/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
5. Circuit Accessories
a. plug fuses - furnish ten percent (10%) of the number of each size and type of
fuses installed, but in any case not less than six fuses of each sizes
b. wall switches - provide five percent (5%) of the number of each size and type
of wall switch installed (c) socket outlets - provide five percent (5%) of the
number of each size and type installed (d) lamps - provide five percent (5%)
lamps of each size and type for indicating panels and pilot lights installed for
different systems.
6. Lighting Fixtures
a. for lighting fixtures provide the following spare parts:
1) 2 % of the total quantity of each type of lighting fixture. This quantity shall
not be less than one fixture of each type
2) Additional diffusers for 5 % of the total quantity of each type of lighting
fixture provided with acrylic, plastic or glass enclosures. Diffusers shall be
identical to those of the installed fixtures. This quantity shall not be less
than two diffusers of each type
3) 10 % spare lamps of each wattage of different type
4) 5 % of the total quantity of control gear (ballast) of each type and size but
in no case less than (6) ballast of each size and type.
7. Emergency Generating Sets
a. Complete itemised list of different spares to be included and priced by the
tenderers. For emergency generator, furnish by the generator supplier to
maintain it for two years.
8. The tenderer shall submit with his offer detail prices of the spare parts he is
required to provide under the Contract indicating the quantity and the unit rate of
each item.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-21-134/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
21.2.27
SECTION 21
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
ITEM
1.
Main Switchboards & SubMain Switchboards)
(800 A & above
MANUFACTURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
BIN GHALIB - (SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC)
FRANCE
QATAR SWITCHGEAR - (ABB)
SWEDEN
QATAR GERMAN SWITCHGEAR – (SIEMENS)
GERMANY
GULF SWITCHGEARS (EATON CUTLER-HAMMER) USA
2. Sub-Main Switchboards SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
(panel boards) &
ABB
Distribution Boards
SIEMENS
GE
EATON
EUROPE/UAE
EUROPE/EGYPT
EUROPE/CHINA/UAE
POLAND/QATAR
EUROPE
3. ACB & MCCB
MERLIN GERIN
MEM
ABB
BILL TALISMAN
FRANCE
UK
GERMANY
UK
4. Fuse Switches, Switch
Fuses & Isolators
EATON
ABB STROMBERG
SOCOMEC
KATKO
UK
SWEDEN
FRANCE
FINLAND
5. Cables
DOHA CABLES
DUCAB
QICC
OMAN CABLES
QATAR
UAE
QATAR
OMAN
6. Cable Trunking (steel)
LEGRAND (SALAMANDRE)
BARTON ENGINEERING
UNITECH
DECODUCT
UK
UK
KSA
UAE
7. Cable Tray (steel)
ICMS
DAVIS
BARTON ENGINEERING
QATAR
MALYSIA
UK
8. Conduit – Rigid & Flexible (steel) TYCO (ALLIED TUBE & CONDUIT)
BURN CONDUITS
BARTON ENGINEERING
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
EGA (MK)
USA
THAILAND
UK
FRANCE
KSA
9. Conduits (uPVC)
EGA (MK)
MARSHALL TUFFLEX
DECODUCT
10. Lighting & Power Accessories
MK ELECTRIC
UK
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC – CLIPSAL EU
LEGRAND
FRANCE
HAGER
UK
AEB-872-10-REV. A
UK
UK
UAE
S-21-135/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
11. Fire Detection & Alarm System
EST -EDWARD (GE)
TYCO (SIMPLEX)
HONEYWELL (NOTIFIER)
USA
USA
12. Standby Emergency
Diesel Generator
CUMMINS
F.G. WILSON
CATERPILLAR
UK
UK
USA
13. UPS systems
LIEBERT
EATON (MGE)
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
UK
FRANCE
FRANCE
14. Emergency Lighting.
TEKNOWARE
SWEDEN
THOMAS & BETTS (EXISTALITE) UK
CEAG
GERMANY
15. Background Music and Audio Visual
TOA
BOSE
PANASONIC
16. Structured Cabling
LEVITON
CLIPSAL
PANDUIT
17. Active & Passive Equipment
CISCO
LINKSYS
IBM
18. CCTV & Security
PELCO
GE SECURITY
PANASONIC
JAPAN
USA
JAPAN
19. Earthing & Lightning Protection FURSE – THOMAS & BETTS
UK
A.N. WALLIS
UK
ERICO
GERMANY
20. Flexible Fire Cable
21. Lighting Control System
22. Central Battery System
AEB-872-10-REV. A
FP 200
PIRELLI
FIRE CELL
DRAKA
TEKAP
MERTEN BY SCHNEIDER GERMANY
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (CLIPSAL) AUSTRALIA
I-LIGHT
UK
SIEMENS
GERMANY
BERKER BY HAGER
GERMANY
PHILIPS
HOLLAND
CEAG
VENTILUX
GERMANY
UK
S-21-136/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 21
TEKNOWARE
COOPER LIGHTING
RP-TECHNIK
EMERGI LITE
AEB-872-10-REV. A
FINLAND
UK
GERMANY
UK
S-21-137/137
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
SL NO.
TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
22.1.0
COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATIONS
22.1.01
General Conditions of Contract
22.1.02
Standard of Works
22.1.03
Data to be Supplied with Tender
22.1.04
Drawings, Submittals, Instructions, Manuals, Etc.
22.1.05
General Requirements
22.1.06
Test at Site
22.1.07
Practical Completion
22.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
22.2.01
Basis of Design
22.2.02
Equipment of Air Conditioning and Ventilation System
22.2.02.01
Air Cooled Packaged Liquid Chillers
22.2.02.02
Base Mounted Air Handling Units
22.2.02.03
Base Mounted Fresh Air Handling Unit and dehumidifier
22.2.02.04
Ceiling Mounted Ducted Fan Coil Units
22.2.02.05
Exposed Wall/Ceiling Mounted Decorative Fan Coil Units
22.2.02.06
Mini Split A/C Units
22.2.03
Chilled Water Pumping System
22.2.04
Water Treatment System
22.2.05
Pressurization Package
22.2.06
Exhaust Fans
22.2.07
Car Park Ventilation and Smoke Evacuation System
22.2.08
Vibration Isolators
22.2.09
Test Holes
22.2.11
Instruments and Gauges
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-1/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
22.2.12
Sheet Metal Work
22.2.13
Flexible Connections
22.2.14
Air Terminals
22.2.15
Dampers
22.2.16
Sound Attenuators
22.2.17
Acoustical Liner
22.2.18
Pipe work and Fittings
22.2.19
Insulation
22.2.20
Builders Work
22.2.21
Painting and Finishing
22.2.22
Identification/Colour Coding
22.2.23
Electrical Works and Control System
22.2.24
Testing and Commissioning
22.2.25
Warranty
22.2.26
Schedule of Technical Data
22.2.27
Commissioning Sheets
22.2.28
Schedules and Explanatory Notes
22.2.29
List of Approved Manufacturers
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-2/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
22.1.00
COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATIONS
22.1.01
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
The work under this section of the specification shall include the supply, delivery to
site, installation, testing and commissioning, setting to work and Maintenance of the
Air Conditioning, Ventilation and Exhaust System of Luxury Villa at Boroque Island
in the Pearl Qatar area.
Contractor shall guarantee for the efficient performance of various equipment which
shall not be less than the specified ratings when working under the operating
conditions for the respective items as given in the specifications.
It is mandatory to have performance testing under simulated conditions at the factory
of prospective suppliers of air cooled chillers prior to shipment. Anything, not
specifically mentioned, but necessary for the fulfilment of the guarantee and
requirements called for in the contract or necessary for the proper operation of the
installations is to be provided by the works contractor without any additional cost.
Any discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in or among contract
documents, or any doubts as to their meaning should be called to the attention of the
Consultants by the works contractor at the time of submitting his tender.
The works contractor shall guarantee holding a full set of spare-parts for all of the
equipment he intends to supply and install, for a minimum period of two years .
The contractor shall submit the lump sum price for the whole works with a breakdown
for individual headings as per the Bill of Quantities. No variation claims shall be
entertained.
The contractor shall not without the consent in writing of the Engineer assign or
sublet his contract or any substantial part thereof other than for raw materials or
minor details. Consent for subletting shall not relieve the contractor from any
obligation, duty or responsibility under the contract.
The contractor shall comply with all bye-laws and regulations of local and other
statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works and shall be responsible for
the payment of all fees and other charges and the giving and receiving of all
necessary notices.
Works shall be carried out in conformity with the specifications and in coordination
with the architectural / structural / other services requirements /constraints.
The contractor shall submit within 14 days from the date of acceptance of the tender,
detailed schedules showing the programme and order in which the contractor
proposes to carry out the works with dates and estimated completion time for various
parts of the work in the form of bar-chart based on “the critical path method”. Such
schedules shall be approved by the Consultant before starting of the work and shall
be binding on the contractor.
Routine tests for various items of equipment shall be performed at the contractor‟s
works, prior to shipment and test certificate furnished. Contractor shall inform and
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-3/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
permit Engineer to be present during these tests. Contractor shall bear all the
expenses thereof.
The contractor shall operate, test and adjust all air conditioning, ventilation and
exhaust system units, fans, motors, all air handling units provided in connection with
this installation and shall make all necessary adjustments and corrections thereof
including the adjustment of all regulations, dampers for the purpose of equalizing the
flow of air to and through all ducts to each and every outlet and inlet. testing,
balancing & commissioning shall be carried out through a 3rd party specialist .
Methods of statement, forms for T&B of different systems, testing equipments
/instruments calibration certificates along with the CVs and certificates of the
balancing team shall be submitted to engineer for approval. Specialist shall have a
valid accreditation by AABC (associated air balance council)or NEBB (national
environmental balancing bureau).
If the completed plant or any portion thereof before it is taken over or during the
guarantee and defects liability period be found defective or fails to fulfil the intent of
this specification, the contractor shall on receipt of notice from the Consultant
forthwith make the defective plant good. Should he fail to do so within a time
considered reasonable by the Consultant, the owner may reject and replace at the
risk and expense of the contractor the whole or any portion of the plant, which is
defective or fails to fulfil the requirements of the contract.
The contractor shall study the design carefully and be sure of the adequacy and
fulfilment of all design features to satisfy the requirement in the tendering stage and
inform the design engineer about any deficiency prior construction stage otherwise
any changes will taken cared off at no extra cost .
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications shall
mean:
Contractor
:
The tenderer whose tender has been accepted
by the Owner and shall include the tenderers‟
heirs, successors and assigns approved by the
owner.
Subcontractor
:
The firm or persons named in the contract for
any part of the work or any person to whom any
part of the work has been sublet with the
consent in writing of the Owner/Consultants and
shall include his heirs, successors and assigns
approved by the owner.
Specification
:
The specification annexed to or issued with
these Conditions of Contract
Contract
:
The agreement between the Contractor
and
owner to be entered into under these conditions
and shall include these conditions of contract,
specifications, schedules, correspondence,
letter of intent of the owner
and
any
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-4/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
subsequent
upon.
amendment
mutually
agreed
Site
:
The place or places at which the plant is to be
delivered or work to be done by the Contractor
and shall include where applicable the lands
and buildings upon or in which the works are to
be executed and shall also include the place or
places at which fabrication and other work will
be carried out by the contractor.
Plant, Equipment, Stores
:
The plant and materials to be provided and
Works and Work or Works to be done by the
contractor under the contract
Test on Completion
:
Tests as are prescribed by the specification or
as per International standards as applicable, to
be carried out before the plant is taken over by
the owner. In case, tests are not possible due to
climatic conditions at the time of completion,
the contractor shall be bound to carry out tests
at any suitable time subsequent to the date of
completion, but before the end of defects liability
period.
Inclusions in the list of approved manufacturers do not absolve the
supplier/contractor of his obligations to fulfil the detailed specifications in accordance
with contract documents.
Canvassing in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and the tenders submitted
by the contractor who resorts to canvassing is liable to be rejected.
22.1.02
STANDARD OF WORKS
Unless otherwise specified, all equipment is to comply with the relevant British and
American codes of practice as listed below. However, the QGEWC / QCS latest
regulations shall take prominence over all other regulations.
1. ASHRAE
:
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers, US
2. IHVE
:
The Institute of Heating and Ventilation Engineers, UK
3. ASME
:
American Society of Mechanical Engineers, USA
4. AMCA
:
Air Movement and Control Association, USA
5. ARI
:
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, USA
6. ASTM
:
American Society of Testing Materials, USA
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-5/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
7. AWS
:
American Welding Society, USA
8. DW 142
:
Specification for Sheet Metal Duct Work, UK
9. HI
:
Hydraulic Institute, USA
10. ANSI
:
American National Standards Institute, USA
11. CIBSE
:
Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers ,UK
12. AABC
:
American Air Balancing Council, USA
13. NEBB
:
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
14. NFPA
:
National Fire Protection Association
The workmen employed must be accustomed to the highest class of air-conditioning
installation.
22.1.03
DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH TENDER
a. Technical data of all equipments proposed, performance curves, selection data
sheet etc.as applicable.
b. Exclusions and deviations from specification.
c. Guarantee particulars.
d. List of spare parts required for 2 years maintenance.
e. Engineering catalogues.
22.1.04
DRAWINGS, SUBMITTALS, INSTRUCTION MANUALS, ETC.
General
All drawings and material submissions, other information and samples must be
supplied to the Consultant as laid in the specifications or as instructed by the
Consultant.
Shop Drawings to be Prepared by the Contractor
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, detailed coordinated shop
drawings for all equipment or distribution services described herein. Such drawings
shall indicate:
i.
All civil works, openings, bases, position of sleeves etc.
ii. The physical dimensions of the equipment.
iii. The sizes of foundation base wherever required.
iv. Location of centre bolts to base.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-6/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
v. Position of motors, controls, air duct connections etc.
vi. Detailed wiring diagram of all electrical systems.
vii. Piping isometric diagram
viii. Any other drawing found necessary or requested by the Consultant for coordination of works.
The work described on any shop drawing submitted shall be properly checked by the
Contractor for all clearance, field conditions, maintenance space and proper coordination. Equipment layout is to be detailed on drawings showing the exact
method of installing and clearly illustrating components to be used in making all
connections, this is to be highly coordinated with the manufacturer(s) of each
equipment(s).
All drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be submitted in the form of three sets
to the Consultant for approval, who in turn, after making his comments will return two
sets of the same to the Contractor for necessary revisions if any. Thereafter the
Contractor shall submit again for the Consultant's final approval.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate all grilles, equipment, pipes, light
fittings, false ceiling layout and other services to allow a completely symmetrical and
co-ordinated installation.
As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall supply to the Consultant a set of 'As-Built' drawings showing the
works 'As-Built' together with any other information necessary for operation and
maintenance. Four copies of each such drawing shall be supplied. In addition, two
sets of soft copy “CD “ for each drawing shall be handed over to the client.
MATERIAL SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES
Submittals
The Contractor shall furnish submittals in triplicate or as required for all the
equipments and materials to the Consultant.
On award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide a list of the items for which
they propose to furnish submittals. All submissions shall be made within 30 days of
the award of the contract or earlier as directed by the Consultant.
The following Information should at least be covered while furnishing the submittals:
i.
Reference number of the specification clause and BOQ.
ii.
A comparison of the salient points of the equipment/material offered vis-à-vis
specified like capacity, size, model no. Etc.
iii.
A confirmation that the item offered complies fully with the specifications,
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-7/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
drawings and the application in question. Deviations, if any, shall be clearly
spelt out and reasons shall be given for the changes proposed.
iv.
Complete technical literature for the particular item. In case only general
catalogues are available, the particular item/features offered should be stated
clearly on a separate sheet and also marked on the catalogues. Points not
applicable should be struck-off.
v.
Confirmation that equipment/material proposed can be housed within the space
available.
vi.
General requirement drawings.
vii.
Samples, wherever required by the Consultant.
The approval of a submittal shall not absolve the Contractor of their responsibility to
provide equipment's/materials/services conforming to the Specifications, Bill of
Quantities and the application in question. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and proper performance of a
complete functional system even though some items may not have been specifically
stated in the contract documents.
Waivers for deletion/deviation from the Specification, Tender drawings, Bill of
Quantities etc., must be requested by the Contractor in writing, stating categorically
the change compared to the contract (specified vis-à-vis proposed). The same shall
be considered 'waived' only if written specific approval is obtained from the
Consultant. The approval of a submittal, any implicit reference or verbal instructions
shall not be treated as a waiver. Waivers shall also be subject to reduction in cost
and/or time, conditional or unconditional as decided by the Consultant.
Material Status Report
A material status report shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted every two
weeks or earlier as directed by the Consultant. The report shall indicate the
following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Description of the material/equipment
Name of the manufacturer/supplier
Submittals Number
Date of submission of submittal
Date of approval of submittal
Order number/date and L.C reference, if any
Delivery period and expected arrival date on site
Remarks, if any
Samples of Materials
The Contractor shall submit at no extra cost or charge, samples of materials as
required by the Consultant for his approval. These samples shall be kept in a
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-8/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
suitable, clean, secured place/room till the end of the project.
Manuals
The Contractor shall make provision for the supply of three copies of the Instruction
Manuals before issue of Practical Completion Certificate. This manual shall include
the following items:
i.
Complete list of all items of equipment, controls and accessories as actually
supplied, including serial nos. & all nameplate details.
ii. A set of 'As-Built' drawings showing equipment layout, foundation details, ducting
layout and details, electrical wiring & drain piping. The drawings shall show plans
and sections necessary to show all required information correctly.
iii. A set of manufacturer's catalogues, wiring diagram and installation drawings
relevant only to the particular item of air conditioning and ventilation equipment
concerned. General catalogues will not be acceptable.
iv. Manufacturer's printed spare parts list for all items of equipment.
v. Operational description of the air conditioning plant including starting, stopping
and seasonal shutdown.
vi. Preventive maintenance routine at monthly, quarterly, half yearly and yearly
intervals and maintenance procedures for all plant and equipment.
The O & M instructions shall be in English.
Also a CD Rom containing all above information shall be submitted.
Storage of Materials and Equipments
All materials and equipment must be stored and protected properly so as to prevent
damage, corrosion, deterioration or dirt penetration.
All duct and pipe outlets must be adequately closed to prevent dust and dirt
penetration during the course of erection.
22.1.05
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Quality of Equipment and Materials
All equipment and materials shall be brand new, of a quality accepted by the
Consultant and presenting no dent, damage or breakage during transportation or
installation.
All metal parts shall be protected on site from rust, corrosion and dirt by properly
storing, packing and covering. All rusted parts of metal, subject to the Consultant's
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-9/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
approval, shall be cleaned of corrosion products and given two coats of anti-rust
paint before installation.
Instructions for Operation and Routine Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide written instructions in English language as to the
method of operation of system/equipment and the routine maintenance works.
Three copies of such instructions shall be handed over to the Consultant.
Paint, Tags and Nameplates
All steel works in connection with supports for ductwork etc., exposed to the
elements are to be painted with two coats of an approved rust preventive paint,
preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel paint of grey or as approved by
the Consultant.
All exposed metal surfaces of refrigeration and electrical apparatus, motors, guards,
un-insulated ductwork, ductwork brackets, hangers etc., must be painted with one
coat of under-coat and two coats of enamel paint finish to approved colour
22.1.06
TEST AT SITE
General
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, one month prior to the date of
commencement of the tests, three (3) copies of the complete test procedures to be
used. The Consultant shall approve the procedures, method of calculation etc.,
before any test is carried out. Three (3) copies of the test results shall be furnished
to the Consultant for his approval.
The Contractor shall supply skilled staff( specialist ) and all necessary instruments
and carryout tests of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or
a complete system if the Consultant requests such a test, for determining specified or
guaranteed data as given in the specifications or in the schedule of equipment filled
in by the Contractor.
( see 22.02.26 )
Any damage resulting from the test shall be repaired and/or damaged material
replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Consultant. In the event of any repair or
adjustment required to be made, other than the normal running adjustment, the tests
shall be void and shall be recommended after the adjustments or repairs have been
completed. The test shall not be void due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's
control. All testing, balancing and final adjustment shall be in accordance with the
provision of the applicable 'ASHRAE' standards
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-10/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Ductwork
All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity and the total of the air
quantities shall be within five percent of fan capacity. Volume control dampers and
splitter dampers shall be tested for proper operation.
Air balancing shall be carried out by AABC certified independent agency.
Equipment
All air handling and ventilating equipment, ductwork and air outlets shall be adjusted
and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities indicated at each inlet and outlet
on the drawings.
Where the equipment or systems depend upon controls for proper operation,
functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the
equipment or system during tests.
If air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of the
sheaves or the available horsepower, the Consultant shall be notified before
proceeding with the balancing of air distribution system.
Other tests as specified under the specific equipment headings are to be completed
to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
Electrical Equipment
All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and tested on site before application of
power as mentioned below:
i.
Wire and cable tests.
ii. Insulation resistance test, phase to phase and phase to earth on all circuits and
equipments using a 500-volt megger. The megger reading shall not be less than
one mega. ohm.
iii. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed half ohm.
iv. Phasing out and phase rotation tests.
v. Operating tests on all protective relays, starters, circuit breakers etc., to prove
their correct operation before energizing the main equipment.
Test on Completion
After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible
for running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed. The whole of the trial of
the plant shall take place during the appropriate seasons when design conditions are
met or approximated. The ventilation trial shall take place at any reasonable time
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-11/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
subject to the approval of the Consultant. The trial shall last for a period of thirty one
(31) consecutive days during which time the whole of the plant shall operate
continuously without readjustments or repair to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the
refrigerating and air conditioning equipment. The test data shall not deviate by more
than three percent from the guaranteed capacity data. Temperature readings shall
be taken for the entering and leaving air of each air-handling unit. Should any part of
the apparatus or system fail to meet with the specification requirements, it shall be
adjusted, repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Consultant. The complete
performance test shall then be repeated. The date of commencement of the above
said tests shall be subject to agreement with the Consultant.
As soon as all tests prescribed in this clause are carried out satisfactorily in the
opinion of the Consultant, a formal letter of completion shall be drawn up in three (3)
copies and signed by the Consultant.
During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment
and apparatus fulfil the requirements of the specifications and he shall operate all
fans, refrigeration and air-conditioning equipment for a sufficient time to adjust all
dampers, thermostats and controls and shall provide the Consultant with a complete
log and report indicating air quantities, fan speed etc.
Maintenance Test
During the last month of the 400 days Maintenance period, the Contractor shall
demonstrate to the Consultant that all equipment and systems are operating
according to the capacities and the manner set down in the specifications.
The Maintenance Certificate will not be issued to the Contractor until all plant &
equipment has been tested to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant.
22.1.07
PRACTICAL COMPLETION
The Contractor shall deliver the Operation and Maintenance Manuals along with 'As
built' drawings to the Client before practical completion. The completion certificate
will be issued by the Consultant after obtaining the “Operation and Maintenance
Manuals” and “As Built” Drawings
Recommendation for release or the release of practical completion certificate would
not absolve the contractor of his responsibility to provide an installation complete in
all respects and in satisfactory working order. If any item is discovered later, during
commissioning, maintenance period or at F.C.C stage to be short supplied or not in
working order, the contractor shall be liable to make good the same to the
satisfaction of the Consultant.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-12/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2
SECTION 22
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
22.2.01
BASIS OF DESIGN
Site Conditions
The broad design parameters for the air-conditioning and ventilation system shall be
as mentioned below:
Site location
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
:
:
:
:
Pearl Qatar area.
25.15 0N
51.34 0E
11 m above sea level
Outdoor Design Conditions
Summer
Winter
:
:
460 C DB / 30 0C WB
10 0 C DB / 90%
envisaged)
RH (Heating in winter is not
Typical conditions of coastal environment prevails with frequent sandstorms. The
atmosphere can be salt & sand laden with dust particles down to 2 microns.
Prevailing wind direction is NW to NNW
Indoor Design Conditions (Summer)
Bed room
Public area
:
:
180C DB / 50% RH
180C DB / 50% RH
Indoor dry bulb throttling range shall be + 1 C. Space Humidity may vary between
40% and 60%, but is expected to lie within the comfort zone as set by ASHRAE
standard.
HVAC System Noise Level in unoccupied Spaces
Bed rooms
Halls, corridors , lobbies
Service / support areas
NC 25
NC 35
NC 35
Other areas as per ASHREA standard
Note:
1. The contractor shall submit the noise level calculations for all A/C equipment
as per final workshop drawings lay out.
2. Sound level meter of ANSI type 1 or type 2 with octave band filters to be
employed for sound level measurements.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-13/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
3. Sound level shall be measured within 1m from the source in the unoccupied
space.
4. Measured sound levels shall be interpreted by plotting the values on the RC
curves
The above sound levels shall be achieved by the following (but not limited to)
methods:
1. Fabrication and installation of air distribution system to minimize flow
resistance and turbulence.
2. Selection of grilles and diffusers to limit the noise level specified limits .
analysis and selection shall be done by specialist and to the approval of the
engineer.
3. Selecting a fan that generates the lowest possible noise, but still meets the
required design conditions for which it is selected.
4. Fabricate duct connections at both the fan inlet and outlet for uniform and
straight air flow.
5. Selection of suitable sound attenuators for air handling unit supply air main
duct and return air main duct.
6. When possible, locate elbows and duct branch take offs at least four to five
duct diameters from each other to minimize flow generated noise.
7. Use turning vanes in larger 900 rectangular elbows and branch take offs.
Turning vanes provide a smoother transition in which the air can change
direction, thus reducing turbulence.
8. Place grilles, diffusers and registers in occupied spaces as far as possible
from elbows and branch take offs.
9. Minimize the use of volume control dampers near grilles, diffusers and
registers in acoustically critical situations.
10. Floor mounted AHU-s,fans etc. shall be mounted on suitable ant vibration
springs for isolating from the building structure. Ceiling mounted FCU-s shall
be hung from the ceiling using spring type anti vibration hangers having steel
frame and helical compression type springs with min.25 mm deflection.
11. AHU / FCU inlet and outlet shall have flexible connectors. Exhaust fan inlet
shall also have flexible connectors.
12. Acoustic liner with zero fibber migration shall be provided for ductwork of
ceiling mounted FCU up to a length of (4 - 5)meter from the face of the unit.
13. Air cooled Chillers shall be provided with cased spring type anti-vibration
mounts with min.25 mm deflection.
14. Chilled water pump sets shall be installed over inertia blocks made out of
reinforced concrete or concrete filled welded steel frame work. The inertia
blocks shall be mounted over cased spring mounts with min.25 mm
deflection.
15. Air cooled Chillers shall be supplied with compressors enclosed within
acoustical compartment.
16. Acoustic barrier to be installed around chillers area to eliminate noise
projected from the chillers to the surrounding area.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-14/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Project Specific Fire and Safety Philosophy
Smoke detectors shall be positioned in the return air ductwork of AHU-s. A fire
situation sensed by the smoke detectors shall shut off the relevant unit through the
fire annunciation panel.
Fire dampers having a minimum of 2 hours fire integrity shall be provided at the
following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All ductwork crossing firewalls.
Supply and return air ductwork at each fire zone crossing.
Ducts entering and leaving shafts.
Ducts through floors and not encased in fire shafts.
Ducts leaving and entering plant area
Suitable fire stop material shall be provided at all wall penetrations with fire damper
through which duct passes through.
For details of Fire strategy refer to the section under Fire alarm and Fire fighting
systems.
Rating for Continuous Service and Local Ambient Conditions
The outside air temperature may occasionally rise to 500C DB. All apparatus and
equipments shall be rated for continuous service, twenty four hours a day, year round
throughout its normal rated life except for necessary routine maintenance. The
contractor shall offer equipment which is capable of operating at the ambient
temperature of 500C DB without any failure.
Building Pressurization
All buildings shall be maintained at positive pressure .Toilets, Pantries, Laundries
and Kitchen shall be maintained at negative pressure.
Estimated Service Lives of Various HVAC System Components
Equipment / Item
Package Chillers
Base mounted pumps
Ductwork
Dampers
Roof mounted fans
Split Units
Air terminals (diffusers, grilles, register)
Molded insulation
Fan-coil units
Electric motors
Motor starters
AEB-872-10-REV. A
Median Years
20
20
30
15
20
12
30
20
20
18
17
S-22-15/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Valve actuators
10
Building Performance Mandates
HVAC design shall ensure the following building performance mandates:
1. Thermal performance
2. Indoor air quality
3. Acoustical performance (HVAC aspects only)
4. Fire safety related with HVAC system
5. Thermal performance shall include the air temperature, humidity, air speed, and
controls.
6. Indoor air quality shall be achieved in compliance with ASHRAE standard 622001 Ventilation for acceptable indoor air quality. Fresh air intake assembly
where provided, shall be complete with sand trap louver, 50 mm thick washable
filter and volume control damper to ensure adequate quality and quantity of fresh
air to the system. Where centralized fresh air systems are provided, the Fan shall
be complete with Sand trap louver, pre-filter, etc for proper level of filtration of the
outside air. Test method for air filters shall be as per ASHRAE Standard 52.1.
7. Acoustical performance (HVAC aspects only) shall be ensured by proper
engineering of the system as a whole.
8. Fire safety related with HVAC System shall be ensured as per the project
specific fire and safety philosophy mentioned elsewhere.
22.2.02
EQUIPMENT OF AIR-CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM
22.2.02.01
AIR COOLED PACKAGED LIQUID CHILLER
PART 1 — GENERAL
SCOPE
Supply, install, testing and commissioning of Microprocessor controlled, screw
compressor, air-cooled, liquid chillers of the scheduled capacities as shown and
indicated on the Drawings, including but not limited to:
1. Chillier package
2. Charge of refrigerant R134a and initial oil charge.
3. Electrical power and control connections
4. Chilled water connections
5. Factory start-up
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-16/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products shall be Designed, Tested, Rated and installed in compliance with
applicable sections of the following Standards and Codes:
1. ARI 550/590 - Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression
Cycle
2. ARI 370 – Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Equipment
3. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 – Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
4. ASHRAE 34 – Number Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants
5. ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings
6. ANSI/NFPA Standard 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).
7. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
8. ASTM A48 – Gray iron Castings
9. Manufactured in facility registered to ISO 9002
10. OSHA  Occupational Safety and Health Act.
11. Conform to Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) for construction of chillers and
provide U.L listing label.
B. Factory Test: Chiller shall be pressure-tested, evacuated and fully charged with
refrigerant and oil, and shall be factory operational run tested at actual design
conditions with water flowing through the vessel.
C. Chiller manufacturer shall have a factory trained and supported service
organization that is within a 50 mile radius of the site.
DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Unit shall be delivered to job site fully assembled and charged with refrigerant and
oil by the Manufacturer.
B. During shipment, provide protective covering over vulnerable components.
nozzles and open ends with plastic enclosures.
Fit
C. Protect the chiller and its accessories from the weather and dirt exposure during
shipment.
D. Unit shall be stored and handled per Manufacturer‟s instructions.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the General
Contractor and all affected Subcontractors to insure proper provisions for
installation of the furnished unit. This coordination shall include, but not limited to,
the following:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-17/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
1. Structural supports for the units.
2. Piping size and connection/header locations.
3. Electrical power requirements and wire/conduit and over current protection
sizes.
B. Description: Supply, Install and commission, as shown on the schedules and
plans, factory assembled, charged, and operational tested air cooled screw
compressor chiller(s) as specified herein. Chiller shall include, but is not limited to:
a complete system with multiple independent refrigerant circuits, semi-hermetic
screw compressors, shell and tube type evaporator, air-cooled condenser, R134a
refrigerant, lubrication system, interconnecting wiring, safety and operating controls
including capacity controller, control center, motor starting components, and
special features as specified herein or required for safe, automatic operation.
C. Operating Characteristics
Provide low ambient control and high ambient options as required to ensure unit is
capable of operation from 0F to 122F (-18C to 50C ) ambient.
D. Cabinet: Unit panels, structural elements, control boxes and heavy gauge
structural base shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Unit panels, control boxes
and structural base are finished with a baked on powder paint. All painted surfaces
shall be coated with baked on powder paint which shall be further made weather
proof.
COMPRESSORS AND MOTORS
A. Compressors: Shall be direct drive, semi hermetic, rotary screw type, including:
muffler, temperature actuated „off-cycle‟ heater, rain-tight terminal box, discharge
shut-off service valve, and precision machined cast iron housing. Design working
pressure of entire compressor, suction to discharge, shall be 450 PSIG (31 bar).
B. Motors: Refrigerant suction gas cooled accessible hermetic compressor motor, full
suction gas flow through 0.006” maximum mesh screen, with inherent internal
thermal overload protection and external current overload on all three phases.
C. Lubrication: External oil separators with no moving parts, 450 PSIG design
working pressure. Refrigerant system differential pressure shall provide oil flow
through service replaceable, 0.5 micron, full flow cartridge type oil filter internal to
compressor. Filter bypass, less restrictive media, or oil pump not acceptable.
D. Capacity Control: Compressors shall start at minimum load. Capacity control
range from 100% to 10% of chiller full load. Provide Microprocessor control to
command compressor capacity to balance compressor capacity with cooling load.
E. The oil injection shall be used in order to get high EER (Energy Efficiency Ratio)
also at high condensing pressure and low sound pressure levels in each load
condition.
F. Compressor acoustic enclosure shall be employed.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-18/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A. Each compressor shall be equipped with full charge
B. Each independent refrigerant circuit shall include: liquid line shutoff valve with
charging port, low side pressure relief device, removable core filter-drier, sight
glass with moisture indicator, and electronic expansion valve.
C. Chiller manufacturer shall provide independent circuit for each compressor to
provide maximum redundancy with minimum two circuit for each chiller.
HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Evaporator
1. The units shall be equipped with a Direct Expansion shell & tube evaporator
with copper tubes rolled into steel tube sheets. The evaporator shall be
single-pass on both the refrigerant and water sides for pure counter-flow heat
exchange and low refrigerant pressure drops. Or shell and tube flooded type .
The evaporator shall have independent refrigerant circuit,
for each
compressor .
2. Constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with applicable sections of
ASME pressure vessel code for minimum 235 PSIG (16 bar) refrigerant side
design working pressure and 150psig (10 bar) water side design working
pressure.
3. Shell covered with ¾” (19mm), flexible, closed-cell insulation, thermal
conductivity of 0.26 ([BTU/HR-Ft2-F]/in.) maximum. Water nozzles with
grooves for mechanical couplings and insulated by Contractor after pipe
installation. The shell insulation shall be cladding by 0.5 mm Alumium sheet
thick to cover and protect the insulation from external damage and weather
conditions this cladding can be supplied in the factory or in the site
4. Provide vent and drain fittings, and thermostatically controlled heaters to protect
to -20F (-29C) ambient in off-cycle.
B. Air Cooled Condenser
1. Coils: Internally enhanced, seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded
into aluminium alloy fins with full height collars. The aluminium fins shall be
protected by epoxy coated to improve the coil performance against the weather
conditions.
Sub cooling coil an integral part of condenser. Design working pressure shall
be 450 PSIG (31 bar).
2. Low Sound Fans: Shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct drive,
corrosion resistant Aluminium blades, providing vertical air discharge from
extended orifices. Guards of heavy gauge, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) coated or
galvanized steel.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-19/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
3. Fan Motors: High efficiency, direct drive, 3 phases, insulation class “F”, current
protected, Totally Enclosed Air-Over (TEAO), with double sealed, permanently
lubricated ball bearings.
The unit shall be equipped with head pressure control for condenser fan cycling
in event of mildambient condition
POWER AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Power/Control Panel
1. NEMA (IP65), powder painted steel cabinets with hinged, latched, and gasket
sealed outer doors
equipped with wind struts for safer servicing.
Provide main power connections(s), compressor starters and fan motor
contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring.
2. Panel shall include control display access door.
B. Multi Point Power
Provide multi point power connection to chiller, shall be 3 phase of scheduled
voltage.
C. Control Transformer: Power panel shall be supplied with a factory mounted and
wired control transformer that will supply all unit control voltage from the main unit
power supply. Transformer shall utilize scheduled line voltage on the primary side
and provide 240V/1 on secondary.
D Motor Starters: Motor current at start shall not exceed the rated load amps (RLA),
providing no electrical inrush. Across the line, Wye-delta,
F. Power Factor
1. Provide equipment with power factor correction capacitors as required to
maintain a power factor of 95% at all load conditions.
2. The installing contractor is responsible for additional cost to furnish and install
power factor correction capacitors if they are not factory mounted and wired.
G. Exposed compressor and fan motor power wiring shall be routed through liquid
tight conduit.
CONTROLS
A. General
1. Provide automatic control of chiller operation including compressor start/stop
and load/unload anti-recycle timers, condenser fans, chilled water pump by
water flow switch , evaporator heater, unit alarm contacts and run signal
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-20/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
contacts.
2. Chiller shall automatically reset to normal chiller operation after power failure.
3. Unit operating software shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Field
programmed set points shall be retained in lithium battery backed real time
clock (RTC) memory for minimum 5 years.
4. Alarm contacts shall be provided to remote alert for any unit or system safety
fault.
B. Display and Keypad
1. Provide standard liquid crystal display as per manufacture standard that is both
viewable in direct sunlight and has LED backlighting for night time viewing.
Provide one keypad and display panel per chiller.
2. Display and keypad shall be accessible through display access door without
opening main control/electrical cabinet doors.
3. Display shall provide a minimum of unit set points, status, electrical data,
temperature data, pressures, safety lockouts and diagnostics without the use of
a coded display.
4. Descriptions in English, numeric data in English (or Metric) units.
5. Sealed keypad shall include unit On/Off switch.
C. Programmable Set points (within Manufacturer limits): display language; leaving
chilled liquid temperature: set point, control range; local or remote control; units of
measure; compressor lead/lag; and maximum chilled water set point reset
temperature range.
C. Predictive Control Points: Unit controls shall avoid safety shutdown when operating
outside design conditions by optimizing the chiller controls and cooling load output
to stay online and avoid safety limits being reached.
E. System Safeties: Shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto-reset
shut down; manual reset required after the third trip . Includes: high discharge
pressure or temperature, low suction pressure, high/low motor current, high motor
temperature, high pressure switch, high/low differential oil pressure, high oil
temperature, low suction superheat, critical sensor malfunction, low or high current,
phase loss/single phase power, overload of motor windings, and low voltage.
F. Unit Safeties: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut down if:
high or low ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature, under voltage, and flow
switch operation. Contractor shall provide flow switch and wiring per chiller
manufacturer requirements.
G. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for automatic
chiller operation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide field control wiring necessary
to interface sensors to the chiller control system as per manufacture standard.
That the display and the system safeties data mention above is for guidance. The
standard microprocessor panel supplied by the chiller manufacture will be
acceptable as minimum requirement
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-21/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Power/Supply Connections
Terminal Block Power Connection: Power connections shall be made to a Terminal
Block with factory provided interconnecting wiring to chiller components.
Vibration Isolation
Vibration isolators will be supplied for field mounting Isolators will be level adjusting
spring type with 2” deflection
PART 3 — EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. General: Rig and Install in full accordance with Manufacturer‟s requirements,
Project drawings, and Contract documents.
B. Location: Locate chiller as indicated on drawings, including cleaning and service
maintenance clearance per Manufacturer instructions. Adjust and level chiller on
support structure.
C. Components: Installing Contractor shall provide and install all auxiliary devices and
accessories for fully operational chiller.
D. Electrical: Coordinate electrical requirements and connections for all power feeds
with Electrical Contractor
E. Controls: Coordinate all control requirements and connections with Controls
Contractor.
F. Finish: Installing Contractor shall paint damaged and abraded factory finish with
touch-up paint matching factory finish.
NOISE LEVEL
The contractor shall include in his pricing all necessary provisions to reduce the noise
level from the chillers in order to obtain a quiet environment, the requirement of which
shall be as stipulated by this specs and the satisfaction of the Engineer.
22.2.02.02
BASE MOUNTEDAIR HANDLING UNIT
General
The Base mounted AHU shall be modular in construction and shall have sections
and capacity as per the schedule. The Sizes and connections of the units shall be
selected to fit into the spaces available. Manufacturers of the AHU shall have ISO
9001 certification.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-22/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
AHUs shall be provided with sound attenuator at main inlet and main outlet to get
low noise level in the space .
Casing
The unit casing shall be of double skinned panels.
Casing shall be assembled with self supporting modular panels with an integrated
aluminium frames sections around each panel from all sides.
Sheet metal thickness shall be 1.0 mm. for the inner skin and 1.0 mm. for the outer
skin and made from zinc coated steel sheets. Outside of the outer skin shall be
plastic coated to a thickness of 0.2 mm. for additional protection. Inside and outside
of the panel wall shall be completely smooth. Overall heat transmittance shall not
exceed k = 0.59 w/m2k.
All casing panels shall be insulated by fibre glass layer/cfc free polyurethane foam
insulation of 50 mm. thickness.
The base frame of the unit shall be made from hot dipped galvanized U-profile.
Service doors shall be provided with special gaskets and locking device. Access
doors 400 mm. and larger shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and
internal opening. Sealant between panels shall be an anti fungicide sealant material.
The construction should serve thermal protection, reducing machine noise, absorbing
vibration and avoiding air leakage.
Modular sizes of panel should be easily assemble and reassemble.
The construction and material used should be environment friendly, clean and safe.
External surface for panel, frames and roof are painted with highly durable heat
hardened polyester based powder paint with 50 microns film thickness.
The paint shall conform to ASTM D-2201 and ASTM D-2092 for gloss, adhesion,
impact resistance, withstand up to 1000 hours salt spray resistance test, exceeding
500 hours ASTM B117.
Thermal Transmittance, U-value tested at 1.37 W/m2K conformed to Eurovent EN
1886 Class T3 Thermal Bridging Factor kb 0.61 conformed to Eurovent EN 1886
Class TB2 .
Fasteners are zinc coated comply with 400 hours salt spray resistance test ASTM
B117.
AHU manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the
exterior of the panels.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-23/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Fan Section
Fan shall be double inlet double width aerofoil backward/forward curved centrifugal
type. The blades shall be made of galvanized steel. Centrifugal fans shall be
statically and dynamically balanced at the factory as complete fan assembly. (fan
wheel, shaft motor, drive and belts).
Fans and shaft shall operate well below their critical speeds. If any out of balance is
apparent on the site, the consultant reserves the right to request new factory supplied
units to be provided until satisfactory balance is demonstrated.
Fan bearing shall be lubricated type with extended Lube lines to terminate outside
the fan section. The bearing shall be selected for life of 100,000 hours of operation.
Fan drive shall be rated at 120% of the maximum motor power of the units and shall
be fitted with adjustable belt tension arrangement.
The air handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan,
motor and drive assembly on spring isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected
to the air handling unit casing through film protected material (fibre glass based
manufacturing) connection to prevent vibration transfer.
Motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on a common galvanized steel base frame
with an easily adjustable motor slide rail. Motors shall be totally enclosed, foot
mounted, fan cooled IP54 with class F insulation.
The fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 10 m/s.
Coil Section
Coils shall be manufactured by the air handling unit supplier. Cooling coils shall be of
cartridge type mounted on Aluminium slide rails for easy resolvability. The number of
fins shall be max. 12FPI to optimize performance requirements. Coil casing shall be
1.0 mm thick galvanized steel with drain holes on the bottom channels to ensure
condensate drainage. Coil tubes shall be heavy gauge copper mechanically
expanded into aluminium plate fins complete with copper headers at pipes inlet and
outlet . All joints shall be silver brazed. Coils shall be designed to utilize the full
available unit cross section area and mounted on slide rail to allow for easy removal
when required. Coils shall be proof tested at 26 bar (375 psig) and leak tested at 17
bar (250 psig). Coil performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
Drain pans shall be stainless steel either integrated in the insulated base or placed
under the coil within the coil section, drain pans shall be sloped and shall have drain
connection to the service side.
The face velocity on coil shall be not exceeding 500 fpm .
Air Mixing Section
Mixing box with Dampers shall be construction from heavy gauge galvanized steel for
sturdy and rigid structure. Nylon or bronze bushing, metal side linkages enable
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-24/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
damper blades to operate within low torque.
Dampers blades shall be with a single skin laminar type, made from galvanized steel,
operate in parallel or oppose blades position.
Shafts are with 12 mm diameter; seated on non-corrosive bronzed or nylon bushing
for less resistance, free maintenance and lowest torque.
Extended shaft length is provided for provision to electrical motor actuator to regulate
dampers blades opening and closing.
Frames are made from galvanized steel, reinforced and flanged at both ends to
facilitate external ductwork or sand trap louvers connection.
Metal linkage made from steel pushrods is installed for dampers with top-rear
position to allow damper to inter connected at open and closed position.
Damper blades quadrant shall be assembled to guide blades opening and closing
position.
Hinged type access door is assemble at Mixing Box Section.
Access Sections and Doors
Access doors shall be provided for Filter, coils, mixing box and fans sections and
where necessary required sections.
Fan Section access door panel shall be with hinge type with handle and lock - access
door panel equipped with hard nylon hinges, nylon handle and metal lock. EPDM
rubber sealed at door perimeter. Internal handle installed for safety release.
Filter Section
All air handling unit shall be supplied with the following filters to cover all air intake
AHU‟S area:
1. 50 mm. thick aluminium frame permanent washable filter made of many
layer of goffered metal mesh ( aluminium ) flat filter having average filtration
efficiency 70%, recommended filter replacement Δp = 200pa , filter class B
acc. EN 1886 .
2. 25 mm thick aluminium frame bag filter with .bags installed and made of
synthetic fibre fabric according to EN 1886, Class B with average filtration
efficiency 95%, max. temperature 80C and max air velocity
4m/s.The
recommended filter replacement Δp = 150 pa .
The impingement principle causes lint, grease and dust to become trapped on
hundreds of adhesive coated baffle surfaces without the danger of clogging or
pressure losses.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-25/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Accessories
The following accessories and sections are to be included in base mounted AHU‟S
1. Inspection window and bulkhead lights (fully wired from factory) to be provided for
the prefilter and supply fan section.
2. Separate inclined manometer for the pre-filter.
3. All valves (isolating, balance), piping connection, automatic air vent, flexible
connection, gauges, strainer, thermometer
22.2.02.03 BASE MOUNTED TREATED FRESH AIR HANDLING UNIT AND DEHUMIDIFIER
General
The Base mounted AHU shall be modular in construction and shall have sections
and capacity as per the schedule. The Sizes and connections of the units shall be
selected to fit into the spaces available.
AHU‟S shall be provided with sound attenuator at main inlet and main outlet to get
low noise level in the space.
Casing
The unit casing shall be of double skinned panels weather proof complete.
Casing shall be assembled with self supporting modular panels with an integrated
base frame made of zinc coated steel and section along upper sides of units.
Sheet metal thickness shall be 1.0 mm. for the inner skin and 1.0 mm. for the outer
skin and made from zinc coated steel sheets. Outside of the outer skin shall be
plastic coated to a thickness of 0.2 mm. for additional protection. Inside and outside
of the panel wall shall be completely smooth. Overall heat transmittance shall not
exceed k = 0.59 w/m2k.
All casing panels shall be insulated by fibre glass layer/cfc free polyurethane foam
insulation of 50 mm. thickness.
The base frame of the unit shall be made from hot dipped galvanized U-profile.
Service doors shall be provided with special gaskets and locking device. Access
doors 400 mm. and larger shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and
internal opening. Sealant between panels shall be an anti fungicide sealant material.
The construction should serve thermal protection, reducing machine noise, absorbing
vibration and avoiding air leakage.
Modular sizes of panel should be easily assemble and reassemble.
The construction and material used should be environment friendly, clean and safe.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-26/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
External surface for panel, frames and roof are painted with highly durable heat
hardened polyester based powder paint with 50 microns film thickness.
The paint shall conform to ASTM D-2201 and ASTM D-2092 for gloss, adhesion,
impact resistance, withstand up to 1000 hours salt spray resistance test, exceeding
500 hours ASTM B117.
Thermal Transmittance, U-value tested at 1.37 W/m2K conformed to Eurovent EN
1886 Class T3 Thermal Bridging Factor kb 0.61 conformed to Eurovent EN 1886
Class TB2 .
Fasteners are zinc coated comply with 400 hours salt spray resistance test ASTM
B117.
AHU manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the
exterior of the panels.
Fans Sections
Fan shall be double inlet double width aerofoil backward /forward curved centrifugal
type. The blades shall be made of galvanized steel. Centrifugal fans shall be
statically and dynamically balanced at the factory as complete fan assembly. (Fan
wheel, shaft motor, drive and belts).
Fans and shaft shall operate well below their critical speeds. If any out of balance is
apparent on the site, the consultant reserves the right to request new factory supplied
units to be provided until satisfactory balance is demonstrated.
Fan bearing shall be lubricated type with extended Lube lines to terminate outside
the fan section. The bearing shall be selected for life of 100,000 hours of operation.
Fan drive shall be rated at 120% of the maximum motor power of the units and shall
be fitted with adjustable belt tension arrangement.
The air handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan,
motor and drive assembly on spring isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected
to the air handling unit casing through film protected material (fibre glass based
manufacturing) to prevent vibration transfer.
Motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on a common galvanized steel base frame
with an easily adjustable motor slide rail. Motors shall be totally enclosed, foot
mounted, fan cooled IP54 with class F insulation.
The fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 10 m/s.
Coil Section
Coils shall be manufactured by the air handling unit supplier. Cooling coils shall be of
cartridge type mounted on Aluminium slide rails for easy resolvability. The number of
fins shall be max 12FPI to optimize performance requirements. Coil casing shall be
1.0 mm thick galvanized steel with drain holes on the bottom channels to ensure
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-27/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
condensate drainage. Coil tubes shall be heavy gauge copper mechanically
expanded into aluminium plate fins complete with copper headers at pipes inlet and
outlet. All joints shall be silver brazed. Coils shall be designed to utilize the full
available unit cross section area and mounted on slide rail to allow for easy removal
when required. Coils shall be proof tested at 26 bar (375 psig) and leak tested at 17
bar (250 psig). Coil performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
Drain pans shall be stainless steel either integrated in the insulated base or placed
under the coil within the coil section; drain pans shall be sloped and shall have drain
connection to the service side.
The face velocity on coil shall be not exceeding 500 fpm.
Air Mixing Section
Mixing box with Dampers shall be construction from heavy gauge galvanized steel for
sturdy and rigid structure. Nylon or bronze bushing, metal side linkages enable
damper blades to operate within low torque.
Dampers blades shall be with a single skin laminar type, made from galvanized steel,
operate in parallel or oppose blades position.
Shafts are with 12 mm diameter; seated on non-corrosive bronzed or nylon bushing
for less resistance, free maintenance and lowest torque.
Extended shaft length is provided for provision to electrical motor actuator to regulate
dampers blades opening and closing.
Frames are made from galvanized steel, reinforced and flanged at both ends to
facilitate external ductwork or sand trap louvers connection.
Metal linkage made from steel pushrods is installed for dampers with top-rear
position to allow damper to inter connected at open and closed position.
Damper blades quadrant shall be assembled to guide blades opening and closing
position.
Hinged type access door is assemble at Mixing Box Section.
Access Sections and Doors
Access doors shall be provided for Filter, coils, mixing box and fans sections and
where necessary required sections.
Fan Section access door panel shall be with hinge type with handle and lock - access
door panel equipped with hard nylon hinges, nylon handle and metal lock. EPDM
rubber sealed at door perimeter. Internal handle installed for safety release.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-28/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Heat Pipe Section (de-humidifier)
The Air handling units shall be equipped with dehumidifier Heat Pipes, to pre-cool the
fresh air and re-heat the supply air in a wrap around configuration around the main
cooling coil. The pre-cool section shall be located immediately before the cooling coil
and the re-heat section immediately after. Both the sections shall be integral to the
equipment cabinet and shall be installed at the AHU factory.
The interconnecting piping between the heat pipe sections shall have necessary
slope to claim the refrigerant back through gravity and it shall be located at the
opposite side from chilled water / DX connections and enclosed within a rigid frame.
The Heat Pipe shall be constructed of Copper tubes with continuous plate type fins,
carried within rigid framework. The tubes shall be of solid drawn Copper, shall
provide enhanced heat transfer and permanently expanded into the fin collars to form
a rigid continuous contact under all operating conditions. Wall thickness shall be a
minimum of 0.35 mm. The tube pattern shall be staggered equilateral design, and the
number of rows shall be selected to provide the required performance.
The fin surface shall be of Aluminium of thickness 0.15 mm and shall be designed to
produce maximum heat transfer efficiency for heat pipe applications. Fin density
shall be as specified to provide the required performance.
The tube endplates, side plates and other associated framework elements shall be in
1.6 mm thick Galvanized sheet steel.
The Heat pipe shall be individually pre-charged with Heat Transfer fluid ( R-134 A) ,
hermetically sealed and tested. The heat transfer fluid shall be classified as safety
group A1 in BSR / ASHRAE Std. 15-1989 R.
The Heat Pipe unit shall provide maximum possible pre-cool and re-heat capacity as
can be achieved and the same shall be guaranteed.
The number of rows and fins spacing shall be selected at the design ambient
conditions to achieve the most optimum performance of heat pipe throughout the
year.
Performance shall be verifiable to ENV 1216 and shall be evaluated and certified by
independent authority.
Installation: The dimension of AHU shall have provision for inclusion of the
horseshoe unit interconnecting pipe work section around the cooling coil and there
shall be no air bypass within the cabinet, with proper sealing to make good
installation.
FILTER SECTION
All fresh air fans of handling unit shall be supplied with the following filters to cover
all air intake AHU‟S area:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-29/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Filter Arrangement for Fresh Air Side
1. 50 mm. thick aluminium frame permanent washable filter made of many layer of
goffered metal mesh ( aluminium ) flat filter having average filtration efficiency
70%, recommended filter replacement Δp = 200pa , filter class B acc. EN 1886 .
2. 25 mm thick aluminium frame bag filter with bags installed and made of synthetic
fibre fabric according to EN 1886, CLASSB with average filtration efficiency 93%,
max. temperature 80C and air velocity
4m/s .The recommended filter
replacement Δp = 150 pa .
Note
All fresh air make up units shall be provided with sand trap louver of aluminium to
cover all fresh air intake area (factory assembled sand trap is recommended) .
Accessories
The following accessories and sections are to be included in base mounted AHU‟S
1.
Inspection window and bulkhead lights (fully wired from factory) to be provided
for the prefilter and supply fan section.
2. Separate inclined manometer for the pre-filter
3. All valves (isolating, balance), piping connection, automatic air vent, flexible
connection, gauges strainer, thermometer
22.2.02.04
CEILING MOUNTED DUCTED FAN COIL UNITS
General
The fan coil (ceiling suspended) shall be of size suitable for installation in the space
provided and have capacity as indicated in the equipment schedule. The unit shall
comply with the following specifications:-
Description
The fan coil unit shall be completely factory built and assembled and shall be
installed at high level as indicated on drawings.
The Unit shall be complete with double skin factory manufactured casing to enclose
the entire coil, fan, motor and filter Sections:1) The FCU‟S casing shall be 18 g. pre painted galvanized sheet steel (1.2 mm.)
solid sheet.
2) Outer casing to be in filled with 25 mm. Polyurethane foam thick thermal
insulation with thermal conductivity not less than 0.037 w/m0k .
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-30/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
3) 22 g (0.8 mm.) galvanized sheet steel inner panel.
Low noise twin fans shall be forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal
type, statically and dynamically balanced and mounted on a steel shaft. Fans shall
have permanently lubricated, self aligning ball bearings. Fan wheel and housing are
to be of galvanized steel.
The motor shall be of the totally enclosed type for protection against dust and
external particles suitable for operation on 240V, single phase, 50Hz, A.C. supply.
The motor shall be fitted with life lubricated bearings having three speed and
complete with thermal overload protection. All units shall be provided with OFF-HIMED-LOW fan speed switch (remote) and air vent.
The cooling coils shall be staggered tube type constructed of seamless copper tubes
expanded into aluminium fins and shall be factory tested at 225psig air pressure. The
coils shall be suitable for the duty requirements as specified in the schedule and shall
be minimum 3 rows deep. The coil face velocity shall not exceed 500 fpm. The
cooling coils shall be completely drainable type.
Drain pan is constructed of stainless steel with thickness 1mm. Drain pan size is
able to cover the entire length and width of the coil including all headers ends. Drain
pan is coated with thermal insulation Polyester powder and its outer wall is lined with
3mm heat insulating PE foam. Condensate drain connector is made of galvanized
steel.
The drain pan shall be suitable extended to cover the valve package and any fitting
The back side of the panel shall have a filter frame with bottom filter access. The filter
shall be washable type made of many layer of goffered metal mesh (aluminium)
having at least 25mm aluminium thick frame take in consideration manufacturer
recommendation .
The unit shall be provided with the packaged valve unit as per detailed drawings
including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Isolating gate valves at return and supply lines
2-way motorized control valve
Flexible connection at supply and return line
Balancing valve complete with measurement water flow tool
Bypass line with valve
Pressure and temperature knobs outlets
Automatic air vents
Strainer
22.2.02.05 EXPOSED WALL /CEILING MOUNTED DECORATIVE FAN COIL UNITS
General
Chilled water fan coil (exposed decorative type ceiling suspended) shall be of
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-31/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
suitable size and have capacity as indicated in the equipment schedule. The unit
shall comply with the following specifications:
Description
The fan coil unit shall be completely factory built and assembled and shall be
installed at high level as indicated on drawings. The shall have galvanized painted
skin of engineering approval with curved face grill and as following:1. The unite casing of 18 g. pre painted galvanized sheet steel (1.2 mm.) solid
sheet.
2. The fan shall be Low noise forward curved, double width, double inlet,
centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced and mounted on a steel
shaft. Fans shall have permanently lubricated, self aligning ball bearings. Fan
wheel and housing are to be of galvanized steel.
3. The fan motor shall be of the totally enclosed type for protection against dust
and external particles suitable for operation on 240V, single phase, 50Hz, A.C.
supply. The motor shall be fitted with life lubricated bearings having three speed
and complete with thermal overload protection. All units shall be provided with
OFF-HI-MED-LOW fan speed switch (remote) and air vent.
4. The cooling coils shall be staggered tube type constructed of seamless copper
tubes expanded into aluminium fins and shall be factory tested at 225psig air
pressure. The coils shall be suitable for the duty requirements as specified in the
schedule and shall be minimum 3 rows deep. The coil face velocity shall not
exceed 500 fpm. The cooling coils shall be completely drainable type.
5. The drain pan shall be fabricated of stainless steel insulated with closed cell
insulation and sealed with mastic for maximum protection against corrosion and
sweating.
6. The back side/bottom of the panel shall have a filter frame with bottom filter
access. The filter shall be washable type made of many layer of goffered metal
mesh ( aluminium ) having at least 25mm aluminium thick frame take in
consideration manufacturer recommendation .
7. The unit shall be provided with valves and accessories on chilled water pipes
outside the cabinets as per detailed drawings including the following :a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
Isolating gate valves at return and supply lines
2-way motorized control valve
Flexible connection at supply and return line
Balancing valve complete with measurement water flow tool
Pressure and temperature knobs outlets
Strainer
S-22-32/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2.02.06
SECTION 22
MINI SPLIT A/C UNIT
General
The plant required shall consist of air-cooled split type air-conditioning unit of mini
split category as applicable
The unit shall be composed of an indoor unit
application with (R407c/R410a)
and an air-cooled outdoor unit for
1. The unit offered in the tender shall be by a reputed manufacturer who is
represented locally and can provide an efficient maintenance and spare part
service
2. The casing for the inside unit shall be the same as mentioned above or of rigid
plastic as supplied by the manufacturer
3. The fan shall be of the forward curved centrifugal type and be made of aluminium
reinforced glass fibre
4. The air filters shall be of nylon fibre glass, fibre material or as supplied by the
manufacturer standard
5. The filter shall be easily removable for cleaning.
6. The inside unit fan and condenser fan motors shall factory lubricated bearings of
the sealed for life type
7. The motor winding and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to
avoid problems with condensation
8. The compressor in the outside unit shall be the hermetically sealed pattern
complete with resilient mountings
9. The condenser and evaporator coils shall be formed of copper primary tubes with
aluminium fins. The fins shall be mechanically bonded to the tubes. Aluminium
coils shall be guaranteed for five years
10. The unit shall have control giving three running speeds and an off position
11. The outlet grille shall be fully adjustable to enable the direction of airflow to be set
to the desired direction Where the units are floor mounted the supply grilles shall
be on the top of the unit
12. The units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s
recommendations to unit location, refrigerant piping, power and condensate piping
13. Where the units are of the concealed type the Contractor shall ensure adequate
access is provided for the removal of a complete unit.
14. The condensate pipe work shall be run to the nearest drain
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-33/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
15. The units shall meet the specified duties for cooling capacities
16. The controls shall include the following:
Thermal overload cut-out and any other as manufacture standard
17. The outdoor unit shall be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperature of
50°C
18. The sound level shall not exceed 50dBA at low speed and 55dBA at high speed
when measured at 1 m distance in a room with normal occupancy and furnishing
The safety devices for the compressors shall be as per the manufacturer‟s
recommendations
22.2.03
CHILLED WATER PUMPING SYSTEM
1. General
Contractor shall furnish and install pumps with capacities as shown on plans. Pumps
shall be horizontal / vertical split case/ end suction , single stage, single / double inlet
type, designed with a foot mounted volute to allow servicing of the impeller and
bearing assembly without disturbing piping connections. Pumps shall meet types,
sizes, capacities, and characteristics as scheduled on the Equipment Schedule.
Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron with integrally cast pedestal support feet.
The impeller shall be cast bronze enclosed type / stainless steel, dynamically
balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking cap screw.
The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the pump shaft by an internally flushed
mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous
operation at 225 degrees F. A replaceable bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover
the wetted area under the seal.
Pump shall be rated for minimum of 175 psi working pressure. Volute shall have
gauge tapings at the suction and discharge nozzles and vent and drain tapings at the
top and bottom.
Base plate shall be of structural steel or fabricated steel channel with fully enclosed
sides and ends, and securely welded cross members. Grouting area shall be fully
opened. A flexible type coupler, capable of absorbing tensional vibration, shall be
employed between the pump and motor. Coupler shall be shielded by a coupler
guard securely fastened to the base.
Motor shall meet NEMA or IEC specifications and shall be of the size, voltage and
enclosure called for on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall
be realigned by contractor after installation.
Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be
thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high-grade machinery
enamel prior to shipment.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-34/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Contractor‟s submittals shall include the following:
1. System summary sheet
2. Sequence of operation
3. Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances location and size of
each field connection.
4. Power and control wiring diagrams
5. System profile analysis including variable speed pump curve and system
curve. The analysis shall also include pump, motor and VFD efficiencies, job
specific load profile, staging points, horsepower and kilowatt/hour
consumption.
6. Pump data sheets
Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals not be accepted.
2. Quality Assurance
A. The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer. An
assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and
construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility for the complete pumping package.
Unit responsibility shall be defined as responsibility for interface and successful
operation all system components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in the design and
construction of variable speed pumping systems.
C. The manufacturer shall make All functions of the variable speed pump control
system at the factory prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors
connected to VFD output and it shall test inputs, outputs and program execution
specific to this application.
D. The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards
Organization per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at the
time of submittal.
E Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as a manufacturer of
packaged pumping systems.
F. Contractor shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged
pumping systems. If no deviations are noted, the supplier or contract shall be
bound by these specifications
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-35/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
1. Primary Chilled Water Pumps
Vertical / horizontal split case constant speed pumping system of maximum rotational
speed 1450 rpm shall be employed for this project of following specifications:
A. General Description
Contractor shall furnish and install new double suction Vertical /Horizontal split case
pumps for chilled water systems as indicated on the drawings. Pumps shall meet
types, sizes, capacities, and characteristics as scheduled on the Equipment
Schedule.
B. Double Suction Vertical /Horizontal Split Case Pump (Base Mounted)
1. The pumps shall be long coupled, base mounted, single stage, double
suction, horizontally split case design, in cast iron bronze fitted construction
specifically designed and guaranteed for quiet operation. Suitable standard
operations at 225° F and 175 psig working pressure. The pump bearings and
mechanical seal internals shall be capable of being services without removing
the rotating assembly or disturbing the piping or electrical motor connections.
2. A bearing housing shall supply support for a pair of heavy-duty regreaseable
ball bearings. An inboard single row bearing will absorb thermal expansive
forces while an outboard double row bearing will be clamped in place to
absorb both radial and thrust loads and keep the rotating element in proper
axial alignment. Bearings shall be replaceable without disturbing the system
piping and shall be regreaseable without removal of the bearings from the
bearing housing.
3. The impeller shaft shall be a solid 416 high strength stainless steel shaft.
4. Pump shall be equipped with a pair of internally self-flushing mechanical seal
assemblies in direct contact with the pump shaft. Seal assemblies shall be a
type 21 design having a brass housing, Buna bellows and seat gasket,
stainless steel spring, and be of a carbon-ceramic design with the carbon face
rotating against a stationary ceramic face.
5. Impeller shall be of the enclosed double suction type made of bronze, both
hydraulically and dynamically balanced to ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5-1994, section
1.4.6.1.3.1, figure 1.106, balance grade G6.3 keyed to the shaft and fixed in
the axial position.
6. A centre flexible type coupling, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, shall
be employed between the pump and motor. On variable speed applications
the coupler sleeve should be of the flexible All-Metal type to maximize
performance life.
7. The coupling shall be shielded by a suitable coupling guard, securely
fastened to the base plate.
8. Pump volute shall be of cast iron (rated for 175psig Max WP) axially split
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-36/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
design with flanges (175 psig drilled for 125# ANSI companion flanges) and
mounting feet integral cast into the bottom half of the casing. Suction and
discharge flanges shall be on a common centreline in both the horizontal and
vertical planes, and the volute shall include Bronze Casing Wear Rings,
priming port, gauge ports at nozzles, and vent and drain ports. The upper half
casing shall be capable of being removed without disturbing piping
connections or electrical motor connections.
9. Motors shall meet scheduled horsepower, speed, voltage, and enclosure
design. Pump and motors shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned
after installation by the manufacturer‟s representative. Motors shall be nonoverloading at any point on the pump curve and shall meet NEMA or IEC
specifications and conform to the standards outlined in EPACT 92 or EFF2 as
minimum.
10. Base plate shall be of channel steel with sufficient rigidity to support pump
and motor. The minimum base plate stiffness shall conform to ANSI/HI 1.3.41997 for Horizontal Base Plate Design standards.
11. Base shall be capable of being field grouting.
12. Pump rotation shall be right hand or left hand as viewed from the pump end.
13. Pump manufacturer shall be ISO-9001 certified.
14. The seismic capability of the pump shall allow it to withstand a horizontal load
of 0.5g, excluding piping and/or fasteners used to anchor the pump to
mounting pads or to the floor, without adversely affecting pump operation.
2. Secondary Chilled Water Pumps
Base mounted Vertical / horizontal split case pumps in this buildings of maximum
rotational speed 1450 rpm complete with variable speed drive
A. General Description
Contractor shall furnish and install new double suction Vertical /Horizontal split case
pumps for chilled water systems as indicated on the drawings. Pumps shall meet
types, sizes, capacities, and characteristics as scheduled on the Equipment
Schedule.
B. Double Suction Vertical /Horizontal Split Case Pump (Base Mounted)
1. The pumps shall be long coupled, base mounted, single stage, double suction,
horizontally split case design, in cast iron bronze fitted construction specifically
designed and guaranteed for quiet operation. Suitable standard operations at
225° F and 175 psig working pressure. The pump bearings and mechanical seal
internals shall be capable of being services without removing the rotating
assembly or disturbing the piping or electrical motor connections.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-37/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
2. A bearing housing shall supply support for a pair of heavy-duty regreaseable ball
bearings. An inboard single row bearing will absorb thermal expansive forces
while an outboard double row bearing will be clamped in place to absorb both
radial and thrust loads and keep the rotating element in proper axial alignment.
Bearings shall be replaceable without disturbing the system piping and shall be
regreaseable without removal of the bearings from the bearing housing.
3. The impeller shaft shall be a solid 416 stainless steel shaft.
4. Pump shall be equipped with a pair of internally self-flushing mechanical seal
assemblies in direct contact with the pump shaft. Seal assemblies shall be a type
21 design having a brass housing, Buna bellows and seat gasket, stainless steel
spring, and be of a carbon-ceramic design with the carbon face rotating against a
stationary ceramic face.
5. Impeller shall be of the enclosed double suction type made of bronze, both
hydraulically and dynamically balanced to ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5-1994, section
1.4.6.1.3.1, figure 1.106, balance grade G6.3 keyed to the shaft and fixed in the
axial position.
6. A centre flexible type coupling, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, shall be
employed between the pump and motor. On variable speed applications the
coupler sleeve should be of the flexible All-Metal type to maximize performance
life.
7. The coupling shall be shielded by a suitable coupling guard, securely fastened to
the base plate.
8. Pump volute shall be of cast iron (rated for 175psig Max WP) axially split design
with flanges (175 psig drilled for 125# ANSI companion flanges) and mounting
feet integral cast into the bottom half of the casing. Suction and discharge flanges
shall be on a common centreline in both the horizontal and vertical planes, and
the volute shall include Bronze Casing Wear Rings, priming port, gauge ports at
nozzles, and vent and drain ports. The upper half casing shall be capable of
being removed without disturbing piping connections or electrical motor
connections.
9. Motors shall meet scheduled horsepower, speed, voltage, and enclosure design.
Pump and motors shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned after installation
by the manufacturer‟s representative. Motors shall be non-overloading at any
point on the pump curve and shall meet NEMA or IEC specifications and conform
to the standards outlined in EPACT 92 or EFF2 as minimum.
10. Base plate shall be of channel steel with sufficient rigidity to support pump and
motor. The minimum base plate stiffness shall conform to ANSI/HI 1.3.4-1997 for
Horizontal Base Plate Design standards.
11. Base shall be capable of being field grouting.
12. Pump rotation shall be right hand or left hand as viewed from the pump end.
13. Pump manufacturer shall be ISO-9001 certified.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-38/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
14. The seismic capability of the pump shall allow it to withstand a horizontal load of
0.5g, excluding piping and/or fasteners used to anchor the pump to mounting
pads or to the floor, without adversely affecting pump operation.
The contractor is expected to check head pressure losses. Head requirement in
conjunction water side equipment selected by him and calculation to submitted for
engineer approval
2.1
Variable Frequency Drive
Individual variable frequency drive with individual manual bypass ( star delta ) shall
be provided for each secondary pump.
1. The variable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type;
microprocessor controlled design, and shall be capable of operating in
voltage ranges of 380 to 460V AC, three-phase, at frequencies of 48 to 63
Hz.
2. The VFD, including all factory-installed options, shall have UL approval.
3. VFD shall be mounted within an enclosure protected to IP54 as minimum,
ventilated for installation as a floor-mounted unit. Drive shall be equipped with an
input disconnect switch, and fuses to protect against ground faults.
4. A manual bypass option shall be available to enable the operator to select normal
or manual bypass of the drive. The bypass includes two contactors. One
contactor is the bypass contactor that connects the motor directly to the incoming
power line in the event that the drive is out of service. The other is the drive
output contactor that disconnects the drive from the motor when the motor is
operating in the bypass mode. The drive output contactor and the bypass
contactor are electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent "back feeding."
5. VFD shall utilize a full wave rectifier to convert three-phase AC to a fixed DC
voltage. Power factor shall remain above 0.98 regardless of speed or load. VFDs
employing power factor correction capacitors shall not be acceptable.
6. Insulated gate bipolar transistors shall be used in the inverter section to convert
fixed DC voltage to a three-phase, adjustable frequency, AC output.
7. The output switching frequency shall be selectable at 4 or 8 kHz.
8. An internal line reactor (3% impedance) shall be provided to lower harmonic
distortion of the power line and to increase the fundamental power factor.
9. The VFD shall be suitable for elevations to 1000m above sea level without
derating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 40
degrees C. VFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95% noncondensing humidity.
10. The VFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-39/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
via an alphanumeric display:
a. Output Frequency
b. Output Voltage
c. Motor Current
d. Kilowatts per hour
e. Fault identification with text
f. RPM
11. All VFDs and controllers shall be furnished by the pump vendor for unit
responsibility for successful system operation.
2.2
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Furnish field mounted differential pressure transmitter(s)-3 sets as required for
measuring differential pressure and transmitting an isolated linear 4 to 20 mA dc
output for use in a standard two-wire 24 V dc system. The unit shall be accurate to
+/- 0.25% of full span and shall have an adjustable span limit applicable for the
system pressure, and shall withstand over ranges upto a static pressure of 2000 psi
with negligible change in output. It shall have a corrosion resistant steel body with
¼‟‟ NPT process connections. Unit shall be protected against radio frequency
interference and shall have a watertight (NEMA type 4) electrical enclosure with 1/2 “
NPT conduit connection.
Contractor shall also include for the supply and installation of interlinking cable
between differential pressure transmitter and pump controller.
2.3
Pump Logic Controller
The pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of
Underwriter‟s laboratory, Inc (UL). The controller shall meet Part 15 of FCC
regulations pertaining to Class A computing devices. The controller shall be
specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications.
The variable speed pump controller shall function to a proven program that
safeguards against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
Motor Overload
Pump Flow Surges
Hunting
End of Curve Protection: The pump logic controller through a factory preprogrammed algorithm shall be capable of protecting the pumps from hydraulic
damage due to operation beyond their published end-of-curve. This feature requires
an optional flow meter for activation.
The pump logic controller shall be capable of staging and destaging pumps based on
an efficiency optimisation program to provide the lowest kw draw .This optimisation
program requires an optional flow meter, kw meter and system differential pressure
sensor for activation.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-40/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting discrete analog inputs from
zone sensor/transmitters. Ana log input resolution shall be 12 bit minimum, and the
controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every 100 milli seconds.
Use of a multiplexer for multiple sensor inputs is not acceptable.
All
sensors/transmitter inputs shall be individually wired to the pump logic controller for
continuous scan and comparison function. All analog inputs shall be provided with
current limit circuitry to provide short circuit protection and safeguard against
incorrect wiring of sensors.
The pump logic controller will select analog input signal that deviates the greatest
amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command
feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting.
The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional integral derivative
control function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be useradjustable over an infinite range. The scan and compare rate that selects the
command set point and process variable signal shall be continuous and automatically
set for optimum performance. Each sensor shall be scanned at least once every 100
milli seconds.
The pump controller shall be capable of controlling pumps in parallel.
The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be displayed in
plain English. The following features shall be provided:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Multi-fault memory and recall
On-screen help functions
Soft-touch membrane keypad switches
LED pilot lights and switches.
The variable speed pumping system shall be provided with a user-friendly operator
interface complete with membrane switches and numeric keypad. Display shall be
no less than four lines with each line capable of displaying up to twenty characters.
The human interface panel shall display the following values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Flow in GPM (requires optional flow meter)
Pump On/Off status
Pump % Speed
Individual Alarm Conditions
Troubleshooting Diagnostics
User-adjustable parameters such as alternation, PID,set points etc.
A data-logging feature shall be provided as a function of the pump logic controller.
The Alarm log shall include last 20 alarms with date/time stamp. The pump data log
shall display individual pump run timers and pump cycle counters. A system data log
will indicate operation mode, system cycles and panel power cycles, each with
date/time stamp. A signal log shall be provided to display the maximum and
minimum values with date/time stamps for each process variable and flow, when
optional flow meter is provided. The signal log shall also be capable of displaying the
cumulative value of kilowatt-hours for each pump and of system minimum and
maximum flow along with individual counter reset capability.
The logic controller shall incorporate a Flash Memory for saving and reloading
customized settings. These field determined values shall be permanently retained in
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-41/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Flash memory for automatic reloading of the site specific setup values in the event of
data corruption due to external disturbances. The Controller shall also employ a
sensor setup copy feature.
The pump controller shall be capable of communicating with the Building Automation
System (BAS) by both hard-wired and serial communications. The following
communication features shall be provided to BAS in „hardwired‟ FORM VIA 4-20 ma
analogue signals and digital outputs.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Remote system start/stop (dry contact supplied by BAS)
Failure of any system component ( relay output from pump controller)
Process variable ( 4-20 ma analogue output supplied by pump controller )
VFD speed ( 0-10 VDC analogue output supplied by pump controller)
Optional: Pump On/Off status ( relay output supplied by pump controller)
The following communication features shall be provided to the Building Automation
System via an RS 485 port (optional hardware required) utilizing BACnet class ll
MSTPTM protocol:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
22.2.04
All sensor process variables
Individual zone set points
Individual pump failure
Individual pump On/Off status
Individual VFD On/Off status
VFD speed
Individual VFD failure
Individual sensor failure
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
The specification in this section is prepared for use by water treatment contractor
(Professional treatment company not others) for closed water circuits.
Deviations from this specification are not allowed without prior approval from the
engineer and the manufacturer of the different concerned equipments.
The contractor shall take in consideration the following:
a. All chemical products supplied to the client must be manufactured by
ISO9002 or ISO 14001 registered companies.
b. All chemical products must be in containers sealed by the manufacturer.
c. Chemical programmes must be submitted to the client for approval before
acceptance.
2. PRE-TREATMENT CLEANING
The pre-treatment procedure consisted of the following stage:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-42/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
2.1 Flushing
Prior to start-up of the treatment program, the system shall be flushed with plain
water in order to remove welding slag, grit, sand etc. from the system.
2.2 Pre-Cleaning
After plain flushing cleaning chemical Culligan CHEM 2512 and CHEM 7200D or
approved equivalent is introduced into system. The cleaning chemical should contain
polymeric dispersant and surfactant in order to remove adhering deposits from metal
surface. The product should be dosed at the rate of 1-2 kgs per cubic meter and
circulated in the system for a minimum period of 24 hours before being flushed out.
During chemical cleaning samples should be taken regularly in order to monitor the
cleaning process.
After chemical cleaning the system should be thoroughly flushed.
The flushing should continue till water runs clear (iron level maximum 1ppm). After
chemical cleaning all drain valves are closed and passivation treatment started.
2.3
Passivation
In order to ensure that a uniform passivation layer of the scale and corrosion inhibitor
is formed on the metal surface, the system shall be passivated for a minimum of 5
days.
The organic, phosphate based scale corrosion inhibitor CHEM 2550 or equivalent
should be dosed at double the recommended concentration (above 150 ppm) in the
system and circulated without giving any blow-down for a period of 5 days. After this
periods the system shall be blow down.
Before start up of regular treatment Biocide CHEM 606 or approved equivalent is
manually dosed into the cooling tower basin at 100 ppm levels.
3. CLOSED CHILLED WATER CIRCUIT TREATMENT
Water treatment shall be provided to prevent corrosion, fungal growth, scaling and
discoloration.
The Contractor shall add the first charge of chemical to the system and supply
additional chemical adequate, for the operation during Warranty period. Testing
chemicals/instruments shall be included in the scope of supply.
Details of treatment system offered and technical literature shall be included with the
tender offer.
In order to apply appropriate levels of inhibitor and biocide a pot doser shall be used.
1. The pot doser shall be manufactured with welded end caps, air cock and filling
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-43/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
2.
3.
4.
5.
SECTION 22
funnel. Non return valves shall be included at its base, inlet, outlet and drain
connections. 22mm bronze globe valves shall be used.
The volume should be 13.5 litres.
As an alternative, a high pressure dosing pump may be used. If so it should be
fitted with low level protection.
A suitably sized corrosion rack shall be supplied which has space for 2 corrosion
coupons.
The dosing pot and all connected pipes and fittings shall be insulated in the same
manner as the chilled water pipes.
4. REGULAR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
As part of the total package, the supplier/contractor shall provide an on site
professional service. The following will be supplied as a minimum.
1. To supervise and report on the entire process of flushing, pre-cleaning and
passivation as well as commissioning of all control equipment.
2. To provide regular site visits (a minimum of 12 per year). A service plan must be
submitted.
3. During site visit the following analyses shall be carried out and reported in writing.
Chilled Water
(i) pH
(ii) Conductivity
(iii) Inhibitor level
(iv) Iron
1. Provide test kits in company specific products. Client personnel are to be trained
in their use.
2. Twice yearly tests for Legionella. At Client‟s discretion an independent laboratory
may be used.
3. Corrosion coupon readings for determining corrosion rate will be checked at the
following frequency.
(a) Chilled water
Carbon steel
Copper
1 per 3 months
1 per 3 months
4. Deposit analysis as required.
22.2.05
PRESSURIZATION PACKAGE
The chilled water system shall be a closed pressurized system incorporating a
combined pressurization and automatic water make-up unit as indicated on the
drawings.
The pressurisation unit shall be an integrated unit, factory assembled and tested.
The pressurisation unit shall incorporate a break tank, two make-up pumps (one
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-44/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
running, one standby), twin expansion vessels, associated pipe work and valves and
controls.
The expansion vessels shall be of the pre-pressurized diaphragm type manufactured
to BS 4814 and shall be subjected to a test pressure of 750 kPa.
The twin expansion vessels shall each have a capacity to suit the chilled water
network size with a maximum working pressure not exceeding 150 kPa.
The controls shall include the following:
i.
Automatic pump changeover upon failure of duty pump indicated by pump
failure light.
ii. Manual pump selector switch.
iii. Duty pump run light
iv. Hours run indicators for pumps
v. Low pressure visible and audible alarm
22.2.06
EXHAUST FANS
GENERAL
All fans shall be provided with speed controller electronic switch as standard
accessory.
Fans shall be provided with sound attenuator at inlet and outlet as shown in
the drawing
1. Centrifugal Single Cabinet Roof Mounted Single Fan
Single – fan extract units shall be mounted on the roof in the locations shown on the
contract drawings.
The performance requirements shall be as specified in the equipment schedule
shown on the contract drawings.
The fan units shall be free upward discharge type complete with system of gravity
shutters that prevent the air recycling through the fan.
The fan frame shall be in aluminium profile and panels in aluminium sheet, with
acoustic lining in techno-polymer class I, and the construction shall be suitable for
outdoor installation with bird-guard at outlet. The fan shall have an access panel for
easy servicing.
The motor shall be minimum IP 44 Clause „B‟ protection for direct driven fans and IP
55 Class „F‟ for belt driven fans. Provide speed controller motor for variable volume
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-45/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
systems.
The fan units shall be with single inlet forward curved impellers either direct or belt
driven, running on two-life long lubricated bearings. The direct drive fans shall
incorporate volume damper on suction side.
The fan units shall be factory wired to terminal box on the casing.
The manufacturer should be ISO 9002 certified and products should bear CE
marking.
2. Wall Mounted Exhaust Fans with painted metallic frame
Extract fan shall be of the propeller type suitable for wall mounting.
The fan construction shall be of weather proof painted metallic frame, unobtrusive
with metal frame inner andbackdraught shutters outer .
Motors shall be of the shaded pole induction type enclosed in a aluminium alloy case
and protected by a thermal overload cut out.
The motor bearings shall be self alignment sealed for life type.
22.2 .07
CAR PARK VENTILATION AND SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM
The car park ventilation system is based on the ducted exhaust fan system which
consists the following components:
1. Sufficient sets number of main exhaust fans (-axial propeller type fans ) located in
the basement floor. Main exhaust fans are exhausting air from the basement
through main shafts and discharge directly to roof floor
2. All main extract fans are controlled by carefully located and distributed CO and
different fired gas sensors sends analogue / digital signals to smart and special
control panels designed for this type of ventilation system which ensure that only
fans in polluted areas are activated and to be insure that the fans shall be
operated in proper speed in the sequence specified.
FAN RATINGS
The airflow rate is to be in accordance with current building local regulations enforce,
to be 6 air changes per hour.
In compliance with Building Regulations Approved the main extract fans for
controlled car park vent system shall each be rated to extract 50% (3 change per
hour ) of the maximum airflow at first speed .
All main extract fans are rated to withstand a temperature of 300C for a period of at
least 120 minutes and the impulse fans 300C for120 minutes. All fans shall be tested
in accordance with BS/EN 12101-3 to verify compliance with the time/temperature
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-46/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
criteria stated.
The main fans have been selected on a nominal pressure drop, which will need to be
confirmed at detail design stage.
SYSTEM OPERATION
Fresh air will be drawn into the car park via the ramps by using proper number of
impulse fans as shown in the layout and contaminated air will be extracted via two
extract fans mounted in parallel through the air intake plenum around the
mechanical plant room and discharge directly to outside through surrounded
discharge louver hood . Additional quantities of fresh air will be drawn to the
basement through the satire case exit of car park by suction effect of the impulse
fans near these .
NORMAL VENTILATION MODE
Under the normal ventilation conditions (CO<30) one main extract fan plus selected
impulse fans shall be operated at low speed to drawn air through all part of the car
park at arte equivalent to (3 ) air changes per hour. CO level will monitored
continually. On detection of CO levels beyond (30) ppm , one main extract fan plus
additional impulse fans will operate at low speed in the affected area to mix and
dilute the CO gases for extract via the main fans , should the CO level continue to
rise to (40) ppm , two main plus impulse fans will operate at low speed to give (6) air
changes per hour. The CO sensing system will play a major roll in the energy saving.
SMOKE CONTROL/REMOVAL MODE
On detection of smoke or other combustion gas, main fans will be operated at high
speed increasing the airflow to the fire floor to 12 air changes per hour. All the air
extracted from the car park will pass through the fire zone, controlled by the selective
operation of the impulse fans.
Due to the distribution and selective operation of the impulse fans on the fire floor,
smoke will be contained and channelled through an air corridor, created by the jet
stream of the impulse fans, and guided towards the extract point. The air velocity
within the corridor will be sufficient to overcome the buoyancy effect of a 6mW design
fire load. There will also be a significant cooling effect on the smoky gases, thereby
limiting the hazard of fire spread and further structural damage.
Care will be taken to protect means of escape wherever possible and to protect them
from smoke contamination.
By approaching the design of the system with this fire engineered approach rather
than using only air change rates normally adopted for car park ventilation, the air
quantity extracted under fire conditions is substantially reduced, resulting in
significant savings in power consumption.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-47/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2.08
SECTION 22
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
All plant and supports shall be isolated from the building structure and the supports
isolated from other items of equipment in such a manner that noise and vibration are
not transmitted through the structure.
The chillers shall be provided with cased spring type anti-vibration mounts with
minimum 50 mm. deflection. The spring mounts shall consist of cast metal telescopic
housings with resilient inserts as guides between the top and bottom housings. The
mounts shall incorporate built-in levelling arrangement. The bottom plate of the
mount shall be fitted with 6 mm. thick synthetic rubber pad to reduce transmission of
high frequency noise and vibrations. The metal casing and the springs shall be
powder coated for protection against corrosion. The springs shall be colour coded to
facilitate identification.
Chilled water pump sets shall be installed over inertia blocks made out of reinforced
concrete or concrete-filled welded steel framework. The weight of the inertia block
shall be at least 1.5 times the total working weight of the pump sets . The inertia
blocks shall be mounted over cased spring mounts, as described above, with
minimum 25 mm. deflection. Protruding steel lugs/brackets or recesses shall be
provided in the inertia base to facilitate installation of spring mounts.
Floor mounted air handling units shall have double rubber pad extended to the unit
Fan-coil units and suspended AHU shall be provided with spring type anti-vibration
hangers having steel frame and helical compression type springs with minimum
25mm deflection. The springs shall be located within synthetic rubber cups to reduce
transmission of high frequency noise and vibrations. The rubber cup shall be
complete with embedded load distribution steel plate and with projection bush to
prevent metal-to-metal contact. The metal fame and the springs shall be powder
coated for protection against corrosion. The springs shall be colour coded to
facilitate identification.
Floor mounted centrifugal fans shall be installed on cased spring mounts as
described above with minimum 25mm. deflection. The mounts shall be installed
under the combined fan-motor frame.
All piping connected to isolated equipment and pipes within mechanical rooms shall
be suspended from spring type anti-vibration hangers as described above for at least
first three points of support on all sides of the equipment. Pipes running at low level
shall be mounted on cased spring mounts. The spring hangers and mounts used for
supporting pipes shall have minimum 25 mm deflection.
Structural columns or vertical steel pipes used as supports for water pipes shall have
extended base plates that rest on rubber pads of adequate load bearing capacity.
Suitable rubber grommets shall be provided to avoid contact between the base plates
and the fixing bolts.
The ratings of anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall suit the load distribution data
furnished by the equipment manufacturer with adequate margin of safety for weights
of water and accessories/fittings connected to the equipment. The vibration isolators
shall be installed in accordance with the maker‟s recommendations. The Mechanical
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-48/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Contractor shall ensure that the performance of isolators is suitable for the machinery
to be installed. All anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall be subject to the
Engineer‟s approval.
22.2.09
1.
VIBRATION ISOLATION
General Specifications
1.1 General
a. All mechanical and electrical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the
equipment schedule or in the specification shall be mounted on vibration
isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically
transmitted sound to the building structure.
b. All piping and ductwork located in mechanical equipment rooms, and for a
minimum of 50 feet (15.0 m), whichever is greater, from any connection to
vibration isolated mechanical or electrical equipment, shall be isolated from
the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers.
c. All isolators shall provide the required static deflection indicated in the
relevant schedule, under the equipment weight.
d. It is the supplier‟s responsibility to ensure that all isolators offered to the
contract meet the specifications and are suitable for the load, operating and
environmental conditions which prevail.
e. A single manufacturer shall provide all vibration isolation materials specified
herein in order to assure single source responsibility for the proper
performance of the materials used.
1.2 Submittal Data Requirements
A.
Samples
a. The contractor shall submit samples of specified isolation devices upon
request to the engineer for approval.
B.
Shop Drawings
a. The contractor shall have prepared by the isolation materials manufacturer or
his representative, and shall submit to the engineer for approval, drawings
showing the construction of the isolation devices to be used, including
specific selection of the isolators for the equipment to be furnished for this
project.
b. The drawing shall include the complete design of supplementary bases; a
tabulation of the design data for each isolator. Including spring OD, free
operating, and solid heights, and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness, and
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-49/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
other required data to clearly indicate that the specified isolator types and
minimum static deflections are provided by the system submitted.
C.
Execution
a. Installation of all vibration isolation materials specified shall be accomplished
following the manufacturers written instructions. Installation instruction shall
be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to beginning the work.
D.
System design
a. The contractor shall submit a complete set of approved shop drawings of all
mechanical and electrical equipment to receive vibration isolation devices to
the vibration isolation manufacturer or his representative. The shop drawings
furnished shall include operating weights of the equipment to be isolated and
the distribution of load at support points.
b. The contractor shall submit a complete layout of piping and ductwork to be
isolated, including vertical risers, showing size or weight and support points of
piping or ductwork to the isolation materials manufacturer for selection and
layout of isolation hangers.
2. Isolator Types and Specification
2.01 Inertia Bases
i.
Type A. (Concrete Inertia Base)
a. Inertia bases shall be constructed from reinforced concrete and shall be
designed for the stressing due to the weight of supported machine. The
surface shall be steel float finished or equivalent and leveled to the
machine manufacturers requirements. Machinery shall be fixed to the
base with „grouted-in‟ holding down bolts located in reverse tapered caste
sockets.
b. Where the inertia base will be supported on spring in shear mountings,
the base shall be formed with prefabricated mild steel continuous edge
frame, 13 mm diameter reinforcing bars on nominal 200 mm centers each
way. The mountings shall be fixed to brackets, which are welded to the
sides of the edge frame.
c. The design of the brackets and mountings shall allow the base to be
raised from (or lowered onto) the floor by adjustment of the leveling bolts
between mountings and brackets. The design shall also allow the
insertion (or removal) of the mountings when the base is resting on the
floor.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-50/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
d. Thickness of the base shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span
between isolators, at least 150 mm. Where inertia bases are used to
mount pumps, the bases shall be large enough to support piping elbows.
e. Concrete inertia bases shall have a clearance of 50mm between the
housekeeping pad and base.
3. Vibration Isolation of Piping and Ductwork
3.01 Suspended piping and ductwork
a. All piping connected to mechanical equipment (chillers, pumps, boilers,
generators, etc) shall be isolated from the building structure by means of
noise andvibration isolation.
b. Piping up to 100mm diameter, first 4 points of support, 125mm to 200mm
diameter, first 6 pinots of support, 250mm diameter and over, first 8 points of
support. Static deflection of the isolators shall be same as isolated
equipment. Spring fiberglass hangers shall be used to support pipes.
c. All ductwork located in mechanical equipment rooms connected to rotating
and for a minimum of 50 feet (15.30 m) from any connection to vibration
isolated air-moving equipment (air handling units, fan coil units, etc) shall be
isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation.
Spring fiberglass hangers shall be used to support pipes.
d. All suspended piping and ductwork located below or near noise sensitive
areas (sleeping room, conference room, offices, etc) shall be isolated from
the building structure using vibration isolation. Spring fiberglass hangers shall
be used to support pipes and ductwork.
3.02
Floor supported piping
a. All floor piping and elbows connected to mechanical equipment (chillers,
pumps, boilers, generators, etc) shall be isolated from the building structure
by means of noise andvibration isolation.
b. Piping up to 100mm diameter, first 4 points of support, 125mm to 200mm
diameter, first 6 pinots of support, 250mm diameter and over, first 8 points of
support. Static deflection of the isolators shall be same as isolated
equipment. Free standing springs shall be used to support pipes.
3.03
Piping and ductwork Penetrations
a. All piping and ductwork to be isolated according to this section of the
specification shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid
connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow
passage of piping or ductwork, and maintain a minimum of 3/4 (19 mm) and
maximum of 1 1/4 (30 mm) clearance around the outsider surfaces. This
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-51/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
clearance space shall be tightly packed with 1.58 P.C.F. glass fiber and shall
be caulked airtight after installation of the piping or ductwork.
3.04 Acoustical Pipe and ductwork Lagging
a. Pipes and Ductwork, which passes through noise sensitive areas (sleeping
room, conference room, theaters, offices, etc), shall be wrapped with an
acoustical lagging material. Lagging material shall consist of a limp mass
vinyl barrier bonded to a low density fiberglass decoupling layer.
b. The barrier material shall be constructed of a 0.10 inch (2 mm) thick barium
sulphate loaded limp mass vinyl sheet bonded to a thin layer of reinforced
Aluminum on one side. The barrier shall have a nominal density of 1 pound /
sq. foot (4.8 Kg. /sq. meter) and shall have a minimum STC rating of 28. The
barrier shall exhibit minimum flammability ratings of 0.0 seconds for flame out
and afterglow and 0.2 inches (5 mm) for char length when tested in
accordance with U.S. Federal Test Standard no. 191-5903. Decoupling layer
shall be a combination of 1 inch (25 mm) fiberglass batting and a non woven
porous scrim coated glass cloth, quilted together in a matrix of 4 inch (100
mm) diamond stitch pattern which encapsulates the glass fibers.
4. Piping Connection
4.01 Flexible Pipe Connectors
a. Flexible connectors shall be used on all piping connected to rotating
equipment such as Pumps, Chillers, Air handling units, Fan coil units and the
like, to reduce the transmission of noise and vibration, and to eliminate
stresses in piping systems due to misalignment and thermal movement of the
piping.
b. Flexible connectors shall be of the single or double sphere molded joint
configuration and shall meet or exceed standard specifications for rubber
Joint.
c. Flexible connectors shall be able to compensate for the anticipated lateral
and axial deflections.
d. Connectors shall be made of molded neoprene reinforced with nylon tire cord
and shall have mild steel floating flanges or female union ends.
4.02 Flexible Hoses
a. Hoses connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off
valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible.
b. Rubber hose connectors shall be wire reinforced and have molded
construction. They shall come with metal threaded end fittings or integral
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-52/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
rubber flanges. Threaded fittings should be limited to 3in and smaller pipe
diameter.
c. Stainless steel hoses shall be used for heating and ventilating unit connection
that may be located in a ceiling away from the equipment room area and for
long life when temperatures exceed 220F.
d. Stainless steel hoses constructed from corrugated inner core and braided
cover to help attain a pressure rating and provide the restraining force
needed.
Recommended live length of flexible hoses:
Nominal
Diameter, in.
½
1
1.5
2
3
Length, in.
12
12
12
12
18
Nominal
Diameter, in.
4
5
6
8
10
12
Length, in.
18
24
24
24
24
36
5. Noise Insulation Requirements Under Mechanical Equipment
5.01 System Design
a. The isolation materials manufacturer or his representative shall be
responsible for the design of the load sound isolation material, and shall
provide a complete sound isolation system to the installing contractor.
b. The isolation system shall be designed to accommodate the range of uniform
dead and live loads, and concentrated loads of the mechanical equipment.
c. The general contractor shall furnish a complete set of final approved shop
drawings of all equipment to be supported by floating floors.
5.02 Submittals
a. The contractor shall submit samples of all sound isolation materials or system
components to the architect for approval.
b. The contractor shall have prepared by the isolation manufacturer or his
representative, and shall submit drawings showing the construction of the
various parts of work, including connections to the adjacent parts of the
building structure.
c. The contractor shall submit copies of certified test reports, from independent
laboratories which are specified as verification of performance for the
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-53/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
specified sound isolation system if an alternative system to that specified is
being submitted.
22.2.10
TEST HOLES
Test holes shall be provided in the horizontal side of the ducts and shall be of 22 mm.
dia. Each test hole shall be fitted with an Instrument Test Port having galvanized cast
metal body, expandable rubber sealing element and metal wing nut for operation.
Test port base shall be seated on soft rubber gasket and riveted to the duct wall.
The wing nut shall extend outside the finished insulation so that the duct interior can
be accessed without disturbing the insulation. Rubber plugs or stick-on seals shall
not be used for closing test holes. The number of test holes shall be as per
recommendation of DW142.
Test holes shall be provided at the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
At fans (in the straight section of duct near to fan outlet)
At main supply and return ducts of air handling units/cooling coils
At main branches after regulating dampers
At any other position as per Engineer‟s requirements
22.2.11 INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES
Stem Type Thermometers
Range
Size
Location
:
:
:
Type
:
200 to 2200 F
9” long
At inlet and outlet of chillers and air handling
units
Mercury in glass
Thermometer Well
Location
At inlet and outlet of chillers, air handling units and fan coil units.
Purpose
To accommodate stem type thermometers
Construction Brass body with Plastic cap to prevent ingress of dirt
Water Pressure Gauges
Size
4” in diameter
Components
Pig tail and vent cock
Location
Inlet and outlet of all pumps and chillers, to be selected in
a way to ensure needle position at mid-range during
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-54/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
operation of the equipment
Range
22.2.12
0 to 100 psi, unless otherwise advised by the Engineer
SHEET METAL WORK
DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
i) General
Low velocity ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured and installed in
accordance with specification DW142 issued by the HVCA/ASHRAE Standards
except where specified hereunder to the contrary.
The Works Contractor shall supply and install all the ductwork, sheet metal, supports,
dampers, grilles, diffusers and auxiliaries, as required to complete the various
ventilation and air conditioning system. The installation shall be as shown on the
Drawings, but the Works Contractor must include for checking site dimension.
All supply, return and exhaust air ducts, support members and fittings shall be
constructed from new high quality galvanized mild steel sheet and shall conform to
the requirements of HVCA, including ASHRAE Standards.
All ductwork shall be manufactured and erected by ductwork specialists and shall be
installed to run parallel with the building structure and provide a neat arrangement.
The ductwork shall be true in section and continuous with air-tight joints, presenting a
smooth surface on the inside and neatly finished on the outside. Internal roughness
or obstruction to air flow, and sharp edges or corners on the outside of ducts. Fittings
or supports will not be accepted.
Variations in direction and in the shape of ductwork shall be effected with easy
changes to the airflow. The slope of either a change in shape, a contraction or an
expansion shall not exceed 22.5 degrees on any side.
All square bends shall be fitted with turnings vanes of proprietary manufacture.
Flanged duct joints shall be used for all circular ducts of diameters 600 mm or
greater, and all rectangular ducts having any dimension equal or greater than
800mm.
All duct joints shall be made air-tight incorporating pop-riveted seams, approved
sealants, gaskets and finished tapes. All excess sealant must be removed before
tape is applied.
Rectangular ducts having any dimension equal or greater than 400mm shall be
externally stiffened all around the duct.
Ductwork test holes shall be provided at air handling units (positioned in a straight
section of duct near to the fan discharge) and in all main branch ducts with two or
more terminals served from the branch. Test holes shall be 25 mm diameter, suitably
strengthened and fitted with an effective removable seal.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-55/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Open ends of ducts shall be covered during erection with plastic sheeting to prevent
ingress of dust and rubbish.
Where damage (or rusting) has occurred on galvanized ductwork, the affected
section shall be made good by preparing, cleaning and painting with two coats of zinc
rich paint and an approved finishing paint. Where damage, in the Engineer‟s opinion,
cannot be made good, than a new section of ductwork shall be provided at no cost to
the contract.
All ductwork supports and hangers shall be painted with two coats of zinc rich paint.
The steelwork supports at roof level shall be provided by the Works Contractor and
shall be painted with two coats of black bit mastic paint.
All ductwork supports and hangers shall be of the angle iron and drop rod type or
other approved suspension systems:
a. Neoprene/compressible rubber strip or timber spacers shall be inserted between
the ducts and supports to reduce the transmission on noise and vibration and to
provide a thermal break.
b. Vertical drop rods or angle support members shall be positioned as close to the
edge of the duct as possible, but not touching it. The supports shall be outside
any insulation, vapour sealing or other finish.
c. Additional supports shall be provided adjacent to dampers, grilles, diffusers, or
other similar equipment so as to prevent duct distortion.
d. Maximum support center shall be 2.4m for any horizontal or vertical ducts and
1.2m for large horizontal ducts whose cross section area exceeds 3 sq.m. On no
accounts shall angles, used for ductwork stiffening, or joints be used as part of
the supports.
e. No ceilings, light fittings or any other equipment shall be supported from the
ductwork or the ductwork supports.
ii) Materials

iii)
This specification shall apply to ductwork and fittings made from hot dip
galvanized sheet or coil to BS 2989 (1992) Grade Z2 Or Z3 with iron-zinc alloy
coating type G275 (STANDARD) or equal.
Construction
a) General
The constructional requirements for rectangular ductwork have been established
following independent tests, the limits of use being related to the characteristics of
rolled steel angle longitudinal beams, cross joints and stiffeners described in this
Specification.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-56/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
b)
SECTION 22
Sheet thickness
Minimum sheet thickness is 0.6mm. (0.9mm for ductwork in pyrotechnical area).
c) Longitudinal Seams
Sealant shall be used with all longitudinal seams irrespective of the pressure class.
The sealant must be included in the seam during manufacture or be applied as an
edge sealant. All joints are to be neatly Pop-riveted or spot welded. No folded
seams will be allowed.
CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS
Duct connections to grilles and diffusers shall be detailed to manufacturer‟s
requirements, and where flexible connections are used, the cross sectional area of
the duct is to be maintained throughout the length of the flexible connections.
All connections to air handling units and sound attenuators if any shall be made with
mating flanges to suit the plant items as delivered to site, and shall be made air-tight
with suitable gaskets and washers such that they may readily be removed.
Flexible connections shall be fitted to the ducted inlet and outlet of all fans and air
handling equipment
i)
General constructional requirements
The minimum metal thickness shall be 0.6 mm. In all cases the larger dimensions
and/or pressure classification shall determine the sheet thickness and stiffening.
ii) Stiffeners
The flat side of fittings shall be stiffened in accordance with the construction. On the
flat sides of bends, stiffeners shall be arranged in a radial pattern, with the spacing
measured along the center line of the bend.
iii) Splitters
Splitters shall be attached to the duct by bolts or mechanically closed rivets at 100
mm maximum spacing.
iv) Turning Vanes
Square bends shall be fitted with turning vanes, which shall be securely attached at
each end either to the duct or to internal runners, and the runners fastened to the
duct by mechanically closed rivets or bolts at 150 mm maximum spacing.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-57/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
For single skin vanes, the maximum length between support shall be 615 mm and
for double skin vanes the maximum length between supports shall be 2250mm.
v) Twin Bends
Turning vanes in twin bends in which the width of the straight section and branch
differ shall be set so that the leading and the trailing edges of the turning vanes are
parallel to the duct vanes.
vi) Branches
A branch should be taken off a straight section of duct, not off a taper. Connection of
branch to duct shall be cleats, rivets or bolts, and sealant shall be used between
ducts and branch.
vii) Expansion and Contraction
Where these are required, an expansion shall be made upstream of a branch
connection and a connection downstream of a branch connection. The slope of
either an expansion or a contraction should not exceed22.5% on any side. Where
this angle is not practicable, the slope may be increased, providing that splitters are
positioned to bisect the angle between any side and the center line of the duct.
viii) Access Panels and Doors
a) Access panels or doors shall be provided in supply, return and exhaust air
ductwork, false ceiling and builders‟ work shafts, as required to facilitate the
routine inspection, maintenance, cleaning and adjustment of air conditioning and
ventilation equipment.
b) Access panels and doors shall be air-tight when closed, with compressible
rubber gaskets around the entire perimeter, and shall generally be of the hinged
type.
c) Where space limitation preclude the use of hinges, access doors shall be fixed
with a minimum of four heavy window type latches.
d) For insulated ducts, all access doors shall be of double panel insulated
construction, with the insulation thickness matching that of the surrounding
ducts. For uninsulated ducts, access doors may be of single panel construction.
All duct access doors shall be mounted in their own separate frames.
KITCHEN EXHAUST HOODS
Kitchen Ventilation hood(s) shall be of the Type I, full compensating double island
canopy group with the capability to replace 90% of the exhausted air with fresh
outside air. The hood(s) shall be U. L. Listed without fire damper for 400 °F, 600 °F,
or 700 °F rated cooking appliances. Air shall be supplied through face and front
perimeter perforated panels in a manner that does not interfere with the cooking
operations beneath the hood(s). Perforated panels with opposed blade, balancing
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-58/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
dampers shall be located on the front perimeter to ensure precise volume control
and shall limit the throw to within several feet of the hood.
The hood(s) exterior shall be constructed of a minimum of 18 ga. stainless steel with
a #4 finish. The hood(s) shall be constructed using the standing seam method for
optimum strength. All seams, joints and penetrations of the hood enclosure shall be
welded and/or liquid tight. Lighter material gauges, alternate material types and
finishes are not acceptable. All unexposed interior surfaces shall be constructed of a
minimum 18 ga. corrosion resistant steel including, but not limited to ducts, plenum,
and brackets.
The hood(s) shall include a filter housing constructed of the same material as the
hood. The filters shall be aluminum baffle type, U. L. 1046 Classified, and in
sufficient number and sizes to ensure optimum performance as specified by the
filter manufacturer. The filter housing shall terminate in a pitched, full length grease
trough which shall drain into a removable grease container.
Vapor proof, U. L. Listed incandescent light fixtures shall be prewired to a junction
box situated at the top of the hood for field connection. Wiring shall conform to the
requirements of the National Electrical Code (NFPA #70- Latest Edition)
Connecting duct work between kitchen hood and exhaust fan on roof shall be made
of stainless steel sheet of 1.09 mm thickness. All longitudinal seams and transverse
joints shall be continuously welded.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
i) General
a. Threaded rods hangers shall be pre galvanized support
b. With a proprietary device, it shall be the responsibility of the Works Contractor to
ensure that the device meets the requirements, with sufficient margin of overload
and that it is installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.
ii)
Horizontal Ductwork
a) The choice of the lower support shall be dictated by the actual duct section.
b) Duct shall be supported by means of U channels and angle profiles. Ducts
supported on the roof shall be rigidly supported by means of concrete piers or
plinth laid on the waterproof complex.
c) All structural support profiles and plates shall be hot dip galvanized 50 microns
minimum to BS 729, plus an approved anti-rust grey paint suitable for exposed
atmospheric conditions.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-59/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
iii) Vertical Ducts
a) The design of support for vertical ducts is dictated by site conditions, and they are
often located to concise with the individual floor slabs.
b) Vertical ducts should be supported from the stiffening angle of the angle frame, or
by separate supporting angles fixed on the duct.
c) Air duct passing through roof shall be suitably weatherproofed.
iv) Heavy Loadings
Where heavy equipment is to be applied to the ductwork, supports shall be
designed to suit the conditions.
PROTECTIVE FINISHES
i) Metal Spraying
Zinc or aluminum spraying shall be to BS 2569 Part 1 (1964) and used only for
remedial works.
ii) Paints
a) Surface preparation and Paint application
Surface preparation of the metal and paint application shall be in accordance
with the paint manufacturer‟s recommendations.
b) Making Good Welding Damage
Galvanizing or other metallic zinc finish damaged by welding shall be suitably
cleaned and painted with two coat of zinc-rich or aluminum paint.
c) Ducts made from Galvanized Sheet or Coil
Ducts made from conventional sheet or coil, do not require further protection
when located inside a buildings. When located outside the building, one coat of
each primer or one coat of calcium plumbate primer shall be applied together
with a suitable finishing coat.
d) Supporting Members
Supporting members made of hot dip galvanized steel 50 microns to BS729
e) External Equipments etc.
All external equipment, ductwork, support frames and brackets are to be finished
with one undercoat and one top coat.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-60/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
STRUCTURAL PENETRATION AND WATERPROOFING
a) All duct penetrations of walls, floor and roofs shall be provided with sleeves of
length equal to the full thickness of the structure. In concrete walls or slabs, the
sleeves shall be galvanized steel of minimum thickness 1.0 mm. In block walls,
the openings larger than a hollow block shall be supported by a lintel
b) Each sleeve shall be sized to allow a 22 mm clearance around the duct and any
required insulation/finish. It shall be built into the structure using mortar.
Subsequently the gap between the duct/insulation and sleeve shall be sealed
with mastic.
All ducts passing through a roof construction shall be suitably weather proofed.
CONNECTIONS TO BUILDER’S WORK
a) All joints between mating flanges, companion rings and wooden frames shall be
fitted with sealing gaskets.
b) Where ductwork is connected to outside louvers, the bottom inside portion of the
ductwork should be sloped to drain outside. The inside surfaces of the duct shall
also be treated for external exposure for a distance equal to the height of the
louver connection, or to the nearest plant item.
22.2.13
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
Flame proof flexible shall be fitted on all intake and discharge connections of fans
and air conditioning units for preventing the transmission of vibration through the
ducts to occupied spaces.
Flexible connections shall also be provided where ductwork passes across building
expansion joints.
Flexible connections shall be factory fabricated from chemically impregnated canvas.
Connections shall fit closely and be secured in airtight fashion to connections to
ductwork, fans and apparatus.
The material shall have a penetration time of at least fifteen minutes when tested in
accordance with BS 476 and shall remain flexible and without strain or distortion.
Flexible connections shall be 150 mm minimum and 250 mm maximum in width.
22.2.14
AIR TERMINALS
GENERAL
Locations, types and finishing of All outlets of different types are subjected to be
revised, modified and coordinated with interior design as per final approved lay out.
And the contractor responsibility to coordinate with all parties (owner , outlets
manufacturer, interior designer , architectural and duct fabricator during project
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-61/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
construction time period to prepare workshop drawings, the technical submittal,
required catalogues and any
data will be required to achieve the best, most
efficient and low nosiness air conditioning system .
All this work shall be carried without additional cost from the Contractor side.
i)
Ceiling Diffusers
Ceiling diffusers shall be of square neck pattern, with a removable core assembly,
suitable for a quiet draftless air distribution. Diffusers shall be of extruded aluminium
construction and of arctic white baked epoxy powder coat finish as standard.
However, the finish shall be subject to the final approval of architect / owner. All
diffusers shall have precisely metered corners mechanically fastened for tight,
invisible joints.
All supply air directional diffusers shall have an integral opposed blade volume
damper to permit equal distribution of air over the entire face of the diffuser. Opposed
blade volume dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Frames are 18 GA
and the blades of 24 GA material. Return air diffuser OBD shall be painted black.
All supply air terminals shall be complete with compressible rubber gaskets at the
flanges to prevent air leakage. Air terminals shall be ARI certified. (ARI 880-89).
ii) Linear Diffusers
„Straight line adjustable diffusers‟ slad type shall consist of extruded aluminium outer
frames, removable snap-in inner assemblies and where ceiling mounting frames are
called for, they shall be of extruded aluminium. Where sectional adjoining
continuous units are installed, outer frames and/or ceiling mounting frames shall be
supplied with concealed alignment strips between sections.
Outer frame styles, for either surface or flush to ceiling mounting, shall be furnished
to suit the type of ceiling construction. Concealed brackets, accessible by removal of
inner assemblies and inner vanes, shall be provided for mounting the outer frames to
ceiling mounting frames or the plenum ducts without any visible mounting screws.
Each diffuser slot shall have a snap-in, pattern and flow control assembly consisting
of a fixed deflecting vane and two adjustable air-flow control vanes accessible from
face of diffusers.
By adjustment of one or both flow control vanes, it shall be possible to obtain a
horizontal, or vertical, discharge air pattern, or to blank-off inactive sections.
Horizontal pattern of air-flow may be changed 180 deg. regardless of diffuser
mounting orientation, simply by adjusting the flow control vanes. The physical
appearance of the face of the diffuser shall not be changed regardless of air pattern
or flow control adjustment. Equalizing deflectors of snap-on type, may be supplied
for field installation, for lateral control of air pattern at 90 deg. to the axis of
continuous runs of units, or for spread pattern control of single units, as required.
They shall be adjustable from diffuser face by removal of inner assembly. Volume
control dampers for system balancing shall be installed, as required by the sheet
metal contractor in the branch supply ducts to plenum.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-62/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
iii) Fresh Air Louvers
Fresh air intake shall be fitted with external louvers, opposed blade volume control
dampers, aluminium insect wire mesh and bird screen and filter as indicated on the
drawings.
Fresh air inlet shall be fitted with a 50 mm thick washable metallic filter. Sand trap
shall be attached to the fresh air intake.
22.2.15
DAMPERS
a) Volume Control Dampers
Volumes control dampers shall be placed in ducts at every branch supply or return air
duct connection whether or not indicated on the drawings for the proper volume control
and balancing of the system.
The dampers shall have sturdy corrosion resistant construction. All dampers shall
have multi-leaf double skin, aerofoil section, opposed action blades. Individual
blades should not exceed 2200 mm. in length or 175 mm. in width. Double skin
blades shall be made out of 22 gauge galvanized steel sheet with seamed edges.
Dampers frames shall be galvanized made out of steel sheet. The thickness shall be
18 G for max duct width of 900 mm. & 16 G for duct sizes of width exceeding 900
mm. Blade ends shall be gasketed to minimize air leakage.
Damper quadrants shall be of cast metal construction, marked OPEN and SHUT in
damper sizes upto 300x150 mm. Single skin blades shall be fabricated from 18
gauge galvanized steel sheet.
The control linkage shall be outside the air stream. Clear airflow area equal to the
duct size shall be maintained within the damper frame. Maximum clearance between
the blades and the frame shall be limited to 3 mm. Indication of damper blade
position shall be provided.
b) Splitter Dampers
At each point of division in a supply duct, where a branch is taken off a trunk, an
adjustment, splitter or deflecting damper shall be fitted two gauge heavier than the
duct, with operating rod and locking quadrant. These deflecting dampers shall be
permanently set and locked in position after completion of the installation and
adjustment with length extending through the duct to externally mounted bearing
plates.
c) Non Return Dampers
Non return dampers shall be manufactured similar to duct dampers but shall
incorporate additionally, felt rubber or neoprene strips on long edges of blades to
ensure positive shut-off and quiet closure.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-63/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Dampers on fresh air inlets shall be similar edged to prevent ingress of dust and
sand particles.
d) Fire Dampers
Fire dampers with fusible links shall be fixed in ducts at all floor crossings, wall
crossings of kitchen and crossings of fire rated walls, irrespective of it being shown on
the drawings or not, without any additional cost.
Fire dampers shall be of the galvanized steel curtain type.
The steel blades of the damper curtain shall fold completely upon themselves and be
stacked at one end of the damper outside the air stream. The dampers shall be
arranged for vertical or horizontal operation as detailed on the drawings.
The damper fusible links shall be rated at 72 C. (162F)
The dampers shall be leakage rated class 1 according to UL 555S or equivalent
standards and fire rated 2 hours resistance. Both the curtain and fusible link shall be
accessible for servicing through air tight inspection doors placed up or down stream
wherever possible.
Each access door shall be of a minimum size of 250x250 mm. or full duct width on
ducts of less than 450 mm.
Ducting dampers and casings are to be manufactured in strict compliance with
UL555 and NFPA 90A.
Any necessary fixing frameworks shall be supplied and fitted as recommended by the
manufacturer, by the Works Contractor.
Motorized Dampers
Motorized dampers shall be used in the fresh air duct at the point of inlet for each
base mounted AHU as indicated in drawings. Fresh air fan outlet shall also be
provided with motorized dampers as indicated in drawings.
22.2.16
SOUND ATTENUATORS
The supply and return air ductworks shall be attenuated to limit the noise level to the
values specified in the design criteria. The method of fabrication and supporting
ducts should be such as to avoid generation of noise because of air movements or
drumming of sheet metal.
The silencers shall be provided in the supply and return air ducts as shown on tender
drawings. The silencers shall be constructed and tested according to BS 4718 for
dynamic insertion loss, self generated noise and aerodynamic performance.
The silencers shall be complete with flanges to facilitate their removal for inspection.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-64/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Externally, the silencers shall be insulated in the same manner as the adjoining air
ducting. The contractor shall carry out sound absorption calculations with respect to
the characteristics and the duct system to ensure the proper selection of silencers.
22.2.17
ACOUSTICAL LINER
Acoustic liner for duct work of fan coil unit, shall be made up of black, strong,
durable, dimensionally stable woven glass fabric with zero fibre migration of 15 mm
thickness and 48 kg /m3 density up to a length of 3.0 meter from the face of the unit
22.2.18
PIPE WORK AND FITTINGS
General
Each part of the system of piping shall be complete in all details and provided with all
control valves and accessories necessary for satisfactory operation. The tender
drawings indicate generally the sizes of all main piping but the right is reserved to
modify the runs of piping to accommodate conditions during construction.
All piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be erected to present a neat
appearance. Pipes shall be parallel to each other and paralleled or at right angles to
structural members of the building and shall give maximum possible headroom.
Piping shall not pass in front of doorways or windows and shall be generally arranged
so that it is least 2.5 cm. from the finished wall face. Sufficient space is to be allowed
for accessibility, servicing and proper insulation works.
Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls or slabs. Pipes shall be
pitched for proper circulation and drainage.
Run outs shall be graded in such a manner as to prevent air traps being formed
within them when the mains expand or contract. Automatic or open vents are to be
provided at high points, piped to suitable drains or terminating over expansion tanks
wherever possible.
All drain piping shall pitch down in the direction of flow. All low points of the system
must be fitted with drain valves to allow the complete draining of the system. Bottom
of all risers must have dirt pockets of the size of riser and at least 15 cms. Long with
a drain valve fitted. All water piping to equipment and valves shall be connected with
either flanges or unions for dismantling and removal. All piping shall reamed after
cutting to remove all burrs.
All reduction in sizes of piping in the direction of downward pitch shall be installed
with eccentric fittings to maintain a level top.
Approved pipe fittings shall be used and bending pipes will not normally be allowed,
except that bending of back steel pipes 50 mm. nominal diameter and smaller shall
be permitted, where space conditions allow for a bending radius of at least 10 times
the diameter of the pipe. A hydraulic pipe bender shall be used to bend all pipes.
Bends showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformations will not be acceptable. Cutting
and shutting of bends will not be permitted.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-65/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Piping shall not be installed passing through ductwork or directly under electric light
outlets or extend beyond footing lines, as determined by the drawings.
In placing pipes through sleeves, near walls, partitions or in chases, care must be
taken to provide sufficient space for pipe covering. Where pipes are held in vices, as
and when screwing, care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe surface is not
damaged. Any pipe work so damaged shall not be fitted.
All pipes stored on site shall be kept clear of the ground and where possible stored
under cover. Pipes corroded beyond normal „stock-rust‟ condition shall not be used.
Special care should be taken to prevent dirt and foreign material entering open ends
of pipes during erection. A valve fitted to the open end of a disconnected pipe will
not be considered satisfactory to prevent entry of foreign matter.
Screwed iron caps or plugs or plastic covers shall be used to seal pipe ends. Wood,
rag paper or other make-shift plugs will not be permitted.
Before connecting upto return mains, the system of piping must be blown and flushed
out. After flushing, all strainers shall be opened and baskets cleaned.
Liberal allowances shall be made for expansion and contraction of pipe by means of
changes in the direction or by the inclusion of expansion joints in the piping system.
Chilled Water Pipes
1. Exposed Chilled Water Pipes
This section Includes material description and application schedule for the exposed
piping system installed in shafts and over false ceiling and machine rooms.
Chilled water pipes shall be seam welded / ERW black Steel conforming to ASTM
106 Grade -B / or BS- 1387 class-B, Screwed fittings shall be used for 50 mm. pipes
and smaller. Welding fittings shall be used for 65 mm. pipes and larger. Branch
welds will not be permitted. Screwed fittings shall be 225 lbs, black malleable iron.
Welding fittings shall be steel medium duty compatible with the piping.
For pipes 6”inch and above schedule 40 will be followed
Sufficient number of unions shall be provided near the coils and valves for easy
dismantling.
Welding
Where shown on the drawings or specified or directed, welded joints, outlets and
flanges shall be used.
Care shall be taken to ensure that welding metal or flux does not project into the bore
of the pipe. All welds shall be of good clean metal, free from slag and porosity, of
even thickness and contour, well fused with the parent metal, hammered on
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-66/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
completion and finished smooth.
The Engineer reserves the right to have cut for examination 2% of all welds made.
The Contractor shall remake the joints at no extra charge.
All welded joints (except pipe welded end to end) shall be made by use of forged one
piece, welding flanges, caps, elbows, branch outlets and tees of approved make. All
such fittings etc., shall be of a type which maintains full wall thickness at all points,
ample radius, fillets and proper levels or shoulders at ends.
All joint welding may be by the electric arc or acetylene process.
Wherever welded piping connections to equipment, valves or other units needing
maintenance, servicing or requiring possible removal, the connecting joints shall be
by means of unions or flanges. Pressure rating of the flanges shall match the
pressure rating of the flanges on the equipment to which the pipe connects.
Valves for Chilled Water System
In addition to valves, cocks and strainers etc., shown on all drawings, the contractor
shall include for the installation of sufficient valves, cocks and strainers to enable the
system to operate to the satisfaction of the engineer.
No asbestos containing materials shall be employed in any valve.
Valves shall bear the BSI Kitemark or equivalent denoting Quality System,
accreditation and compliance with British Standards and where no Kitemark scheme
exists, valves shall be manufactured under an approved BS5750 Quality System.
All castings shall be clean close grained metal free from rough projections. Unless
otherwise specified valves of 50mm nominal bore and under shall have female ends
screwed to BS 21 and valves 65mm nominal bore and over shall have flanged ends.
Special care must be exercised in the installation of screwed valves to avoid straining
their bodies, and preventing the gate or seat from closing tight. The wrench shall
always be applied to the side being attached to the pipe. When attaching pipe to a
valve already in place, a second wrench shall be used to hold the valve while the
pipe is being tightened. A pipe shall not be screwed so far into a valve as to damage
the seat.
Flanged valves shall have matching flanges manufactured in accordance with
BS4504. Composite flanges to BS4504 should be used when butterfly or other
'inside bolt circle' valves are installed in copper pipe work systems.
All flanged valves (all services ) shall be epoxy coated both internally and externally
in order to prevent corrosion and pitting, valves shall be suitable for the fluid carried
and the temperatures, test and working pressures of the system in which they are
installed.
All valves which contain copper alloy shall be of gunmetal or capable of withstanding
dezincification.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-67/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
All valves on potable water services shall be approved by the Local Water Authority
and WRc. As indicated in the drawings minimum the following valves shall be
installed
Isolating Valve
For sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze (to BS1400 LG2) gate valve to
BS5154 PN20 Series B. Valves shall be complete with position indicator and locking
device, asbestos free gland packing, with non-rising stem, threaded bonnet, WRc
approved, one piece wedge and BS21 taper thread (ISO R7). Valves shall be
Kitemarked.
For sizes 65mm and above shall be cast iron (to BS1452 Gr 220) gate valve to
BS5150 PN16. Valves shall be complete with locking device and open shut indicator,
rising stem, outside screw, zinc free bronze trim, wedge facing ring and body seat
ring shall be of gunmetal, flanged to BS4504 PN16. Valves shall be Kitemarked.
Regulating Valves
Sizes up to and including 50mm valves shall be of the bronze double regulating, to
BS7350 PN20, Series B. WRc approved, lockshield type, DZR rising stem, screwed
bonnet, handwheel operated, micrometer style indicator, Parabolic slotted DZR
regulating disk, with double regulating device. The end connections shall be threaded
to BS21 Tr (ISO 7) except for the ½" size, which shall be parallel. Valves shall be
Kitemarked.
Sizes 65mm and above, shall be cast iron double regulating valve, to BS7350 PN16,
and shall be with non-rising stem and locking device, inside screw, ductile iron
bonnet and fitted with EPDM coated regulating disk, double regulating device and
indicator, backseating feature, flanged to BS4504 PN16. Valves shall be Kitemarked.
Manual Commissioning Sets-Balancing Valves
For the purpose of balancing water distribution systems accurately (5%), the
following commissioning valves must be installed as indicated in the drawings , and
where else required for balancing the system. Commissioning sets (balancing valves)
shall comprise of a metering station and a close coupled double regulating valve and
shall be installed with a minimum of 5 diameters uninterrupted upstream length of
straight pipe. Valves shall be as following:
Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze commissioning set, comprising of (i)
bronze metering station, to BS7350 PN20 Series B and must be fitted with double
sealing feature test points and (ii) bronze double regulating valve, to BS7350PN20
series B. Lockshield type, WRc approved, Micrometer style indicator, rising DZR
stem, screwed bonnet, Parabolic and slotted DZR regulating disk with ends
connections to BS21 Tr (ISO 7) except ½" size which shall be parallel. Valves shall
be Kitemarked.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-68/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Sizes 65mm and above, shall be cast iron commissioning set, comprising of (i)
stainless steel metering station to BS7350 with extension pieces to mount test points
and (ii) cast iron double regulating valve to BS7350 PN16, inside screw, non-rising
stem and locking device, ductile iron bonnet, and fitted with EPDM coated regulating
disk, double regulating device and indicator, back seating feature. Valve shall also be
flanged to BS4504 PN16. Valves shall be Kitemarked.
Strainers
Strainers, in addition to where shown on drawings shall be fitted prior to all major
items of plant including all pumps, air handling units, control valves, etc.
Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze (BS1400 LG2) "Y" type strainer
PN32 Series B. WRc approved, with perforated stainless steel screen 0.75mm
diameter holes for 'fine' straining and 22.6% free flow area per the square cm. of
element area. Strainer shall be with screwed cap and shall be fitted with gland cock
(hose union type) for blow down connection and shall also have drilled and tapped
bosses on each side of the body fitted with 2 test points and 2 plugged points. Ends
shall be threaded to BS21 (ISO R7).
Sizes 65mm and above shall be cast iron (BS1452 Gr 220) "Y" type strainer to PN16
Series B with perforated stainless steel screen 1.6mm diameter holes for 'fine'
straining and 34% free flow area per square cm. of element area. Strainers shall be
with bolted cover and fitted with gland cock (hose union type) for blow down
connection and shall have drilled and tapped bosses on each side of the body fitted
with 2 test points and 2 plugged points, flanged to BS4504 PN16.
Non Return Valves
Non-return valves shall be fitted where plant must operated on an automatic
changeover basis or where flow reversal can occur.
Sizes upto and including 50mm shall be bronze (BS1400 LG2) check valve to
BS5154 PN25. Kitemarked and WRc approved, horizontal swing pattern with
threaded cover, nitrile disk, and shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and
vertical pipe (with vertical flow upwards).end threaded internal BS21 (ISO 7).
Bronze double check valves shall be installed to prevent contamination of water
caused by back siphonage, back flow and cross connection in supplies such as those
to hose taps, cisterns, stand pipes, showers and basins.
Sizes 65mm and above shall be cast iron (BS1452 Gr 220) check valves with lever
and air cushion to BS5153 PN16, of the horizontal swing pattern with bolted cover,
outside lever and air cushion, zinc-free bronze trim and rubber faced disk and
flanged to BS4504 PN16 and shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical
pipelines.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-69/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Drain/Gland Cocks
Drain cocks shall be installed in plant rooms, on major plants. Drain cocks shall be of
the hose union pattern gland cock in bronze (BS1400 LG2).WRc approved, asbestos
free gland packing and shall be threaded to BS21 complete with captive cap. The
plugs shall have square head with a slot to indicated plug position.
Flow Measurement
For the purpose of the flow and temperature measurement and the proportional
balancing of water distribution system, the contractor shall provide a digital
(microprocessor) flow measurement test set and shall be suitable for portable or
bench mounted use.
Screwed Joints on Steel Piping
Screwed joints shall be clean threaded, pulled up tightly and made with approved
joining compound and long strand hemp. After joints have been formed, all surplus
hemp shall be cut away and the joints wiped clean. Where pipes are galvanized,
care shall be taken to ensure that threads are carefully cut so that the number of
exposed threads are minimised.
Flanged Joints
All flanged joints shall be flush and truly aligned and made with approved brass
corrugated rings or compressed asbestos in compositions. Flanges for connection to
welded pipe shall be „slip-on‟ or „welding-neck‟ standard steel type, made as called
for in the schedules. Flanges or unions shall be provided on straight runs at not
greater than 22 m. intervals.
Unions
Unions are required on pipe sizes 50 mm. and under. Unions shall be ground taper
joint type, good for 150 psi working pressure.
Direct connection between pipes of dissimilar materials must be avoided to minimize
chances of galvanic corrosion. Dielectric unions should be used for connection
between steel and copper pipes.
Flexible Connections and Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be fitted in straight lengths of pipe at distances not exceeding
18 metres unless otherwise approved by the Consultant.
All flexible couplings and expansion joints must be selected so that the working
pressure, temperature and movement encountered will not be more than 75% of that
allowable for the joint selected. One side of the joints must have all piping and/or
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-70/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
adjacent equipment adequately anchored. The other side must be supported,
aligned and guided so as to allow free movement without imposing unnecessary
stresses on the joints.
Expansion joints shall have integral duck flanges. They shall have individual solid
steel ring reinforced with a carcass of highest grade woven cotton or acceptable
synthetic fibre. Joints shall be constructed to pipe line size and to meet working
pressure conditions, face measurements etc., as designated. They shall be of an
arch type construction with the number of arches (corrugations) dependant on
projected movement. All joints must be finish-coated with eypalon paint to prevent
ozone attach. Split back or retaining rings shall be furnished. Joints size 2” and
below shall have threaded malleable iron unions on both sides. All joints shall be
suitable for minimum test pressure of none and a half times the working pressure or
225 ft. of water, whichever is higher.
Flexible connections shall be provided to Fans, AHUs, FCUs, pumps, chillers etc. in
order to prevent transmission of vibration to pipework.
Automatic Air Vents
At all high points in the system, an automatic air vent shall be fitted. Air vents shall
be of the float type. The size and working pressure shall be as per the schedule.
Automatic air vents shall be connected to the nearest drain.
Air Cocks and Bottles
Air bottles shall be formed from 1.5 m. length of pipe one size larger than the pipe
being vented. A 15 mm. pipe fitted with 15 mm. needle valve shall be welded into top
and taken to low level. These items shall be fitted so that they are not concealed and
are readily accessible. Where equipment is cased, vents shall be extended so that
they can be operated from the outside of the casing.
Pipe Supports, Hangers and Anchors
All supports and hangers for steel piping shall be ferrous. Supports for copper pipes
shall be non-ferrous and chromium plated, wherever specified. Brackets or supports
shall be set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valves, flanges or other
fittings requiring maintenance.
All pipe work shall be supported by means of approved clips or hangers at centres as
detailed. In the event of two or more pipes being carried by a single support, the
spacing shall be of a shorter interval.
All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging. Unless
otherwise indicated, pipe changers shall be spaced as follows:
a. 20 to 32 mm.
b. 40 to 100 mm.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
-
Not over 2.4 m. apart Not over 3.0 m. apart -
10 mm. rods
15 mm. rods
S-22-71/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
c. Over 100 mm.
-
Not over 3.6 m. apart -
22 mm. rods
Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or
distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be
supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum
of dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are
removed.
All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc., necessary for fastening of hangers shall be
furnished by the Contractor. All hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to be
supported. Oversized hangers shall not be permitted. Details of hangers and
supports to be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
before fitting. All hangers shall be provided with lock-nuts and have provision for
vertical adjustment of pipes.
Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trapeze type hangers of steel
construction. Individual horizontal piping shall be supported by hangers consisting of
malleable split rings with malleable iron sockets or steel clevis type hangers or roller
hangers where specified.
Pipe standard with base flange and adjustable type yokes shall be used for pipes
supported from the floor. Vertical piping shall have heavy wrought iron or steel
clamps securely bolted on the piping with the end extension bearings on the building
construction.
Piping shall be anchored where required to localise expansion or to prevent undue
strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and
shall be heavy forged or welded construction of approved design.
Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have treated hardwood or plastic inserts
of approved make or high density insulation capable of withstanding the compression
and allowing the hanger to support the pipe without any metal to metal contact.
All pipe supports hangers and anchors etc., are to be painted with two coats of an
approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel
paint of grey colour or as approved by the Engineer.
Pipe Sleeves
All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have sleeves having an
internal diameter at least 25 mm. larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of
the insulation for insulated services. All the building expansion joints shall also be
provided with pipe sleeves.
The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab and pipe
sleeves around them shall be projected minimum 50 mm. on either sides of the wall,
floor and roof slab.
Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of 22 gauge
galvanized sheet steel set flush with finished wall surfaces.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-72/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Flashing Sleeves
Flashing sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through water proof
membranes. Flashing sleeves details shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval, but generally, they shall be provided with an integral flange set into the
membrane. The associated pipes shall have flange and shield which shall extend
beyond the insert and be sealed with approved mastic.
Testing of Chilled Water Pipe Work
The Works Contractor shall carry out hydraulic and performance tests, under actual
conditions, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer before any thermal insulation is
applied.
The whole chilled water pipe work system shall be hydraulically tested to a pressure
equivalent to one and a half times the maximum working pressure or ten
atmospheres, whichever is higher. All flexible/ expansion joints shall be restrained to
prevent axial stretch and all control subject to damage shall be isolated at the time of
the pressure test. The indicated pressure shall be maintained for 4 hours without
further application of pressure and without visible leakage or a drop in the indicated
pressure.
When a section of pipe work is complete and ready for testing, it shall be plugged
and then slowly and carefully charged with water, allowing all air to escape and
avoiding all shock or water hammer. The Works Contractor shall make arrangements
for all water used in the test to be properly drained away.
Pipe work which fails under test, due to pressure loss or visible leakage, shall be
relieved of pressure and all faulty joints or other defects made good.
Remedial work and test shall be repeated until the systems are tested successfully. If
in the opinion of the Engineer, damage has been caused during the remedial work, or
faulty materials have been used, the section under test will be condemned. The
installation shall then be removed, cleared from site, replaced with new materials and
re-tested as specified.
The General Works Contractor shall provide the water and electricity supplies
necessary for testing purposes.
Refrigerant Pipe Work and Fittings
Refrigerant pipe work shall be refrigerant quality copper tube to BS 2871 Table 2
(Material C106), fully annealed and internally degreased and cleaned, with capillary
fittings.
Piping shall be supported to prevent strains or distortion in the connected equipment,
valves and control valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of
equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without
requiring additional supports after these items are removed.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-73/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have UPVC sleeves of an
internal diameter at least 25 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of the
insulation for insulated services. All building expansion joints shall also be provided
with pipe sleeves.
The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab and pipe
sleeves through them shall be projected minimum 50 mm on either side of the walls,
floor and roof slab.
Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of U. P. V. C.
set flush with finished wall surfaces.
Joints in copper pipe shall be flanged, flared (up to 19.05 mm O. D. only) or brazed
(with or without capillary fittings). Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of
the HVCA Code of Practice – Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe and
Sheet.
Screwed joints shall not be accepted in refrigerant pipes except on the equipment
accessories. In such cases the threads shall either be of taper form and used in
conjunction with PTFE tape or an anaerobic sealant, or of parallel form associated
with machined joint faces and a suitable joint.
Copper pipe work shall be used as feed piping for all pressure gauge or similar
fittings.
Compression fittings shall not be accepted on refrigerant pipe work.
Refrigerant pipe work shall not be arranged for running compressors in parallel (i.e.
with common suction and/or discharge in pipes). The use of a number of
compressors each having an independent refrigerant circuit in a common evaporator
shall be permitted provided pressure tests between adjacent refrigerant circuits in the
evaporator are carried out during manufacture.
The pipe work shall be designed so that oil in the refrigerant leaving the compressor
(and passing any oil separator fitted) shall be carried through the system and back to
the compressor at the lowest stage of capacity unloading.
Pipe work shall be firmly supported and secured to minimise vibration. Vibration
eliminators shall be fitted to the compressor suction and discharge pipes to minimise
transmission of vibration or noise.
All refrigerant equipment shall have a strength and leakage pressure test after
manufacture in accordance with the Table below:
Refrigerant
R134a
High Side
kPa
3000
Low Side
kPa
1700
A pressure test equal to the low test pressure quoted in the table of equipment test
pressures shall be applied to the refrigerant system after all piping has been fitted.
This test shall be in addition to the pressure test on each unit at completion of the
manufacture.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-74/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Provision shall be made for the supply of up to 3 sets of pressure test sheets for
each machine and system. It shall be the Works Contractor‟s responsibility to ensure
the sheet content and presentation is acceptable to the Engineer.
Refrigerant pipe work shall be insulated in accordance with QGEWC requirements.
Manufacturer‟s recommendations shall likewise be considered.
Condensate Drain Piping
Condensate drains shall be provided in copper pipes to BS 2871 Part 1 Table „X‟
above ground, UPVC to BS 5255 for buried pipes and shall be adequately supported
along their length. All condensate drains shall be fitted with 75mm deep trap with dirt
pocket and removable plug provided and extended to the nearest drains/soakaways
as shown in the drawings. Removable plugs shall be provided at every change in
direction to allow rodding access.
All drain pipes shall be pressure tested at 6.0meter of water before applying
insulation or covering the pipes. Drain test plugs with expandable rubber seal shall
be used for the purpose of testing.
Condensate drains within the building and on the roof shall be insulated with 10mm
thick rubber foam and weather proofed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All exposed pipes external to the building shall be painted with two coats of paint
matching with the building colour.
22.2.19
INSULATION
Scope
The work included in this specification consists of furnishing all labour, materials,
accessories and equipment necessary for the insulation of all air conditioning
systems and mechanical equipment. Said work shall be completed in strict
accordance with the insulation section of the specification.
General
All insulation shall be applied in a workman like manner by skilled workmen regularly
engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall be applied to clean and dry surfaces
after tests and approvals required by this specification have been completed.
On cold surfaces where a vapour barrier must be maintained, insulation shall be
applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapour seal. All hangers,
supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be
insulated and vapour sealed to prevent condensation. All surface finishes shall be
extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of
insulation.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-75/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
All pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings
or sleeves, except where firestop materials are required.
Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping
insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe
and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent
insulation and shall be vapour sealed as required.
Surface Burning Characteristics
All insulation shall have surface burning characteristic ratings as tested by ASTM E84, UL 723 or NFPA 255 not exceeding;
Flame Spread
Smoke Developed
25
50
Composite shall include insulation, jacketing and adhesive used to secure jacketing
or facing. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic,
cement, tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above.
Cold Piping Insulation
Cold piping shall include chilled water piping, refrigerant suction and condensate
drain piping.
a) General
i) Thermal insulation to pipe work shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in
accordance with this Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipe
work prior to the witnessing of the pipe work pressure test by the Engineer and
authorized in writing by the Engineer giving clear instructions for further insulation
to be applied. In order that tests may be made of the thickness of insulation
applied to each pipe size, plant and equipment, the Works Contractor shall allow
for the cost of cutting away one section for each size of pipe, plant and
equipment for inspection by the Engineer. If the insulation proves to be of the
thickness specified then the cut section shall be made good and the whole
installation completed. Should any cut section show a deficiency in thickness,
further section shall be cut at the direction of the Engineer for inspection. If a
deficiency in thickness, further sections shall be cut at the direction of the
Engineer for inspection. If a deficiency in thickness or any other defects are
found, the Works Contractor shall remove the whole of the insulation installed or
as the Engineer directs and then shall supply, deliver and apply new insulation
complying with Specification and restore it to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
This work shall be carried out by the Works Contractor at his own expense.
ii) Thermal insulation shall be applied to all pumps, valves, strainers, non-return
valves, draincocks, automatic air vents and bosses for gauges/test points.
Insulation of these components in the pipe work system up to and including 50
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-76/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
mm. diameter pipe work shall be carried out using sectional insulation cut to suit
and of the same size as the line pipe work. Components within the pipe work
system 80 mm. diameter and above, as well as all flanged components upto 50
diameter, shall have purpose made boxes applied. Each valve, strainer and NRV
boxes shall be made using 0.67 mm. aluminium sheet with 50 mm. fibreglass
insulation fastened tot he inside of the valve box with approved adhesive. Each
valve box shall be hinged along one side with a minimum of three fastening clips
on the other side. Samples of boxes shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval and approved received in writing prior to installation.
iii) No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings, vertical or horizontal
builder‟s work shafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.
iv) All fibre glass section insulation shall have a density of not less than 96
kilogrammes/m3 and a thermal conductivity of not greater than 0.037 w/m20 C.
All pipe work insulation shall be applied to the pipe work using proprietary brand
adhesive approved by the Engineer.
b) Pipe Work Exposed and Within the Plant Room
Thermal insulation shall be 50 mm.for pipes up to 100mm and 75mm for 150mm and
above thick aluminium foiled faced preformed sectional glass fibre and shall be
applied to all pipe work, valves, flanges and fittings in accordance with this
Specification in a neat and workmanlike fashion. Each joint shall be sealed using 75
mm. wide aluminium foil adhesive tape and the whole covered in 60z heavy duty
glass cloth and all joints lapped and sealed with approved vapour seal. Vapour seal,
first coat, shall be applied by dipping the cloth into the vapour seal prior to applying to
the pipe work insulation. The second coat of vapour seal shall be applied with brush.
Finally, the installation shall be finished with a system of 0.67 mm. thickness
aluminium smooth polished sheet cladding, cut and formed into sections to suit the
extreme outside dimensions of the insulated work for straight runs. Each length of
aluminium cladding shall have a “snap-lock” fixing.
Cladding sections shall be finally arranged with the longitudinal seams turned away
from the normal working area. Bends, tapers, tees, other fittings, valves and pump
bodies shall be encased in specially pressed or otherwise formed aluminium single
sections. Circular bends over 200 mm. outside diameter may be encased in a
maximum of 3 No. equal segmental pressed or formed sections.
c) Pipe Work Within the Building
i) Thermal insulation shall be 50 mm thick aluminium foil faced preformed sectional
glass fibre and shall be applied to all pipe work, flanges and fittings in accordance
with this specification in a neat and workmanlike fashion. Each section shall be
secured to the pipe work by applying an approved adhesive of high quality to the
surfaces of both pipework and insulation section. The sections shall be fixed in
place immediately. Note that the adhesive shall also applied to the edges of the
fibreglass section.
ii) All joints shall be sealed using 75 mm. wide aluminium adhesive tape. The
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-77/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
insulation shall then be covered with high quality glass cloth of 200 gm/sq.m.
quality, sealed with an approved vapour seal.
iii) The glass cloth shall be soaked in an approved weather proofing compound and
wrapped carefully around the insulation to provide a smooth surface free from
wrinkles and gaps. There should be a minimum 50 mm. overlap at transverse and
longitudinal glass cloth joints.
iv) The second coat of vapour seal shall be applied after the first coat has dried.
v) When the pipe work insulation is exposed to view within the building, the insulation
shall be finished with one coat of rubberised paint of a colour approved by the
Engineer.
vi) All pipe work within the plant room shall be finished with a system of 0.67mm
thickness aluminium smooth polished sheet cladding.
d)Vapour Seal and Adhesives
i) The vapour seal material shall be fire resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant and
have anti-rodent and anti-fungal properties. Bitumen based products shall not be
used.
ii) The vapour seal material must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to use.
Duct Work Insulation
Conditioned air, for the purpose of this specification, shall consist of air that is cooled.
Both supply and return duct work as well as outside air intake ductwork shall be
insulated.
a) General
i) Thermal insulation to ductwork shall be carried out neatly and to a high grade
quality by skilled workers experienced in the trade, and strictly in accordance with
following specification.
ii) No thermal insulation shall be applied on any ductwork prior to inspection by the
Engineer and a site inspection report signed by the Engineer authorizing the
application of thermal insulation. As and when necessary, joints must be left
uncovered until tests are carried out successfully.
iii) No insulation shall be enclosed in false ceilings, vertical or horizontal builder‟s
work shafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.
iv) Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any
building shall, when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 4, be classified noncombustible. Thermal insulating materials used within any building shall be free
from substances which in the event of a fire would generate appreciable
quantities of smoke, noxious or toxic fumes.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-78/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
v) All openings in roof slabs and walls for passing ducts shall be sealed and/or
weatherproofed suitably. Sleeves shall be provided where ducts pass through
masonry walls or partitions.
vi) All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, then treated with an approved
corrosion inhibitor before insulation is applied. Note that the inhibitor coating
would not be required for galvanized surfaces.
vii) Insulation shall be applied to all ductwork, volume control dampers, silencers,
mixing boxes, fans, cooler casings and other items of equipment contained within
the Specification detailed below.
viii) The Works Contractor shall allow for the cost of sampling in-place insulation from
ductwork or plants, for inspection by the Engineer. Any sample found not in
accordance with the approved material should be replaced at the Works
Contractor‟s expenses.
ix) All fibreglass rigid slabs shall have a density of not less than 48 kg/m3 and a
thermal conductivity not greater than 0.037 W/M2.
x) Where specifically stated, insulation shall be additionally secured using screwed
thread type plastic hangers glued to the ductwork at 500 mm. centres. The
insulation shall be restrained by push-on circular plastic discs terminated below
the external surface of the insulation after which any projecting threads shall be
cut level with the insulation. Ends and edges of sheets shall be lapped sufficiently
and sealed where insulated duct enters or leaves the building.
xi) Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proofed against rotting, mould
and fungal growth and attack by vermin, be non-hygroscopic and in all respects
be suitable for continuous use through the range of operating temperatures and
within the environment indicated.
b) Supply and Return Ductwork Within the Building
i) Rectangular supply air ductwork within air conditioned zones shall be insulated
using 25 mm. rigid fibreglass slabs covered with reinforced aluminium foil.
Panels shall be secured to the ductwork by applying an approved high quality
adhesive to the surfaces of both the ductwork and insulation panel. Fibreglass
matts shall be used for circular ducts instead of fibreglass slabs. Insulation shall
also have 25 mm. wide galvanized bands secured at 600 mm. center to center for
circular ducts. 48 kg/m3 density.
ii) All insulation joints shall be sealed using 75 mm. wide minimum aluminium tape.
The insulation shall then be covered with high quality glass cloth of 200 gm/sq. m.
quality and sealed with an approved vapour seal .
iii) The glass cloth shall be soaked in an approved weather proofing compound and
wrapped carefully to provide a smooth surface, free from wrinkles and gaps.
There should be a minimum 50 mm. overlap at transverse and longitudinal glass
cloth joints. The second coat of vapour seal shall be applied after drying of the
first coat.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-79/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
iv) All supply and return ductwork running in unconditioned space shall be insulated
using 50 mm. foil backed rigid fibreglass panels.
v) Exhaust and fresh air duct traversing conditioned space shall be insulated using
25 mm. foil backed rigid fibre glass panels.
Alternatively cross link polyethylene insulation together with factory applied
aluminium foil can be utilized for internal duct only .
The insulation shall be self adhesive and thickness shall be minimum 15 mm
c) Supply and Return Air Ductwork outside the Building
All rectangular supply and return air ductwork external to the building shall be
insulated using 50 mm.foil backed rigid fibre glass panels secured to the ductwork
using an approved adhesive and 75 mm. wide minimum aluminium foil tape to cover
the joints. Fibreglass matts shall be used for circular ducts. On ducts with dimensions
larger above 600 mm. insulation shall have plastic clips riveted to the ducts on the
underside only. Insulation shall also have 25 mm. wide galvanized bands secured at
600 mm center for circular ducts. The whole installation shall be securely wrapped in
200 gm/m2 glass cloth, all joints lapped and sealed with adhesive. Two coats of
approved vapour seal shall be applied ensuring first class penetration into the glass
cloth.
d) Vapour Seal and Adhesive
i) The vapour seal material shall be fire resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant, and
have anti-rodent and anti-fungal properties.
ii) Bitumen based products shall not be used.
iii) The vapour seal material must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to use.
22.2.20
BUILDER’S WORK
The Contractor shall carry out the cutting of holes and making them good where
pipes, conduits, cable and cable trays are passing through the walls, floor and roof
slabs as measured in the Bill of Quantities.
The Contractor shall provide cross-over bridges as shown on the drawings. Bridges
details shall be agreed with the Architect and Engineer.
Two sets of builders work drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval.
22.2.21
PAINTING AND FINISHING
All steel work in connection with pipe supports exposed to the elements are to be
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-80/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
painted with two coats of a rust preventive paint approved by the Engineer,
preferably zinc rich primer, followed by one undercoat and one topcoat.
All exposed metal surfaces of air conditioning and electrical apparatus, motors,
guards, pipe work, hangers etc. must be galvanized and painted with one coat of
under-coat and two coats of enamel paint finish to a colour approved by the
Engineer.
After completion of the installation, the entire work shall be checked for finish and
appearance. Any portion of work found damaged, unpainted or not finished to the
satisfaction of the Engineer shall be rectified.
22.2.22
IDENTIFICATION/COLOUR CODING
All insulated and non-insulated pipe work and ductwork shall be identified by colour
codes indicated and basic colour identification bands to BS 1710 (1984).
The safety colour and code indication bands shall be 100 mm. wide between two
basic colour identification bands each of length 150 mm. The identification shall be
at centres of not more than 6 meters and adjacent to all valves, items of plant,
changes in direction and both sides where the pipework passes through walls, floors,
etc. and all service access points.
Pipe and ductwork sizes, content flow and return (F & R) indication and direction of
flow arrows in black shall be applied on the basic colour identification band as
detailed in Tables 1, 2 and Appendix „D‟ of BS 1710 (1984).
The safety colour, contents, code and colour identification bands shall be applied by
means of self adhesive coloured or printed tape.
Flow and return (F& R) and direction of flow arrows shall be in black with letter 25
mm. high on 50 mm. wide white self adhesive tape applied in a continuous band
around the pipe insulation.
Pipe contents shall be in black lettering 25 mm. on 50 mm. wide clear self adhesive
labels.
The materials employed shall be as for pipe work identification, i.e. self adhesive
plastic.
All the lettering and wording shall be in English.
Where the pipe work/ductwork contents constitute a hazard, a symbol as given in BS
1710 (1984) should be added to the type colour.
The hazard information shall be given as briefly as possible, using commonly
accepted forms such as a number indicating which floor of the building.
Where the identification of the space is by room number this must be agreed with the
user who otherwise may have numbered the rooms differently
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-81/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2.23
SECTION 22
ELECTRICAL WORKS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL WORKS
General
All electrical works and materials shall be as described under the Electrical
specifications and shall conform to the regulations of Ministry of Electricity and
Water.
All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue to
function without damage to itself or otherwise, if the voltage and/or frequency vary
within the following tolerances:
i. Voltage
ii. Frequency
-
+ 6%
+ 0.3%
All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and prolonged
operation within the ambient temperature or exposed condition to the atmosphere
where they are installed to operate. Allowance for the local high ambient
temperature shall be made by reducing the permitted rise of temperature above
ambient or by derating the capacity and ratings.
Electrical Motors
All motors shall be designed to suit the maximum temperature of air passing over the
motors and the additional temperature rise caused by exposure to the sun. The type
of winding insulation shall, however, be not less than Class „B‟. The motors for
exhaust fans shall have the insulation suitable to operate on 500 C. ambient
temperature.
All motors shall be wound for 240 volts, single phase, or 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz,
A.C. system. Any motors brought to site not complying with above mentioned voltage
and insulation requirements shall not be accepted.
Electrical Wiring
All power cabling up to and including isolators to the control panels in plant rooms.
Pump room, Chiller yard roof and fan controlled isolator as indicated on the drawing
shall be carried out by the Electrical Contractor. The electric supply shall be
terminated into the main incomer of the control panel/isolator. It is the A.C.
Contractor‟s responsibility to continue the connections from the isolator upto all the
air conditioning and ventilation units.
The A.C. Contractor shall be responsible for complete electrical equipment/controls
associated with the Air conditioning and Ventilation works. A.C. Contractor‟s scope
of works shall include but not be limited to the following:
All control wiring necessary conduits, cables, cable trays etc., for the air conditioning
equipment, controls and remote emergency push buttons (if required), etc. All HVAC
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-82/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
control components such as flow switches, temperature/humidity sensors,
thermostats etc., are to be wired to control panel and other associated components
using armoured cable on galvanized cable rack/tray. Power cabling from AHU/FCU
control panel to AHUs/FCUs,
control panel to pumps, isolator to chillers,
pressurization unit and power cabling from isolators to fans etc. shall be carried out
by the A.C. Contractor. (For continuity, refer electrical drawings and specifications).
Specification for conduits, cables, cable trays to conform to electrical specifications.
Starters
All three phase motors for A.C. units shall be provided with D.O.L./Star Delta starters
having the following facilities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
To disconnect the supply in the event of power failure or voltage drop
To protect the motor from overload in each phase.
Start/stop push button.
ON/OFF/TRIP indicating lamp.
Single phase preventer
All three phase starters shall have thermal overload protection in each phase as well
as under voltage reset plus two auxiliary normal open contacts.
Isolators
All electrical drives shall have local isolators, weather proof. Isolators shall be of
reputed manufacturers, up to Engineer‟s approval.
Earthing
All motors starting equipment panels shall have their frames, carcasses and all metal
parts effectively and continuously connected to the general mass of the earth.
Testing
All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to despatch, for loose
connections, correct terminations and compliance with wiring diagrams. In addition,
functional checks shall be carried out in the works to ensure that all interlocking and
sequencing is in accordance with the performance requirements of the specification.
The Engineer shall be given 7 days written notice of such tests so that he may attend
if he so desires.
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses
fitted, the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test of 2.5 Kv for one minutes,
across the following points:
1. Phase to phase
2. Phase to neutral
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-83/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
3. Phase to earth
4. Neutral to earth
Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the
Engineer within fourteen days of the test.
MCC panel
All motor starters shall be grouped and housed with motor control centre (MCC) panels
as indicated upon the drawings. Each MCC panel shall be provided with a main
incoming MCCB capable of carrying the full-load current.
Each starter shall comprise as a minimum:
1. On load triple-pole MCCB with two normally open and one normally closed
auxiliary switches. The MCCB shall be mechanically interlocked with the starter
component door and capable of breaking the motor starting current and of making
onto a fault located at the motor terminals. Provisions shall be made for padlocking
the MCCB in the 'OFF' position.
2. Four-pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three normally
closed auxiliary contracts. All the auxiliary contacts shall be wired down to the
starter terminal block.
3. One triple-pole thermal over current relay incorporating over current (with
adjustable trip settings), phase sequence and lost phase protection. An external
panel fascia mechanical hand reset button is also to be provided.
4. An appropriately rated (6 A) MCB and one copper link provided to protect the
controls power circuit.
5. Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop push buttons and a
local/remote/auto selector switch (hand/off/auto) as required. Each starter control
wiring terminal block shall include terminals for connection of remote push buttons,
automatic control circuits and local / remote emergency stop push buttons.
6. Where more than one motor with a duty/standby (duty/backup) function are used,
the starter control wiring shall be arranged to automatically change duty upon a
fault condition tripping the manually selected duty motor. A duty/standby sequence
selector switch shall also be provided for automatic timed (hours run) duty sharing
between the selected motors.
7. Each starter shall be fitted with transformer operated lamps indicating
i.Motor running (green)
ii.Motor stopped (red)
iii.Overload tripped (amber)
8. Each starter shall be fitted with an ammeter and selector switch for motors of rating
3 kW and above.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-84/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
9. Each starter to be equipped with labels both in English and Arabic giving drive
designation, plant number and control operation.
10. Each starter shall include the wiring terminals and control relays as necessary to
achieve electrical interlocking as may be specified elsewhere.
Starter units that include manual operation facilities shall have push buttons provided
for both starting and stopping operations, together with auxiliary contacts for remote
indicator lights where specified. Starter units arranged for automatic operation shall
have hand/off/auto controls and remote push buttons.
All Star-Delta starters shall be provided with mechanical and electrical interlocks
between the star and delta contactors to prevent short circuiting. Star-Delta starters
shall also be provided adjustable time-delay devices for the automatic change-over
from star to delta.
a. Enclosures
MCC Panels enclosures shall be constructed of minimum 2mm thick electrogalvanized coated steel plate with a high quality solid polyester enamel electrostatic
spray paint finish.
Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP54.
All MCC panels shall be arranged for front access for cabling and maintenance
operations to be carried out and be equipped with robust hinged lift-off doors (only by
means of a tool). Dust and damp proof gaskets shall be provided around the door
panel edges. Each access door with MCCB located behind shall be fitted with lockable
cam type chromium plated handle that shall be mechanically interlocked with the
starting MCCB to require electrical isolation before the door can be opened.
b. Internal Wiring
The MCC panels shall be fully wired internally at the manufacturer works to terminal
strips.
The control panel internal wiring shall accord with BS 7671:2008. All internal wiring of
the control panel shall utilize 600/1000V grade single core, circular Tri Rated PVC
(heat resistant) insulated cables of appropriate current carrying capacity complying with
BS 6231.
The control circuits live conductors shall be wired using white coloured insulation while
the neutral conductors shall have black coloured insulation.
All cabling within the panel shall be run within appropriately sized purpose made
slotted, plastic trunking, fitted with appropriate retaining clips and arranged to run
continuously around inside the panel. Cables to items of control gear shall then leave
the trunking slots adjacent to their location, with any quantity of cables from the
trunking to control item being formed into a loom using flexible plastic loom wraps.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-85/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
c. Fixings
No item of equipment secured within the control panel shall incur penetration of the
main cabinet enclosure for riveting, bolting, etc.
All fixings shall be achieved with adequately sized brass bolts and nuts (or threaded
inserts).
Any fixing bolt visible from the front face of the panel shall be mushroom headed and
bright chromium plated with similar sized visible bolt heads generally used, with the
possible exception of main panel fascia plate retaining bolts which may be larger.
d. Identification and Referencing
Each isolator switch, indicator lamp and panel component shall have its function clearly
identified and labelled.
Adjacent to each external connections terminal block shall be fixed a label identifying
each field device to be connected with each wiring terminal individually referenced to
the main wiring diagram. Each circuit breaker and starter shall be labelled to define the
item protected and the rating or overload settings to be used.
For ease of tracing cabling, at each termination position the cable shall be identified
with a numbered Helerman cable identification ferrule corresponding to the workshop
wiring diagram provided with the control panel.
All label plaques shall be screw fixed engraved black traffolyte having white substrate
with clear and legible letters / numbers, graded in size for emphasis and positive
identification. The intended labelling text and formats shall in all cases be submitted to
the Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing. Warning labels shall be provided
in all compartments and spaces fixed in prominent locations to warn of any dangerous
voltages that may be present eg. 415 V and 240 V.
Engraved traffollyte mimic diagrams plaques shall be provided fixed to all MCC panel
fascia to clearly chart in a single-line format the configuration of electrical connections.
The intended labelling diagram, text and format shall in all cases be submitted to the
Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing.
e. Compensated Equipment
Any motorized valves and damper controlled via a compensated system, shall be
arranged such that a manual selector switch is provided to override compensated
selection and enable manual opening/closing or on/off control, as appropriate. Any
compensator unit mounted within the control cabinet shall remain in the manufacturer's
purpose made enclosure and be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
The panels shall contain all the necessary devices for the automatic restart of units
after power failure where required.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-86/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Approval of Workmanship Standards
The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the Engineer
who shall carry out periodic inspection of completed work and work in progress.
Any work not to the Engineer‟s satisfaction during such inspection shall be replaced
to a standard satisfactory to the Engineer at no cost to the contract for the
subsequent inspection.
Tags and Colour Coding
All equipment shall be properly identified by means of permanent tags. All
components shall be labelled in the control panel as per the approved drawings. All
wires shall be colour coded in accordance with the Electrical regulations of the
Ministry of Electricity & Water. Labelling system shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Wiring Regulations
All installation shall comply with the Electrical regulations of the Ministry of Electricity
& Water.
22.2.24
TEST AND COMISSIONING
A. COMISSIONING SPECIFICATION
General
The contractor is requested to prepare and submit detailed and accurate thorough
test and balance reports about all system included in this scope of work through
selected independent commissioning agency for test and balance. The contractor
shall cover all costs related to agency works needed to complete the required work.
The report shall reflect actual tested and observed conditions of all systems and
components during the test and balance. The report shall be certified, dated and
signed by the certified test and balance engineer.
This section contains general requirement and conditions to selected independent
commissioning and test agencies to inviting them to submit a proposal to act as the
commissioning agent for this project.
The Site consultant must review and approve the Testing and commissioning agent if the
owner delegate consultant for checking and approval
1. Owner Requirement
1.1. In reaching a decision on awarding a contract for the subject commissioning
services, the Owner will consider and evaluate, for each proponent, the
following:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-87/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
1. Experience and qualifications
2. The proposal quality
3. The references submitted
4. The proposed fee
5. Any other applicable factors
1.2. The Owner reserves the right to negotiate and accept any proposal, to reject
any or all proposals, and to offer to accept any proposal subject to the
deletion of any item or group of items of work from the scope of work.
However, in such a case, the scope of work and fees proposed by the Owner
are subject to the agreement of the proponent.
1.3. The proponent shall be prepared to attend an interview as part of the
Owner‟s evaluation of the proposals submitted. The Owner may request a
presentation identifying company qualifications, key staff, relevant
experience, and the suggested approach to undertaking this project. In
addition, the proponent shall be prepared to provide a sample of
documentation created for previous commissioning services projects
including commissioning reports and systems manuals.
1.4. The proponent shall bear all costs associated with preparing for and
attending such an interview and presentation. Failure to attend when
requested will disqualify the company from being selected to provide
commissioning services for this project.
1.5. In the event that any equipment or service provided by the successful
proponent under a contract or purchase order should not conform to the
requirements or specifications in the contract, the Owner may reject such
equipment or service. In such an event, the Owner shall instruct the company
to remove any rejected equipment without expense to the Owner, and to
replace it with such equipment as conforms to contractual requirements,
and/or to provide additional or alternative services that conform to contractual
requirements.
2. Qualifications and Experience of Commissioning Agency
1. At a minimum, the proponent company‟s qualifications and experience shall
include the following:
a. Membership in the AABC Commissioning Group (ACG) and
commissioning certification from that organization.
b. At least 10 years of experience with the types of building, HVAC and
control systems included in this project.
c. Knowledge of operations and maintenance requirements.
d. A thorough knowledge of testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB)
procedures and methods.
e. Knowledge and experience with applicable life safety codes, regulations,
and procedures.
f. Successful experience working with multi-disciplinary teams,
g. Excellent oral and written communications skills.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-88/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
3. Required Scope of Commissioning Services
Commissioning services are to be provided in two(2) phases: acceptance and
post-acceptance, in accordance with the ACG Commissioning Guideline.
1. During the acceptance phase the commissioning agency shall carry out the
following scope of work:
a. Review and inspect, on a sample basis, the testing, adjusting and
balancing work that has been carried out by another agency.
b. Conduct functional performance testing of sub-systems, systems, and
interactions between systems, leading to acceptance of the completed
work. Document results of all tests witnessed.
c. Organize and direct the training of O & M personnel.
d. Videotape O&M staff training sessions.
2. During the post-acceptance phase the commissioning agency shall carry out
the following scope of work:
a. Conduct functional performance testing of sub-systems, systems, and
interactions between systems that could not be carried out prior to
acceptance due to unsuitable weather conditions.
b. Prepare and submit a final commissioning report.
c. Provide follow-up for quality performance during the guarantee period.
3. The scope of work as described in Articles 1 through 2 shall be provided for
the following base building systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Supply air
Return air
Exhaust air
Chilled water
HVAC control system
B. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIESFOR HVAC COMMISSIONING
1. Commissioning of HVAC Systems
1.1 Commissioning Agency
The commissioning agency (CA) has been contracted directly with the owner and
contractor for this project. The CA has overall responsibility for planning and
coordinating the commissioning process. However commissioning involves all
parties to the design and construction process, including the contractor.
1.2 Contractor Responsibility
This Section of the specifications defines the contractors responsibilities with respect
to the commissioning process. Each contractor and sub-contractor shall review this
Section, and shall include in their bids for carrying out the work described, as it
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-89/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
applies to each Division and Section of these specifications, individually and
collectively.
1.3 Description of Work
The purpose of the commissioning process is to provide the owner/operator of the
facility with assurance that the mechanical systems have been installed according to
the contract documents, and operate within the performance guidelines set out in the
design intent documents (DID) and these specifications. The CA will provide the
owner/contractor with an unbiased, objective view of the system‟s installation,
operation, and performance. The commissioning process does not take away or
reduce the responsibility of the installing contractors to provide a finished product,
installed and fully functional in accordance with the contract documents.
Commissioning is intended to enhance the quality of system start-up and aid in
the orderly completion and transfer of systems for beneficial use by the owner. The
CA will be the leader of the commissioning team, planning and coordinating all
commissioning activities in conjunction with the design professionals, construction
manager, subcontractors, manufacturers and equipment suppliers.
The General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, all Division 15 sub contractors,
and the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for cooperating, and coordinating
their work, with the CA. They shall also be responsible for carrying out all the
physical activities required for installation of components and systems, and operating
them during the commissioning process as required in this Section.
1.4 Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and
supplementary conditions, general mechanical provisions and applicable Divisions
15 and 16 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.5 References
Associated Air Balance Council Commissioning Guideline
2. Products
2.1 HVAC Systems to be Commissioned
HVAC systems installed under this contract are to be inspected, tested, signed off as
complete and operational, and operated for commissioning agency verification as
described in Part 3 of this Section.
This includes, but is not necessarily limited to the work listed for each system. The
foregoing includes all the following:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-90/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
1. Duct and air-handling systems .work includes installation inspections and
checks; confirmation of flow balancing completion; leak testing as applicable;
seismic restraints installation certification.
2. Chiller(s).work includes installation inspections and checks (including seismic
restraints installation certification); checkout and startup by manufacturers
representative; documented performance measurements including capacity,
evaporator and condenser flows, motor amperage, controls operation, and
sound levels.
3. Refrigeration Compressor/Condensing Unit(s).Work includes installation
inspection and checks (including seismic restraints installation certification);
checkout and startup by manufacturers representative as specified;
documented performance measurements including capacity, evaporator
and condenser pressures, motor current draw, and controls operation.
4. Pumps. Work includes documented checks on alignment, rotation, motor
current draw, flows and pressures.
5. Supply, Return, Relief and Exhaust Fans .Work includes checks on
installation (including seismic restraints, dampers and other accessories),
rotation, sound levels, motor current draw, and airflows and pressures.
6. Air Handling Units (both packaged and built-up).Work includes installation
inspections and checks (including seismic restraints installation certification);
checkout and startup by manufacturers representative as specified;
documented capacity tests, for heating, cooling, air flow and static
pressures; operation of all controls; sound level.
7. Air Terminal Devices. Work includes installation inspections and checks;
for VAV units, flow adjustments and calibration coordinated with controls and
air balancing; controls operation including flow modulation, reheat, controls
responses.
8. Fan-coil Units. Work includes installation inspections and checks;
performance and controls checks.
The contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all work required for
commissioning these systems that is defined as a contractor responsibility in Part
3 of this Section.
2.2 System Verification Checklists
This specification contains the system verification checklists as listed below:
SVC#1,
SVC#3,
SVC#4,
SVC#5,
SVC#6,
SVC#7,
SVC#8,
Chiller
Pumps
Supply fan
Return fan
Exhaust fan
Coils
Air-handling unit, liquid heat/cool
2.3 Functional Performance Test Checklists
This specification contains functional performance test checklists as listed below:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-91/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
FPT#1, Chilled water system, including hydronic distribution system.
FPT#2, Constant volume air distribution system.
FPT#3, Air make-up and exhaust system.
2.4 Members of the Commissioning Team
The commissioning team will consist of representatives of the following:
1. Owner
2. End user [if applicable]
3. Architect
4. Mechanical design engineer
5. Electrical design engineer
6. Commissioning agency (CA)
7. General contractor [or construction manager]
8. Mechanical (Div. 15) contractor (M)
9. Electrical (Div. 16) contractor (E)
10. Controls contractor (ATC)
11. Sheet metal contractor
12. Testing, adjusting, and balancing agency (TAB)
13. Owner‟s O&M staff
During the commissioning process, participation of team members will generally
be required as noted in the following table (with abbreviations as noted in
brackets in the preceding list of team members). The mechanical contractor,
indicated by .M., includes all mechanical sub-contractors or suppliers whose
participation is required for commissioning a particular system or piece of
equipment.
3. Execution
3.1.1 Introduction
As noted in 2.2, a multidisciplinary team carries out commissioning. The
commissioning responsibilities of some non-contractor team members during the
construction and acceptance phases of the project are provided here for information,
and to provide some context for the overall process.
3.1.2 Commissioning Agency Responsibilities
The commissioning agency will:
a. Plan, organize and implement the commissioning process as specified herein;
b. Prepare the commissioning plan, and ensure its distribution for review and
comment;
c. Revise the commissioning plan as required during construction;
d. Chair commissioning meetings, and prepare and distribute minutes to all
commissioning team members, whether or not they attended the meeting;
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-92/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
e. In conjunction with the General Contractor, coordinate commissioning
activities among all contractors, sub-trades and suppliers;
f. Monitor system verification checks, and ensure the results are documented
as the checks are done;
g. Monitor controls point-to-point checks done by the controls contractor, and
ensure the results documented as the checks are done;
h. Observe all start-ups and initial system operations tests and checks;
i. Direct the contractors to operate equipment and systems as required to
ensure that all required functional performance tests are carried out for
verification purposes;
j. Witness all functional performance tests and document the results;
k. Prepare and submit a Commissioning Report which documents all checks
and tests done throughout the Commissioning process, and the results
obtained from each; and ensure all required O&M manuals, instructions and
demonstrations are provided to the Owner‟s designated operating staff.
3.2 Commissioning Responsibilities of General Contractor
The General Contractor has responsibility to ensure the overall completion of the
Work. In this regard, he shall:
1. Participate as required in the HVAC commissioning process,
2. Ensure the Mechanical Contractor performs all assigned HVAC commissioning
responsibilities as specified in 3.3,
3. Ensure the testing, adjusting and balancing agency performs HVAC
commissioning responsibilities as listed in 3.3 .
4. Ensure the cooperation and participation in the HVAC commissioning process of
all other sub- contractors as applicable. The General Contractor shall assign a
representative to the commissioning team, and submit the person‟s name to the
commissioning agency, within one (1) month of the award of the contract. The
representative shall have the authority to make decisions on behalf of the general
contractor as they relate to the organization and scheduling of HVAC
commissioning. The representative shall facilitate communications among all
contractors and suppliers and other commissioning team members, and shall
foster the necessary cooperative action. One specific responsibility shall be to
attend commissioning meetings, and ensure action items arising from them
are attended to as required to allow the commissioning process to proceed on
schedule. In the event that any scheduled equipment or system start-ups or
functional performance tests are terminated because the CA or the mechanical
engineer discover deficient or incomplete work, or due to the non-attendance of
required contractor or supplier personnel, the contractor or sub-c0ntractor
responsible for the termination shall also be responsible for paying reasonable
costs of time and travel expenses of any or all of the following representatives
who were physically present for the purpose of witnessing the start-up or the
FPT: the CA, the mechanical engineer, the electrical engineer, and the owner.
The owner may provide a statement to the General Contractor identifying the
specific activity that was terminated, the scheduled date, and a list of those in
attendance, along with their reasonable time and travel expense costs.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-93/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
3.3 Commissioning Responsibilities of TAB Agency
With respect to HVAC commissioning, the TAB agency shall:
1. Include costs for HVAC commissioning requirements in the quoted price.
2. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CA prior to, and during,
on-site TAB work being done.
3. Submit proposed TAB procedures to the CA and mechanical engineer for
review and acceptance.
4. Attend the TAB planning meeting scheduled by the CA. Be prepared to
discuss the procedures that shall be followed in testing, adjusting and
balancing the HVAC system.
5. At the completion of the TAB work, submit the final TAB report to the general
contractor [or construction manager], with copies to the Owner, CA and
mechanical engineer
6. Participate in verification of the TAB report by the CA for verification or
diagnostic purposes. This will consist of repeating a sample (normally 10% to
20%) of the measurements contained in the TAB report as directed by the
CA.
7. Participate in O&M personnel training sessions as scheduled by the CA.
22.2.25
WARRANTY
The Contractor shall guarantee for a period of 400 days after the practical completion
of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any defects due to
defective material and bad workmanship and that any part found defective during this
period shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor.
All the compressors shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years from the date of
practical completion. The Contractor shall also guarantee the performance and
efficiency of the plant and equipment as per the specifications for a similar period of
400 days after the practical completion and if the services of Contractor‟s personnel
are requisitioned during this period, such shall be made available free of cost to the
Client.
The contractor shall guarantee (All AHU‟S , FCU‟S , and equipments, pumps, valves,
fans, etc.) for two years.
If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to
do so another agency at the Contractor‟s entire risk and expense without prejudice to
any rights of the Client
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-94/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2.26
SECTION 22
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
The technical schedules listed hereunder must be filled in and signed by the
Tenderer and they must be attached with the offer with complete engineering
catalogues for every piece of equipment to enable the Engineer to evaluate each
offer. Offers submitted without such information will not be acceptable.
Air cooled Chillers
Reference
:………………………………………………………………..
Quantity
:………………………………………………………………..
Manufacturer/Model :……………………………………………………………..
Refrigerant
:……………………………………………………………..
Type
:……………………………………………………………..
Capacity in TR (Each) :…………………………………………………………..
Cooler Flow USGPM
: …………………………………………………………..
Chilled Water 0 F (In/Out)
:…………………………………………………………..
Scale Factor
:…………………………………………………………..
Permissible pressure drop :…………………………………………………………..
Across cooler (in ft.)
Air on Condenser (0 F)
:…………………………………………………………..
Electrical Characteristics
:…………………………………………………………..
Type of Compressors
:…………………………………………………………..
Number of Compressors
:…………………………………………………………..
Type of Drive
:…………………………………………………………..
Type of Motor
:…………………………………………………………..
Class of Insulation
:…………………………………………………………..
Method of Start
:…………………………………………………………..
F.L.A. of each
:…………………………………………………………..
Compressors
Inrush Amperes of each
Compressor room
AEB-872-10-REV. A
:…………………………………………………………..
S-22-95/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Full load Amperes of
Each Chiller
:…………………………………………………………..
Operating weight/chiller
:…………………………………………………………..
Physical dim.ofchiller :…………………………………………………………..
Overall length, (Ft)
:…………………………………………………………..
Overall width, (Ft)
:…………………………………………………………..
Overall height, (Ft)
:…………………………………………………………..
Total power input (KW)
:…………………………………………………………..
APLV (KW)
:…………………………………………………………..
*1/3 Octave band
sound data
:………………………………………………………….
*Note :
ARI 370 shall be applicable. This data must include all of the
measurement points and should not be restricted to the average of the data points.
Maximum sound pressure
Level at 3m from chiller (dba)…………………………………………………………
Chilled Water Pumps
Reference
:…………………………………………………………..
Serving
:…………………………………………………………..
Type
:…………………………………………………………..
Quantity
:…………………………………………………………..
Manufacturer
:…………………………………………………………..
Model Number
:…………………………………………………………..
Capacity of each, USGPM
:…………………………………………………………..
Head, feet
:…………………………………………………………..
Speed, rpm
:…………………………………………………………..
Power supply
:…………………………………………………………..
B.H.P.
:…………………………………………………………..
Motor Type/H.P./Make
:…………………………………………………………..
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-96/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Class of Insulation
:…………………………………………………………..
Net Weight-each pump set
:…………………………………………………………..
Overall dimension of
foundations
:…………………………………………………………..
Components
Flexible coupling
:…………………………………………………………..
C.I. base plate
:…………………………………………………………..
Rubber isolators
:…………………………………………………………..
Pressure gauges
:…………………………………………………………..
Flexible connections
:…………………………………………………………..
Mechanical seal
:…………………………………………………………..
Controls
a.
Motorised valve
Make/Model
:…………………………………………………………..
Type/Size
:…………………………………………………………..
Power Supply
:…………………………………………………………..
Power Consumption
:…………………………………………………………..
b.
Temperature Controls
Make/Model
:…………………………………………………………..
Type
:…………………………………………………………..
Temperature range
:…………………………………………………………..
Power supply
:…………………………………………………………..
Water Pressurization Unit
Flexible coupling
:…………………………………………………………..
C.I. base plate
:…………………………………………………………..
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-97/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Rubber isolators
:…………………………………………………………..
Pressure gauges
:…………………………………………………………..
Air Handling Units
Reference
:…………………………………………………………..
Location
:…………………………………………………………..
Make/Model
:…………………………………………………………..
Type
:…………………………………………………………..
Total cfm
:…………………………………………………………..
Fresh Air cfm
:…………………………………………………………..
Casing Construction
:…………………………………………………………..
Overall Dimension
:…………………………………………………………..
Cooling Coil
:…………………………………………………………..
Total Cooling Capacity
:…………………………………………………………..
Sensible Cooling
Capacity
:…………………………………………………………..
Coil Face Velocity
:…………………………………………………………..
Coil rows/deep/fins per inch :…………………………………………………………..
Water temperature In/Out
:…………………………………………………………..
Water Flow, USGPM
:…………………………………………………………..
Air on Coil, DB/WB0F :
…………………………………………………………..
Air off Coil, DB/WB0F :
…………………………………………………………..
Pressure drop through
Coil in W.G.
:…………………………………………………………..
1/3 Octave band
Sound data through
Casing panel
AEB-872-10-REV. A
:………………………………………………………….
S-22-98/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Fans
Type / Make
:…………………………………………………………..
Total Static Pressure
:…………………………………………………………..
B.H.P.
:…………………………………………………………..
Motor H.P./ Make
:…………………………………………………………..
Class of Insulation
:…………………………………………………………..
Miscellaneous Information
Type of filters and thickness :…………………………………………………………..
Type of Insulation and
density
:…………………………………………………………..
Controls provided
:…………………………………………………………..
Reheaters Capacity
:…………………………………………………………..
Filters
a.
Fresh Air Filters
Make
:…………………………………………………………..
Type/Model
:…………………………………………………………..
Frame
:…………………………………………………………..
Number of Cells
:…………………………………………………………..
Cell Dimensions
Efficiency
:…………………………………………………………..
Face Velocity (fpm)
:…………………………………………………………..
Pressure drop ,inch of
Water
:…………………………………………………………..
b.
Return Air Filters
Make
:…………………………………………………………..
Model No.
:…………………………………………………………..
Type of Filter
:…………………………………………………………..
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-99/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
Location of Filter
SECTION 22
:…………………………………………………………..
Is the filter:a) Throwaway type
:…………………………………………………………..
b) Replaceable medial type :…………………………………………………………..
c) Cleanable type
:…………………………………………………………..
d) High efficiency filters
:…………………………………………………………..
Area of media sq.ft
:…………………………………………………………..
Face Area Efficiency
:…………………………………………………………..
Face Velocity
:…………………………………………………………..
Initial Pressure drop
(inch of water)
:…………………………………………………………..
Filter life, hours of
operation
:…………………………………………………………..
Fan Coil Unit
Reference
:…………………………………………………………..
Make
:…………………………………………………………..
Type/Model
:…………………………………………………………..
Location
:…………………………………………………………..
Sensible Cooling
Capacity (Each)
:…………………………………………………………..
Total Cooling Cap. (Each)
:…………………………………………………………..
Entering Air Temp. DB,F
:…………………………………………………………..
Entering Air Temp.WB,F
:…………………………………………………………..
Air Quantity, CFM
:…………………………………………………………..
Water Temp. Entering Coil,F :…………………………………………………………..
Water Temp. Leaving Coil,F :…………………………………………………………..
No. of rows deep
AEB-872-10-REV. A
:…………………………………………………………..
S-22-100/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
No. of fins per inch
:…………………………………………………………..
Water Flow rate ,gpm
:…………………………………………………………..
Water Pressure drop ,
Through coil,Pa
:…………………………………………………………..
Power supply
:…………………………………………………………..
Motor kW / Make
:…………………………………………………………..
Overall dimensions
:…………………………………………………………..
Electric Heaters Cap.
:…………………………………………………………..
Insulation
Manufacturer
:…………………………………………………………..
Type
:…………………………………………………………..
Density
:…………………………………………………………..
Finish
:…………………………………………………………..
Ventilation/Exhaust Fans
Reference
:…………………………………………………………..
Location
:…………………………………………………………..
Service
:…………………………………………………………..
Type
:…………………………………………………………..
Make
:…………………………………………………………..
Model
:…………………………………………………………..
Size
:…………………………………………………………..
CFM
:…………………………………………………………..
Static Pressure,Pa
:…………………………………………………………..
Motor Rating / Make
:…………………………………………………………..
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-101/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2.27
SECTION 22
COMMISSIONING SHEETS
COMMISSIONING SHEET OF PACKAGED AIRCOOLED CHILLER
Project:
Chiller Operating Results :
Date
:
Sheet No.of :
Unit Voltage per phase
:
L1
L2
L3
Current Voltage per phase
:
L1
L2
L3
Control Voltage
:
Suction Pressure
:
Circuit – 1
Circuit - 2
Discharge
:
Circuit – 1
Circuit - 2
Oil Pressure
:
Compressor – 1
Compressor – 3
Plant Ref :
Oil Level in Compressor at least 1/ 2?:
Yes
No
Is a liquified line solenoid valve
Operational in each circuit
Yes
No
Compressor - 2
Compressor - 4
:
Do step controls operate
Satisfactorily?
:
Yes
No
Do oil safety controls operate
Satisfactorily?
:
Yes
No
Is there a remote shut down switch?
Does it shut down chiller or pump
:
Yes
No
Super Heat Setting at XV
:
Circuit – 1
Circuit – 2
System thermostat set point
:
0
Ambient temperature
:
0
Unit current amps at
:
A. 100% B. 75% C.50% D.25%
Part winding T-D operate properly
(If any)
:
Yes
No
Do lock-out T-D operate properly
:
Yes
No.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
C
C
S-22-102/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Crankcase Heater Operation
:
Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory
Antifreeze Thermostat
:
Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory
Sequence Selector Operation
:
Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory
Condenser Fan Motor
:
Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory
Cycling Operation
:
Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory
Pump Down Cycle
:
Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory
Chilled Water Inlet Temperature
:
0
Chilled Water Outlet Temperature
:
0
Chiller Inlet Pressure
:
bars
Chiller Outlet Pressure
:
bars
F
F
Certified by ……………….
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-103/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
COMMISSIONING SHEET OF CHLLED WATER PUMP SET
Project :
Pump Operating Results :
Date
Pump Reference and Make
:
Pump Model No.
:
:
Designed
Flow rate
:
Pump Inlet Pressure
:
Pump Outlet Pressure
:
Pump Working Head ,FT
:
Pump RPM
:
Motor Horse Power
:
Motor Running Current,AMPS
Sheet No. of
Measured
:
Starter Overload Setting
:
Voltage
:
Water Temperature
:
Certified by ………………………..
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-104/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
COMMISSIONING SHEET OF AIR HANDLING UNITS
Project :
AHU Precommissioning Checks:
Date
System Reference
:
Installation Complete
:
System Clean and Unobstructed
:
Inspection Covers Fitted
:
Balancing Dampers Open
:
Grilles/Diffusers Open
:
Sheet No. of
:
Fire Damper/Automatic Damper
Operational
:
Chilled Water Lines Insulated :
Condensate Drain Line Completed
With „U‟ trap with Proper level
:
Air Components Aligned
:
Pulley Alignment/Belt Tension
:
Motor/Fan Bearing Lubricated
:
Filter in Position and Cleaned:
Flexible Connections
:
Starter Overload Adequate for Load :
Control Circuit Operational
:
Permanent Electrical Supply Available:
Certified by …………………….
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-105/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
COMMISSIONING SHEET OF AIR HANDLING UNITS (FAN AND COIL)
Project :
Results
Date
Location
:
System/Equip. Ref.
:
Item
Measurement
Identification
Fan Make and Model No.
:
Fan Type
:
Motor Pulley Size
:
Fan RPM
:
Motor Voltage, Phase, Hz.
:
Fan Belt Nos., Size
:
Motor Power
:
Motor Full Load Current
:
Motor Running Current
:
Starter Type
:
Starter O.L. Sliting
:
Air Volume Flow Rate
:
Fan Static Pressure
:
Air Temperature
:
Filter Nos., Size
:
Motorised Valve Operation
:
OK/Not OK
Thermostat Operation
:
OK/Not OK
Condensate Drainage
:
OK/Not OK
Smoke Detector Operation
:
OK/Not OK
Filter Operation
:
OK/Not OK
AEB-872-10-REV. A
:
Sheet No. of
Design
S-22-106/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Chilled Water In
:
Temperature
Pressure
0
Chilled Water Out
:
Temperature
Pressure
0
Air In Temperature
:
0
0
Air Out Temperature
:
0
0
Noise level at 1.0m
:
F.DB
F.DB
F
Psi
F
Psi
F.WB
F.WB
Certified by …………………….
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-107/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
COMMISSIONING SHEET OF FAN AND COIL
Project :
Results
Date
Location
:
System/Equip. Ref.
:
Item
Measurement
Identification
Fan Make and Model No.
:
Fan Type
:
Fan RPM
:
Motor Voltage, Phase, Hz.
:
Fan Belt Nos., Size
:
Motor Power
:
Motor Full Load Current
:
Motor Running Current
:
Starter Type
:
Starter O.L. Setting
:
Air Volume Flow Rate
:
Fan Static Pressure
:
Air Temperature
:
Filter Nos., Size
:
Motorised Valve Operation
:
OK/Not OK
Thermostat Operation
:
OK/Not OK
Condensate Drainage
:
OK/Not OK
Smoke Detector Operation
:
OK/Not OK
Filter Operation
:
OK/Not OK
AEB-872-10-REV. A
:
Sheet No. of
Design
S-22-108/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
Chilled Water In
:
Temperature
Pressure
0
Chilled Water Out
:
Temperature
Pressure
0
Air In Temperature
:
0
0
Air Out Temperature
:
0
0
Noise level at 1.0m
:
F.DB
F.DB
F
Psi
F
Psi
F.WB
F.WB
Certified by ………………...
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-109/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
DUCT VOLUME TEST SHEET
Project
System
Date
Reference
Design Vol.
m3/s
Sheet No. of
Duct Size
mm
Velocity Profile (Taken ……………….. Airflow)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Duct Area
m2
Velocity
m/s
Units ………………………
7
8
A ______________________________________________________________
B ______________________________________________________________
C______________________________________________________________
D ______________________________________________________________
E ______________________________________________________________
F ______________________________________________________________
G ______________________________________________________________
H ______________________________________________________________
I ______________________________________________________________
J ______________________________________________________________
K ______________________________________________________________
Correction Factor of Meter
Total of Velocities
Average Velocity
Test Volume
Design
Static Pressure
Remarks
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Certified by …………………….
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-110/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
DUCT VOLUME TEST SHEET (FRESH AIR)
Project
System
Date
Reference
Design Vol.
m3/s
Sheet No. of
Duct Size
mm
Velocity Profile (Taken ……………….. Airflow)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Duct Area
m2
Velocity
m/s
Units ………………………
7
8
A ______________________________________________________________
B ______________________________________________________________
C______________________________________________________________
D ______________________________________________________________
E ______________________________________________________________
F ______________________________________________________________
G ______________________________________________________________
H ______________________________________________________________
I ______________________________________________________________
J ______________________________________________________________
K ______________________________________________________________
Correction Factor of Meter
Total of Velocities
Average Velocity
Test Volume
Design
Static Pressure
Remarks
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Certified by …………………….
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-111/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS
Project
System Reference
Terminal
No.
Location
Date
Design
Free Area
m2
Sheet No.of
Measured
Volume
m3/s
Velocity
m/sec
Comments
Volume % of
m3/s
Design
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Correction Factor of Meter
__________________________________________________________________
Remarks
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Certified by …………………….
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-112/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2.28
i.
SECTION 22
SCHEDULES AND EXPLANATORY NOTES
The schedules have been prepared for the purpose of facilitating selection of
equipment and evaluating the tenders. The reference given against each item in
the schedules refer to the appropriate reference in the drawings.
ii. Technical details of the equipment offered by the Contractor should be furnished,
as asked for in the technical schedules enclosed.
iii. The external static pressure for fans, where given are approximate and the
Contractor will be required to supply equipment to handle the requirements of his
installation without extra cost to the contract.
iv. Should the Contractor wish to amplify any information to be provided, this should
be set out on separate sheets and submitted with his tender together with
explanatory manufacturer‟s catalogues, curves and selection charts.
v. If the equipment selected by the tenderer should require any special alteration or
addition to the architectural or structural work, he must list the requirements
separately.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-113/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
22.2.29
SECTION 22
LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
ITEM
1. Chillers
MANUFACTURER
CARRIER
MCQUAY
YORK
TRANE
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
USA, EUROPE
EUROPE
USA, EUROPE
USA
2. Chilled Water Pumping System ITT
PATTERSON
ARURORA
TACO
GRUNDFOS
USA
JAPAN
JAPAN
JAPAN
IATLY
3. Pressurisation Package
ITT
S.A ARMSTRONG
GRUNDFOS
WESSELS
USA
USA
DENMARK
USA
4. Air Handling Units
FLAKTWOODS
TRANE
CARRIER
EUCLIMA
VTS CLIMA
YORK
SWEDEN
USA, EUROPE
USA, EUROPE
AUSTRIA
POLAND
USA/ EUROPE
6. Fan Coil Units
CARRIER
YORK
TRANE
VTS CLIMA
TRANE
MEKAR
USA, EUROPE
USA, EUROPE
USA, EUROPE
POLAND
USA, EUROPE
ITALY
7.
CARRIER
MITSUBISHI
LG
DAIKEN
MCQUAY
Split A/C Unit
THAILAND
THAILAND/MALYSIA
THAILAND
MALYSIA/CHINA
MALYSIA/CHINA
8. Exhaust Fans
NUAIR
ROSENBERG
ELTA
SYSTEM AIR
UK
EUROPE
UK
GERMANY
9. G.I. Sheets
NIPPON
TASIKAN
HADID
JAPAN
SOUTH AFRICA
JAPAN
10. Silencers
TROX
UK
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-114/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
SAFID
EURO REGISTER
SOUNDATTUNATORS
KSA
BELGIUM
UK
11. Fire Dampers
RUSKIN
NAILOR
SAFID
KSA REGISTER
ALDES
KBE
UK
USA, CANADA
KSA
LEBANON
UAE
LEBANON
12. Volume Control Damper
KMC
ATAI
SAFID
TECHNALCO
QUAD-NEL
DOHA
KSA
KSA
UAE
UAE
13. Duct & Pipe Supports
GRINNEL
GEORGE DISCHER
SIKA
HILTI
USA
GERMANY
GERMANY
14. Valves & Strainers
KITA ISO
CRANE
NIBCO
USA
UK
USA
15. Chilled Water Pipes & Fittings
SAUDI PIPES
NIPPON STEEL
ECONSTO
KSA
JAPAN
EUROPE
16. Automatic Air Vent
MULLER
ITT BELL&GOSSETT
SPIRAXSARCO
USA
USA
UK
17. Insulation (Duct & Pipe)
AFFICO
KIMMCO
THERMOBREAK
KSA
KUWAIT
AUSTRAILIA
18. Air Terminals
ANEMOSAT
TITUS
EURO REGISTER
KRUGER
USA
USA
EUROPE
USA
19. Instruments & Gauges
JOHNSON
WEISS
USA
USA
20. Vibration Isolators
MASON
AMBER/BOOTH
KINETICS
USA
USA
USA
21. Flexible Joints
MASON
HATTERSELY
USA
UK
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-115/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 22
KINFLEX
MINIKIN
SHURJOINT
USA
UK
USA
22. Rubber Foam Insulation
RUBATEX
ARMAFLEX
GULF FLEX
USA
UK
UAE
23. Copper Pipes & Fittings
YORKSHIRE
WEDNESBURY
MUELLERBRASS
UK
UK
USA
25. Flexible Duct
ATAI
THERMAFLEX
SUPAFLEX
KSA
THAILAND
UK
26. Adhesive
FOSTER
MIRACLE
IDENDEN
USA
USA
UK
27.Vapour Barrier
FOSTER
MIRACLE
IDENDEN
USA
USA
UK
28. Impulse Car Park
Ventilation System
PSB
DYNAIR
FLAKT WOODS
GREENHECK
ACME
GERMANY
JAPAN
UK
USA
USA
29. Balance Valve
TOUR & ANDERSSON
CRANE
HATERESLEY
TACO
USA
USA
UK
USA
30. Controls
JOHNSON
WEISS
USA
USA
31. Dehumidifier
SPC
CALOREX
MUNTERS
UK
UK
EUROPE
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-22-116/116
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION – 23
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
SL NO.
TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
23.1.00
FIRE FIGHTING GENERAL
23.1.01
Scope of Works
23.1.02
Design Requirements
23.1.03
Regulatory Agencies
23.1.04
Submittals
23.1.05
Coordination
23.2.00
PRODUCTS
23.2.01
General
23.2.02
Piping Products
23.2.03
Pipe Supports and Sleeves
23.2.04
General Purpose Valves
23.2.05
Alarms
23.2.06
Supervisory Devices
23.2.07
System Accessories
23.2.08
Cabinets
23.2.09
Control Valves
23.2.10
Locks
23.2.11
Monitored Isolation Valve
23.2.12
Portable Fire Extinguishers
23.2.13
Fire Pumps
23.2.14
Wet Barrel Fire Hydrant
23.2.15
Under Ground pipes and Fittings
23.3.00
EXECUTION
23.3.01
Preparation
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-1/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
23.3.02
Installation
23.3.03
Field Quality Control
23.3.04
Cleaning and Flushing
23.3.05
Pre-Commissioning Works
23.3.06
Testing
23.3.07
Painting
23.3.08
Labels and identification
23.3.09
Aerosol Fire Extinguishing System
23.3.10
Cleant Agent System (FM-200 System)
23.3.11
Fire Extinguishing System for Electrical Cabinets
23.3.12
Schedule of Approved Manufactures
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-2/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
23.01.00
FIRE FIGHTING GENERAL
Work covered under this section includes furnishing of material, labor, and
equipment to install fire protection system as indicated on drawings and specified
herein.
Include incidental work necessary to make fire protection system complete,
satisfactory, and ready for operation.
A specialist Contractor shall execute the complete scope of work under this contract.
The Scheme and Selection of equipment and components as shown on the drawings
are indicative, all the design parameters are to be cross verified and sized
accordingly on a need and requirement basis, by the Specialist Contractor assigned
and nominated by the Main Contractor to carryout the job.
The Profile of the Specialist Contractor need to be submitted to the Consultant – in
charge for the project, prior to the nomination by the Main Contractor, and the
Consultant‟s Decision will be final and binding on the Main Contractor.
23.01.01
SCOPE OF WORKS
The Fire Fighting Services include, but not limited to the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
Fire Fighting Pumps
Hose reel cabinets
Sprinkler System
Piping products.
Pipe supports.
Pipe sleeves.
General purpose valves.
FM 200 System for Substation
Aerosol Fire Extinguishing System
Fire extinguishers
Fire Hydrant
Alarms.
Supervisory devices.
System accessories.
It shall be executed as shown on the drawings, and all the equipment and
components shall be approved by the Fire Department of State of Qatar and any
other statutory bodies as required and confirm to the NFPA Standards.
23.01.02
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
System requirements and pipe sizes shall be determined using hydraulic calculations
prepared in accordance with NFPA Standards.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-3/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
System requirements to comply with applicable NFPA Standards (as referenced by
the authority having jurisdiction).
23.01.03
REGULATORY AGENCIES
Installation shall comply with following:
1. Building and fire safety codes of the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Owner's insurance carrier or Insurance Services Office.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards (as referenced by the
authority having jurisdiction and Owner's insurance carrier).
4. Underwriters‟ Laboratories (UL) & FM (Factory Mutual)
5. Design documents.
23.01.04
SUBMITTALS
A. General
Comply with Tender Invitation documents.
Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections
listed below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and
can be reviewed together.
B. Product Data
Manufacturer‟s specifications
construction, and fabrication.
and
technical
data
including
performance,
Submit product data for each manufactured component.
C. Shop Drawings
Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction,
specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and
installation procedures, including specific requirements indicated.
1. Submit shop drawings for each complete system or assembly of shop-fabricated,
field-fabricated, and manufactured components.
2. Special requirements:
a. Unless otherwise noted, prepare shop drawings in accordance with
requirements for "Working Plans" as described in NFPA Standard 13.
b. Certify Shop Drawings by a Professional Engineer registered and currently
licensed to practice in Qatar.
c. Draw floor plans at 1:100 scale or greater. Submit reproducible copies of all
drawings.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-4/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
d. Cloud and key with date to indicate areas that have been changed on all resubmittals.
e. Calculations for Hydraulically Designed Systems:
1) Calculations are required to be performed on the approvaed computer
software.
2) Unless otherwise noted, prepare calculations in accordance with
requirements of "Hydraulic Calculations Procedures" as described in
NFPA Standard 13.
3) Include calculations with submission of Shop Drawings.
D. Quality Control
Field Quality Control submittals as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
a. Document results of test required by authority having jurisdiction, the
Owner's insurance carrier, and listed NFPA Standards.
b. Document test results on standard NFPA forms or a form acceptable to the
Architect / Engineer.
E. Submittal Sequence
1. First, submit reproducible copies of each shop drawing to Architect/Engineer
along with product data and hydraulic calculations.
a. All submittals are to be complete.
b. All shop drawings, hydraulic calculations and product data shall be included
in one submittal.
c. Identify all material.
2. Second, submit two sets of the revised shop drawings to the Owner who will
forward one copy to their insurance carrier for review.
a. Send a copy of transmittal to Architect/Engineer.
b. Make changes to shop drawings after these reviews.
c. Circle changes to indicate areas that have been changed.
3. Submit the final shop drawings with approvals from the approved agencies to the
Architect/Engineer.
F. Alternative Materials
Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturer‟s. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to valid
reasons, with official written apologies from manufacturers for not being able to
supply the requested materials. Only in such cases, the Consultant will consider the
alternatives, before the tender is accepted and the Consultant‟s decision will be final
regarding the matter.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-5/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
In case the alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the acceptance of
the same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment,
materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the contractor is
fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not up to the specification, must
be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then such
replacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, but at the Contractor‟s expenses
etc.
23.01.05
COORDINATION
Coordination with Construction Documents:
1. Refer to drawings for smoke and fire ratings of walls and floors.
2. Refer to drawings for exact location and mounting height of cabinets housing fire
department valves and hoses.
3. Monitors, hydrants, fire hose reels, sprinkler heads, etc shall be located as noted
on architectural and mechanical plans.
4. Architect/Engineer, after reviewing installation, reserves the right to direct the
contractor to make minor adjustments in locations of the monitors, hydrants, fire
hose reels, sprinkler heads, etc. at no additional cost to the Owner.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-6/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
23.02.00
PRODUCTS
23.02.01
GENERAL
List products by name and manufacturer as listed in UL Fire Protection Equipment
Directory and FM Approval Guide and conform to requirements contained in Contract
Documents.
Material and equipment to be new and currently listed or approved.
Where more than one of any specific item is required, items to be of same type and
manufacturer.
Products to be UL listed, and preferred FM approved as well.
23.02.02
PIPING PRODUCTS
A. General
Only pipe and fitting materials listed in this specification shall be acceptable for use.
Extra lightweight steel, schedule 5 steel, non-metallic products, and associated
fittings are not acceptable.
B. Related Standards
1. All dry standpipe works shall be Galvanized ERW steel pipe schedule 40: ASTM
A53, hose reel piping and sprinkler shall be black ERW steel pipe schedule 40,
ASTM A53 Class B.
2. Fitting manufacturing standards:
a. Galvanized threaded fittings, Class 125 pound, and 250 pound: comply with
ASTM A53
b. Malleable iron threaded fittings, Class 150 pound, and 300 pound: comply
with ANSI B16.3.
c. Cast iron flanged fittings, Class 125 pound, and 250 pound: comply with
ANSI B16.1.
d. Butt welded fittings: comply with ANSI B16.9.
e. Flange gaskets: comply with ANSI B16.24.
f. Fastener bolts: comply with ANSI B18.2.1.
g. Fastener nuts: comply with ANSI B18.2.2.
C. Threaded Fittings
1. Galvanized, 125 pounds:
Pipe Size Maximum Working Pressure
1" through 2"
300 psi
2-1/2" through 12"
175 psi
2. Cast iron, 250 pounds: 400 psi maximum working pressure.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-7/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
3. Malleable iron, 150 pounds: 300 psi maximum working pressure.
4. Malleable iron, 300 pounds:
Pipe Size Maximum Working Pressure
1" through 2"
1500 psi
2-1/2" through 4"
1000 psi
5" and 6"
800 psi
D. Flanges and Flanged Fittings
1.
2.
3.
4.
Galvanized, 125 pounds: 175 psi maximum working pressure.
Galvanized, 250 pounds: 400 psi maximum working pressure.
Flange gaskets: 1/16 inch thick.
Bolts and nuts: Bolt length to allow not less than 1/8 inch exposed thread beyond
nut.
E. Grooved Fittings
1. For connection to cut or rolled grooved pipe.
2. Pressure rating of fittings to exceed maximum system working pressure.
3. Fittings to be of same manufacturer as couplings.
F. Welded Fittings
1. Butt welded or socket welded branch lets, 3 inches through 12 inches.
2. Pressure rating of fittings to exceed maximum system working pressure.
23.02.03
PIPE SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES
Design: Provide in this section in compliance with Section 15140 and NFPA 13 (as
referenced by the authority having jurisdiction).
23.02.04
GENERAL PURPOSE VALVES
All valves shall be marked with the manufacturer‟s name and the appropriate British
or American standard or shall fully comply with NFPA standards.
Valves to be FM approved and/or UL listed.
A. Indicating Control Valve (O S & Y Gate Valve):
1. Rising indicating stem.
2. 1 inch through 2 inches: screwed ends.
3. 2-1/2 inch through 12 inches: flanged ends.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-8/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
O.S & Y gate valves shall be provided to each branch pipe and, at the locations
where the flow is required, either fully open or fully closed, as indicated on the tender
drawings or as directed by the Engineer in order to isolate that part of the system in
the event of leaks and maintenance, which may arise at the time of commissioning
and pressure testing.
All main sprinkler system isolating valves shall be listed indicating valves and shall
be connected with the tamper switches. All valves controlling water supplies to the
sprinkler system including floor control valves shall be accessible to the authorized
persons during emergency.
Gate valves shall be made of cast iron and tested to 300-psi hydraulic pressure.
Valves of 50 mm dia shall be screwed ends and provided with unions on both sides.
Valves more than 50 mm dia shall be with flanged ends. Valves shall be
manufactured in accordance with NFPA standards.
Valves used as drain valve and valves near jockey pump shall be standard gate
valves. All other valves shall be UL listed, FM approved O.S & Y gate valves.
C. Globe and Ball Valve: Bronze body with screwed ends.
D. Check Valve
Bronze body with screwed ends. 1 inch through 2 inches.
Listed check valves shall be provided in discharge line of each pump, fire
department connection and at other locations in accordance with their listing or as
directed by the engineer to prevent reversal of flow. Non-return valves shall be made
of cast iron and conform to B.S. 5154. Valves shall be swing pattern, metal-to-metal
seat and tested to 300-psi hydraulic pressure.
E. Alarm Check Valves
This shall be NFPA approved to be constructed and equipped to give clear positive
audible alarm at any water flow through the sprinkler system equal to or greater than
that from a single automatic sprinkler. It shall be suitable for vertical/ horizontal
installations as per as the system requirement or as directed by the engineer and for
the variable pressure of water supply.
Alarm check valves shall be of flanged, designed to withstand up to working
pressure of 300 psi. It shall have cast iron body and a clapper hinge, bronze clapper
assembly, pilot valve assembly and other moving parts.
Alarm check valves shall be complete with retarding chamber 2” main drain valve, up
stream and downstream pressure gauge cocks, alarm control and test valves,
pressure operated alarm switch to actuate a bell, horn, or siren. Water motor and
alarm gong shall be located preferably outside the building at a location to engineer‟s
approval.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-9/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
F. Rubber Face Check Valve: Swing type with flanged ends. 2-1/2 inches through
12 inches.
G. Wafer or Grooved End Swing Type Check Valve & shall be UL listed FM
approval.
H. Reduced Principal Zone Backflow Preventer
23.02.05
ALARMS (FOR EXTERIOR USE)
Electric Alarm Bell
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
23.02.06
8 inch diameter gong.
Rated for 12 VDC, 24 VDC or 120 VAC.
Suitable for exterior use.
Minimum sound rating: 80 db at 10'-0".
UL Listed.
Compatible for use with fire alarm system.
SUPERVISORY DEVICES
A. Supervisory (Tamper) Switches
Design Requirements:
a. Switches to indicate position of control valve.
b. Rated for 120 VAC - 24 VDC.
c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.
d. To be connected to the fire alarm system.
B. Water Flow Switches
1. Paddle type for pipe sizes 1-1/4 inches through 2 inches:
a. Rated for 175 psi working pressure.
b. Two sets 120 VAC - 24 VDC form C contacts.
c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.
d. To be connected to the fire alarm system.
2. Paddle Type: For pipe sizes 2 inches through 8 inches, with 0 - 70 second
adjustable pneumatic retard.
a. Rated for 175 psi working pressure.
b. Two sets 120 VAC - 24 VDC form C contacts.
c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-10/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
23.02.07
SECTION 23
SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Test and Drain Connection
1. Manufactured combination test, drain, and sight glass fitting.
2. 175 psi working pressure.
3. 1/4 inch NPT gauge fitting.
B. Pressure Gauges
1. 1/4 inch NPT.
2. 175 psi working pressure.
3. 1/2 inch dial marked in 5 pound increments.
Pressure gauges shall be provided on the discharge of the pumps and on wet pipe
sprinkler system riser as shown on the drawing. Each gauge shall not be less than
100 mm dia in dial size and shall comprise of a corrosion resistant housing with glass
window and brass trim. It shall have accuracy within +/-5% of the full-scale deflection
when working at 50 degree C. each gauge shall be provided with a gauge cock. The
pressure gauges shall be calibrated in psi or bars, or both. Each gauge shall have a
range of 0 to 11/2 times the normal working pressure.
C. Automatic Ball Drips: 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch NPT.
D. Insert Sight Glasses: 175 psi working pressure.
E. Downspout Nozzle (express drain outlet):
1. Wall mounted downspout nozzle.
2. Rough bronze finish.
3. Full line size. Terminate at and provide concrete splash block.
23.02.08
CABINETS
a. Fire Hose Reel
The Fire Hose Reel shall be installed where shown on the drawings. It shall be
automatic swinging recessed type.
Hose reels shall be in accordance with EN694 & EN671-1. The hose reel shall have a
30 meters long of 25 mm. internal diameter reinforced non-kickable rubber hose
capable of withstanding a working pressure of 16 bar. The hose shall be wound on a
fabricated steel drum with circular side plates.
The hose reel shall turn on automatically when 1.5 to 1.8 meters of hose is withdrawn
from the real/ drum.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-11/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
The hose reel shall be equipped with shut-off valve for connecting with pipework.
The hose nozzle shall be chrome plated brass, JET/SPRAY/SHUT/ OFF nozzle, and
shall have a 6 mm orifice.
b. Fire Hose Cabinet
The fire hose cabinet shall consist of:
a. Cabinet: Cabinet and door leaf shall be made of 1.2 mm stainless steel with all
around folded edges, door leafs hinged flush mounted on door frame.
Cabinet shall be equipped with vertical wired glass window on front door. The
cabinet shall be stainless steel Matt finished.
The door shall be recessed type base with aluminum turn handle chrome plated
and labeled „Fire Hose Reel‟.
b. The fire hose cabinet shall be located at 1400 mm above the finished floor level
and shall include fire extinguisher of the ABC type as indicated in the drawing
and a 2 2 ½” inch layflat synthetic rubber lined layflat hose with a male-female
instantaneous couplings along with a suitable 2 ½” Jet/Spray/Sutoff Nozzle.
c. 4- way type Breeching Inlet shall be provided in a Polished Chrome plated
BreechiNG Inlet Cabinet.
23.02.09
CONTROL VALVES
Each control valve set shall comprise the following equipment, plus any other
ancillary equipment necessary.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Main stop valve
Alarm valve
Waste & test valve
Installation & pressure gauge.
All the equipment necessary for the correct functioning of the control valves.
Water motor alarm gong.
Towns main pressure gauge.
Drain manifold from control valves.
Pump initiating pressure switches (including wiring) to main booster pump
controller.
10. Alarm pressure switches wired to Fire Indicator Panel.
11. Spares Cabinet, complete with sufficient spare sprinklers and spare sprinkler
spanner.
12. Brigade booster inlet.
13. Street key to main sluice valve.
14. Block plan of the area of the building serviced by the valve set, showing the
complete site and the building outline.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-12/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
23.02.10
SECTION 23
LOCKS
Locks shall be of type suitable for the Qatar Fire Department type key. If a non brigade key is used on doorways to control valves, pump rooms, etc. a key shall be
placed in a box with a brigade lock, adjacent to the door.
23.02.11
MONITORED ISOLATION VALVE
Supply and install monitoring switches on all sprinkler and hydrant system isolation
valves, to register an alarm if the valves are moved from the fully open position.
The switch, means of actuation and power supply shall be of approved manufacture
and function.
23.02.12
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
ABC DRY POWDER FIRE EXTINGUISHER: (FIRST AID EQUIPMENT)
ABC Dry powder fire extinguishers (Multi purpose) shall be manufactured in
accordance with BS EN3 for portable extinguishers and shall be operated by means
of a lever/squeeze handle operated valve provided with a safety pin which shall avoid
inadvertent operation and the valve shall be capable for controlling partial discharge.
The cylinder shall have minimum working pressure of 14bar. The temperature shall
range from -20° to 60° C. The extinguisher must have a plastic base (Only for
portable). It must be coated externally by electrostatic polyester powder and oven
baked for corrosion resistance. The cylinder shall be made special cold rolled steel
sheet with Argon/CO2 automatic welding process and the suction tube shall be made
of PVC material. All extinguishers shall carry instructions for operation and
maintenance in English and Arabic. The Fire Extinguisher should have at least been
certified by an independent Certification Organization from International Testing
Laboratories/ Accredited Certification Bodies such as LPCB Approval, BSI KITE
mark or UL listed/FM Approved. The capacity of the ABC dry Powder Fire
Extinguisher shall be 6 KG and shall have a minimum fire rating of 34 A & 183 B as
per BS EN3
Fire extinguishers of 4 kg ABC Dry Powder and fire blankets shall be
kitchens.
added at all
CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Clean agent fire extinguishers which shall contain „Halotron‟ agent and shall be of 15
lbs capacity (approximately 7 Kg) with a A;10-B;C rating. The discharge time shall be
13 seconds and the unit weight shall not be more than 11.75 kg. The „Halotron‟ fire
extinguishers shall be UL-Listed and Local Civil Defense Approved. Where the clean
agent fire extinguishers are located in electrical rooms they shall be complete with
wall mounting brackets. Instructions shall be screen printed on the front door. The
„Halotron‟ fire extinguishers shall be UL-listed.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-13/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
23.02.13
SECTION 23
FIRE PUMPS
A. GENERAL
Each system shall be design to insure the maximum pumping capacity even if one of
the main pump fails.
The total supplying of all the necessary equipment for the firewater production
(including pumps, engines driven, controllers, instrumentation, piping, valves, relief
valves) is included in the Contractor‟s scope of work.
The supplying and installation of the day fuel tank of the engines is included in the
Contractor‟s scope.
The fuel tank (and all the fuel installation) shall be in accordance with NFPA
standards.
The air supply system of the diesel engines drive (automatic opening, venting
panels) is included in the Contractor‟s scope.
The fire pumps, motor, engine and electric pump controllers and diesel pump
controllers shall be UL listed or FM approved and suitable for sprinklered fire
pumproom. An undertaking to this effect shall be submitted to the superving
engineer. Unit responsibility must be submitted from the manufacturer.
The engine driven fire pumps shall be in accordance with NPFA 20 (curves, starting,
protection).
The problem of surge (hammer effect) shall be taken into account in the design. A
surge analysis shall be conducted and specific surge pressure control system shall
be installed.
Over-pressure system shall also be installed.
The contractor shall provide fully certified hydraulic calculations for exact sizing of
the pumps.
The pumps shall be furnished with a full set of bench test certificates proving
acceptability for the design points for this installation.
B. FIRE PUMPS
Fire pumps shall be UL and FM approved. Each pump shall have a capacity as
shown in pump schedule, adjusted as necessary to suit the hydraulic calculations.
The pumping unit or package shall meet all requirements complying with NFPA 20
The pumps shall also deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure of
not less than 65% of rated pressure. The shutoff pressure shall not exceed 140% of
the rated pressure at rated capacity.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-14/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
C. FIRE PUMPS TYPE
Each fire pump shall be of horizontal split case centrifugal single stage or multistage
construction, specifically labeled for fire service and capable of providing the
required flow and pressure of the entire development. The pump shall be connected
to the combined sprinkler/FHR system. The suction supply for the fire pump shall be
from a storage tank at a maximum pressure of 20 kPa and a minimum pressure of 0
kPa. The pump casing shall be cast iron and rated to withstand twice the working
pressure.
D. PUMP CONSTRUCTION
The pump construction shall be cast iron casing, Bronz impeller, Stainless Steel
shaft and gland packing.
Note: The pump shall also deliver not less than 150 % of the rated capacity at a
pressure of not less than 65 % of the rated pressure. The shut off pressure shall not
exceed 140 % of the rated pressure at rated capacity.
E. PUMP DISCHARGE & HEAD
The fire protection contractor shall select a pump discharge and head to satisfy the
fire protection system requirements resulting from the system hydraulic calculations
and submit it to engineer‟s approval.
F. G) FIRE PUMP ACCESSORIES
The Fire and Sprinkler Pumps shall include the following accessories, as required by
NFPA standards:
1. Flow Metering Device, shall be of the Venturi type. Pilot and annubar devices
will not be acceptable- One metering device shall be provided for each pump
or as shown on the drawings. Pipe water back to the storage tank.
2. Discharge tee.
3. Necessary isolating valves with supervisory switches.
4. Air release valve and fittings.
5. Discharge pressure gauge.
6. Main relief valve, pilot operated, enclosed relief valve overflow cone and
discharge tee with elbow (diesel drive only).
7. Main relief valve with discharge pipes to water tank.
8. Pump casing relief valve.
G. ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE
On installations where the Fire Pump is to be operated electrically, the electric motor
shall be a horizontal, UL listed, wound for 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz (cycle) current The
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-15/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
motor shall be of such capacity that 115% of the full-load ampere rating shall not be
exceeded at any condition of the pump load for UL Listed fire pump.
With an ambient temperature not exceeding 40 deg. C, the motor shall be designed
for a temperature rise not exceeding 60 deg. C when carrying fully rated-load
continuously, and shall be capable of operating continuously with an overload of 15%
without stress or excessive rise in temperature. The locked rotor current shall not
exceed the values specified in NFPA Pamphlet No. 20.
Bearings shall be anti-friction ball or roller type.
H. CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRIC DRIVE
The Fire Pump motor control shall be UL listed and FM Approved. It shall be
completely assembled, wired and tested by the control manufacturer before
shipment from factory, and shall be labeled 'Fire Pump Controller". The controller
shall be located as practical and within the sight of the motor.
The controller shall be so located or protected that it will not be injured by water
escaping from the pump or connection. The controller shall be of the combined
manual and automatic star & delta type. and shall be complete with:
1. Disconnect switch - externally operable, quick-break type.
2. Circuit breaker - time delay type with trips in all phases set for 300% of the
motor full load current3. Motor starter, capable of being energized automatically through the pressure
switch or manually by means of an externally operable handle. Motor starter
shall be of the autotransformer type.
4. Pressure switch, of adjustable type.
5. Running period timer - set to keep motor in operation, when started
automatically, for a minimum period of one minute for each 10 HP motor
rating, but not to exceed 7 minutes.
6. Pilot lamp - to indicate circuit breaker closed and power available.
7. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
8. Alarm relay - to energize an audible or visible alarm through an independent
source of power to indicate circuit breaker open or power failure.
9. Manual selection station - a two position station shall be provided on the
enclosure marked "Automatic" and Non-automatic".
10. Means shall be provided on the Controller to operate an alarm signal
continuously while the pump is running.
11. Provisions for power supply at 220 V for diesel pump battery chargers.
12. Control equipment shall meet all requirements of NFPA20 & NFPA72.
I.
DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE
Diesel engine shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-16/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
The engine shall be of the self contained open type, mounted on a suitable base with
the following minimum plus any others that may be necessary by NFPA-20 and local
CD requirements.
1. Dual battery set sized to NFPA -20 requirements with electrolyte shipped in
separate containers, rack and cables.
2. Dual battery charger of proper type for batteries used ( included in UL Listed /
FM Approved controller ). Power to battery charger shall be supplied from
electric pump control panel. Wiring from control panel to battery chargers
shall be by the contractor.
3. Electric starter with suitable generator and voltage regulator.
4. Engine water pump.
5. Heat exchanger cooling system.
6. Water cooled or ceramic blanketed exhaust manifold.
7. Lubricating oil pump and filter.
8. Fuel injection system.
9. Air cleaner.
10. Proper instrument panel, complete with engine run warning light, water
temperature gauge, oil pressure gauge, voltmeter, totalizing type tachometer
and hour meter.
11. Residential Grade Muffler.
12. Cooling water line for the engine heat exchanger assembly.
13. Flexible exhaust connectors.
All engine wiring for automatic operation shall terminate in a proper junction box to
permit connection to control panel.
J. FUEL SYSTEM
A suitable fuel system for the diesel engine shall be furnished. It must be in
accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No.20 and shall include above surface day storage
tank, flexible hose connectors, combination vent, flesh arrestor and fill cap.
K. SILENCER ( MUFFLER )
The silencers shall be Silex series JA. The silencer shall be for turbo-charged
engines, sized and selected to accommodate the allowable pressure drop of the
engine.
The silencer shall provide an average attenuation of 20-25 Db (a).
The silencer shall be designed by HEAVY DUTY APPLICATIONS, with noise
attenuation across the entire audible range of the frequency spectrum 63 through
8000 Hz. The silencer shall consist of a series of chambers connected by nonresonant tubes. The entire silencer shall be manufactured from plate steel and be of
a completely welded design. The heavy plate ensure longer silencer life and better
resistance to damage. The heavy plate shall prevent shell radiated noise. There
shall be no spot welds or press fits used.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-17/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
Silencer inlet and discharge shall be flanged, manufactured from minimum 10mm
thick plate and drilled to ANSI 70 kg. Silencers shall be either and in/end out and
side in/end out configurations to suit installation.
Provide 12mm drain connections. Prior to shipping, the silencers shall be thoroughly
cleaned and coated in a high temperature 650ºC aluminium paint.
L. DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE CONTROLLER
Automatic Diesel Drive Engine Control Panel : The automatic engine control panel
shall be UL-listed and FM-approved for fire pump service and meet the requirements
of NFPA20. The panel shall be of the floor mounted type, and enclosed in a
moisture and dust tight housing. A combination manual and automatic type
controller with “Manual-Off-Automatic” selector shall be provided and a 240 volt
single phase power failure relay or a pressure switch, which will ( when the system
pressure drops ) activate all electric circuits to automatically start the engine.
Should the engine fail to start after the required cranking cycles, the controller shall
disconnect the starting circuit and activate an alarm system using lights and buzzer
or bell. “Low oil pressure” and “high jacket-water temperature” shall also be
indicated by a suitable alarm system. The engine shall not shut down if either of
these conditions occurs during an operating cycle.
The engine shall be started automatically by the Controller at least once a week,
adjustable, and operate a minimum of 30 minutes (adjustable). An appropriate
timing arrangement shall determine the day and hour of this test.
Pressure recorder (7 day drive ) shall be provided within the control panel.
Fire Pump Controller shall be a diesel engine type, Controller approved and listed by
the Underwriters Laboratories for fire pump service, carry the labels of both ULand
FM and meet the requirements of the NFPA20.
The controller shall incorporate the following :
1. Each charger shall be completely independent of the other charger and
equipped with its own individual power transformer, rated for a maximum
continuous charge current of 10A. The charger shall be of solid state
electronic design, with semi-conductor type rectifier, and include the following
supervisory and safety features :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
Current limiting in every charging mode
Over current shut-off
Automatic selection of bulk or charge by sensing battery voltage
Trickle charge limited to less than 500MA
Reverse voltage shut-off
Dead cell detection
Over and under voltage alarm
S-23-18/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
In case of battery failure, the charger shall initiate an alarm and provide a
signal to prevent the use of the defective battery during the start attempt
cycle.
2. Relays : All relays shall be equipped with manual test buttons, status “ON” –
“OFF” indicators, be of the plug in type and shall meet all voltage and current
requirements.
Remote Alarm Circuit : A total of five ( 5 ) standard alarm contacts, rated at
10 A, 125 V shall be provided and wired to the field terminal block, to indicate
the following engine conditions :
a. SPDT contact : Engine Running
b. 1 N/O contact : Contact shall close when main switch in Auto-position
c. 1 N/O contact : Contract shall close when main switch is in OFF or
Manual position.
d. SPDT contact : Engine trouble. This shall be a common alarm contact
indicating the following conditions. Engine overspeed, engine fail to start,
low oil pressure, high coolant temperature.
3. Description of Operation : A four positions main switch shall provide
selection of three starting method and one OFF position.
OFF position shall shut down engine and alarms under any condition.
AUTO position : a water pressure switch mounted inside the controller shall
provide the engine start on water pressure drop. The automatic starting
circuit shall alternate the two storage batteries after each start attempt. The
attempt to start cycle shall consist of six cranks and five rest periods of 15
seconds duration. In the event of one battery failure, the starting cycle shall
lock itself to the remaining battery. In case of engine failure, the controller
shall stop any further cranking and energize the ENGINE FAIL TO START
alarm. A manual stop pushbutton shall enable engine shut down, but only
after all starting causes have returned to normal. The automatic Weekly
Exercise cycle shall also be operational in the auto-position. This cycle shall
be programmed on the 7 day time clock. A short opening of the water
solenoid valve shall create a momentary pressure drop and cause automatic
engine start. At the end of the programmed Exercise cycle, engine shall shut
down automatically. A manual test switch located on the time clock shall
allow for manual test operation of the weekly exercise cycle. The 7 day time
clock shall hold its time on A/C power failure and not require resetting.
TEST Position : Engine shall start in the same manner as the above exercise
cycle start. Turning main switch to Auto or Off position shall shut down
engine.
MANUAL Position : Start pushbutton “Battery 1” or “Battery 2”, shall override
all automatic starting circuits, and allow for direct manual engine start.
Safety Shut Down : Engine overspeed condition shall shut down engine
without time delay and lock out until manually reset.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-19/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
The controller shall provide the following additional safety features Engine
shut down in case of low oil pressure or high coolant temperature during
exercise, test or optional AC failure operation only.
M. JOCKEY PUMP
The Jockey pump capacity and pressure shall be as indicated in the pump schedule
on the drawings.
Pump shall be constructed as follows:
Type
: Vertical multi-stage motor driven,
Rotation
: Counter-clockwise, viewed down
Motor
: TEFC
Motor bracket
: Cast type, connecting motor to pump
Diffuser cases
: Pressure containing, flow directing
Impellers
: Stainless steel
Shaft, l
: Stainless steel,
Pump discharge
: Flanged type
Control
: Definite purpose type, magnetic starter
In NEMA II enclosure, with reset button
Pump controller shall be factory pre-wired and tested. Pressure switch shall sense
low pressure in the fire pump system. Set cut-in pressure 5 PSI above main fire
pump cut-in pressure. Set cut-out pressure at system pressure. Provide minimum
run timer to operate the pump for a minimum of 3 minutes.
Across the fine start, H-O-A selector switch.
Control panel to contain a fusible 3-pole disconnect switch, magnetic motor
contractor and thermal overload relays with external reset Enclosure to be wall
mounted with hinged door.
23.2.14
WET BARREL FIRE HYDRANT
Fire hydrants shall be manufactured to comply with AWWA Standard C503. Fire
hydrants shall meet all requirements UL/FM. Coupling must be quick coupling as per
Civil Defense requirements where coupling must be Listed & Certified. The Fire
hydrants shall be rated for a working pressure of 200 Psig and shall have a 4 inch
nominal diameter barrel and 2 nos. 2.5 inch diameter controllable outlets for fire hose
connection. The Fire hydrant Body shall be Ductile Iron. All ferrous part shall be
Internally & Externally Epoxy coated. Each hydrant shall be provided with its own
Non-Rising stem (NRS) type isolation gate valve. Such gate valve shall be located in
a pit at the base of the hydrant and shall be listed for Fire Protection Services. The
lowest pit of the valve pit shall be no more than 1m below the surrounding grade.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-20/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
23.2.15
SECTION 23
UNDER GROUND PIPES AND FITTINGS
High density Polyethylene Pipes & fittings (HDPE) PE 100 manufactured for under
ground fire protection lines to ISO 4427 to be used for fire water under ground
pipeline. The SDR ration selection should be such that the working pressure shall not
be less than 16 bar after considering de-rating factors. The contractor shall have this
selection verified by the pipe manufacturer and submit to the consulting engineers
prior to despatching the Pipes and Fittings. The Pipes and fittings to be from one
Manufacturer and shall meet the above standards. The Welding to be butt fusion
only, suitable for pipe pressure ratingS.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-21/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
23.03.00
EXECUTION
23.03.01
PREPARATION
Ensure concrete bases are provided for floor mounted equipment.
23.03.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install Fire Protection System in compliance with applicable NFPA standards
(as referenced by the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Pipe and Fittings
1. Acceptable pipe connection methods:
Schedule 40: Cut grooves or threaded.
2. Acceptable pipe size reducers:
a. Reducing fittings.
b. Tapered reducers.
3. Companion flanges or reducing grooved couplings are unacceptable.
4. Install piping as follows, unless noted otherwise:
a. Parallel to walls.
b. Above suspended ceilings.
c. Behind walls.
5. Galvanized pipe and fittings:
a. Use where exposed to corrosive atmospheres in the following locations:
Exterior piping.
b. Field paint damaged galvanizing on pipe and fittings.
6. Label piping appropriately.
C. Pipe Supports
Install hangers in compliance with Section 15140 and NFPA 13 (as referenced by the
authority having jurisdiction). All pipe hangers bolts, nuts, washers and other
hardware to be hot dipped galvanized construction for use at the cooling towers. All
outdoor piping to be hot dipped galvanized construction with all threads coated to
prevent corrosion from outdoor elements.
D. Pipe Sleeves and Seals
Install sleeves and seals in compliance with Section 15140.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-22/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
E. Drains
Provide drainage facilities as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
In accordance with NFPA standards, and as indicated.
Drain entire system by gravity.
Drain size not less than 3/4 inch.
Provide nipple and cap or brass plug for systems or partial systems of 5
gallons or less.
e. Provide valve and plug for systems or partial systems of more than 5 gallons.
F. Control Valves
1. Bolt position on lugged butterfly valves to allow removal of downstream piping.
2. Globe or ball valves to be used as shutoff valves for:
a. Water piping systems.
b. Drain valves.
c. Test valves.
G. Reduced Pressure (Zone Principal) Backflow Preventer
1. Size as indicated on plans.
2. Install where shown and
recommendations.
in
accordance
with
manufacturer‟s
H. Standpipe and Fire Hose Valves
Mount valves minimum 1070 mm and maximum 1525 mm above finished floor
elevation.
I. Alarms
Install electric alarms as follows:
a. Above fire department Siamese connection or as indicated on plans.
b. No less than 2.5 meters above finished grade.
c. Coordinate with Division 16 for electrical characteristics.
J. Supervisory Devices
1. Coordinate with Division 16 for electrical characteristics.
2. Provide supervisor (tamper) switch for each control valve.
3. Provide water flow switch for each wet pipe system and where otherwise
indicated.
a. Locate minimum distance recommended from change in flow direction.
b. Field adjust for proper flow retard.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-23/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
K. Combination Test and Drain Connection
1. Locate in accessible location.
2. Pipe express drain discharge as directed on the drawings.
3. Provide pressure gauge at test connection with brass 3-way valve and test plug.
L. Down Spout Nozzle
1. Verify location with architectural elevations.
2. Provide pipe increaser for connection to nozzle when drain line size is less than
available minimum size nozzle outlet.
M. Fire Department Connections
1. Install fire department connections where indicated on plans.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
Breeching Inlet Connection
The inlet breeching shall be of horizontal pattern having a 150 mm flanged outlet and
four 65 mm instantaneous male inlets complete with blank caps and chains. A nonreturn (check) valve shall protect the inlet. The coupling shall comply with BS 336.
The inlet connections shall be of suitable type of local fire brigade department. The
breaching shall be equipped with a 25 mm drain valve to drain the riser. Valves body
shall be made of DI with polished chrome brass Inlet Valves and Brass/Bronze cap
and chain.
Breeching Inlet Cabinet
The inlet breeching unit shall be housed in a steel flush box with polished chrome
plated door and archive with wired glass glazed front panel as per BS 5041-5
standard and:
a. Conspicuously indicated by the words: “ Sprinkler Inlet” in block letters on the
inner face of the glass, depending on the project type.
b. Fastened only by means of a spring lock, which can also be operated from
the inside without the aid of a key after the glass has been broken.
c. Made large enough for hose to be connected to inlets even if the door cannot
be opened and the only means of access is by breaking the glass.
2. Install not less than 1 meter and not more 1.2 meters above adjacent grade.
Verify with architectural elevations.
N. Sprinklers
1. Unless noted otherwise, provide sprinkler types as indicated on drawings.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-24/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
2. Install sprinklers in fittings after piping is in place.
3. Install exposed sprinklers with frame parallel to branch line.
4. Install sprinkler guards where sprinklers are within 2.2 meters of floor, or when
subject to injury.
5. Line sprinklers up with themselves.
6. Prior to Date of Substantial Completion, deliver spare heads and wrench and
place in spare head cabinet(s).
O. Cabinets
Mount cabinets at elevation indicated on architectural drawings.
P. Signs
Provide permanent signs to identify:
a. Drains.
b. Test connections.
c. Shut-off valves.
d. Risers supplying hydraulically designed systems.
e. Each alarm.
Q. Power Wiring: Furnished and installed under Division 16.
23.03.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Arrange, conduct, and document all performance and acceptance tests required
by the applicable NFPA Standards and the authority having jurisdiction.
1. Give sufficient advance notice of time of test (2 week minimum).
2. Test must be witnessed by:
a. Owner's fire department and maintenance representative.
b. Architect/Engineer representative.
c. Authorized inspector.
d. Owner's insurance representative.
3. Deficiencies to be corrected at no additional cost to owner.
4. Use new pipe and fittings as necessary to correct leaks.
5. Temporary repairs of leaks not acceptable.
6. Repair water damage caused by leaks or test procedures.
B. Conduct tests prior to:
1. Painting.
2. Covering.
3. Concealing in any way.
C. Pressure test control valves as follows:
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-25/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
1. While under full system pressure.
2. Open and close each valve.
3. Demonstrate proper operation to owner.
D. Test drain valves and test valves as follows:
1. Open to full flow for two minutes.
2. Close to test for tightness.
23.03.04
CLEANING AND FLUSHING
Procedure:
1. Clean and flush piping systems and connections in accordance with the
applicable NFPA Standards and the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Connect hoses to outlets and discharge to sewer.
3. Discharge water must be free of rust, stain and discoloration.
4. Remove stains caused by discharge.
5. Replace equipment and materials that cannot be cleaned.
6. Provide hoses and hose connections for this work.
23.03.05
PRE-COMMISSIONING WORKS
Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered stored and maintained in
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves
and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stored in suitable
racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under weather proofed cover to be
supplied by the contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components
are kept clean and dry.
Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests the
entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the
flushing out provision shall be made to exclude any item of plant, which could be
damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the consultant.
23.03.06
TESTING
All paperwork and the whole installation shall be hydraulic pressure tested to twice
the normal working pressure or 16.0 bars whichever is greater. The Pressure shall
be maintained for a period of not less than 24 hours, and the drop in pressure
recorded, and the drop in pressure shall be within the specified limits and as per the
relevance British standards.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-26/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
Any equipment fitted not suitable for this pressure test shall be adequately protected
from the system during the tests.
All leaks are to be immediately repaired and the installations re-tested until the above
requirements are obtained.
All the required tests are to be performed before application of the paint and valve
adjustments made with the pumps in operation.
The Consultant‟s decision will be final and binding the contractor.
23.03.07
PAINTING
All pipe works for the fire fighting services shall be given one coat of rich primer and
two coats of “Post office Red” paint after installation and pressure testing.
23.03.08
LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION
All items of Fire Protection Services shall be labeled and identified as required, and
as per the requirements of the Fire Department.
23.03.09
AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
The Aerosol Fire Extinguishing System shall be in accordance with NFPA 2010.
The aerosol extinguishing Agent must not be pressurized and must not be toxic;
supportive documentation mandatory. The extinguishing agent must not cause
excessive cooling to avoid damage to components and must be suitable for Class A,
B, C and F Fire as per EN2 Classification. The extinguishing agent must not be
pyrotechnic; supportive documentation mandatory and must be of a stable media,
and have no physical and/or chemical changes in temperatures of over 275 deg C.
The extinguishing agent must extinguish fire chemically. The extinguishing agent
must be environmentally friendly, ecologically friendly, and SNAP Listed (Significant
New Alternative Policy) as per EPA; supportive documentation is mandatory. The
atmospheric Life Time should be negligible and the global Warming Potential shall
be zero. The ozone depletion potential shall also be zero. The extinguishing agent
shall be non-Corrosive for electronic components. The aerosol system shall not use
the pressure piping & valves. The extinguishing system must be versatile, and
suitable for possible future extension and/or additional room protection. The
manufacturer of the aerosol extinguishing system shall be ISO 9001 & ISO 14000
Certified. It should have the International Certification, and should be in accordance
with the NFPA Standards and relevant Test Reports shall be produced. It should
have approval sich as UL/ULC, KIWA, BSI, ANPI, LPC, etc.
The submittal shall include Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS, installation reference
list for similar applications and for any other relevant installations. The manufacturer
should have at least 10 years relevant industry experience. The Certified Life Time of
Extinguishing Agent not less than 15 years. The extinguishing agent discharge Time
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-27/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
shall be in the range of 5 – 10 sec. The agent shall be suitable for the operating in
the ambient temperatre range of (minus) -50 C to (plus) 150 deg C and should be
Suitable for humidity level of up to 98%.
23.3.10 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (FM-200 / HFC-227ea)
A)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SCOPE
This specification outlines the requirements for a “Total Flooding” Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System with automatic detection and control. The work described in this
specification includes all engineering, labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary, and required, to complete and test the suppression system.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS
The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the Clean Agent
Suppression System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements set
forth in the latest edition of the following codes and standards:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NFPA No. 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code
NFPA No. 72 - Standard For Fire Alarm System
Factory Mutual Approval Guide
U.L Listings
Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
The standards listed, as well as all other applicable codes and standards, shall be
used as "minimum" design standards. Also to be considered are good engineering
practices.
REQUIREMENTS
The FM 200 Fire Suppression System installation shall be made in accordance with
the drawings, specifications and applicable standards.
Scope of Work
The Specialist contract shall include the following materials / works in their scope but
not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Design & Engineering of clean Agent fire suppression system;
Prepare workshop drawing and technical submittals;
Perform Flow calculation;
Clean Agent gas storage cylinders filled with gas and all hardware
accessories;
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-28/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
5.
6.
7.
8.
Cylinder Manifold and discharge piping;
Discharge Nozzles;
Gas low pressure switch & Gas discarge pressure switch;
Fire Detection and Alarm system c/w Optical smoke detectors, manual
release, Auto / Manual selector switch, Abort unit, First stage Alarm bell,
second stage Alarm sounder, strobe horn, Gas discharge warning sign and
associated cabling etc;
9. Gas release control panel
i.
Interlock wiring and conduit for shutdown of HVAC, dampers and/or
electric power supplies, relays or shunt trip breakers.
ii.
Integrity Test and Functional test;
iii.
Training to the client representatives;
iv.
Provide As Built drawings and Operation & Maintenance Manuals.
The work listed below shall be provided by others, or under other sections of this
specification:
1. 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC power supply to the Fire suppression control panel.
2. Connection to local/remote fire alarm systems, listed central alarm station.
3. Sealing of openings to maintain the protected room enclosure as Air tight.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
MANUFACTURER
1) The manufacturer of the Suppression System hardware and detection
components shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and
manufacture of similar types of suppression systems and who can refer to similar
installations providing satisfactory service.
2) The name of the manufacturer, part numbers and serial numbers shall appear on
all major components.
3) All devices, components and equipment shall be new, standard products of the
manufacturer‟s latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended.
4) All equipment shall be U.L listed and/or FM approved.
a. INSTALLER
1) The installing contractor shall be trained by the supplier to design, install, test
and maintain Suppression Systems.
2) The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in
the installation of automatic Clean Agent, or similar, fire suppression systems
in strict accordance with all applicable standards.
3) The installing contractor must have a minimum of eight (8) years experience
in the design, installation and testing of Clean Agent, or similar, fire
suppression systems. A list of systems of a similar nature and scope shall be
provided on request.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-29/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
4) The installing contractor shall maintain, or have access to, a Clean Agent
recharging station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability
to recharge the largest Clean Agent system within 24 hours after a discharge.
Include the amount of bulk agent storage available.
5) The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the
Clean Agent system equipment so that immediate replacement parts are
available from inventory.
6) The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available on a
twenty-four hour, seven-days-a-week basis.
b. SUBMITTALS
1) The installing contractor shall submit the following information for approval to
the local Fire Prevention Agency, owners Insurance Underwriter,
Architect/Engineer, and all other Authorities Having Jurisdiction before
starting installation:
a) Field installation layout drawings scale shall be 1:100m detailing the
location of all agent storage tanks, pipe runs, including pipe sizes and
lengths, control panel(s), detectors, manual pull stations, abort stations,
audible and visual alarms, etc.
b) Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door
holders, special sealing requirements and equipment shutdowns.
c) Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, ( i.e.;
room, underfloor, and above ceiling) and for mechanical and electrical
work.
d) A separate layout or drawing shall show isometric details of agent storage
containers, mounting details and proposed pipe runs and sizes.
Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and
include point-to-point conduit runs and a description of the method(s)
used for detector mounting.
Internal control panel wiring diagram shall include power supply requirements and
field wiring termination points.
Graphic Annunciator wiring schematics and dimensioned display panel illustration
shall be provided. (Optional device)
Complete flow calculations shall be provided from a U.L. listed computer program,
for all engineered Clean Agent systems. Calculation sheet(s) must include the
manufacturers name and U.L. listing number for verification. The individual sections
of pipe and each fitting to be used, as shown on the isometrics, must be identified
and included in the calculation. Total agent discharge time must be shown and
detailed by zone.
Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply taking into consideration
the power requirements of all alarms, initiating devices and auxiliary components
under full load conditions.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-30/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
A complete sequence of operation detailing all alarm devices, shutdown functions,
remote signaling, damper operation, time delay and agent discharge for each zone
or system.
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
A) The system shall be a Total Flood Clean Agent Suppression System supplied &
installed by an Authorised by the manufacturer.
B) The system shall provide minimum design concentration of 7.0%, by volume, in
all areas and/or protected spaces, at the minimum anticipated temperature within
the protected area. System design shall not exceed the NOAEL value of 9.0%,
adjusted for maximum space temperature anticipated, unless provisions for room
evacuation, before agent release, are provided.
C) The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and
electrical installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage
containers, FM 200 agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release
and abort stations, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and
controls, shutdowns, alarm interface, caution/ advisory signs, functional checkout
and testing, training and all other operations necessary for a functional, U.L.
Listed and/or F.M. approved FM 200 Clean Agent Suppression System.
D) Provide two (2) inspections during the first year of service. Inspections shall be
made at 6 month intervals commencing when the system is first placed into
normal service.
E) The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the
protected spaces against agent loss and/or leakage during the 10 minute "hold"
period.
F) The system(s) shall be actuated by cross zoned photoelectric detectors installed
at a maximum spacing of 250 sq. ft. (23.2 sq. m) per detector, in both the room,
underfloor and above ceiling protected spaces. If the air flow is one air change
per minute, photoelectric detectors shall be installed at a spacing not to exceed
125 sq. ft. (11.6 sq. m) per detector. (Ref. NFPA No. 72 - current edition)
G) Detectors shall be wired in Sequential Detection method of operation, standard
Cross-Zoned detection, or Single Detector Release, using either a Class "A" or
Class "B" wiring arrangement. No other detection / wiring arrangements will be
acceptable.
H) Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:
1) Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system, shall:
a) Illuminate the "ALARM" lamp on the control panel face.
b) Energize an alarm bell and/or an optional visual indicator.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-31/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
c) Transfer sets of 5 Amp rated auxiliary contacts which can perform
auxiliary system functions such as:
1) Operate door holder/closures on access doors.
2) Transmit a signal to a fire alarm system.
3) Shutdown HVAC equipment.
d) Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
2) Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system, shall:
a) Illuminate the "PRE-DISCHARGE" lamp on the control panel face.
b) Energize an predischarge horn or horn/strobe device.
c) Shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
d) Start time-delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds). System abort
sequence is enabled at this time.
e) Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
3) After completion of the time-delay sequence, the HFC-227ea Clean Agent
system shall discharge and the following shall occur:
a) Illuminate a "SYSTEM FIRED" lamp on the control panel face.
b) Shutdown of all power to high-voltage equipment
c) Energize a visual indicator(s) outside the hazard in which the discharge
occurred.
d) Energize a "System Fired" audible device. (Optional)
4) The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices
located at each hazard exit. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the
sequence description above except that the time delay and abort functions
SHALL be bypassed. The manual discharge station shall be of the electrical
actuation type and shall be supervised at the main control panel.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Clean Agent System materials and equipment shall be standard products of the
supplier's latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended. When one or
more pieces of equipment must perform the same function(s), they shall be
duplicates produced by one manufacturer.
1) All devices and equipment shall be U/L Listed and or FM approved.
2) Clean Agent System and Distribution:
Each system shall have its own supply of clean agent.
The system design shall be modular type.
Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
3) Each supply container shall be located outside the hazard area, or as near as
possible, to reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the
system.
4) The clean agent shall be stored in Agent Storage Containers. Containers
shall be super-pressurized, with dry Nitrogen, to an operating pressure of 360
psi @ 70 F. (2482 kpa at 21 C). Containers shall be of high-strength alloy
steel construction and conform to NFPA 2001.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-32/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
5) Clean agent containers with an Impulse valve can be actuated by the
following methods and Solenoid valve is not allowed:
Method 1: Electric actuation – Single container system with Impulse valve
operator (IVO) & Impulse release Module (IRM)
Method 2: Electric actuation – Multi container system with Impulse valve
operator (IVO) & Impulse release Module (IRM)
Method 3: Electric & Pneumatic actuation – Two container system with
Impulse valve operator (IVO) & Impulse valve pnuematic operator (IVPO)
Method 4: Electric & Pneumatic actuation – Multi container system with
Impulse valve operator (IVO) & Impulse valve pnuematic operator (IVPO)
6) Each container shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to
provide visual and electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low
pressure switch shall be wired to the control panel to provide an audible and
visual "Supervisory" alarm in the event the container pressure drops below
288 psi (1986 kpa). The pressure gauge shall be color coded to provide an
easy, visual indication of container pressure.
7) Each container shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically
operates when the internal temperature exceeds 150F. (66C).
8) Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided, within the manufacturers
guidelines, to distribute the clean agent throughout the protected spaces.
The nozzles shall be designed to provide proper agent quantity and
distribution.
a) Nozzles shall be available in pipe sizes 3/8” thru 2.0” (BPS 10mm thru
50mm). Each size shall be available in 180 and 360 distribution
patterns.
b) Ceiling plates, can be used with the nozzles to conceal pipe entry holes
through ceiling tiles.
9) Distribution piping, and fittings, shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements, NFPA 2001 and approved piping standards
and guidelines. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals
using good, accepted practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be
adequately supported and anchored at all directional changes and nozzle
locations.
a) All piping shall be seamless, schedule 80, reamed, blown clear and
swabbed with suitable solvents to remove burrs, mill varnish and cutting
oils before assembly.
b) All pipe fitting shall be malleable iron, threaded with suitbale pressure
rating of class 300. The threads shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe
sealant applied to the male thread ONLY.
c) All pipes and fittings shall be UL-listed.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-33/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
CONTROL PANEL
The control panel shall be a SHP (Single Hazard Panel) Control Panel.
The SHP Control System, and its components, shall be UL listed and FM approved
for releasing service and be suitable for clean Agent release service.
The SHP Control System shall perform all functions necessary to operate the system
detection, actuation and auxiliary functions, as outlined.
The SHP Control System shall be capable of providing 7AH or 18AH battery standby
power supplies.
The SHP Control System shall be microprocessor based with hardware and software
integration designed to guarantee reliability.
The SHP Control System shall support Cross Zoned, Sequential, Single Detector
Release and Manual Release detection/actuation methods.
The SHP Control System shall provide the following capabilities and functions:
a. Three (3) Class B (Style Y) indicating appliance circuits rated for 2.0 amps @
VDC.
b. Four (4) Class B (Style A) initiating circuits
c. Optional Class A (Style D) module for initiating circuits
d. Eight (8) Status LEDs plus alpha-numeric display for troubleshooting: AC
normal; alarm; pre-discharge; release; supervisory; trouble; alarms silenced
and system abort.
e. Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers
f. Resettable and continuous auxiliary output power
g. Five (5) optional Abort types
h. Intelligent Transistor protection to prevent noise spikes and microprocessor
failure from inadvertently activating release outputs
i. A dedicated Disarm switch for release outputs
j. Dedicated alarm and trouble contacts programmable for alarm, trouble, predischarge, discharge, abort, supervisory or waterflow functions, depending on
panel configuration.
k. Two (2) Form “C” relays, rated at 5 amps, are provided on the SHP panel
board. Installation of the optional SRM4 Relay Module (P/N 10-2176) will
provide four (4) additional 5 amp relays.
l. Multiple input power source - 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
m. 2.6 amp @ 24 VDC power supply to operate high current draw horns and
strobes. Capable of allowing expansion to 8 amp external power supply for a
total of 10.6 amps of available power.
n. Available in either Red or Gray finish
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-34/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
Optical Smoke Detector
The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and the guidelines of NFPA 72 – current edition.
The optical smoke detector shall continuously measures the smoke level in the air,
and gives a proportional output. It shall comply with the requirements of EN54 part
7.
The detector shall be an optical light scattering type sensitive to visible smoke and
be stable under all environmental conditions. The internal test and calibration circuits
shall use the same optical elements as the smoke sensing circuits, to ensure
reliability.
A light emitting diode (LED) on the base must illuminate when a detector is in alarm.
MANUAL RELEASE (Electric)
The electric manual release switch shall be a dual action device which provides a
means of manually discharging the Suppression System when used in conjunction
with the Fike SHP Control System.
The Manual Release switch or Manual Pull station shall be a dual action device(s)
requiring two distinct operations to initiate a system actuation.
Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the
system to discharge, and shall cause all release and shutdown devices to operate in
the same manner as if the system had operated automatically.
A Manual Release switch shall be located at each exit from the protected hazard and
shall have an advisory sign, provided at each location.
ABORT STATION
The optional Abort Station shall be the "Dead Man" type and shall be located next to
each manual switch.
The Abort Station shall be supervised and shall indicate a trouble condition at the
SHP Control Panel, if depressed, and no alarm condition exists.
"Locking" or "Keyed" abort stations shall not be permitted.
The Abort Station shall be located adjacent to each manual station.
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARMS
Alarm audible and visual signal devices shall operate from the SHP Control Panel.
The Alarm Bell, Alarm Horn and Horn/Strobe devices shall operate on 24 volts Dc
power to allow supervision of the circuit wires.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-35/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
The alarm bell and horn shall deliver a minimum sound level of 92 decibels at a
distance of 3m.
Horn and strobe light are to operate simultaneous from one power supply with flash
rate of 1-3 flashes per second minimum over the listed input voltage range.
A Strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exit door from the
protected space. Provide an advisory sign at each light location.
CAUTION and ADVISORY SIGNS
Provide signs, as required, to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations of
the equipment supplier:
1. Entrance sign: (1) required at each entrance to a protected space.
2. Manual Discharge sign: (1) required at each manual discharge station.
3. Flashing Light sign: (1) required at each flashing light over each exit from a
protected space.
SYSTEM and CONTROL WIRING
All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or conduit, and must
be installed and kept separate from all other building wiring.
All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring. Runs
of conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, installed
parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions.
The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Color
coded wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be
free from shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the system drawings), and
crosses between conductors. Final termination‟s between the SHP control panel and
the system field wiring shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory trained
representative.
All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike
manner, to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725, and Article 760,
except as otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in NFPA 72 current edition. Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province and/or country
codes.
The complete system electrical installation, and all auxiliary components, shall be
connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-36/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT
After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked
out, inspected and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and NFPA standards.
All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and
installation.
All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and resistance to
earth.
The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner or his
representative, and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks, must be
operational at least five (5) days prior to the final acceptance tests.
a. Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures, and test values recorded.
b. All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible
and visual devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall
function as required and designed.
c. Each SHP control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a
trouble condition into the system.
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to
each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall include system SHP
Control Panel operation, manual and abort functions, trouble procedures,
supervisory procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
OPERATION and MAINTENANCE
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation
and maintenance instruction manuals, four (4) copies for each system, to the owner.
All aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed, including piping
isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system design,
sequence of operation and drawing(s) illustrating control logic and equipment used in
the system. Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting
techniques, maintenance operations and procedures shall be included in the manual.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
1) At the time "As-Built" drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are
submitted, the installing contractor shall submit a "Test Plan" describing
procedures to be used to test the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-37/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
a step-by-step description of all tests to be performed and shall indicate the type
and location of test apparatus to be employed. The tests shall demonstrate that
the operational and installation requirements of this specification have been met.
All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the owner and shall not be
conducted until the Test Plan has been approved.
2) The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed
and intended. All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation, solenoid and
manual actuation, HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices
and manual override of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits,
including AC power and battery power supplies, shall be tested and qualified.
3) A room pressurization test shall be conducted, in each protected space, to
determine the presence of openings which would affect the agent system
concentration levels. The test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp.
Door Fan system, or equivalent, with integrated computer program. All testing
shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001.
4) If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in
leakage and/or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the
general contractor or his sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor shall
be responsible for adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or
leakage. The installing contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the
protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed.
THE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE
RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SUCCESS OF THE ROOM PRESSURIZATION
TESTS. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in accordance with
these specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to
determine, and correct, the cause of the test failure. The installing contractor
shall conduct additional room pressurization tests, at no additional cost to the
owner, until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful test results shall
be submitted to the owner for record.
5) Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into
service.
SYSTEM INSPECTIONS
The installing contractor shall provide two (2) inspections of each system, installed
under this contract, during the one-year warranty period. The first inspection shall be
at the six month interval, and the second inspection at the 12 month interval, after
system acceptance. Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the
manufacturer's guidelines and the recommendations of NFPA 2001.
Integrity Test must be done by qualified certified Engineer. Documents certifying
satisfactory system(s) operation shall be submitted to the owner upon completion of
each inspection.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-38/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
WARRANTY
All system components furnished, and installed under this contract, shall be
guaranteed against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full
warranty period which is standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than
one (1) year from the date of system acceptance.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4)
copies of system "As-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual
installation details including all equipment locations as well as piping routing details.
Show all room or facilities modifications, including door and/or damper installations
completed. One (1) copy of reproducible engineering drawings shall be provided
reflecting all actual installation details.
23.3.11
FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM FOR ELECTRICAL CABINETS
Cabinet Mounted Fire Extinguishing System shall be based on the technology of
Flexible sensor tubing and installed at the locations indicated in the drawing. The
Flexible Sensor tubing shall be installed directly into the electrical component
enclosure. The tubing shall be pressurized with nitrogen holding down the valve
piston.The heat produced by, or coming immediately before, a fire shall cause the
tube to burst at the hottest point (approx. 110 deg C) releasing pressurized nitrogen,
moving the piston, and opening the valve assembly. The pressure differential valve
shall open to release the agent through the piping network and shall be discharged
through the nozzles. The system cylinder shall be filled with HFC 227 ea or Novec
1230 Extinguishing Agent. The system shall be UL-listed/FM-approved and QCD
approved.
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-39/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
23.3.12
SECTION 23
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURES
ITEM
MANUFACTURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
1. Hose Reel Cabinets
THORN NORSEN
NOHA
MOYNE
NAFFCO
UK
NORWAY
IRELAND
UAE
2. Fire Fighting Pumps
ITT
PATTERSON
READY BAFFALO
PEARLESS
USA
USA
USA
USA
3. Sprinkler Heads
CENTRAL
TYCO
GRINNEL
GLOBE
USA
USA
USA
USA
4. Control Valves
KIDDE
GLOBE
GRINNEL
SHIELD
UK
USA
USA
UK
5. Fire Extinguisher
CHUBB
NAFFCO
ANSUL
MOYNE
UK
UK
UK
IRELAND
6. Fire Fighting Pipes
SURIA
SAUDI PIPE
ECONOSTO
SHIELD
INDIA
KSA
EUROPE
EUROPE
7. Fire Fighting Fittings
(Threaded)
CRANE
SHIELD
NIPPON
ECONOSTO
UK
UK
JAPAN
EUROPE
8. Fire Fighting Fittings
(Groove Mechanical)
VICTAULIC
GRINNEL
NATIONAL
SHIELD
USA
USA
USA
USA
9. Support System
HILTI
PHD
FISHER
GERMANY / USA
USA
GERMANY/ USA
10. FM-200
KIDDE
CHEMETRON
TYCO
UK
USA
USA
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-40/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
LUXURY VILLA AT BOROQUE ISLAND-ISOLA DANA 9
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 03
SECTION 23
11. HDPE Pipes & Fittings
ISCO
SHIELD
IPF
USA
UAE
USA
12. Fire Hydrants
KENNEDY
NAFFCO
MUELLER
USA
UAE
USA
AEB-872-10-REV. A
S-23-41/41
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION